AAC Site Safety Plan

Davis Constructors & Engineers, Inc.
Pacific Spaceport Complex Alaska

(PSCA)
Range Facilities Reconstruction
Site Specific Safety Plan

Job#:
Signature Sheet:
Plan Preparer:
Kirk Wagoner – Corporate Safety Coordinator
Plan Approval:
Luke Blomfield – Project Manager
Plan Approval:
Ken Parmenter – Project Superintendent
Title Page
PSCA – Range Facilities Reconstruction
Site Specific Safety Plan TABLE OF CONTENTS
TITLE PAGE
PREFACE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Emergency Contacts, Jobsite Maps, Phases of Work
2. Roles & Responsibilities ,Organization Chart, Statement of

Safety & Health Policy
3. ABC’s of Safety and General Rules
4. Safety Policy & Procedures
5. Subcontractor Health & Safety Procedures
6. Emergency Action, Evacuation, and Fire Plan
7. Accident Prevention and Reporting Procedures

 Hazard Alert/Near Miss Report
 Incident/Property Damage Report Form
 Accident Investigation Form
 Recordkeeping Decision Tree
8. Hazard Communication Plan
9. Fall Protection and Elevated Surface Work Emergency Action

and Rescue Plan
 Appendix 1 – 4 Inspection Checklists
 Fall Protection Work Plan
10. Trenching & Excavation Procedure

 Appendix 1 – Daily Trench/Excavation Inspection
 Appendix 2 – Soil Analysis Checklist
 Atmospheric Test Record
11. Confined Space Procedures

 Confined Spaces Emergency Planning & Procedures
 PRCS Entry Checklist
 Confined Space Entry Permit/Testing & Monitoring
 Atmospheric Test Record
 Confined Space Pre-entry Checklist for Non-permit
Page 1 of 2
Site Specific Safety Plan TABLE OF CONTENTS
12. Lock Out / Tag Out Program

 Hazardous Energy Control Register Plan
13. Forklift Procedures and Training

 Daily & Monthly Inspection Report
 Forklift Training Program
14. Aerial Lift and Scissor Lift Procedure
15. Ladder Safety Program
16. Respiratory Protection Plan

 Appendix 1 Medical Questionnaire for Respirator Use
 Respirator Fit Test Report
 Voluntary Use of Dust Mask Document
 Respiratory Equipment and Training Log
17. Indoor Air Quality Controls
18. Electrical Safety Program
19. Scaffold Safety Program
20. Steel Erection
21. Environmental Protection Plan & Control of Hazardous Materials

 DEC Spill Notification Poster
22. Cast In Place Concrete

 Fall Protection Program for Wall & Deck Forming
 Safe Plan of Action – Cast In Place Concrete
 SPA Checklist
23. Job Hazard Analysis (JHAs)

 JHA – Template
 SPA – Template
24. FORMS
Page 2 of 2
Preface
This Site Specific Safety Plan (the working core of this manual) is by design a
flexible tool for developing detailed, task specific hazard analysis and safe work
plans. JHA’s are included in this version for the early, predictable phases of
work on this project. They include mobilization, clearing and initial site prep,
excavation, and concrete forming and placement. Even these initial JHA’s may
be modified prior to dissemination at the specific prep when more detailed
information about equipment, tools, soils, etc. becomes available.
The format will be consistent with the samples provided at this time. Task
specific JHA’s will be developed and submitted prior to each prep in compliance
with any timeline indicated by contract or mutual agreement. Like any written
safety program, the strength and level of effectiveness are vested in the JHA’s,
inspection programs, and the willingness of workers at all levels to participate
in, contribute to, and abide by the procedures and rules in place.
A critical issue discussed in more detail in some task specific JHA’s, work
plans and programs, is OSHA’s definition of a designated “Competent Person”
in some specific construction activities. The definition is: “Competent Person
means one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the
surroundings, or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or
dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective
measures to eliminate them.” OSHA’s intent is to provide a distinct separation
of the responsibility for safety from production.
During initial mobilization and early project development the Davis

Superintendent, Ken Parmenter, will be the “competent person” for most Davis
activities and for subcontractors who have not designated a competent person
who meets the criteria of OSHA’s definition.
Subcontractors may designate a competent person at any time, assuming

adequate documentation. That designation will be in writing and submitted to
the Davis Safety Department for approval and filing.
Comments and suggestions about the format and content of this plan are
welcome. Contact the Davis Constructors Safety Department.
Page 1 of 1
PSCA - Range Facilities Reconstruction
EMERGENCY PHONE NUMBERS
911 Emergency
Address: Pasagshak Rd. Kodiak Island, AK
486-4536 KODIAK FIRE DEPARTMENT
486-8000 KODIAK POLICE DEPARTMENT
486-3281 KODIAK HOSPITAL
800 222-1222 STATE OF ALASKA POISON CONTROL
800 424-8802 SPILL RESPONSE (NRC)
907-269-3063 ADEC - Spill Report After hours: 800-478-9300
TBD DAVIS JOBSITE OFFICE
242-0422 DAVIS SUPERINTENDENT (CELL) - Ken Parmenter
952-3816 SAFETY CORDINATOR (CELL) - Kirk Waggoner
301-4017 DAVIS PROJECT MANAGER (CELL) - Luke Blomfield
562-2336 DAVIS ANCHORAGE OFFICE
486-8060 SEWER LOCATES
800-808-8083 ALASKA COMMUNICATIONS
811 CABLE LOCATES 800-478-3121
486-7700 KODIAK ELECTRIC ASSOC.
486-8060 GAS LOCATES
486-8060 WATER LOCATES

Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 1– EMERGENCY CONTACTS &
BACKGROUND INFORMATION
Project Name: Pacific Spaceport Complex – Alaska

Description of Project: All work is to repair or replace damages to the
existing rocket launch facility from damaged caused during a launch
malfunction, individual scope below:
1- Launch Service Structure

2- Integration and Processing Facility
3- Launch Equipment Building
a. Number of Buildings 4- Launch Equipment Vault
5- Spacecraft Assembly and Transfer
6- Rocket Motor Storage Facility
7- Payload Processing Facility
b. Type of Structural Frame Structural Steel, Concrete
c. Type of roof supports and roofing Insulated Metal Panels, TPO
materials:
d. Type of interior wall framing: Metal Stud on Drywall
e. Type of exterior wall framing and Concrete, cold rolled metal and metal panels
wall covering:
Concrete, Steel plate on Steel, Concrete on
f. Type of foundation and floors: metal deck
g. How many stories: Ranges from 1 – 17
1- Launch Service Structure 2,833 sf (17
story)
2- Integration and Processing Facility 7,105 sf
(5 Story)
3- Launch Equipment Building 120 sf (1
story)
h. Total square footage each 4- Launch Equipment Vault 400 sf (1 story)
building:
5- Spacecraft Assembly and Transfer 3,700 sf
(5 story)
6- Rocket Motor Storage Facility 1,500 sf (1
story)
7- Payload Processing Facility 10,952 SF (5
story)
Page 1 of 3
1- Launch Service Structure 2,833 sf (17 story, open interior with catwalks,
170 feet tall)
Works consist of replacement of 13 damaged structural members,
overhead and interior doors, replacement of damaged MEP systems,
upgrade to thermal envelope and replacement of exterior metal panels.
2- Integration and Processing Facility 7,105 sf (5 Story, open area from 0-50’)
Work consists of installation of a new pre-engineered metal building,
overhead doors and repair/upgrades to MEP systems. The building
foundation is existing.
3- Launch Equipment Building 120 sf (1 story)

Work consists of adding a covered entry, replace roof, replacement of
existing unit heater, and replacement of damaged MEP systems.
4- Launch Equipment Vault 400 sf (1 story)

Work consists of adding a covered entry, replace roof, replacement of
existing unit heater, and replacement of damaged MEP systems.
5- Spacecraft Assembly and Transfer 3,700 sf (5 Story, open area from 0-50’)
Work consists of installation of a siding to an existing pre-engineered
metal building, overhead doors, and repair/upgrades to MEP systems.
The building foundation and structure is existing.
6- Rocket Motor Storage Facility 1,500 sf (1 story)

Work consists of upgrade to damaged comm. lines and repair of an
existing damaged door frame.
7- Payload Processing Facility 10,952 SF (5 story)

Work consists of replacement of overhead doors, repair, damaged interior
finishes, upgrades and repairs to existing MEP systems.
*Reference specification section 01000 for additional project description

details.
Page 2 of 3
Phase of Work/Hazardous Activities:

Mobilization to Site
Demolition of Existing Damaged Structure
Structural Steel Replacement
Install Metal Panels
Install Coiling Doors and Mega Doors
Install Roofing
Erection of Buildings
Install Trench Drain
Interior Metal Stud Framing
Bolt Replacement
Interior Metal Stud Framing
MEP Rough In
Perimeter Wall Framing and Rigid Insulation
MEP Trim
Install Crane
Painting
Interior Wall GWB
Overhead Door Installation
Tape and Paint
Doors and Hardware
Finishes
Page 3 of 3
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 2 – STATEMENT OF POLICY
STATEMENT OF SAFETY AND HEALTH POLICY

The purpose of this policy for Davis Constructors and Engineers (Davis) is to
develop a high standard of safety throughout all phases of our operations and
to ensure that no employee is required to work under any conditions which are
hazardous or unsanitary.
Davis firmly believes that the individual employee has the right to derive
personal satisfaction from their job. Consequently, the prevention of
occupational injury or illness will be considered as a top priority at all times.
Davis has developed and will maintain a complete accident prevention plan as
well as the necessary safety training programs. Each individual, from top
management to the job site craftsman, is responsible for the safety and health
of those persons in their charge as well as their co-workers. By accepting
mutual responsibility to operate safely, we will all contribute to the safety,
health and well being of all personnel. Active participation in and support of
our safety commitment is essential for its success. This accident prevention
written program is a living document that can and will be amended to reflect
any and all changes in conditions that develop as this project progresses. Davis
Staff and Employees are aware of the potential for new hazards to develop as a
project progresses, and have been trained to notify management of any such
circumstances or conditions as soon as they are identified. In addition, Staff
and Employees understand that there is also an obligation to ask questions
when they do not fully understand what hazards may be associated with a
specific task or procedure. Davis is committed to the belief that there is no
such thing as a “stupid question” relative to safety and health issues.
Page 1 of 1
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 3 – ABC’S OF SAFETY
THE ABC’S OF SAFETY

Attitude, Behavior, and Control
Attitude, behavior, and control are the three most important aspects of
personal safety both on and off the job.
Safety is more than just following your company’s guidelines while on the job.
Safety is actually a combination of safe attitude, behavior and control both on
and off the job. Attitude means your frame of mind – the way in which you
approach a given situation. Behavior means what you do about it – how you
react to a situation. Control refers to making you surroundings (where you do
what you do) safe. Safe attitude, behavior and control add up to a safer more
productive you.
A safe attitude means staying alert and focused on the job at hand.
When it comes to safety, attitude isn’t exactly everything, but it’s close. A safe
attitude means staying alert and focused on the job at hand, taking safety
guidelines and practices seriously, never horsing around on the job and not
letting emotions like anger and frustration get in the way of job performance.
Safe behavior means taking safety guidelines and practices seriously.
How you react to a situation is an important part of being safe. Following

established safety guidelines and procedures, refusing to take “shortcuts”
using personal protective equipment, asking questions when you need more
information about the task at hand – all these are safe behaviors. Safe
behavior also means helping friends, coworkers, and family members
understand the importance of safe practices at work, home or play.
Control means taking responsibility – keep you work area clean and orderly.
Control means taking responsibility for making your work site, home or
recreational facility a safe place to be. You can help keep you surroundings
safe from potential hazards by keeping them clean and orderly. Keep machines
in good repair, clean up spills and debris (or report them to the appropriate
person) and make sure that walkways are free from obstacles. Store chemicals
properly (both at home and on the job) and never switch containers. At work,
be sure to report faulty equipment, ventilation problems, or any potential
hazards to your supervisor.
Page 1 of 23
GENERAL RULES OF CONDUCT – ALL PERSONNEL ON SITE
Davis Constructors & Engineers (Davis) Safety and Health Policies require that
all personnel follow all safety and health rules on Davis projects. Below are the
minimum basic rules of conduct required by all personnel entering our
projects.
Personal Protective Equipment

Hard hats
All personnel, vendors, visitors, etc., who are on the job site must wear ANSI
Z89.1 approved head protection (this includes entering and exiting the site).
For identification purposes the hard hats should visibly display the workers
name and the name of the company in which the employee is working for.
Note:
Hard hats must be worn. No hard hat, no entry.
Safety glasses
Davis’ standing policy requires safety glasses to be worn at all times on the job
site. Glasses must be ANSI Z-.87.1 approved. No sunglasses are allowed
without proper documentation showing the above ANSI criteria is met. Safety
glass lenses are to be kept clean and free from scratching, pitting, etc.
Damaged glasses must be replaced immediately.
Double Eye Protection

Double Eye Protection MUST be worn when using equipment that generates
projectile, e.g. grinding, chipping, and using a powder-actuated tool. Double
eye protection consists of safety glasses and face shield or safety goggles and
face shield.
Footwear
Heavy work boots that cover the ankle and rubber boots approved for
construction use are the only authorized footwear on site.
No work shoes, tennis type shoes or slippers will be allowed on site. Do not
wear slippers onto site; change before entering and after exiting the site.
Work clothing
Substantial work pants must be worn. No sweatpants or excessively damaged
or loose clothing is permitted. Shirts must cover all of the shoulder and have 6
inch sleeves and conceal the stomach. No tank tops or shorts will be allowed.
Page 2 of 23
Hearing protection
All personnel on site must have hearing protection on their person at all times.
Fall protection equipment

All activities six feet (6’) and over require the use of fall protection systems. The
priority of fall protection systems is as follows: “Fall Restraint”, consisting of
standard guard rails, tie-off systems that will preclude unplanned descent in
excess of 2 feet. When personal fall protection involving fall arrest equipment is
the method chosen, the use of a full-body harness, lanyard with double-locking
snap-hook and suitable anchorage point are required. The use of deceleration
devices on lanyards is required. Persons using such equipment must be
properly trained. With the exception of Steel Erection, all fall protection on this
project shall be in compliance with 29 CFR 1926, Subpart M. All Steel Erection
activities shall be performed in compliance with 29CFR 1926, Subpart R.
Note:
We have a No Tolerance Policy regarding fall protection violations. Please refer to the
disciplinary policy for further information.
Conduct
The following general rules of conduct apply to all personnel on all Davis
Projects.
Housekeeping
Housekeeping is a major concern, and must be maintained at the highest level.
Daily clean-up is mandatory, especially for food rubbish. Left over or scrap
materials, pallets, etc. must be removed promptly, but no later than the end of
the workday in which they accumulate. If a subcontractor does not perform
adequate housekeeping, Davis will do it and issue a back-charge.
Alcohol & Drugs

Alcoholic beverages and illegal drugs are strictly prohibited on and around all
projects. No one is permitted to work under the influence of such substances
and will be immediately removed and disciplined in accordance with our
disciplinary policy.
Personal Entertainment Devices

Radios, tape players, and other personal entertainment devices are prohibited
on this project.
Page 3 of 23
Note:
At a minimum all OSHA (State/Federal) regulations must be complied with on all sites.
Workers that fail to comply with Davis safety policies are subject to disciplinary action in
accordance with our policy.
The following section is intended as a multi-level application of the

principles of the “ABC’s” of Safety that appeared in the introduction of
this section. Even though Davis management already adheres to these
principles, new Davis Subs may appreciate the clarification of the process.
PRESIDENT
The President is the leader in a very important chain of individuals that sets
the tone for a successful safety and health program within the company. The
President must clearly communicate his strong commitment and support for
the program. This commitment will ensure that the Managers under him will
support and pass the importance of the safety and health program down the
chain of command with no loss of importance in his message.
The following are some ways that the President may communicate his views on
the importance a strong company commitment to the safety and health of the
working men and women on our projects. These suggested ways are intended
to allow the President to be highly visible as a safety and health leader without
reducing the number of hours he must commit to other critical functions
requiring his attention.
Executive Staff Meetings

Safety and Health statistics, current trends and concerns should be a topic at
each meeting. The President should use some of this time to express his
pleasure/concern for current trends and statistics, and inquire about
corrective action being taken where appropriate.
Informal Meeting With Management

Whenever the President meets with Managers, and the opportunity presents
itself, he may take a few moments to share his thoughts or concerns regarding
a particular safety and health issue.
Site Visits
When the President visits a project it is a prime opportunity for him to
communicate his commitment to the safety and health program to those
Page 4 of 23
supervisors and craft employees who actually implement and carry out the
company’s safety and health policies and procedures.
Asking questions about safety pre-planning, observations made during the site
walk-through, setting the example by wearing the required PPE and speaking
to employees about safety are excellent ways to show his concern and interest.
OFFICERS/DEPARTMENT HEADS
Leadership in any business carries with it the burden of responsibility and

accountability. The Officers/Department Heads are responsible and
accountable for the implementation and communication of the Safety & Health
Program. The managers in their divisions must clearly understand that their
Officers/Department Heads value the safety program and expects projects to be
run safely.
To achieve this understanding, the Officers/Department Heads must

communicate and motivate their managers in good faith, diligent effort to
carrying out their assigned responsibilities safely.
The following are minimum responsibilities of the Officers/Department Heads

for the Safety & Health Program.
Implementation Of The Safety & Health Program

It is the Officers/Department Heads responsibility to ensure each Project
Manager adopts and implements the Safety & Health Program at all levels. The
Officers/Department Heads must communicate the various requirements for
each level of supervision and ensure their full participation and commitment.
Communication Of Safety & Health Commitment

The Officers/Department Heads are responsible for instilling in Project
Managers a resolve to meet and exceed the applicable safety requirements for
their project. They must communicate their own commitment clearly and
convincingly so them is no misunderstanding regarding participation or
compliance with the safety requirements.
Provision Of Necessary Means

Officers/Department Heads must provide each Project Manager with the
support, authority and resources required to implement the Safety & Health
Program at their project sites. This will require significant commitment of the
Project Manager and he/she must know it is not only required but also
endorsed and supported by the Officers/Department Heads. Without this
Page 5 of 23
endorsement, Project Managers may not spend the time required to

successfully instill a dedication and commitment into their Superintendents.
Stimulation Of Earnest Efforts

It is critical that all members of project management become convinced that
the Officers/Department Heads are serious about achieving a safe and
healthful workplace. They must understand that each project is responsible
for, and expected to, manage safety & health by setting a personal example,
devoting tune and effort in promoting safe and healthful work practices, and
pre-planning safety into work activities.
Evaluation Of Progress Made

Officers/Department Heads are responsible for reviewing project monthly
reports and evaluating the safety efforts of each site. Project Managers must be
held responsible and accountable for the safe performance of all trades on their
site. Discussions on the results of performance should be held monthly with
Project Managers. Where appropriate, Officers/Department Heads should
complement Project Managers for their earnest efforts and success. However,
where necessary, there should be a willingness to speak frankly and firmly
where there has been a lack of progress. Only by doing so can the efforts of
subordinates be stimulated when their pace has slowed to an ineffective level.
Adherence To Federal, State and Local Safety and Health Codes

Officers/Department Heads are responsible for the adherence to Federal, State
and Local Safety & Health regulations. Further, Officers/Department Heads
must ensure that a project’s financial status does not compromise the monies
made available for meeting safety requirements.
PROJECT MANAGERS
Implementation of the Safety and Health Program

At the pre-construction meeting, the Project Manager will communicate to all
employees and subcontractors, their personal commitment to the program. In
addition, the Project Manager must communicate these sincere commitment
and performance expectations to Superintendents and Foremen.
Provision of the Necessary Means

Production, quality and safety are interdependent. Safety must be an equal,
integrated partner with quality control and production. Superintendents and
Foremen must be encouraged to take the time necessary to plan for safety
during the various phases of construction, to implement necessary protection
Page 6 of 23
measures and to enforce compliance. It is the Project Manager’s responsibility

to set the tone and encourage these activities.
Communication of Safety Objectives

The Project Manager must communicate their commitment to sound safety
management principles. They should set goals related to basic construction
safety activities outlined in the project schedule and set target dates for the
accomplishment of pre-planning different phases of the safety program into the
project.
Stimulation of Earnest Efforts

A critical function for Project Managers is motivating every member of the
construction site management team to make a diligent, good faith effort in
carrying out their responsibilities. The best way to accomplish this is to lead by
personal example, show commitment by frequently communicating safety
concerns with members of the team and facilitating pm-planning.
Evaluation of Progress Made

Superintendents and Foremen must be held accountable for managing safety
performance in their respective areas of responsibility. The Project Manager
must review Superintendent’s and Foremen’s activities regularly and review
accident loss analysis results regularly to determine what reinforcement or
corrective counseling may be necessary. By doing this, effective management is
stimulated while ineffective management can be identified and corrected.
Adherence to Federal, State, and Local Safety and Health Codes

The Project Manager is responsible for adherence to Federal, State, and Local
safety regulations. They shall ensure that Superintendents, Foremen and subs
are aware of and comply with applicable requirements
Site Meetings
The Project Manager shall set aside time at weekly progress meetings to
discuss safety and health progress/concerns. Attendees should discuss pre-
planning efforts for upcoming activities, current concerns, recent accidents,
preventative recurrence requirements and any other matters relating to the
safety and health of persons affected by the project activities.
Some of the items that may be discussed are listed below as an example of
functions specific to this phase of the meeting:
1. Formulate job site policy and/or operating rules.
2. Promote the adoption and use of job site safety rules.
3. Establish a schedule of job site safety self-inspections.
4. Plan ahead for needed safety controls as job progresses through various
phases.
Page 7 of 23
5. Review and analyze accident/incident reports analysis and take

appropriate actions.
When decisions are made that require corrective or preventive action, the
requirements shall be clearly stated in the meeting minutes and someone shall
be assigned the responsibility for follow-up.
Safety Contact Program

When the Project Manager walks the site, it is important they wear the required
personal protective equipment. During the walk-around, they should make
safety contacts with foremen or craft workers. When positive or negative safety
behavior is observed, the Project Manager is highly encouraged to make an
appropriate contact to reinforce positive behavior or counsel and correct
negative behavior. Since positive contacts are more effective than negative
contacts, it is most desirable to catch someone doing something right and tell
them about it.
BEST PRACTICES OF SUCCESSFUL PROJECT MANAGERS
Listed below are “Best Practices” used by Project Managers who have
consistently experienced low incidence rates on their project sites. Project
Managers will incorporate these practices at their project sites.
1. Communicate sincere commitment to safety and health and stress

Superintendents and Foremen treat safety and health equal to
production and quality.
2. Plan ahead for needed safety measures before moving into a new job
phase.
3. Encourage superintendents/foremen to discuss job specific safety and
health concerns daily with crews.
4. Review job site self-inspection forms and reinforce positive observations
and correct and see that negative observations are corrected.
5. Review accident investigations for root cause(s) and ensure corrective
procedures are implemented.
6. Incorporate safety planning/concerns at regular job planning meetings.
7. Visibly show commitment to safety and health daily to someone.
8. Meet weekly with Project Safety Manager, one-on-one, to discuss job
safety progress, concerns, discuss recent accidents, etc.
Page 8 of 23
When you ignore safety during a production crunch you destroy everything
you’ve done in the past to build your people’s confidence in your commitment.
The negative effects will be hard to overcome. They’ll read it as - Safety is O.K.
as long as it doesn’t interfere with production, but as soon as production falls
behind — forget safety.
SUPERINTENDENTS
Active participation in and support of safety and health programs are essential.
Supervisory officials will display their interest in safety and health matters at
every opportunity. Each superintendent will establish goals for implementing
safety instructions. It is mandatory for each sub- to have his employees attend
Davis weekly safety meetings. If unavoidable circumstances, such as off site
preparation activities, prevent subcontractor employees from attending the
Davis Meeting, that employer shall conduct their own meeting and submit
copies of meeting records, including the justification for missing the Davis
meeting to the Davis Safety Manager immediately following the meeting.
A primary responsibility of the superintendent is ensuring the safety and
health of the employees he supervises. To accomplish this obligation, the
following rules apply:
1. Assure that all safety and health rules, regulations, policies and
procedures are understood, observed and practiced.
2. Require the proper care and use of all needed protective equipment.
3. Support the Safety Manager in identifying and eliminating job hazards

quickly through job safety analysis procedures. All hazards and
corrective measures identified in the JHA development shall be presented
by the affected contractor during the specific task preparatory meeting.
4. Support the training program in general and the training of employees on

the hazardous chemicals and/or procedures they MAY encounter under
normal working conditions or during an emergency situation.
5. Receive and take initial action on employee suggestions.
6. Participate in weekly safety meetings with comments about observed

activities, and present a synopsis of upcoming work phases while
emphasizing the importance of safety to Davis.
7. Ensure each employee, under all trades, will participate in this program.
If any employee misses this program he or she may be subject to
disciplinary action by the foreman or superintendent.
Page 9 of 23
8. Participate in investigations and inspections.
9. Actively follow the progress of injured workers and display an interest in

their rapid recovery and return to work.
Management of the Site Safety Program

The Safety Manager, in conjunction with the Superintendent, is responsible for
the day to day pre-planning and coordination of safety and health throughout
the site. It is their responsibility to ensure that tools, equipment and job site
conditions are inspected each day prior to workers being allowed on/in such
areas. They must be aware of the site-specific needs and take necessary action
to provide any added measures to ensure the safety and health of the
workforce. The superintendent must clearly and frequently communicate with
foremen regarding safety and health issues, and hold them personally
responsible and accountable for safety performance in their areas of
responsibility. In short, the scope of this responsibility includes:
1. Conduct in-house safety inspection.
2. Assist in accident investigation to uncover trends.
3. Review accident reports to determine means of elimination.
4. Accept and evaluate employee suggestions.
5. Review job procedures and recommend improvements.
6. Monitor the safety program effectiveness.
7. Promote and publicize safety.
Foreman Safety Training

The Superintendent is responsible for communicating any needs for foremen
training to the Environmental, Safety and Health Department of Davis.
Safety and Health Meetings with Foremen

Superintendents shall establish and personally conduct weekly safety and
health pre-planning meetings with foremen. The meeting should solicit input
from foremen on the concerns and problems they have in the day-to-day
management of safety and health in the respective areas of responsibility. The
topics shall include planning for safety and health in upcoming job phases,
accident prevention, inspection findings, and regulatory requirements.
Accident Investigation
The Safety Manager, in conjunction with the Superintendent shall personally
participate and coordinate investigation of all accidents and near-miss
incidents and determine the root cause. They must assure that immediate
corrective action is taken to ensure accidents do not re-occur.
Page 10 of 23
Safety Inspections
The Safety Manager, in conjunction with the Superintendent, is responsible for
implementing and monitoring a site safety inspection program at the job site.
The Safety Manager, analyzes inspection requirements for the site, delegate
areas of daily inspection responsibility to foremen and ensure that the program
is aggressively carried out. The superintendent shall conduct a formal
inspection of the site at least daily, giving particular attention to safe and
unsafe behavior patterns.
Job Site Orientation

The Superintendent should take time to express their firm commitment to
safety and health on the job site to new employees thereby setting the tone for
the new employee. A few minutes up-front can pay off big in the end.
Planned Safety Talks

Planning, coordinating and/or presenting the site-specific talks tailored to the
upcoming work schedule, identifying risk areas, and leading the program
personally is an important responsibility of the superintendent.
Planned Safety Contacts

The Superintendent, in conjunction with the Safety Manager, will be
responsible for participating in and coordinating a program aimed at
communicating with employees by making daily safety contacts. When positive
or negative safety behavior is observed, the Superintendent and Foreman will
make an appropriate contact to either reinforce positive behavior or counsel
negative behavior. Since positive contacts are more effective than negative
contacts, it is most desirable to catch someone doing something right and tell
them about it. Superintendents should average at least five documented and
meaningful contacts each day.
Remember — silence means consent. When safety hazards or unsafe acts are
observed, take immediate corrective action.
Development of a Culture of Safety

A major role of the Superintendent is to develop attitudes of safety & health
mindedness in the foremen and non-supervisory employees. This is
accomplished by exhibiting a sincere personal concern for employee safety and
by backing up personal concern by personal example.
Development of Safety Rules
The Superintendent, in conjunction with the Safety Manager, has the authority
to add safety rules that are specific to the needs of the job site that are in
addition to corporate safety rules (however no corporate rules may be deleted).
Page 11 of 23
Safety Discipline
The Superintendent and Safety Manager, in their role as coordinators of the
Safety Contact Program must ensure maintenance of the safety and health
program through corrective discipline where necessary. Applied firmly, fairly
and consistently, it will give assurance of employee commitment to the safety
and health program. The superintendent must take appropriate disciplinary
action in accordance with the disciplinary policy.
Note: The following activities will be regarded as “Zero Tolerance” relative to
safety compliance:
1.) Confined Space Entry
2.) Trenching and Excavation
3.) Fall Protection
4.) Lockout / Tagout – Hazardous Energy Control.
Emergency Readiness Training

Where any job involves non-routine or greater than usual risk or serious
injury, the superintendent should pre-plan, organize and train foremen and
non- supervisory employees concerning the hazards that constitute a threat of
serious injury and the precautions required for safe performance. All advance
Emergency Readiness Training shall be completed only after review by UAF
Police and Fire and UAF Safety.
Dissemination
A copy of this document will be issued to all employees, project
superintendents and project managers. A copy of the policy statement will be
posted on the company safety and health bulletin board.
BEST PRACTICES OF SUCCESSFUL SUPERINTENDENTS
Listed below are “Best Practices” used by Superintendents who have

consistently experienced low incidence rates on their project sites.
Superintendents will incorporate these practices at their project sites.
1. Accept safety as your responsibility and a priority on your projects. Be a

personal example for safety.
2. Meet weekly with the Safety Manager, one-on-one, to discuss job safety
progress, concerns, discuss recent accidents, etc. Walk the project with
the Safety Manager looking specifically for safety items. Don’t be
distracted by other items on this walk-through, stay focused on safety.
Page 12 of 23
3. Plan ahead for safety issues and communicate your plans with everyone
affected. Being proactive is critical for a successful safety program.
4. Use the Safety Department as a resource.
5. Hold your foremen accountable and responsible for the safety of their
crews.
6. Match your personnel - build a team that works well together.
7. When hiring craft people - take time to meet each one, ensure the Safety
Officer gives them an orientation. Provide an overview of the project and
let them know they can contact you with problems.
8. Get feedback from foremen. Are they well matched with their crews?
9. Focus on how safety can work, not why it can’t.
10. Learn from past experience. Don’t be a dinosaur and keep doing the
same thing expecting different results.
11. Always address and immediately correct safety violations or hazards you
observe or that are brought to your attention (especially the small
things). This is one of the most powerful statements you can make to the
workers on site and it avoids negligence on your part.
12. Be aware of your own attitude! It always flows throughout the group. You
set the tone. Set the example by your actions first, and then use words if
you need to.
13. Bring safety issues up at all meetings and support the safety policies and
procedures. If you don’t understand why something is a rule, find out.
14. Take time to contact at least five craft people daily regarding safety
issues. The personal touch has a significant impact.
15. Make your people proud to be Davis employees. Keep a clean site and set
your standards high - they will take ownership of the project, do a better
job and watch out for one another.
16. Assign craft people to do job site inspections with the Safety Manager.. It
helps them to be aware of safety concerns/problems, feel a part of the
program, and take ownership of the program.
17. Communicate! Communicate! Communicate!
you’ve done in the past to build your people’s confidence in your commitment
The negative effects will be hard to overcome. They’ll read it as -Safety is O.K.
PROJECT ENGINEERS
Engineers are in daily contact with our field employees. Further, they are
responsible for planning, coordinating, and scheduling upcoming work. They
Page 13 of 23
communicate constantly with Subs and therefore are the personnel in a key
position to see “The Big Picture”.
Project Engineers can assist with safety planning as the various job phases
develop and communicate equipment and training needs to the Project
Manager and the Safety Manager. They can also, through their regular contact
with Subs, communicate our corporate commitment to the safety and health of
all workers. Project and Safety Managers can be alerted regarding Subs that
resist complying with our high standards before someone is injured.
During their regular travel throughout the work site, Project Engineers have an
excellent opportunity to act as another set of management’s eyes to look for
unsafe conditions and acts. Further, they can look for ways to “do it better”
both during the planning and building phases.
FOREMEN
The activities of the first line supervisor are of major importance to the success
of the safety and health program. In order to prevent accidents, employees
must be trained to work safely. They must become “Safety Minded” through
regular counseling and safety/training meetings. Employee’s tools, equipment
and work areas should be inspected daily for unsafe conditions.
Foremen will be expected to participate in, and assist with, accident

investigations to determine root causes and required corrective actions.
Foremen have constant contact with employees and their work areas, therefore
they have the best opportunity to train, guide and influence employees to work
safely, and, in short, to promote a Culture of Safety.
The Foreman indirectly represents management to employees. Consequently,

what is said and done by foremen is a reflection of construction management
views. To act lukewarm or indifferent toward safety and health responsibilities
will convey the idea that management is indifferent to the safety and health of
the employees.
Conversely, when safety and health responsibilities are discharged with

enthusiasm and concern, the employees are more likely to be cooperative and
less likely to take unnecessary risks. The result is a safer and healthier
workplace with lowered costs and increased productivity. Foremen set the tone
for the success or failure of the Safety and Health Program.
Listed below are basic guidelines, that, when followed, will ensure the success
of the Safety and Health Program:
Page 14 of 23
Responsibility for Assigned Personnel

Foremen are responsible for the safety and health of all employees assigned to
them.
Note:
This means they have company authorization to take any reasonable action
required to prevent an accident where an immediate danger exists.
Responsibility for Non-assigned Personnel

Foremen also share responsibility for personnel of subs who may be working in
their area. The foreman should become familiar with the nature of their work,
and make sure that they take necessary precautions to protect themselves and
other affected employees. When sub’s employees work without supervision, the
foreman of that area is responsible for their adherence to safe working
procedures and job site safety rules. The foreman must immediately notify the
superintendent of all “Near Miss” accidents and assist with the investigation.
Area Housekeeping
Foremen have the responsibility for maintaining acceptable standards of
housekeeping in their area of responsibility. They are responsible for the use of
construction tape, barricades, cones, etc. to alert employees and/or visitors of
any temporary safety hazard until corrected.
Safety Inspections
Foremen must conduct daily safety inspections in their assigned area of
responsibility. Safety inspections, findings and corrective actions must be
documented and transmitted to the Safety Manager for closing action. When
the situation is beyond their power to react, they must immediately report the
condition or behavior to their Superintendent and/or the Safety Manager with
recommendation(s) to correct the problem.
Safety Orientation and Job Instruction

Foremen are responsible for ensuring that their assigned personnel know the
job site safety rules and regulations, safe job procedures and all hazards
unique to their work and work areas. They are also responsible for contacting
the Safety Manager to ensure completion of the initial safety orientation and
job instruction of newly assigned employees.
Safety and Health Talks/Instruction

Foremen must give crew safety pre-planning talks daily before work starts. The
purpose of such talks is the continuing education of all employees in safety-
related matters and safety preparedness for the day’s activities. Primary
Page 15 of 23
emphasis should be focused on personal safety that is specifically related to

employee work practices in their area of responsibility.
Additionally, short, documented safety meetings should be held with employees
when they will be engaging in activities that are non-routine, unusual,
hazardous, etc., to explain the hazards they may face and safety precautions
that should be used.
Accident Investigations
Foremen should be prepared to assist in all accident investigations occurring in
their area of responsibility. Foremen should be prepared to provide names of
witnesses and a description of how the accident occurred. They should also
“freeze” the scene of all accidents that involve serious injuries that may result
in lost time or death.
Safety Observations/Contacts
The purpose of safety observations/contacts is to promote “safety mindedness”
through regular communication with employees and to determine whether or
not the employees are working safely. When positive or negative safety behavior
is observed, the foreman will make an appropriate contact to either reinforce
positive behavior or counsel negative behavior. Since positive contacts are more
desirable and effective than negative contacts it is more productive to catch
someone doing something right and tell them about it.
Remember- silence means consent. When safety hazards or unsafe acts are
observed, take immediate corrective action.
Employee Safety Attitudes

It is expected that Foremen develop a cooperative safety attitude in their
employees by applying sound and approved methods of prevention, corrective
discipline and positive reinforcement. They must accomplish this by relying
primarily on education, friendly persuasion, and by setting the correct example
for their employees. Under no circumstances are unsafe practices to be
condoned.
Employee Fitness to Work

It is the responsibility of the Foreman to be alert for temporary or chronic
physical or mental conditions that may cause employees to be safety risks.
When such conditions are observed, the Foreman must act in accordance with
approved construction safety procedures.
Employee Medical Care

Foremen are required to ensure that their workers receive prompt medical
treatment for all injuries, no matter how slight. They should discourage self-
Page 16 of 23
treatment of injuries by their employees and should not give such treatment
themselves, except where emergency first aid is required.
Emergency Readiness
It is the responsibility of the Foremen to know the proper procedure for
emergency evacuation and to be prepared to act. They must know how to
operate emergency equipment on the job site, such as, fire extinguishers and
rescue baskets.
Federal, State and Local Safety Codes

Foremen are responsible to know applicable federal, state and local safety and
health regulations and plan their work accordingly.
BEST PRACTICES OF SUCCESSFUL FOREMAN
Listed below are “Best Practices” used by Foremen who have consistently
experienced low incidence rates on their project sites. Foremen will incorporate
these practices at their project sites.
1. Accept safety as your responsibility and a priority on your projects. Be a

personal example for safety.
2. Plan ahead for safety issues and communicate your plans with everyone
affected. Being pro-active is critical for a successful safety program.
Conduct daily huddles before work starts, stretch and discuss the 4 key
topics (what are we doing, do we have the right equipment & people, does
anyone have any safety concerns, what lessons have we learned doing
this in the past) for your day’s activities.
3. Use the Safety Department as a resource. Don’t wait for the Safety
Manager to come to you.
4. Hold your crew accountable and responsible for the safety of their crews.
5. When new craft people are assigned to your crew- take time to discuss
the importance of safety, your expectations for their safety performance
and re-enforce what they learned from their orientation with the Safety
Manager.
6. Get feedback from your crew. Do they have any safety concerns?
7. Focus on how safety can work, not why it can’t.
8. Learn from past experience. Don’t be a dinosaur and keep doing the
same thing expecting different results.
9. Always address and immediately correct safety violations or hazards you
observe or that are brought to your attention (especially the small
things). This is one of the most powerful statements you can make to the
workers on site and it avoids negligence on your part.
Page 17 of 23
10. Be aware of your own attitude! It always flows throughout the group. You
set the tone. Set the example by your actions first, and then use words if
you need to.
11. Bring safety issues up at all meetings and support the safety policies and
procedures. Get your crew up close at the meetings and get involved!
12. Make your people proud to be Davis employees. Keep a clean site and set
your standards high - they will take ownership of the project, do a better
job and watch out for one another.
13. Assign people to do job site inspections of your area before you start each
day. Use the Safety Manager to help come up with and implement with
corrective action. It helps your crew to be aware of their personal
responsibility for safety and gets you into the habit of looking ahead for
safety concerns, rather than cleaning-up after them.
14. Communicate! Communicate! Communicate!
you’ve done in the past to build your people’s confidence in your commitment
The negative effects will be hard to overcome. They’ll read it as - Safety is O.K.
SAFETY MANAGER
Safety Manager designation may be assigned to Superintendent, General

Foreman, or other Competent member of the project team.
The Safety Manager is responsible for the coordination and administration of

the project safety process. They are an extension of the Superintendent’s
authority and assist site management in safety and health related matters. The
Safety Manager has a dual reporting responsibility. The Safety Manager is a
member of the Environmental, Safety & Health Department. They are assigned
to projects in various divisions and are a part of the site management team. On
day to day matters, they coordinate and administer the site program with the
Superintendent and Project Manager. On program administration matters or
departmental matters, they report directly to the President. This reporting
structure takes away any potential for conflict of interest concerns on site. The
Safety Manager is responsible for providing or arranging for in house Safety
and Health Training and for identifying employees whose actions or behavior
indicate that retraining or further training is indicated.
The Company President assigns the Safety Manager to the job, with input from
the Project Manager and Superintendent. The Safety Manager acts with the
Page 18 of 23
authority of the Project Manager in matters relating to safety and health and
with the support of the President the Safety Manager is the final authority on
“Serious and IDLH (Immediate Danger to Life and Health)” issues in Safety and
Health.
Record Keeping
The Safety Manager is responsible for coordinating and filing, at minimum, the
following reports at the project. All filing systems should be maintained in
accordance with Company Policy.
1. State Workman’s Compensation Accident Report Safety Citations; Red
Flag Notices; Near Miss & Incident Reports
2. Daily Site Inspection Reports
3. Monthly Project Status Reports
4. Safety Meeting Minutes
5. Required Construction Training Documentation
6. Worker Orientations
7. Sub Documentation/Orientations
Safety Meetings/Tool Box Meetings

The Safety Manager conducts or assists in conducting safety and health related
meetings and any site-specific training. The responsibility of ensuring the
conduct of safety and health-related meetings belongs jointly to the Safety
Manager, Project Managers and Superintendents. The Safety Manager must
actively participate in the preparation and conduct of such meetings. The
Safety Manager will document and maintain a record of all toolbox meetings
and safety meetings.
Construction Required Training

The Safety Manager is responsible for conducting and recording all required
training areas for all job site employees. This training must meet the minimum
requirements as for all site activities.
Emergency Action Plan

The Safety Manager is knowledgeable in the implementation of the Emergency
Action Plan and is a key participant in assisting the Superintendent and
Foremen in communicating the plan to all job site employees. The Safety
Manager must ensure, through regular inspection/training, that all
components of the plan are working, (e.g., the evacuation alarm is in good
working order and coordinate periodic drills). A copy of the Project Emergency
Action Plan must be available the project site.
Page 19 of 23
OSHA (Federal and State) Inspections

The Safety Manager is required to be familiar with current rules and
regulations of the OSHA (Federal and State) Standards, especially with respect
to the specific work being performed at their project. They are responsible to
assist the Superintendent in following corporate policy regarding OSHA
(Federal/State) inspections. The Safety Manager ensures required notices and
posters are maintained and OSHA 300 logs and applicable citations are posted.
Training Meetings
The Safety Manager will attend monthly training meetings conducted by the
Environmental Safety and Health Department. The purpose of these meetings
is to increase knowledge regarding regulatory requirements, policies and
procedures, program administration techniques, trends and lessons learned.
These meetings also include frequent job site tours and exchange of
information regarding alternative methods of program management used by
other administrators within the group. Safety Manager must maintain
certifications in First Aid, CPR and OSHA rules and regulations, as they are the
designated competent safety person for the project.
Accident Investigations
The Superintendent’s responsibility is to assist in conducting accident
investigations to determine root cause. The Safety Manager coordinates and
participates in all accident and near miss investigations.
The Safety Manager is responsible to notify the Company President

immediately upon notice of a serious accident. They must maintain the project
accident file and forward copies of all accident reports to the Environmental
Safety and Health Department within 24 hours of accident notification.
Daily inspections
The Safety Manager will conduct daily environmental, safety and health
inspections. They will ensure project management is involved in the routing of
the inspection reports and participates in the resolution process in a timely
manner. The Safety Manager will maintain copies of all inspection/action
reports, and monitor action forms. When conditions have not been abated by
the proposed date, the Safety Manager follows-up with the responsible
individual.
When responsible parties fail to take action after being contacted by the Safety
Manager, the Superintendent will be notified and held accountable for ensuring
immediate corrective action. Inspection action forms will be used to conduct
Page 20 of 23
trend analysis to identify problem areas and target training, enforcement and
other reduction efforts.
Site Orientations
The Safety Manager coordinates and conducts new employee orientations.
Orientations are critical to the success of the safety program because they
communicate expected employee conduct
During the orientation process, the Safety Manager will issue any required
personal protective equipment and site- specific rules. All orientations will be
documented on the company orientation form.
Note: Employee orientations shall be conducted prior to or on the

employees first day of work.
Safety Contact Program

The Safety Manager coordinates and manages the Safety Contact
Program/Disciplinary Policy for the entire project. They must notify and
coordinate with the Superintendent when workers require re-training,
suspension, or removal.
The Safety Manager will forward copies of all Safety Contacts to the
Environmental Safety and Health Department. The Environmental Safety and
Health Department will maintain a record of all contacts issued and
periodically forward trend reports to Officers/Department Heads and Project
Managers.
In addition, the ESH Department will notify all projects when a worker has
been removed from site for disciplinary purposes. All managers are to ensure
that the worker does not participate in job activities on any site during the
disciplinary period
Safety and Health Equipment Supervisors

The Safety Manager will order and distribute project Safety and Health related
equipment such as safety glasses and respirators. They coordinate job site
training for employees where necessary, such as powder-actuated tool or
pneumatic nail gun training.
Respirator Program Project Coordination

The Safety Manager is responsible for management of the respiratory protection
program. The Safety Manager will maintain training records and copies will be
forwarded to the Environmental Safety and Health Department.
Page 21 of 23
Job Site Bulletin Board

The Safety Manager is responsible for maintaining the job site bulletin board
and ensuring that all required notices are posted. The Environmental Safety
and Health Department will ensure that all required material is provided.
ALL EMPLOYEES
It is the company’s responsibility to provide the employee with a safe place of

employment that is free from recognized or predictable hazards. We will
endeavor to provide this environment by managing an on-going safety
awareness program. Just as we will hold supervisors accountable for their
safety performance, we will also hold you, the employees, accountable for your
safety performance.
Our employees are our greatest resource. Therefore, the safety and health of all
workers is extremely important to Davis and to its employees. Safety is
something in which every person at Davis is involved in and is responsible and
accountable for. Safety starts with you.
CODE OF SAFE PRACTICES
1. Employees shall not knowingly perform work in an unsafe manner or in

an unsafe environment without the safeguards prescribed by the OSHA
(federal/state) standards.
2. Employee’s shall not tamper with or render ineffective any safety device
or safeguard.
3. Employees shall use the safety devices provided for personal protection.
4. Employees must comply with all work and safety rules.
5. Employees will not undertake a job they have not done before, or are
unfamiliar with until they have been instructed by their Supervisor in
the safe methods of performing the work along with safety hazards that
may be present.
6. Employees must follow safe work practices and be alert and concerned
for the safety of their fellow workers. They must be especially mindful
and watchful of new or inexperienced workers. Apprentice workers
experience most accidents with less than one-year experience and
experienced workers with less than 30 days on the job. We can help
these works avoid injury by watching out for them until they become
acclimated to their new environment.
7. You must not take shortcuts to save time or money. Shortcuts cause
accidents and are very costly.
8. If you are unfortunate enough to experience an injury while at work, you
must report it to your Supervisor immediately regardless of how minor it
may seem.
Page 22 of 23
9. Report all near miss incidents to your Supervisor immediately so we may

the possibility of a damaging accident.
10.All employees must pay attention to detail and take immediate corrective
action when hazards or unsafe acts are observed. Silence means consent
Page 23 of 23
TAB 4 – SAFETY POLICY & PROCEDURES
Safety Policy and Procedures
1.0 Introduction
1.1 General Information
A Site-Specific Safety Plan is a requirement of the OSHA
Standard for Construction 29 CFR 1926. This plan is designed
to identify, evaluate, and control health and safety hazards for
the purpose of protecting employees. The plan provides for
emergency response activities at the jobsite as well as covering
site hazard analysis, training requirements, engineering
controls, materials handling, and safe construction operations.
This Site-Specific Plan is intended to provide guidance and
information in dealing with the hazards that may be faced on
the job by Davis Constructors & Engineers Inc. (Davis)
employees. This plan is a site specific document. Technical,
Contract and/or Operational Managers are responsible for
ensuring all aspects of employee safety are addressed in this
plan. Health and safety personnel are available to assist
management with the contents of the plan. The health and
safety personnel help ensure the plan complies with all
applicable federal, state, and corporate regulations and policy.
The Health and Safety Department has final authority for this
plan’s contents and provisions.
1.2 Policy
Davis has a strong commitment to providing a safe and
productive workplace. To this end Davis seeks to establish
policies promoting high standards of employee health and safety
while delivering to our customer the highest quality product. In
keeping with this commitment Davis intends to maintain a
positive Safety Program and a Substance-Abuse Program. Our
employees conduct themselves and work in a safe manner
with good construction practices.
Effective safety demands cooperation on everyone’s part. It’s

important communication is kept open at all times. For this
reason, Davis management practices an open-door policy.
Employees who notice hazards or other safety problems or feel
they need additional training must notify their supervisor.
Supervisors and management address these concerns and take
corrective action when warranted.
Page 1 of 17
Responsibility for achieving our safety goals belongs to the site

superintendent, safety manager, supervisors, foreman,
employees, with the support of Davis management. Everyone is
obligated to know the safety requirements and standards for
their areas or job and abide by them. Supervisors must instill a
positive attitude and awareness of the “safety culture” in their
workers through personal adherence, training, personal
contact, and regularly scheduled safety meetings. It’s the duty
of all employees to perform their work with maximum regard for
their safety and co-workers’ safety.
Our safety policies are an integral part of the Davis personnel

policies. This means compliance with the policies is a condition
of employment and must be taken seriously. Failure to comply
with the Safety Program and Policy is grounds for disciplinary
action up to and including termination.
1.3 Purpose
The purpose of this Site-Specific Safety Plan is to illustrate
safety issues specific to the PSCA Range Facilities
Reconstruction Project. This site safety plan is consistent with
the Safety Program and Policies located in the Davis Corporate
Safety Plan.
This plan is intended to maintain a safe work environment and

effectively reduce the number of accidents resulting in personal
injury, property damage, and damage to Davis equipment.
This policy applies to all Davis employees. By contract, all

subcontractors are required to comply with this policy in
addition to their own safety program and policy.
This policy complies with applicable local, state, and federal

laws concerning safety including 29 CFR 1926 and 29 CFR
1910. In the event a discrepancy exists between this policy and
any applicable law, the provisions of that law govern.
This policy is made available in the following ways:
• A copy of this revised policy is made available to each

newly hired employee in his/her new hire packet.
Page 2 of 17
• A copy of this revised policy is available in the job site

office.
• A copy of this revised policy is available upon request to

the supervisor.
2.0 Scope of Project

2.1 Scope of the Work
All work is to repair or replace damages to the existing rocket
launch facility from damaged caused during a launch
malfunction. (See Tab 1 of this Plan for more detail)
2.2 Site Location

South of the city of Kodiak take Rezanof Dr. West to the Chiniak
Hwy. which turns into Pasagshak Rd. Follow Pasagshak road to
the end.
Kodiak Island, AK.
2.3 Site Access/Traffic

From Kodiak via Pasagshak Road.
2.4 Temporary Facilities

At the start of the project Davis will have a field office as well as
crew and subcontractor trailers adjacent at the designated
location. At this location there will also be a tool and equipment
storage trailer, fuel storage, and temporary toilets.
2.5 Utilities and Power

Temporary electrical power will feed to the project from existing
services on site. Once the structure is substantially complete,
Facility Utilities will provide permanent power and steam to the
building.
3.0 Health and Safety Responsibilities

The effectiveness and success of the safety program depends upon the
active participation and cooperation of all employees. Duties and
responsibilities of all employees under this policy are the following:
Page 3 of 17
3.1 Corporate Safety Coordinator

• Coordinate health and safety training for management
and supervisors.
• Coordinate monthly supervisor safety meetings.
• Coordinate jobsite safety audits.
• Maintain and revise the Safety Policy, Corporate Safety
Manual, and Site-Specific Safety Plans as needed.
3.2 Project Safety Manager

• Maintain the jobsite postings and notices required by law.
• Ensure the proper filing of paperwork relating to acci-
dents.
• Participate in post-accident investigations.
• Maintain all records and reports related to this policy.
• Implement Davis Safety Program and Policy including
hazard analysis and development JHA’s prior to all
preparatory meetings and associated construction
activity, complete daily comprehensive, documented
project inspections and direct corrective action as needed.
3.3 Project Manager

• Approve the Site-Specific Safety Plan.
• Direct and coordinate health and safety regulations
related to his/her area of responsibility.
• Assist in formulating policy matters.
• Implement Davis Safety Program and Policy.
3.4 Project Superintendent assisted by Project Safety Manager

• Be familiar with the health and safety regulations related
to area or responsibility.
• Direct and coordinate health and safety activities within
area of responsibility.
• Ensure arrangements for prompt medical attention in
case of serious injury. These arrangements include, at
the very least: transportation, communication, and
emergency telephone numbers.
• Ensure all supervised employees use required personal
protective equipment (PPE) and safety devices.
• Ensure safety equipment is available, maintained, used,
and stored correctly.
Page 4 of 17
• Instruct and train all employees within area of

responsibility in job health and safety requirements.
• Direct correction of unsafe conditions.
• Conduct weekly safety meetings.
• In the case of an accident complete the Report of
Occupational Injury or Illness.
• Participate in post-accident investigation.
• Review all accidents/incidents with foremen and
employees involved. Ensure corrective action is taken
immediately to eliminate the cause of the accident.
• Ensure foremen are aware of and comply with
requirements for safe practices.
• Require all subcontractors to comply with health and
safety regulations as well as Davis Safety Program and
Policy.
• Maintain copies of applicable programs and OSHA forms
on site, in accordance with Davis practices and policies.
3.5 Foreman
• Be familiar with, explain, and enforce health and safety
regulations applying to Davis operations within areas of
responsibility.
• Direct and coordinate health and safety activities within
area or responsibility.
• Ensure safety devices and proper PPE are used by
employees under supervision.
• Instruct and train all employees within area of
responsibility in job health and safety requirements,
including (but, not limited to) hazard recognition and
avoidance. Also, foreman/front line supervisors must
require compliance by employees with the established
safety rules.
• Direct the correction of unsafe conditions.
• Ensure safety equipment is available, maintained, used,
and stored correctly.
• Ensure injuries are treated promptly and reported
properly.
• Coordinate daily jobsite inspection.
Page 5 of 17
3.6 All Employees

• Be familiar with and comply with proper health and safety
practices.
• Use the required safety devices and proper PPE.
• Notify the supervisor immediately of unsafe conditions/-
acts, accidents, and injuries.
• Implement the Davis Safety Program and Policy.
3.7 Subcontractors
By contract subcontractors comply with and ensure the
compliance of their employees with the provisions of this policy
as well as their own safety program. Failure to fulfill this
requirement is a failure to meet the conditions of the
subcontract.
3.7 Key Personnel

The following Davis personnel are key individuals for this
jobsite.
Project Manager: Luke Blomfield

Safety Coordinator: Kirk Wagoner
Project Superintendent: Ken Parmenter
Project Safety Manager: TBD
Project Engineer: TBD
Foremen: Delbert Holman
4.0 Prohibited Conduct

4.1 Repairs
Employees are prohibited from making repairs, alterations, or
attachments to equipment in the field except by the permission of
the superintendent, foreman, or equipment mechanic. Only
qualified personnel will perform repairs on equipment. Such
repairs, alterations, or attachments are documented on the
appropriate shop forms.
Employees are prohibited from removing a guard, safety device,

or appliance from equipment or machinery except to make
repairs as described in 4.1 first paragraph. While making
repairs, employees use appropriate lockout/tagout procedures.
Page 6 of 17
When repairs are complete the guard, safety device, or appliance

is replaced immediately.
4.2 Equipment Use and Operation

Equipment is used only for its intended use and as recommended
by the manufacturer. Using equipment for purposes other than
what it’s designed for is prohibited.
Employees are prohibited from operating a vehicle in a reckless
manner or at a speed greater than is reasonable and proper, with
due regard for weather, traffic, character of roadway, load, type of
vehicle, and any other conditions which may affect the safe
operation of the vehicle. The vehicle must be kept under control
at all times and special care is exercised when transporting
personnel. Employees using Davis vehicles must sign and abide
by Davis Vehicle Policy.
Employees may only ride equipment if there are seats with
seatbelts or equal protection available for each person. Seatbelts
are worn at all times while operating equipment with seats.
Forklift policy and procedure are located in TAB 13 of this SSP
binder.
4.3 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

Davis provides Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) to all
employees. Hard hats, safety glasses, reflective vest, and safety
work boots are required to be worn at all times when on the
jobsite. Exceptions may be made to this PPE requirement only
under an approved Davis work plan. Employees learn where to
get PPE during their new-hire orientation and are responsible for
wearing and maintaining the required PPE. Additional PPE
may be required depending on the task and if there’s a potential
for exposure to hazardous conditions. PPE requirements are
reviewed by the foreman. Employees are expected to use
reasonable judgment regarding whether additional PPE (beyond
the required) are necessary for certain tasks. If employees are
unsure of the type of PPE required for a specific task or job, they
should ask the supervisor.
4.4 Conduct
The following conduct is prohibited and may result in discipline
up to and including termination:
♦ Horseplay and scuffling on the job.
Page 7 of 17
♦ Making a false report or misrepresentation.

♦ Fighting.
♦ Violating the prohibitions of the Drug and Alcohol Policy
(distributed to each employee in their new-hire packet).
♦ Dishonesty and theft of Davis property.
♦ Deliberate misuse of Davis equipment.
♦ Unnecessary risk taking.
♦ Violating or disobeying any instruction given by a supervisor.
4.5 Other Policy Violations

Employees committing policy violations other than those
addressed in Section 4.0 may be subject to discipline up to and
including immediate termination of employment.
4.6 Consequences for Policy Violations

The following consequences apply to all employees found to have
violated this policy. Any foreman, supervisor, or official of
management, as soon as becoming aware of any such failure,
ensures the following action is taken:
Stage 1
A formal verbal warning may be given to the employee by the
immediate supervisor, along with a warning that this is the first
stage in the disciplinary procedure and any repetition within
one month will lead to the second stage in the procedure.
Stage 2
If the offense(s) addressed in Stage1 is repeated and/or
continued or a more serious offense committed, the employee
may be given a formal written warning, setting out the details of
the offense(s) and stating if the offense(s) is (are) repeated within
one month the third stage in this procedure will be invoked. In
addition to the written warning the employee is suspended—
without pay—for a period of one day. Upon returning to work
the employee must undergo additional formal training in the
area of the offense(s) before being permitted to work. This is to
prevent injury to the employee or co-worker.
Page 8 of 17
Stage 3
If an offense written up under Stage 2 is repeated within three
months, the employee may be terminated. An employee so
terminated is ineligible for rehire for 24 months.
Depending on circumstances, Davis reserves the right to

bypass, duplicate, or alter any stage of the recommended
disciplinary procedures described above.
Safety violation documents are located in Tab 24 – FORMS of

this SSSP binder.
5.0 General Jobsite Procedures

5.1 New-Hire Orientation
New-hire orientation may consist of, but is not limited to, the
following:
A. Have the employee read the new-hire packet which includes
this policy and the Drug and Alcohol Policy. Answer any
questions the new hire may have about these policies and
request a signature on the Statement of Understanding.
B. Return all forms to the Davis office as indicated on the first
page of the new-hire packet.
C. Orient the employee to the jobsite indicating the location of the
Safety Center, SDS book, emergency facilities, portable fire
extinguishers, first-aid station, emergency phone numbers,
public notices, EEO, and any jobsite specific information.
D. Explain the injury and accident policy.
E. Review the written hazard communication program. Discuss
hazards, container labeling, and the use of protective
equipment.
F. Explain the emergency response plan for catastrophic events
such as fire, explosion, etc.
G. Issue PPE as required for the job.
5.2 Training
Training and education are necessary for the success of this
policy. Employees are trained to recognize jobsite hazards and
the procedures to follow to minimize these hazards. Training may
consist of (but is not limited to) the following:
• Weekly jobsite safety meetings.
Page 9 of 17
• Orientation training for new hires.

• Individual job/task training, including the applicable
regulations/standards for the specific job/task.
Supervisors and management receive ongoing safety training

throughout the year as organized by the Safety Coordinator and
as deemed necessary by Davis owners. Such training includes
the maintenance of first-aid and CPR cards.
Training and competent person documents are located in TAB 24 –
FORMS in this SSSP binder.
Areas requiring a competent person are hearing protection, rigging,

hot work on preservative coatings, scaffolds, fall protection, cranes,
hoists, excavations, concrete work requiring lift-slab operations, steel
erection, underground construction, demolition, blasting, stairways
and ladders, accident prevention responsibility, ionizing radiation,
welding and cutting, tunnels and shafts, caissons, cofferdams,
compressed air, bolting, riveting, fitting up and planking, lead,
mechanical demolition, respiratory protection, slings, electrical, and
asbestos.
5.3 Safety Meetings

Weekly safety meetings are held on the jobsite. All employees
and subcontractors are required to attend. The meetings may
cover a range of safety-related topics. The format and content of
the meeting is up to the discretion of the superintendent.
Monthly safety meetings are held for all foremen,
superintendents, project managers, project engineers, Davis
owners, and other management personnel. These meetings are
for the purpose of discussing companywide safety issues and
providing continued safety training and education.
Safety meeting documents are located in TAB 24 – FORMS of this SSSP
binder.
5.4 Safety Inspections

The superintendent and foreman conduct an initial safety
inspection at the beginning of each project, following the “Safety
Inspection Guide” included in the site-specific safety plan.
In addition, a daily safety inspection of the jobsite is conducted
by Davis employees, employees of a subcontractor, or some
combination thereof. The inspection is rotated between all
workers on the jobsite. Inspection sheets covering different
Page 10 of 17
aspects of safety were developed for each day of the week. The
sheets are intended as a guide. Any safety concern found
during the inspection is reported. If a worker is unclear about
any item on the inspection sheet, a Davis foreman or safety
officer helps. If the area being inspected requires a competent
person, the employee conducts the inspection with the
competent person. Also, if time allows, the foreman for the
worker conducting the inspection is encouraged to walk
through it with them.
Safety inspection documents are located in Tab 24 – FORMS of this
SSP binder.
5.5 Hazard Communication
Davis developed a written hazard communication plan. It’s
explained to each employee during the new-hire orientation.
This plan is located in the site-specific safety plan appendices
and is available upon request to the superintendent. The
purpose of the hazard communication plan is to provide
employees information on the chemical and physical hazards that
may be present at the jobsite.
The Hazard Communication Plan is detailed in Tab 8 – HAZARD

COMMUNICATION PLAN of this SSSP binder.
5.6 Job Hazard Analysis

A job hazard analysis may be developed covering the major
activities of construction, the hazards associated with these
activities, and ways to mitigate these hazards.
The job hazard analysis procedures and forms are detailed in Tab 23
Job Hazard Analysis of this SSSP binder.
5.7 Housekeeping
Housekeeping is one of the most important factors for a safe
jobsite. Form material should be scraped and all protruding nails
pounded down. All other debris is cleared from work areas,
passage ways, and stairs. Excess materials are stacked neatly
out of the way. Tools should be stored in the tool van so they’re
available for all employees to use.
Combustible scrap and debris are removed at regular intervals
during the course of construction. Containers with covers are
provided for the collection and separation of waste, trash, oily
and used rags, and other such refuse, which is removed safely
and on a regular basis.
Page 11 of 17
Foreign object and debris (FOD) is a significant concern on

medical facilities and construction areas. It’s extremely
important to keep all trash and debris contained at this site.
Housekeeping will be strictly enforced.
5.8 Fall Protection

Davis provides fall protection when employees are exposed to
fall hazards beyond those permitted by federal and/or state
regulations. A fall-protection work plan is prepared for all fall
hazards associated with the work. Fallprotection work plan
templates can be found in TAB 9 – FALL PROTECTION of this
binder. Fall protection may consist of, but is not limited to, the
following:
• A stairway or ladder is provided at any point of access
where there’s a break in elevation of 19 inches or more.
• Guardrails are installed for all leading edge work. For
loading bay locations fall-arrest system or fall-restraint
systems are used.
• All stairways of four or more risers or greater than 30
inches high are guarded by a handrail or stair rails.
• A hole cover or safety guardrail is immediately installed
for all floor holes or openings (greater than two inches in
its least dimension).
• Safety harnesses with approved lanyards and tie-off
points are used for all other fall protection unless an
appropriate procedure or device was approved in advance
by a competent person.
The fall-protection plan is detailed in Tab 9 – FALL PROTECTION AND
ELEVATED SURFACE WORK EMERGENCY ACTION AND RESCURE
PLANE of this SSSP binder.
5.9 Electrical Safety

Electrical safety may consist of, but is not limited to, the
following:
• Live electrical parts are guarded against accidental
contact by cabinets, enclosure, location, or guarding.
• All receptacles not part of the permanent wiring of the
building are equipped with GFCI receptacles at the
temporary service drop.
• Extension cords are kept in safe, working condition.
• All lamps for general illumination have the bulbs
Page 12 of 17
protected against breakage. All light sockets are filled

with a working bulb.
• Employees will not work in such close (able to contact)
proximity to any part of an electric power circuit unless
the circuit is de-energized, grounded, or guarded by
insulation.
• De-energized equipment or circuits are locked out and
tagged out. The tags identify the equipment or circuits
being worked on.
Electrical Safety is located in TAB 18 – ELECTRICAL SAFETY
PROGRAM of this SSSP Binder
5.10 Tools
Davis provides tools for employees to use. These tools meet
applicable OSHA standards for safety. Only trained employees
are allowed to use such tools. The safe use of tools may consist
of, but is not limited to the following:
• Unsafe or defective tools are removed from service and
tagged out.
• Power tools are turned off and motion stopped before
setting down.
• Tools are disconnected from the power source before
changing drills, blades, or bits and before any repair or
adjustment is made. Power saws, table saws, and radial
arm saws shall have operational blade guards installed
and used.
• Portable abrasive grinders have guards installed covering
the upper and back portions of the abrasive wheel.
5.11 Scaffolds
Scaffolds are erected, moved, dismantled, or altered under the
supervision of a competent person for scaffolding. Scaffold use
consists of, but is not limited to, the following procedures:
• Standard guardrails are installed on all open sides and
ends of scaffold platforms and/or work levels more than
ten feet above the ground, floor, or lower level.
• Scaffolds four to ten feet in height with a minimum
horizontal dimension in any direction less than 45 inches
have standard railings installed on all open sides/ends.
• Platforms at all working levels are fully planked. Planking
is laid tight with no more than one inch space between
Page 13 of 17
them, overlap at least 12 inches, and extends over end

supports 6-12 inches unless cleats are used.
• The front edge of all platforms is no more than 14 inches
from the face of the work, except plastering/lathing may be
18 inches.
• Mobile scaffolds are erected no more than a maximum
height of four times their minimum base dimension.
• Scaffold casters/wheels are locked whenever platform is
occupied.
• Scaffolds are not overloaded beyond their design loadings.
• Scaffold components are not used as tie-off/anchor points
for fall-protection devices.
• Portable ladders, hook-on ladders, attachable ladders,
integral prefabricated scaffold frames, walkways, or direct
access from another scaffold or structure are used for
access when platforms are more than two feet above or
below a point of access.
• Cross braces are not used as a means of access to
scaffolds.
• Scaffolds are not erected, used, dismantled, altered, or
moved such that they or any conductive material handled
on them might come close to exposed and energized power
lines than the following:
- Three feet from insulated lines of less than 300
volts;
- Ten feet plus for any other insulated or uninsulated
lines.
Scaffold Safety is located in TAB 19 – SCAFFOLD SAFETY PROGRAM of
this SSSP Binder
5.12 Excavation and Trenches

Excavation and trenching are done in the presence of a
competent person and in compliance with, but not limited to, the
following procedures:
• Any excavation or trench four feet or more in depth is
provided cave-in protection through shoring, sloping,
benching, or the use of hydraulic shoring, trench shields,
or trench boxes. Trenches less than four feet in depth and
showing potential of cave-in are also provided cave-in
protection. In addition, when the work to be performed in
trenches less than 4 feet in depth mandates that workers
Page 14 of 17
work from a kneeling or crouching position, additional

protection shall be provided. Specific requirements of each
system are dependent upon the soil classification as
determined by a competent person.
• A competent person inspects each excavation/trench daily
prior to the start of work, after every rainstorm or other
hazard increasing occurrence, and as needed throughout
the shift.
• An exit is provided in trenches four feet or more. The
exit(s) is/are within 25 feet of any employee in the trench.
• Spoil piles and other equipment are kept at least two feet
from the edge of the trench or excavation.
The excavation plan is detailed in TAB 10 – TRENCHING and

EXCAVATION of this SSSP binder.
5.13 Ladders
Ladders are inspected during the weekly inspections to identify
any unsafe conditions. Any ladders found to be unsafe are taken
out of service. Extension ladders extend three feet above the work
surface and are 100 percent tied off. Step ladders are only used in the
open position. Ladders are stored lying down.
Ladder Safety is detailed in TAB 15 – LADDER SAFETY PROGRAM of
this SSSP binder.
5.14 Illumination
Construction areas, aisles, stairs, ramps, runways, corridors,
offices, shops, and storage areas where work is in progress are
lighted with either natural or artificial illumination.
5.15 Motor Vehicles and Mechanized Equipment

Vehicles and equipment are only operated by qualified persons
(training or experience). The superintendent maintains
equipment training logs. Employees operating Davis-owned
vehicles must sign and abide by Davis Vehicle Policy.
All equipment operators are responsible for checking, on a daily
basis, all fluid levels, drive components, and hydraulics. In
addition, operators visually inspect the engine and look for
structural breaks and cracks on the machine. Any and all
deficiencies must be reported to a supervisor immediately.
When equipment is stopped or parked, parking brakes are set
Page 15 of 17
and other safety precautions are taken as required for the type of
equipment such as placing the forks flat on the ground.
5.16 Severe Weather

Outside construction operations including, but not limited to,
steel erection, site work, and concrete work are suspended if
severe wind or rain conditions present safety hazards at the
worksite. Ice and snow hazards are evaluated and appropriate
measures taken to abate potential hazards. The “Buddy System”
will be invoked for outside work at temperatures of -40F or
colder.
5.17 Accidents
All accidents and near misses must be reported immediately to
the foreman or superintendent. An accident report is then filled
out by the employee and the supervisor. Filling out an accident
report does not require the delay of medical attention. Any
injury is treated first. Employees file such reports without fear
of reprisal by management.
The accident or incident may be discussed at weekly safety
meetings or in the Safety Alert to talk about how to avoid that
sort of accident in the future.
Accident prevention and investigation procedures and documents are
located in TAB 7 – ACCIDENT PREVENTION and REPORTING
PROCEDURES of this SSSP binder.
5.18 First Aid

First-aid kits are available in the project office, at the safety
center and other locations as indicated during orientation. In
addition, foremen and superintendents maintain current first-
aid and CPR cards.
CPR/First-Aid cards are on file in the Project Safety Office.
5.19 Fire Protection

Davis maintains one or more fire extinguishers (rated not less
than 2A) every 3000 square feet of building area, or every 100
feet. In multi-story buildings one or more fire extinguishers rated
not less that 2A are provided on each floor and adjacent to the
stairway(s). All trucks and equipment are fitted with portable fire
extinguishers. Employees are instructed on the location and
usage of these fire extinguishers. Emergency telephone numbers
Page 16 of 17
for fire protection and emergency medical services are posted on

the field office bulletin board.
Fire Protection procedures are located in TAB 6 – EMERGENCY
ACTION, EVACUATION and FIRE PREVENTION of this SSSP binder.
5.20 Emergency Action Plan

Each jobsite develops an emergency action plan that’s reviewed
with each employee during orientation. The emergency action
plan covers emergency escape procedures, procedures followed by
employees remaining to operate critical operations before they
evacuate, procedures to account for all employees, rescue and
medical duties, and how to report emergencies. Site maps
showing site and building evacuation routes, assembly areas and
other critical information will be posted on the employee bulletin
board and other appropriate sites around the project. Maps,
routes and assembly areas will be modified to reflect all physical
changes as the project progresses.
Emergency Action Plan is located in TAB 6 – EMERGENCY ACTION,
EVACUATION and FIRE PREVENTION of this SSSP binder.
6.0 Safety Program and Policy Limitations

The provisions in this policy reflect decisions made by management
and are not required to be approved by employees. It’s impossible to
anticipate every circumstance or question about policy and include
them all in this safety program and policy. Also, as time goes by, the
need for revisions will arise and Davis reserves the right to revise,
supplement, or rescind any portion of this policy at its discretion at
any time with or without notice.
Page 17 of 17
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 5 – SUBCONTRACTOR HEALTH & SAFETY
PROCEDURES
Subcontractor Health and Safety Procedures
1.0 Policy
Davis Constructors & Engineers, Inc. (Davis) policy is to select, contract
with, and oversee subcontractors with the same priority and emphasis
on safety as we practice. It’s a contractual requirement that
subcontractors comply with Davis, client, state, and federal safety and
health regulations.
2.0 Purpose and Scope

All contractors and employees on a project can only achieve the goal of
an accident-free jobsite through a cooperative effort. This procedure
provides guidelines used by Davis management when selecting
subcontractors as well as safety requirements implemented when
subcontractors and their employees begin work on Davis projects.
This procedure applies only to subcontractors who have a contractual

relationship with Davis and their tier subcontractors.
3.0 Definitions
Term Definition
Subcontractor Any person, partnership, or corporation with a contract
with Davis and/or their subcontractor(s) to furnish
labor, material, or equipment as part of the work
Work The total of the contractor’s responsibilities as set forth
in the contract documents.
Superintendent The highest-ranking representative of Davis whose
regular work location/office is on the project site.
4.0 Responsibilities
The Project Manager, project engineer, and superintendent are
responsible for the selection of subcontractors. The Safety Department is
available as a resource to interpret safety data and provide assistance in
the selection of subcontractors as required. The Project Manager and
superintendent and the project staff are responsible for assuring the
Page 1 of 10
PROCEDURES
overall implementation of and compliance with the requirements of this

procedure through the subcontractor management/supervisor chain of
command.
5.0 Training
Subcontract employees must complete safety training complying with all
applicable federal, state, local, client, and Davis safety requirements.
Documentation of all safety training is maintained on the project by the
subcontractor and provided to Davis upon request.
Under federal and state safety requirements subcontractors (employers)

must certify all operators of mobile equipment, such as forklifts, cranes,
boom lifts, buses, etc., are trained and/or certified on the proper
operation of the equipment. Copies of this training and certification are
maintained on the project by the subcontractor and forwarded to Davis
upon request.
All subcontractor employees are required to participate in weekly safety

training sessions. Signed copies of the weekly meeting reports are made
available to Davis within 24 hours of each session.
6.0 Inspection and Storage

Copies of all subcontractor safety documents are maintained for a
minimum of 12 months, unless a specified longer retention time is
required by a regulatory agency.
Accident reports, OSHA logs, and other critical safety documentation

become part of the permanent project files and maintained by Davis at
project completion.
7.0 Procedure
Requesting and evaluating subcontractor general safety plan:
• The Project Manager, Superintendent or Project Safety Manager
will request a subcontractor general safety plan from all potential
subcontractors in conjunction with a request for quotation for
services.
Page 2 of 10
PROCEDURES
• Upon return receipt, the general safety plan is reviewed by the

Project Manager, Superintendent and Project Safety Manager to
determine if the subcontractor has a safety program meeting
acceptable guidelines for performing the work.
• Subsequent to review of the general safety plan, the Project Man-

ager, Superintendent or Project Safety Manager jointly qualify or
disqualify a subcontractor. Three primary sources of information
provide ways to evaluate the probable safety performance of
prospective subcontractors:
1) Experience modification rates for worker’s compensation

insurance premiums.
2) OSHA incidents rates for recordable injuries and illnesses.
3) Contractor safety programs, procedures, and practices.
Note: Due to the vast number of variables that may impact safety
measurement systems, Davis has no standard minimum or set safety
criteria for disqualifying potential subcontractors.
7.1 Documentation and Reporting Requirements

Every subcontractor’s employee is required to review all relevant
elements of the Davis Site Specific Plan and acknowledge said
review by signature.
Prior to mobilizing the project, all subcontractors are to forward a

copy of their safety program and hazard communication program
to the Project Safety Manager.
Subcontractors must generate a Hazard Assessment Safety Action

Plan, specific to their scope of work and completed before
mobilizing the project. The Project Safety Manager reviews the
plan.
Subcontractors are required to participate in producing task-

specific hazard analysis for daily activities as well as review all site
safety reports.
Page 3 of 10
PROCEDURES
Signed copies of subcontractor’s weekly safety meeting reports are

made available to Davis within twenty-four (24) hours of each
meeting.
Accident investigation reports for all subcontractor accident,

injuries, and work-related illnesses are forwarded to the Davis site
superintendent within twenty-four (24) hours of the occurrence.
Subcontractors provide a Monthly Summary of Injuries for each

month in which they conduct work on the project. These reports
are due to the Davis site safety manager by the fifth (5th) day of the
month for the past month.
Subcontractors are also responsible for and comply with all federal
and state accident reporting and recordkeeping requirements for
their employees.
Each subcontractor develops a project specific emergency action

plan in accordance with federal, state, client and Davis
requirements.
Site management must be informed promptly of any accident

occurring on the project. Serious injuries, illnesses or any
accident involving a third party or a member of the general public
must be reported to Davis site management immediately.
Site management must be informed immediately of any OSHA,

EPA, or other safety or health regulatory agencies actions involving
the subcontractor’s work.
7.2 Basic Safety Requirements

The following basic safety rules list some of the Davis primary
safety concerns for subcontractor safety, but are in no way all-
inclusive. All other client, owner, Davis, federal, state, and local
safety and health regulations governing the work applies.
Each subcontractor appoints an on-site safety representative who

attends Davis scheduled project safety meeting and is responsible
for implementation of rules listed below, as well as any other safety
rules determined necessary for the safe execution of the project as
decided by Davis.
Page 4 of 10
PROCEDURES
Rules:
• Hard hats are worn at all times. This includes welders when
using welding hoods, and all visitors.
• Sleeved shirts are worn at all times. (No tank tops.)
• Hard-toe, leather work boots, will be worn at all times.
• Safety glasses (with rigid side shields), designated ANSI

Z87.1, are worn at all times. This includes under welding
hoods and employees with prescription eye wear.
• Face shields must be worn in conjunction with safety glasses

when grinding, chipping, jack hammering, power sawing, or
conducting other tasks involving serious face/eye hazards.
• Gloves, appropriate for the hazard present, are worn when

hands are exposed to absorption of harmful substances,
cuts, abrasions, punctures, chemical burns, thermal burns
or harmful temperature extremes.
• All subcontractor employees comply with the Davis Fall-

Protection Policy. This policy simply states: “Anytime
employees are working from an unprotected elevation of six
(6) feet or more, fall protection must be used.” Working as
stated above means while traveling, stationary, or at any
time exposed to a fall from a surface not protected by
approved handrails, guardrails or some other approved fall-
arrest device.
• Good housekeeping is maintained on a continual basis.

Supplies, tools, materials, scrap material and construction
debris are stored, transported, signed, contained and
disposed of properly.
• Hearing protection is worn when employees are exposed to

noise levels requiring protection, as defined by OSHA safety
standards.
Page 5 of 10
PROCEDURES
• Illegal drugs, alcohol, firearms, fireworks or other dangerous

substance are not allowed on the project and may result in
permanent dismissal.
7.3 Drug and Alcohol Compliance

Drug or alcohol usage or impairment on the worksite is not
tolerated. Such impairment may risk injury or death to the
impaired worker and/or co-workers. For the safety and protection
of all jobsite workers, subcontractors must agree to mandate its
employees to subject themselves to reasonable suspicion drug
and/or alcohol testing when:
a. Any subcontractor manager or superintendent has a

reasonable suspicion of drug or alcohol usage or
impairment.
b. Davis superintendent or designee has a reasonable suspicion

that any subcontractor employee may be in violation of the
zero-tolerance drug and alcohol policy or appears impaired
and such impairment could adversely affect job safety
and/or performance.
Davis Drug and Alcohol Policy is posted at the jobsite and on the
“Subcontractor” page of Davis website, www.davisconstructors.com
this page is password protected. The password is: subp@ge.
7.4 Equipment
All equipment brought onto the project will, at a minimum, comply
with Davis, state, and federal OSHA regulations. All equipment
inspections shall be properly documented and maintained on site.
All equipment on the project is used in accordance with both

federal and state safety requirements and the manufacturer’s
instructions and guidelines. Equipment shall not be altered in any
way for a use for which it’s not intended.
An inspection program and schedule are implemented for all

equipment used on site, as required by applicable safety
regulations. Documentation of these inspections are maintained
by the subcontractor and provided to Davis upon request.
Page 6 of 10
PROCEDURES
A scaffold tagging program is enforced on all projects. All

subcontractor scaffolds are required to have a scaffold tag attached
indicating subcontractor’s:
• name,
• date,
• status of scaffold safety requirements and
• any additional items that may be needed before using the
scaffold.
Subcontractors use either Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters

(GFCI’s) or an assured equipment grounding inspection program to
protect employees using electrical tools and equipment.
7.5 Certification and Permits
Certain operations may require a Client/Owner permit. The

subcontractor representative inquires with Davis site management
to determine if any of the subcontractor’s activities require a
Client/Owner permit. Such activities may include, but are not
limited to:
• Hot Work
• Confined Space
• Excavations
Various state and local authorities require permits for specific

activities such as excavations, heavy lifts, lead abatement,
scaffolding, etc.
7.6 Hazard Communication Program

All subcontractor companies are required to have a written Hazard
Communication Program meeting federal, state, and OSHA
requirements and comply with the program. A copy of the program
is forwarded to the Davis site management and a copy is required
to be in the possession of the subcontractor on the site. The
employer must complete documentation of employee Hazard
Communications Training prior to the commencement of work.
Any potentially hazardous material or chemical brought onto the

project must have a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS). Copies of
the MSDS’s shall be forwarded to the Project Safety Manager before
the product is brought on to the project.
Page 7 of 10
PROCEDURES
Small quantities of hazardous liquids, such as gasoline, diesel

fuels and any solvents, brought onto the project are stored in a
properly labeled safety container with a flame arrestor and self-
closing lid. All hazardous materials and chemicals brought onto
the project are in the proper containers with no visible signs of
leaks. Contact site management prior to bringing large quantities
of hazardous materials or liquid on site.
All containers brought onto the project must be

labeled as to their contents.
Site management is notified before any chemical/material creating

noxious or toxic fumes is used.
7.7 Respiratory Protection

All subcontractors, whose employees may be expected to wear a
respirator, send a copy of their written Respiratory Protection
Program to Davis site management. The program must comply
with current Davis, state, and federal requirements. A Respiratory
Protection Program must address the following:
• Proper respirator selection,

• Proper respirator training and the required fit-test
procedures,
• Proper respirator cleaning, sanitizing, inspection and main-
tenance,
• Respirator users medical clearance.
7.8 Safety Surveys

Site management and the Project Safety Manager conduct periodic
safety surveys of projects. Any safety discrepancy observed is
reported to the appropriate subcontractor’s site safety
representative for immediate resolution.
Davis safety surveys do not relieve subcontractors of their

responsibility to self-inspect their work and equipment. All
subcontractors—at all times—conduct their work in a safe manner.
7.9 Safety Adherence

Davis understands the discipline of subcontractor personnel is the
responsibility of subcontractor management. When observed,
Page 8 of 10
PROCEDURES
however, Davis documents violations of safety policies and forward

said documentation to the subcontractor’s representative. After
verbal and written notices are documented and if the
subcontractor repeatedly fails to comply, the employee may be
removed from the worksite (as outlined by the procedures below).
7.9.1 Consequences for Policy Violations

The consequences discussed below apply to all
employees/subcontractors found in violation of this policy.
Any foreman, supervisor, or official of management after
becoming aware of any such failure ensures the following
action is taken:
Stage One
A formal verbal warning may be given to the employee by
his/her immediate supervisor, along with a warning that this
is the first stage in the disciplinary procedure and any
repetition within one month will lead to the second stage in
the procedure.
Stage Two
If the offense(s) addressed in Stage 1 is repeated and/or
continued or a more serious offense is committed, the
employee may be given a formal written warning setting out
the details of the offense(s) and stating that if the offense(s)
is (are) repeated within one month, the third stage in this
procedure is invoked. In addition to the written warning, the
employee is suspended without pay, for a period of one day.
Upon his/her return to work the employee must undergo
additional formal training in the area of the offense(s) before
being permitted to work in order to prevent injury to the
employee or co-workers.
Stage Three
If an offense identified in Stage 2 is repeated within three
months, the employee may be terminated. An employee so
terminated is ineligible for rehire for 24 months.
Note: Depending on circumstances, Davis reserves the right

to bypass, duplicate, or alter any stage of the recommended
disciplinary procedures described above.
Page 9 of 10
PROCEDURES
7.10 Imminent Danger

Upon discovery of any situation which may (in the opinion of the
site management or safety representative) lead to a serious injury,
illness, or death site management or safety immediately suspends
the related work. Work may resume only after the safety
concern(s) is corrected to the satisfaction of Davis.
Examples of “imminent danger” situations may include, but are

not limited to, the following:
• Falls from elevations exceeding Davis, federal, or state safety

standards.
• Excavation not properly sloped or shored.
• Possible electrocution hazards to the general public.
• Operations of vehicles, machinery, or heavy equipment in an
unsafe manner.
Other than immediate suspension of work the procedure for

correction of imminent danger situations follows the procedure set
forth in section 7.9.
Page 10 of 10
TAB 6 – EMERGENCY ACTION, EVACUATION
AND FIRE PREVENTION
Emergency Action, Evacuation, and Fire Prevention
1.0 Purpose
The purpose of this Emergency Action Plan (EAP) is to ensure employee
safety from fire and other emergencies. This written document is
prepared to demonstrate compliance with 29 CFR 1910.38. It provides a
written document detailing the actions and procedures to be followed in
case of an emergency.
At the time of an emergency, employees should know what type of

evacuation is necessary and their responsibilities in carrying out the
plan. In some cases the emergency is grave requiring total and
immediate evacuation of all employees in necessary. In other
emergencies a partial evacuation of non-essential employees with a
delayed evacuation of others may be necessary. In some cases, only
employees in the immediate area of a fire may be expected to evacuate or
move to a safe area such as when a local application of a fire suppression
system discharge sounds the employee alarm. Employees must ensure
they know what’s expected of them in all such emergency possibilities
which were planned in order to provide assurance of their safety from fire
or other emergencies. This plan contains the information required for
employee knowledge.
2.0 Types of Emergency Evacuations

At this location the following types of potential emergencies exist:
1. Evacuation of seriously injured personnel.
2. Fire or explosion.
3. Earthquake
4. Building collapse.
5. Encountering combustible or toxic gases.
6. Other emergencies.
3.0 Employee Training

All employees are trained in safe evacuation procedures and refresher
training is conducted whenever the employee’s responsibilities or
designated actions under the plan change and whenever the plan itself is
Page 1 of 12
AND FIRE PREVENTION
changed. In addition, the employer must review with each employee

(upon initial assignment) the parts of the plan the employee must know
to protect the employee in the event of an emergency. Every individual is
responsible for immediately correcting and/or reporting any hazard or
unusual condition that might lead to the development of a fire or
emergency situation. All individuals are responsible for knowing:
1. In an emergency call 911.
2. Location of emergency phones and fire alarm
3. Location of emergency equipment.
4. Location of safe-briefing area for evacuation.
The training may include the use of floor plans and workplace maps
which clearly show the emergency escape routes included in the
Emergency Action Plan.
4.0 Floor Plans and Maps

Floor plans and workplace maps were developed for this location to show
the emergency escape routes. Color coding aids employees to determine
their escape route assignments. These floor plans and maps are
available and posted at all times in the key areas of the jobsite to provide
guidance in an emergency. A copy of the floor plans and map are located
in Appendix 1. Note: Floor plans and maps may not be available at the
beginning of this project.
5.0 Response to Accidents Involving Injuries

5.1 Use of the acronym: SAVE.
The following steps should be followed to respond to injuries
resulting from accidents:
Situation: Quickly assess the situation to determine if any
hazards exist, the extent of the injury, and to decide the best
mode of response.
Activate:
1. If the injured person has serious injuries or is not respond-
ing, immediately call or direct a person to call 911. The
caller needs to stay on the line and give responder pertinent
Page 2 of 12
AND FIRE PREVENTION
information e.g. location and street address, nature of injury,

conditions, number of persons involved. Jobsite
identification hardhat stickers with job address and phone
numbers are given to all new employees.
2. Notify site superintendent/management to start emergency
action plan. Radio call is: code RED.
Site management:
• Management sends personnel to direct emergency respond-
ers to the accident scene: one person at the street and one
at building entrance.
• Moves excess equipment out of the way.
• Secures the scene for an accident.
Verify:
1. Verify the extent of injury.
2. Stabilize and prevent movement (if necessary).
3. Render first aid using proper PPE e.g. protective gloves, CPR,
mouth shield.
4. Treat for shock (keep injured worker warm).
5. Stay with the injured worker until emergency services arrive.
6. Assist emergency personnel upon arrival.
Evaluate:
Investigate the accident. (See Accident Reporting in site safety
manual.)
Note: Davis Safety Policy requires a post-accident/incident
investigation be performed for all injuries beyond first aid.
Drug testing is required when the injury:
1. Involved circumstances leading to a reasonable suspicion of
the employee’s drug use.
2. Results in or causes the release of hazardous waste or
materials, or
3. Involves an on-the-job injury or potentially serious accident,
injury, or incident in which safety precautions were violated,
equipment or property was damaged, or unusually careless
acts were performed. Such testing is required of any
employee directly involved in such an incident and whose
action or inaction may have been a causative factor.
Page 3 of 12
AND FIRE PREVENTION
Supervisors must consult with corporate safety/risk

management for guidance on drug screening.
6.0 Emergency Escape Procedures and Assignments

The following are the evacuation procedures for a fire, earthquake,
building collapse, and/or any other emergency:
1. Stay calm! Your example can influence others and thereby aid the
emergency response.
2. Employees proceed to the nearest available and safe exit and leave
the building as quickly as possible in the event of a fire or other
emergency requiring evacuation to achieve safety.
3. As a matter of general practice, corridors (if applicable) are the

primary means for evacuation from a building.
4. Personnel operating moving machinery e.g. trucks, forklifts, etc.

are to depress the closest emergency stop button (if applicable) or
park the vehicle to the side immediately.
5. Personnel are to gather at a “refuge zone.” The refuge zones pro-

vide sufficient space to accommodate the employees. During
evacuation procedures employees move away from the exit
discharge doors of the building and avoid congregating close to the
building(s) and/or main entrance area where they may hamper
emergency operations.
6. The safe-briefing areas are equipped with first-aid equipment to

treat any injured employees.
7. No one is allowed onto the jobsite during this time without consent
from Davis supervisory personnel.
8. Once assembled no one is permitted to leave the safe-briefing site

without consent from Davis supervisory personnel.
9. After the determination is made that re-entry is safe by the fire

department or the evacuation coordinator employees may re-
enter the building or jobsite.
Page 4 of 12
AND FIRE PREVENTION
The refuge/safety zones are as follows:

Contractor Laydown Yard or the Contractor Office Trailer Complex
7.0 Critical Site Procedures

Only in the event of an incipient fire will employees address the fire and
care for critical site operations. If the fire exceeds the incipient fire stage,
the employee is to evacuate the area immediately.
The procedures to be taken to care for essential jobsite operations until a

total evacuation becomes absolutely necessary include:
• Monitoring the jobsite power and water supplies, and,
• Vehicle/utility operations which must be shut down in stages or

steps to ensure the safe shut down procedures are completed
including the following:
Indicate procedures which must be shut down in stages/steps

e.g. pick-up or delivery in process, filling of containers, etc:
1. Equipment operations
2. Material movement
3. Subcontractor utility
4. Fueling
8.0 Evacuation Procedures

The superintendent in conjunction with the Project Safety Manager
anticipates the effect of a major emergency or disaster for each specific
jobsite and plans a course of action minimizing personal injury and
property damage in the event of fire, industrial hazard, or natural
disaster. If evacuation of the jobsite and/or building(s) is required, the
following procedures are followed ensuring safe evacuation of all
employees, contractors, and/or visitors.
1. The evacuation coordinator (default to superintendent, Project

Safety Manager or foreman) verifies an emergency situation truly
exists. If so, UAF fire department or emergency service is notified.
Page 5 of 12
AND FIRE PREVENTION
2. The evacuation coordinator utilizes the alarm system or a means of

communication e.g. bull horn, public-address system, radio, etc. to
effectively communicate that evacuation of the building and/or
jobsite is required.
3. The evacuation coordinator verifies the visitor/subcontractor log is

removed from the building/jobsite.
4. The evacuation coordinator conducts a head count to verify all

employees, subcontractors, and/or visitors are safely evacuated.
5. The evacuation coordinator communicates to the fire department

either that all personnel are safely evacuated or who remains
unaccounted for.
6. No one may return to the building or jobsite until the evacuation

coordinator or fire department authorizes such action.
9.0 Rescue and Medical Duty Assignments

If rescue is required, the local fire department responding to the
emergency is responsible for performing any rescue.
Designated personnel (trained in first aid and cardiopulmonary

resuscitation, CPR) provide medical assistance within their capabilities.
Trained personnel are:
List trained employee’s names here:
________________________ ________________________
________________________ ________________________
Professional emergency services responding to an emergency assist with

and direct all rescue and medical duty assignment upon their arrival.
Page 6 of 12
AND FIRE PREVENTION
10.0 Fire and Emergency Reporting Procedures

In the event of a fire and/or any other type of emergency follow these
reporting procedures:
1. When a fire is detected (seen, heard, smelled, etc.) alert everyone in

the near vicinity and radio or otherwise inform the fore-
man/supervisor (if applicable).
List locations of alarm stations (if applicable):
Air Horns will be located on each fire extinguisher stand. Five (5)
consecutive blasts for any emergency.
_____________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________
____________________________________________________
2. Jobsite personnel (supervisor/foreman, evacuation coordinator,

employee if needed) are to verify the alarm is indicating an
emergency. If so, they contact the local fire department to
summon assistance.
3. The local fire department performs all emergency rescue and fire
fighting duties. The evacuation coordinator meets with the fire
department to notify them of any missing persons.
4. Employees are not to return to the jobsite or buildings until

authorized by the evacuation coordinator or fire department.
11.0 Earthquake Procedures

If an earthquake warning is issued by local news services(s), the
evacuation coordinator notifies all employees. If an employee notices
earthquake indicators (shaking ground, swaying or falling objects) that
employee evacuates to a pre-disclosed earthquake safety/shelter area.
The area(s) designated to provide shelter/protection during an
earthquake are:
Page 7 of 12
AND FIRE PREVENTION
List area(s) designated as earthquake shelter for personnel:
TBD_____________________________________________
________________________________________________
________________________________________________
12.0 Evacuation Coordinator

Selected personnel are trained as evacuation coordinators conducting
head counts of employees once evacuation is complete. At least one
trained evacuation coordinator for every twenty employees on the jobsite
is available to provide adequate guidance and instruction at the time of
an evacuation. The employees selected are trained in the complete
jobsite layout and various alternative escape routes from the jobsite.
All evacuation coordinators are made aware of:

o Any physically handicapped employees requiring additional
assistance and of hazardous areas to be avoided during
emergencies.
o Any visitors/subcontractors or personnel not permanently
assigned to work at this jobsite.
Before leaving the jobsite evacuation coordinators ensure all personnel

are evacuated from the jobsite and verify that all rooms and other
enclosed spaces in the building are empty.
Evacuation coordinator(s) for this jobsite are:
Job Title Area Work Shift

Superintendent
TBD 7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m.
Russ Kramer
Project Safety Manager
TBD 7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m.
Carl Francis
13.0 Fire Prevention Plan

The Fire Prevention Plan was established to control and reduce the
possibility of a fire and to specify the type of equipment required to be
available in case of a fire.
Page 8 of 12
AND FIRE PREVENTION
13.1 List of Workplace Fire Hazards and Procedures
The fire hazards in this location are:
Hazard Type Location Procedures

Keep covered and keep
smoking area and hot
Storage area running equipment at
Lumber stock piles
distance.
All flammable paint
containers and aerosol
cans are to be stored in
Paint, aerosol cans Flammable storage cabinet
“flammable storage.”
Keep amount of paper on
hand to a minimum.
Office paper Ensure all trash
Offices
Office supplies containers are empties
every day.
Follow all OSHA
Fuel:
regulations (keep stored
Gasoline
Fuel storage area upright, away from other
Diesel
fuel, in cool area, etc.)
Keep separated and away
Flammable material/ Specially designated storage from sources of heat.
chemicals area. Otherwise follow above
instructions.
Keep closed when possi-
ble. Keep things up
Tools and other elec- above floor so no water
Tool storage.
trical equipment gets on them. Also, keep
smoking area safely
away.
13.2 Housekeeping Procedures

Accumulations of combustible waste materials must be controlled
to ensure a fast-developing fire, a rapid spread of toxic vapors or
gases, or an explosion does not occur.
Large accumulations of combustible waste materials can cause a

large fire or generate dense smoke.
Good housekeeping in the workplace ensures hazardous

accumulation of oil soaked rags and/or large accumulations of
Page 9 of 12
AND FIRE PREVENTION
wastepaper, corrugated boxes, etc. do not pose a significant fire

hazard.
13.3 Equipment Maintenance (if applicable)

Certain equipment is installed in a workplace to control heat
sources or to detect combustible fuel leaks e.g. a temperature-
limit switch, storage tank high level alarms, etc. If these devices
are not properly maintained or if they become inoperative, a
definite fire hazard exists. Employees and supervisors are aware of
the specific type of hazard-control devices utilized in the workplace
and they ensure (through periodic inspection and/or testing) such
devices are operable. The manufacturer’s instructions are followed
ensuring proper operation and maintenance procedures are
followed.
13.4 Ignition Sources and Fire Protection

The ignition sources at this location and their control procedures
at this location are:
Ignition Source Control Procedure

Periodic inspection of equipment. Dry,
1. Electrical
clean storage.
2. Flame Heaters Safely distanced from everything around.
3. Welding Observation and wetting of things around.
4. Cigarette butts Smoke only in designated areas.
Keep distance from other objects and
5. Hot-running equipment
observation.
Also, smoking is only allowed in designated smoking areas of this

location. The designated smoking area(s) for this location are:
Designated Smoking Area:

Area(s) assigned by site superintendent.
13.5 Fire Protection Equipment

The fire protection equipment utilized at this location includes
various sizes of multipurpose dry chemical (aka, ABC) portable fire
extinguishers to protect from the various types of fire hazards.
Employees are trained on site with the location and usage of
portable fire extinguishers.
Page 10 of 12
AND FIRE PREVENTION
Page 11 of 12
AND FIRE PREVENTION
Appendix 1
Floor plans and maps here.
Page 12 of 12
TAB #7 – ACCIDENT PREVENTION
AND REPORTING PROCEDURES
Accident Prevention and Reporting Procedures
1.0 Introduction
Accidents are unplanned events sometimes resulting in injury or
damage to property. Good companies learn from accidents especially
those that don’t result in injury. This Accident and Loss Prevention
Program is Davis Constructors & Engineers, Inc. (Davis) approach to
reducing or eliminating accidents at the home office and jobsites.
This plan can be used alone or in conjunction with other safety plans
and programs.
2.0 Responsibility
Management at all levels and the Safety Department are responsible
for implementation of this Program. Each Safety Manager in
conjunction with the Superintendent is responsible for carrying out
these provisions. Employees are responsible for understanding the
safety aspects and hazard controls and using these controls properly
throughout their workplace. This Site-Specific Safety Plan and/or
activity hazard analysis is used to evaluate the hazards and identify
suitable controls.
3.0 Communication
Project management and the Safety Department communicates with
workers continually on health and safety matters including providing
the incentive and mechanism for employees to report jobsite hazards,
near misses, and accidents without fear of reprisal. The field crew is
totally involved in all aspects of Davis Safety Programs, primarily
through open communications. Anyone in our organization can call
the corporate safety office (907-562-2336) for advice on a safety issue
anytime, although supervisors should be aware of all communica-
tions.
4.0 Compliance
Davis makes available to all employees this Site-Specific Safety Plan
and communicates requirements of each employee. Failure to comply
Page 1 of 9
includes disciplinary action that may include the termination of

employment.
5.0 Accident Investigation

Accident investigation and reporting is a systematic search and review
for factual information on the cause, extent, and nature of an
accident. The purpose of this investigation is to learn what caused an
accident and how Davis can prevent similar accidents in the future
throughout the company. This should be done for all near misses,
property damage, and injuries.
Management and employees at all levels, plus the Safety Department

are responsible for implementation of accident investigation and
reporting as well as implementing follow-up recommendations.
5.1 Davis Safety Department Responsibilities

• Report injuries or illness to appropriate agencies, as
required by law.
• Review all accident reports or forms, including near
misses, accidents, and losses.
• Develop and coordinate report forms to ensure their
current and applicable.
• Train supervisors in accident and loss responsibilities,
report investigation, and recordkeeping.
• Conduct follow-up investigations when required.
• Review accident investigation policy and adjust as
necessary.
• Ensure follow-up recommendations are implemented.
5.2 Superintendent and Project Safety Manager Responsibilities

• Conduct accident investigations using appropriate forms
and procedures (see forms in appendices at the end of
this section). Report all:
o Recordable occupational injuries
o Near misses
o Occupational illness or disease
Page 2 of 9
o Occupational deaths
o Occupational accidents involving any of the above
• Train and encourage employees to report all work-related

near misses, accidents, illnesses and injuries as they
occur.
• Identify and take required corrective measures to prevent
similar accidents.
• Report all serious accident and deaths immediately (or
within reason) to Davis Safety Coordinator.
5.3 Employee Responsibilities

• Report immediately all occupational injuries, accident,
illnesses and near misses.
• Communicate all factors surrounding an incident.
• When requested participate fully in an accident or injury
investigation.
6.0 Accident Reporting Procedure

6.1 General Reporting
Standard OSHA Form 300 reporting classifications used are:
Death, days away from work, restricted work or transfer to
another job, medical treatment beyond first aid, loss of
consciousness, or a significant injury or illness diagnosed by a
physician or other licensed health care professional, the
reporting requirements are as follows:
Death:
You must record an injury or illness resulting in death by
entering a check mark on the OSHA 300 Log in the space for
cases resulting in death. You must also report any work-related
fatality to OSHA within eight (8) hours, as required by Part
1904.39.
Page 3 of 9
Days away from work:

When an injury or illness involves one or more days away from
work, record the injury or illness on the OSHA 300 Log with a
check mark in the space for cases involving days away and an
entry of the number of calendar days away from work in the
number of days column. If the employee is out for an extended
period of time, enter an estimate of the days the employee will
be away and update the day count when the actual number of
days is known.
Restricted work or transfer to another job:

When an injury or illness involves restricted work or job
transfer but, does not involve death or days away from work,
record the injury or illness on the OSHA 300 Log by placing a
check mark in the space for job transfer or restriction and an
entry of the number of restricted or transferred days in the
restricted workdays column.
Medical treatment beyond first aid:

If a work-related injury or illness results in medical treatment
beyond first aid, record it on the OSHA 300 Log. If the injury or
illness did not involve death, one or more days away from work,
one or more days of restricted work, or one or more days of job
transfer, enter a check mark in the box for cases where the
employee received medical treatment but remained at work and
was not transferred or restricted.
Injuries requiring treatment beyond the care available on site

requires evacuation to a facility capable of a higher level of care.
Emergency first-aid supplies are required at each work site.

Minimum supplies required for worksites where a medical
facility isn’t readily available include the following:
• bandages
• antiseptic
• pain reliever
Page 4 of 9
6.2 Employee Reporting

All work-related accidents, injuries, and illnesses must be
reported by employees as soon as they occur. In addition to
verbal notification, employees complete a report of damage or
an injury report form.
6.3 Supervisors/Project Managers Reporting

Supervisor reports all accidents to the Project Safety Manager
immediately. The Project Safety Manager determines if the
incident is work related and whether it’s recordable or lost-time.
Enter each recordable injury or illness on the OSHA 300 Log
and 301 Incident Report within seven (7) calendar days of
receiving information of a recordable injury or illness has
occurred, or an Alaska Worker’s Compensation Form, if
applicable. OSHA Log of Occupational Injury, Form 300 is
maintained at the Davis project office and copies forwarded to
the HR/Safety Administrator on a continuous basis from
January to January of each year. For the month of February of
the following year, the completed OSHA log is posted in a
conspicuous location at the work place.
6.3.1 Recordable Injuries

An injury or illness must be considered to meet the
general recording criteria, and therefore be recordable, if
it results in any of the following:
• death
• days away from work
• restricted work or transfer to another job
• medical treatment beyond first aid
• loss of consciousness
Consider a case to meet the general recording criteria if it

involves a significant injury or illness diagnosed by a
physician or other licensed health care professional, even
if it doesn’t result in death, days away from work,
restricted work or job transfer, medical treatment beyond
first aid, or loss of consciousness.
Page 5 of 9
6.3.2 First-aid Criteria

For the purposes of part 1904, “first aid” means the
following:
• Using a non-prescription medication at non-
prescription strength (for medications available in
both prescription and non-prescription; a
recommendation by a physician of other licensed
health care professional to use a non-prescription
medication at prescription strength is considered
medical treatment for recordkeeping purposes).
• Administering tetanus immunizations (other

immunizations, such as Hepatitis B vaccine or
rabies vaccine, are considered medical treatment).
• Cleaning, flushing or soaking wounds on the

surface of the skin.
• Using wound coverings such as bandages, Band-

Aids™, gauze pads, etc.; or using butterfly
bandages or Steri-Strips™ (other wound closing
devices such as sutures, staples, etc. are
considered medical treatment).
• Using any non-rigid means of support, such as

elastic bandages, wraps, non-rigid back belts, etc.
(devices with rigid stays or other systems designed
to immobilize parts of the body are considered
medical treatment for recordkeeping purposes).
• Using temporary immobilization devices while

transporting an accident victim (e.g., splints, slings,
neck collars, back boards, etc.).
• Drilling of a fingernail or toenail to relieve pressure,

or draining fluid from a blister.
• Using eye patches.
Page 6 of 9
• Removing foreign bodies from the eye using only

irrigation or a cotton swab.
• Removing splinters or foreign material from areas

other than the eye by irrigation, tweezers, cotton
swabs or other simple means.
• Using finger guards.
• Using massages (physical therapy or chiropractic

treatment are considered medical treatment for
recordkeeping purposes); or
• Drinking fluids for relief of heat stress.
This is a complete list of all treatments considered

first aid for Part 1904 purposes.
6.4 Occupational Illness and Disease

Occupational illnesses for an employee is any abnormal
condition or disorder, other than one resulting from an
occupational injury caused by exposure to environmental
factors associated with employment. Occupational illnesses
include acute and chronic illnesses or diseases that may be
caused by inhalation, absorption, ingestion, or direct contact
with hazardous materials.
7.0 Reporting Losses and Accidents

All accidents, damage or near misses (no matter how trivial) are
reported immediately to supervisors. Supervisor’s follow-up on each
incident and report results to the Project Safety Manager and Davis
management within 24 hrs of occurrence. Reportable incidents or
lost-time accidents are recorded immediately on OSHA Form 300 and
any required State Department of Labor forms. OSHA Form 300A is
displayed at each main office from February 1 to April 30 of each year.
7.1 Procedure for Injuries

If an employee is injured and/or complains of illness or pain
caused by work, follow these steps:
Page 7 of 9
• Encourage the employee to go to a licensed health-care

provider for treatment. A Doctor Visit Packet must go
with employee to medical center. Stress to the employee
that documents in the packet must be filled out before
returning to work. Doctor Visit Packet and all related
documents for injuries are found in the Accident Folder in
jobsite office.
• Complete:
 DOL – Report of Occupational Injury or
Illness to Employer form
 Authorization for Release of Information
 Accident Investigation form
Forward to office ASAP.
• Call Kirk or Jacque at 562-2336. Back up: Anne and

Sheila. While on phone ask about drug/alcohol testing.
7.2 Procedure for Serious Accidents

If it’s a serious accident, follow these steps:
• Call 911.
• Secure accident scene and don’t let anyone leave. Get
witness names, company name, address, and phone
number.
• Don’t talk to the media. Refer media to Josh.
• Notify family members of the location and condition of the
injured employee(s)
• Call Josh at 529-8031
• Call Kirk at 952-3816
8.0 Accident and Loss Forms (See TAB 22 - FORMS)
Post-Accident Procedures: When an employee is injured follow

these steps:
Page 8 of 9
Hazard Alert/Near Miss Report: All Davis employees on a job

site are familiar with this form. This is intended to inform all
employees, supervisors and safety personnel of near misses.
Our intent is to learn from near misses and prevent accidents.
Damage to Property form: Needs to be completed by both

supervisor and employee involved in an incident where damage
to Davis property is done, whether it’s work related or not.
Report of Occupational Injury or Illness: The injured

employee completes top portion of the form. Send form to
Jennifer at the corporate office within 24 hours. (This is the
blue form found in the jobsite accident folder.)
Davis Accident Investigation Form: This form is used to

track the progress of previously reported injuries. Did they
become lost time, etc?
Page 9 of 9
TAB 7 – ACCIDENT PREVENTION
Accident Investigation Form
Date:
Project Name/Location:
Name of Injured Employee:
Superintendent:
Project Manager/Owner Signature:
Superintendent/Foremen Signature:
Employee Signature:
1. Background Information:
a. Where and when the accident occurred:
b. Who and what were involved:
c. Witnesses:
2. Account of the Accident (what happened?):

a. Sequence of Events:
Page 1 of 3
b. Extent of damage:
c. Personal or property:
3. Subsequent Remedial Measures:

a. Causes (may include unsafe acts, conditions, management
policies, personal, or environmental factors:
b. Remedial Recommendations (how do we prevent this from

occurring in the future?):
c. Will there be additional training or discipline for the involved

employee(s)?:
Attach additional notes and photos of scene and conditions

(do not attach any photos that contain people).
Page 2 of 3
Page 3 of 3
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 7– ACCIDENT PREVENTION
Hazard Alert/Near Miss Report
Employees may use this form to report a workplace hazard or provide safety
suggestions.
Hazards posing an immediate danger to life or health should be reported immediately

to your Supervisor.
Date: _____________________ Time: _____________________________________
Location of Hazard/Incident (building, room, area, and other description):

_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________
Description of Hazard/Incident (including whether it is Chemical, Biological, or

Physical): ______________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________
Your Recommendation for Correction: ___________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Has this Hazard/Incident been reported to a Supervisor? Yes  No 
Optional:
Date:_____________
Employee Name:________________________________________
Remarks: ___________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Page 1 of 1
TAB 7– ACCIDENT PREVENTION
Incident/Property Damage Report Form
Reported By _________________________________ Dept. ____________________
Date _______________________
Date of Incident ______________ Time of Incident __________ a.m. _________p.m.
Location of Incident_____________________________________________________
Was Police Dept. Notified? Yes  No  Fire Dept? Yes  No 
Incident Report
Please provide a brief description of the type of damage:
Injury to Person ________________________________________________________________
Damage to Property______________________________________________________________
Other (describe) _________________________________________________________________
Name of Party ________________________________ Phone____________________________
Address (include complete address, with street address, city, state and zip)
_________________________________________________________________________________
Driver's License No. ______________________ Vehicle License No. ___________________
Briefly Describe What Happened:

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Did party indicate intent to file a claim against agency? Yes  No 

Witnesses:
Name ______________________________ Address ____________________________________
Phone _____________________________
Name ______________________________ Address ___________________________________
Phone _________________________
Page 1 of 1
RECORDKEEPING DECISION TREE
NO
Did the employee experience an injury or illness?
YES
• Is the injury or illness work-related? (1904.5)

• Was the employee in the work environment?
NO (Presumed to be work-related.)
• Was the employee in travel status, or working
from home? (Needs to be engaged in work
activities “in the interest of the employer.”)
YES YES
Is the injury or illness a “Significant Is the injury or illness a

Aggravation” of a (non work-related) new case? (1904.6)
NO Pre-existing Condition? (The pre-
existing injury or illness would likely NO
not have met the general recording
criteria but for the occupational event Update the previously
or exposure.) 1904.5(b)(4) YES recorded injury or
illness entry if
necessary.
YES
Does the injury or illness meet the  Medical treatment does not include
general recording criteria or the the following (1904.7(b)(5)(i)
application to specific cases? A. Observation or counseling
General Recording Criteria B. Diagnostic procedures
(1904.7): C. First aid (all inclusive)
• Death (1904.5(b)(5)(ii):
• Non-prescription medication at
• Days away from work
non-prescription strength
• Restricted work or job transfer
• Tetanus immunization
• Medical treatment beyond • Cleaning, flushing or soaking
NO first aid wounds on skin surface
• Loss of consciousness • Wound coverings such as
bandages, gauze pads, butterfly,
• Significant injury or illness:
steri-strip
– Cancer
• Hot or cold therapy
– Chronic irreversible disease • Non-rigid support
– Fractured or cracked bone • Temporary immobilization
– Punctured eardrum devices for transport to medical
Specific circumstances criteria: facility
• Needle sticks and sharps injuries • Drilling of fingernail or toenail
(1904.8) • Eye patches
• Medical removal (1904.9) • Removing foreign bodies from
eye by simple means
• Hearing loss (1904.10)
• Removing splinters or foreign
• Tuberculosis (1904.11)
material from other than the eye
by simple means
YES • Finger guards
DO NOT RECORD
• Massages
THE INJURY RECORD THE
• Drinking Fluids for heat stress
OR ILLNESS INJURY OR ILLNESS
TAB 8 – HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAM
Hazard Communication Program
1.0 Introduction
The Davis Constructors & Engineers, Inc. (Davis) Hazard Communication
Program is designed to transmit information regarding the hazards of
chemical and physical agents present in the workplace to those employees
who may be affected.
This Hazard Communication Program was established in accordance with

the Occupational Safety and Health Standards for General Industry (29
CRF 1910.1200 Hazard Communication) as regulated by the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). In addition, this program was
established in accordance with Title 8 of the Alaska Administrative Code
(AAC) Chapter 61 Section 1110 (Additional Hazard Communication
Standards) as regulated by the Alaska Department Labor and Workforce
Development, Occupational Safety and Health Division.
2.0 Procedures
Employee exposures to hazardous chemicals and/or physical agents can
lead to serious and permanent injuries and illnesses. Certain operations
conducted by Davis require employees to handle hazardous chemicals
and/or expose employees to physical agents.
This Hazard Communication Program provides guidelines and procedures

for safe handling of hazardous chemicals and/or exposure to physical
agents under normal use conditions as well as during foreseeable
emergencies. It also includes areas of responsibility for Davis management,
supervisors, and other employees.
This Hazard Communication Program affects all Davis employees exposed

to hazardous chemicals and/or physical agents. Each Davis workplace
institutes and maintains a Hazard Communication Program.
Page 1 of 49
3.0 Definitions
Term Definition
Any element, chemical compound, or mixture of elements
Chemical
and/or compounds.
A liquid having a flash point at or above 100 degrees
Combustible Liquid
Fahrenheit (°F) but below 200°F.
A gas or mixture of gases in a container having an absolute
pressure exceeding 40 pounds per square inch (psi) at
70°F; or
Compressed Gas a gas or mixture of gases in a container having an absolute
pressure exceeding 104 psi at 130°F regardless of the
pressure at 70°F; or
a liquid having a vapor pressure exceeding 40 psi at 100°F.
Any bag, barrel, bottle, can, cylinder, drum, reaction
Container vessel, storage tank, or the like containing a hazardous
chemical.
A chemical that when subjected to sudden shock, pressure,
Explosive or high temperature causes a sudden, almost
instantaneous release of pressure, gas, and heat.
An aerosol that yields a flame projection exceeding 18
inches at full valve opening or a flashback (a flame
Flammable Aerosol
extending back to the valve) at any degree of valve
opening.
A gas that at ambient temperature and pressure forms a
flammable mixture with air at a concentration of 13% by
volume or less; or,
Flammable Gas
a gas at ambient temperature and pressure forms a range
of flammable mixtures with air wider than 12% by volume
regardless of the lower limit.
Flammable Liquid A liquid having a flashpoint below 100°F.
A solid, other than a blasting agent or explosive, that is
liable to cause fire through friction, absorption of
moisture, spontaneous chemical change, or retained heat
Flammable Solid
from manufacturing or processing, or which can be ignited
readily. And, when ignited burns so vigorously and
persistently it creates a serious hazard.
The minimum temperature at which liquid gives off a
Flashpoint
vapor in sufficient concentration to ignite.
Hazardous Chemical Any chemical that is a physical hazard or a health hazard.
Any words, pictures, symbols, or combination thereof
appearing on a label or other appropriate form of warning
Hazard Warning conveying the specific physical and health hazard(s),
including target organ effects, of the chemical(s) in the
container(s).
Page 2 of 49
A chemical with statistically significant evidence based on

at least one study conducted in accordance with
established scientific principles that acute or chronic
health effects may occur in exposed employees. This term
Health Hazard includes chemicals which are carcinogens, toxic or highly
toxic agents, reproductive toxins, irritants, corrosives,
sensitizers, hepatotoxins, nephrotoxins, neurotoxins,
agents that act upon the hematopoietic, and agents which
damage the lungs, skin, eyes, or mucous membranes.
Any written, printed, or graphic material displayed on or
Label affixed to containers of hazardous chemicals.
Written or printed material concerning a hazardous
Safety Data Sheet chemical prepared in accordance with OSHA Hazard
(SDS) Communication Standard requirements.
A chemical other than a blasting agent or explosive that
initiates or promotes combustion in other materials
Oxidizer thereby causing fire either of itself or through the release
to oxygen of other gases.
Means heat stress, cold stress, hand-arm (segmental)
vibration, ionizing, radiation, lasers, noise, radio frequency
and microwave radiation, or ultraviolet radiation which
exceeds the threshold established in the 1995-1996
Physical Agent edition of Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances
and Physical Agents and Biological Exposure indices in the
Work Environment published by the American Conference
of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH).
Written or printed material concerning a physical agent
Physical Agent Data prepared in accordance with the Alaska Department of
Sheets (PADS) Labor and Workforce Development Occupational Safety
and Health Division requirements.
A chemical with scientifically valid evidence that it’s a
combustible liquid, compressed gas, explosive, flammable,
Physical Hazard and organic peroxide, an oxidizer, pyrophoric, unstable
(reactive), or water-reactive.
A chemical that will ignite spontaneously in air at
Pyrophoric temperatures of 130°F or below.
A chemical in its pure state or as produced or transported,
will vigorously polymerize, decompose, condense, or will
Unstable (Reactive) become self-reactive under conditions of shocks, pressure,
or temperature.
A chemical that reacts with water to release a gas that is
Water-Reactive either flammable or presents a health hazard.
Page 3 of 49
A room or defined space in a workplace where hazardous

Work Area chemicals are produced or used, and where employees are
present.
An establishment, jobsite, or project, at one geographical
Workplace location containing one or more work areas.
4.0 Hazard Determination

Davis relies on information provided by chemical manufacturers and
chemical importers for the purpose of hazard determination under this
Hazard Communication Program. The information provided by chemical
manufacturers and chemical importers is in the form of a safety data sheet
(SDS).
4.1 Hazardous Chemical and Physical Agent Inventory List

Davis completes a hazardous chemical and physical agent inventory
for each workplace. This inventory list is updated, if a new
hazardous chemical or physical agent is introduced to a workplace.
In addition, Davis performs (at a minimum) an annual inventory of
hazardous chemicals and physical agents ensuring the inventory list
is current and complete.
4.2 Safety Data Sheets

Davis obtains an SDS for each hazardous chemical present in a
workplace. SDS is maintained at a central location at each
workplace easily identified and readily accessible to all employees
during their work shift. Davis requests SDS be supplied with
shipments of hazardous chemicals to each workplace. Updated SDS
(when made available by the chemical manufacturer or chemical
importer) are incorporated into this Hazard Communication Program.
Davis evaluates each SDS received for completeness. At a minimum,

SDS must include the following information:
• Product identification and manufacturer information.
• Hazard(s) identification.
• Composition/information on ingredients.
Page 4 of 49
• First-aid measures.
• Fire fighting measures.
• Accidental release measures.
• Handling and storage
• Exposure controls / personal protection
• Physical and chemical properties
• Stability and reactivity
• Toxicological information.
• Ecological information
• Disposal considerations
• Transportation information
• Regulatory information
• Other information
4.3 Physical Agent Data Sheets

Davis obtains physical agent data sheets (PADS) for each physical
agent present in a worksite. PADS are maintained at a central
location at each workplace easily identified and readily accessible to
all employees during their work shift. PADS are obtained from the
Alaska Department of Labor and Workforce Development, Occupa-
tional Safety and Health Division at the following address:
Alaska Department of Labor

Labor Standards and Safety
3301 Eagle Street
Anchorage, Alaska 99510-7022
Page 5 of 49
Phone: 907-269-4955, ANC.

907-451-2888, FBKS.
Internet Web Site:

http://www.labor.state.ak.us/lss/oshhome.htm
5.0 Container Labeling Procedures

Davis personnel ensure each container of an incoming shipment of
hazardous chemicals is properly labeled with the following minimum
information:
• Product Identifier.
• Supplier Identification.
• Precautionary Statements. (PPE, Fire, Storage, Exposure)
• Hazard Pictograms and Signal Words.
• Hazard Statement.
• Supplemental Information.
Labels supplied by the manufacturer are not defaced or removed from the
containers. Labels are in English and prominently displayed on the
containers.
If a Davis employee transfers a hazardous chemical from the manufacturer

or importer, the employee ensures the secondary container is immediately
labeled with the following minimum information:
• Product Identifier
• Supplier Identification
• Precautionary Statements
Page 6 of 49
• Hazard Pictograms / Signal Words
• Hazard Statement
• Supplemental Information
Secondary container labels can include a photocopy of the original

container label or any combination of words, pictures, or symbols that
convey at least general information regarding the hazards of the material.
SDS can be used to provide specific information to the employee when
secondary container labels provide general information regarding material
hazards. Employees are trained in the specific labeling procedures for
secondary containers used at each Davis worksites.
6.0 Performing Non-Routine Tasks

Davis informs affected employees of the hazards associated with the
performance of non-routine tasks. Prior to initiating a non-routine task
Davis management specifies the appropriate engineering controls,
administrative controls, PPE, and the safe work practices required to
complete a non-routine task. This information is reviewed with employees
prior to performing the non-routine task.
7.0 Training Program

Davis requires all employees affected by this Hazard Communication
Program attend a training program. Employee training is conducted at the
time of initial assignment to a work area where hazardous chemicals
and/or physical agents are present. Additional training is provided
whenever a new hazardous chemical and/or physical agent is introduced to
the work area for which an employee was not trained. Davis management
and supervisors may require an employee repeat the training if that
employee exhibits a lack of understanding regarding this Hazard
Communication Program.
The contents of the training program will (at a minimum) include the
following:
• The requirements of the OSHA Hazard Communication
Standard.
Page 7 of 49
• Additional hazard communication requirements of the Alaska

Department of Labor and Workforce Development.
• Any operations in work area where hazardous chemicals

and/or physical agents are present.
• The location and availability of this Hazard Communication

Program including the hazardous chemical and physical agent
inventory list, SDS, and PADS.
• Methods and observations that may be used to detect the

presence or release of a hazardous chemical in the work area.
• The physical and chemical health hazards of chemicals and/or

physical agents in the work area.
• The measures employees can take to protect themselves from

the physical and chemical health hazards and/or physical
agents (e.g., appropriate work practices, emergency
procedures, and PPE).
• The details of this Hazard Communication Program including

an explanation of the labeling system, SDS, and PADS, and
how employees can obtain and use the appropriate hazard
information.
When training about hazards associated with hazardous chemicals the

information may be presented to cover categories of hazards such as
flammable liquids, carcinogens, or compressed gases. However, chemical-
specific information of each hazardous chemical must always be available
through labels and MSDS.
8.0 Subcontractor Requirements

Davis coordinates the implementation of this Hazard Communication
Program in each workplace where subcontractors may be exposed to
hazardous chemicals and/or physical agents. Davis provides a copy of this
Hazard Communication Program and applicable SDS and PADS to the
subcontractors. In addition, subcontractors are responsible for providing
Page 8 of 49
Davis with copies of SDS and PADS for hazardous chemicals or physical
agents they intend introducing at a Davis worksite. Affected Davis and
subcontractor employees are trained on the hazardous chemicals or
physical agents for the new hazards they may be exposed to.
9.0 Posting Requirements

Davis ensures current state and federal labor law documents are posted at
each workplace. This poster is designed to meet the requirements of
Alaska Statute (AS) 18.60-065. An equivalent poster may be displayed, if it
meets the requirements of AS 19.60-065 through 18.60-068.
In addition, Davis posts SDS, PADS or equivalent information for each

hazardous chemical and physical agent to which an employee may be
exposed. Instead of posting each SDS or PADS, Davis may instead opt to
post the hazardous chemical and physical agent inventory list at each
workplace with an identification of a location where employees may access
SDS and PADS at any time during the work shift.
Page 9 of 49
Potential Hazardous Material Categories:
Acids Aerosol Varnishes

Adhesive Battery Fluids Solders
Catalysts Caustics Cleaning Agents
Coatings Degreasing Agents Detergents
Dusts Etching Agents Fiberglass
Flammable Xylene Fuels
Gasoline Glues Greases
Oils Inks Kerosene
Janitorial Supplies Lacquers Shellacs
Paints Plastics Resins
Thinners Sealers Solvents
Wood Preservatives Water Treatments
PHYSICAL AGENT DATA SHEET

Page 10 of 49
NOISE
Description:
Sound is created when a vibrating source (like a bell, motor or a stereo

speaker) sends sound waves through the air to your ear. Every sound has two
aspects: its pitch (frequency) and its loudness (intensity). On a stereo,
frequency is determined by the bass/treble control. Intensity is determined by
the volume control. Noise (unwanted sound) is usually made up of many
frequencies. The disturbing and harmful effects of noise depend both on the
loudness and the frequency of the tones making up the noise.
Loudness is measured in units called decibels (dB). A conversational voice is

about 65 dB. A shout is 90 dB or greater. Frequency is measured in units
called Hertz (Hz). The frequency of a locomotive horn is about 250 Hz. The
frequency of a table saw is about 4,000 Hz.
Health Effects:
Excessive noise can destroy the ability to hear, and may also put stress on
other parts of the body, including the heart.
For most effects of noise, there is no cure, so prevention of excessive noise

exposure is the only way to avoid health damage.
Hearing:
The damage done by noise depends on how loud it is and on the length of
exposure. The frequency or pitch can also have some effect, since high-pitched
sounds are more damaging than low-pitched sounds.
Noise may tire out the inner ear, causing temporary hearing loss. After a
period of time away from the noise hearing may be restored. Some workers
who suffer temporary hearing loss may find that by the time their hearing
returns to normal, it is time for another work shift, so, in that sense, the
problem is “permanent”.
With continual noise exposure, the ear will lose its ability to recover from
temporary hearing loss, and the damage will become permanent. Permanent
hearing loss results from destruction of cells in the inner ear – cells which can
never be replaced or repaired. Such damage can be caused by long-term
Page 11 of 49
exposure to loud noise or, in some cases, by brief exposures to very loud
noises.
Normally, the workplace noise first affects the ability to hear high frequency
(high-pitched) sounds. This means that even though a person can still hear
some noise, speech or other sounds may be unclear or distorted.
Workers suffering from noise-reduction hearing loss may also experience

continual ringing in their ears, called “tinnitus”. At this time, there is no cure
for tinnitus, although some doctors are experimenting with treatment.
Other effects:
Although research on the effects of noise is not complete, it appears that noise
can cause quickened pulse rate, increased blood pressure and narrowing of the
blood vessels. Over a long period of time, these may place added burden on the
heart.
Noise may also put stress on other parts of the body by causing the abnormal
secretion of hormones and tensing of muscles. Workers exposed to noise
sometimes complain of nervousness, sleeplessness and fatigue. Excessive
noise exposure also can reduce job performance and may cause high rates of
absenteeism.
Permissible Exposure Limit:
The Action Level for noise is an average noise level of 85 dB for an eight hour
day. When employees are exposed to noise levels which exceed that Action
Level, a Hearing Conservation Program must be established.
The Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) is an average noise level of 90 dB for an

eight-hour day. When employees are exposed to noise levels which exceed the
Permissible Exposure Limit, the employer must install or use engineering or
administrative controls to lower the noise levels. While these controls are being
designed or installed employees must wear hearing protection. If the controls
still do not reduce noise exposures to below 90 dB, hearing protection must
continue to be worn.
Protective Measures:
Suitable hearing protectors (ear plugs of muffs) must be made available at no

cost to employees who are exposed to an average of 85 dB or greater for an
Page 12 of 49
eight hour day. Employees are required to wear hearing protectors when noise
levels exceed an average of 90 dB for an eight hour day. Employees must be
given the opportunity to select from three different types of appropriate hearing
protectors.
Hearing test (audiometric exams) must be given to employees who are exposed
to an average of 85 dB or greater for an eight hour day. Hearing tests will show
whether employees are experiencing any hearing losses. Hearing test are also
useful in showing how well the ear plugs and earmuffs are working. Hearing
test must be given annually.
Employees should also receive training in the effects of noise and hearing, an
explanation of the hearing tests, and instruction on the proper fitting and care
of ear plugs or muffs.
Noise away from work can also cause hearing loss. Hearing protectors should
be worn when operating noisy equipment or tools such as chain saws, brush
cutters, power lawn mowers or when using firearms.
REFER TO ALASKA ADMINISTRATIVE CODE, OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND

ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL 04.0104 FOR SPECIFIC REGULATIONS ON
NOISE EXPOSURE AND HEARING CONSERVATION PROGRAMS.
HEAT STRESS
Description
Page 13 of 49
Heat stress is caused by working in hot environments like laundries, bakeries

or around boilers or incinerators. Four environmental factors affect the
amount of heat stress felt by employees in hot work areas: temperature,
humidity, radiant heat (such as from the sun or a furnace) and air velocity.
How well or how poorly an individual reacts to heat stress is dependent on
personal characteristics such as age, weight, fitness, medical condition and
acclimatization.
The body has several methods of maintaining the proper internal body
temperature. When internal body temperature increases the circulatory
system reacts by increasing the amount of blood flow to the skin so the extra
heat can be given off.
Sweating is another means the body uses to maintain stable internal

temperatures. When sweat evaporates, cooling results. However, sweating is
effective only if the humidity level is long enough to permit evaporation and if
the fluids and salts lost are replaced.
Health Effects - Heat Disorders:
Heat stroke, the most serious health problem for workers in hot environments
is caused by the failure of the body’s internal mechanism to regulate its core
temperature. Sweating stops and the body can no longer rid itself of excess
heat. Signs include (1) mental confusion, delirium, loss of consciousness,
convulsions or coma; (2) a body temperature of 106 degrees Fahrenheit or
higher; and (3) hot dry skin which may be red mottled or bluish. Victims of
heat stroke will die unless treated promptly. While medical help should be
called, the victim must be removed immediately to a cool area and his or her
clothing soaked with cool water. He or she should be fanned vigorously to
increase cooling. Prompt first aid can prevent permanent injury to the brain
and other vital organs.
Heat exhaustion develops as a result of loss of fluid through sweating when a

worker has failed to drink enough fluids or take in enough salt or both. The
worker with heat exhaustion still sweats, but experiences extreme weakness or
fatigue, giddiness, nausea or headache. The skin is clammy and moist, the
complexion pale or flushed, the body temperature normal or slightly higher.
Treatment is usually simple: the victim should rest in a cool place and drink
salted liquids. Salt tablets are not recommended. Severe cases involving
victims who vomit or lose consciousness may require longer treatment under
medical supervision.
Page 14 of 49
Heat cramps, painful spasms of the bone muscles are caused when workers
drink large quantities of water but fail to replace their bodies’ salt loss. Tired
muscles, those used for performing the work, are usually the ones most
susceptible to cramps. Cramps ma occur during or after working hours and
may be relieved by taking salted liquids by mouth or saline solutions
intravenously for quicker relief if medically determined to be required.
Fainting may be a problem for the worker un-acclimatized to a hot environment

who simply stands still in the heat. Victims usually recover quickly after a
brief period of lying down. Moving around, rather than standing still, will
usually reduce the possibility of fainting.
Heat rash, also known as prickly heat, may occur in hot and humid
environments where sweat is not easily remove from the surface of the skin by
evaporation. When extensive or complicated by infection, heat rash can be so
uncomfortable that it inhibits sleep and impairs a worker’s performance or
even results in temporary total disability. It can be prevented by showering,
resting in a cool place and allowing the skin to dry.
Medical Conditions Aggravated by Exposure to Heat:
Persons with heart or circulatory diseases or those who are on “low salt” diets
should consult with their physicians prior to working in hot environments.
Preventing Heat Disorders:
One of the best ways to reduce heat stress on workers is to minimize heat in
the workplace. However, there are some work environments where heat
production is difficult to control, such as when furnaces or sources of steam or
water are present in the work area or when the workplace itself is outdoors and
exposed to varying warm weather conditions.
Acclimatization:
Humans are, to a large extent, capable of adjusting to the heat. This

adjustment to heat, under normal circumstance, usually takes about five (5) to
seven (7) days, during which time the body will undergo a series of changes
that will make continued exposure to heat more endurable.
On the first day of work in a hot environment, the body temperature, pulse
rate, and general discomfort will be higher. With each succeeding daily
exposure, all of these responses will gradually decrease, while the sweat rate
Page 15 of 49
will increase. When the body becomes acclimated to the heat, the worker will
find it possible to perform work with less strain and distress.
Gradual exposure to heat gives the body time to become accustomed to higher
environmental temperatures. Heat disorders in general are more likely to occur
among workers who have not been given time to adjust to working in the heat
or among workers who have been away from hot environments and who have
gotten accustomed to lower temperatures. Hot weather conditions of the
summer are likely to affect the worker who is not acclimatized to heat.
Likewise, workers who return to work after a leisurely vacation or extended
illness may be affected by the heat in the work environment. Whenever such
circumstances occur, the worker should be gradually re-acclimated to the hot
environment.
Lessening Stressful Conditions:
Many industries have attempted to reduce the hazards of heat stress by

introducing engineering controls, training workers in the recognition and
prevention of heat stress, and implementing work-rest cycles. Heat stress
depends, in part, on the amount of heat the workers body produces while a job
is being performed. The amount of head produced during hard, steady work is
much higher than that produced during intermittent or light work. Therefore,
one way of reducing the potential for heat stress is to make the job easier or
lessen its duration by providing adequate rest time. Mechanization of work
procedures can often make it possible to isolate workers from the heat source
(perhaps in an air-conditioned booth) and increase overall productivity by
decreasing the time needed for rest. Another approach to reducing the level of
heat stress is the use of engineering controls which include ventilation and
heat shielding.
Number and Duration of Exposures:
Rather than be exposed to heat for extended periods of time during the course
of a job, workers should, whenever possible, be permitted to distribute the
workload evenly over the day and incorporate work-rest cycles. Work-rest
cycles give the body an opportunity to get rid of excess heat, slow down the
productions of internal body heat, and provide greater blood flow to the skin.
Workers employed outdoors are especially subject to weather changes. A hot

spell or a rise in humidity can create overly stressful conditions. The following
practices can help to reduce heat stress.
Page 16 of 49
• Postponement of nonessential tasks,

• Permit only those workers acclimatized to heat to perform more strenuous
tasks, or
• Provide additional workers to perform the task keeping in mind that all
workers should have the physical capacity to perform the task and that
they should be accustomed to the heat.
Thermal Conditions in the Workplace:
A variety of engineering controls can be introduced to minimize exposure to

heat. For instance, improving the insulation on a furnace wall of the area
around it. In a laundry room, exhaust hoods installed over those sources
releasing moisture will lower the humidity in the work area. In general, the
simplest and least expensive methods of reducing heat and humidity can be
accomplished by:
• Opening windows in hot work areas,

• Using fans, or
• Using methods of creating airflow such as exhaust ventilation or air
blowers.
HEAT STRESS:
Providing cool rest areas in hot work environments considerably reduces the
stress of working in those environments. There is no conclusive information
available on the ideal temperature for a rest area. However, a rest area with a
temperature near 76 degrees Fahrenheit appears to be adequate and may even
feel chilly to a hot, sweating worker until acclimated to the cooler environment.
The rest area should be as close to the workplace as possible. Individual work
periods should not be lengthened on favor of prolonged rest periods. Shorter
but frequent work-rest cycles are the greatest benefit to the worker.
Drinking Water:
In the course of a day’s work in the heat, a worker may produce as much as 2
to 3 gallons of sweat. Because so many heat disorders involve excessive
dehydration of the body, it is essential that water intake during the workday be
about equal to the amount of sweat produced. Most workers exposed to hot
conditions drink less fluid than needed because of an insufficient thirst drive.
A worker, therefore, should not depend on thirst to signal when and how much
Page 17 of 49
to drink. Instead, the worker should drink 5 to 7 ounces of fluids every 15 to

20 minutes to replenish the necessary fluids in the body.
There is no optimum temperature of drinking water, but most people tend not
to drink warm or very cold fluids as readily as they will cool ones. Whatever
the temperatures of the water, it must be palatable and readily available to the
worker. Individual drinking cups should be provided – never use a common
drinking cup.
Heat acclimatized workers lost much less salt in their sweat than do workers
who are not adjusted to the heat. The average American diet contains
sufficient salt for acclimatized workers even when sweat production is high. If,
for some reason, salt replacement is required, the best way to compensate for
the loss is to add a little extra salt to the food. Salt tablets should not be used.
CAUTION: Persons with heart problems or those on a “Low Sodium” diet
who work in hot environments should consult a physician about what to
do under these conditions.
Clothing inhibits the transfer of heat between the body and the surrounding
environment. Therefore, in hot jobs where the air temperature is lower than
skin temperature, wearing clothing reduces the body’s ability to lose heat into
the air.
When air temperature is higher than skin temperature, clothing helps to

prevent the transfer of heat from air to the body. The advantage of wearing
clothing, however, may be nullified if the clothes interfere with the evaporation
of sweat.
In dry climates adequate evaporation of sweat is seldom a problem. In a dry

work environment with very high air temperatures, the wearing of clothing
could be an advantage to the worker. The proper type of clothing consists of
specific insulated gloves, insulated suits, reflective clothing, or infrared
reflecting face shields. For extremely hot conditions, thermally-conditioned
clothing is available. One such garment carries a self-contained air conditioner
in a backpack, while another is connected to a compressed air source which
feeds cool air into the jacket or coveralls through a vortex tube.
Another type of garment is a plastic jacket which has pockets that can be filled
with dry ice or containers of ice.
Recommended Exposure Limits:

Page 18 of 49
These Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) refer to heat stress conditions under
which it is believed that nearly all workers may be repeatedly exposed without
adverse health effects. The TLVs shown in Table 1 are based on the
assumption that nearly all acclimatized, fully clothed workers with adequate
water and salt intake should be able to function effectively under the given
working conditions without exceeding a deep body temperature of 38 degrees
Celsius (100.4 degrees Fahrenheit).
Since measurement of deep body temperature is impractical for monitoring the

worker’s heat load, the measurement of environmental factors is required
which most nearly correlate with deep body and other physiological responses
to heat. At the present time Wet Bulb Globe Temperature Index (WBGT) is the
simplest and most suitable technique to measure the environmental factors.
WBGT values are calculated by the following equations:
1. Outdoors with solar load:

WBGT = 0.7 NWB + 0.2 GT. + 0.1 DB
2. Indoors or Outdoors with no solar load:

WBGT = 0.7 NWB + 0.3 GT
Where:
WBGT = Wet Bulb Globe Temperature Index
NWB = Natural Wet Bulb Temperature
DB = Dry Bulb Temperature
GT = Globe Temperature
The determination of WBGT requires the use of a black globe thermometer, a

natural (static) wet bulb thermometer and a dry bulb thermometer.
Higher heat exposures than shown in Table 1 are permissible if the workers
have been undergoing medical surveillance and it has been established that
they are more tolerant to work in heat than the average worker. Workers
should not be permitted to continue their work when their body temperature
exceeds 38.0 degrees Celsius (100.4 degrees Fahrenheit)
Table 1
Permissible Heat Exposure Threshold Limit Values
(values are given in degrees Centigrade WBGT (Fahrenheit))
Page 19 of 49
Work – Rest Work Load

Regimen
Light Moderate Heavy

Continuous Work 30.0 26.7 25.0
(86.0) (80.1) (77.0)
75% Work 30.6 28.0 25.9

25% Rest, each (87.1) (82.4) (78.6)
hour
50% Work 31.4 29.4 27.9

50% Rest, each (88.5) (85.0) (82.2)
hour
25% Work 32.2 31.1 30.0

75% Rest, each (90.0) (88.0) (86.0)
hour
COLD STRESS
Exposure to cold can cause the body’s internal temperature to drop to a

dangerously low level. This is called hypothermia. Exposure to temperatures
below freezing can cause frostbite of hands, feet, and face.
Hypothermia Can Kill:
Hypothermia occurs when a person’s body loses heat faster than it can be
produced. The body’s normal deep body temperature is 99.2 degrees
Fahrenheit. If your body temperature drops to 95 degrees Fahrenheit,
Page 20 of 49
uncontrollable shivering occurs. If cooling continues, these other symptoms

may occur:
• Vague, slow, slurred speech

• Forgetfulness, memory lapses
• Inability to use hands
• Frequent stumbling
• Drowsiness
• Exhaustion, collapse
• Death
Hypothermia impairs your judgment. You may not be able to make good
decisions about your situation. Preventing hypothermia is the best way to
avoid being a victim.
Preventing Hypothermia – Be Prepared:
Hypothermia can occur at temperatures above freezing. Cold, wet windy

conditions make prime hypothermia weather.
Stay Dry – Avoid Exposure:
Wet clothing draws heat very quickly away from the body. Whenever you may
be away from shelter, or your vehicle, carry warm, waterproof and windproof
clothing. Put this clothing on before you get wet. Wear inner clothing which
retains warmth even when it’s wet such as wool or polypropylene. Avoid cotton
clothing. Down clothing is good for cold, dry weather but it loses almost all
insulating value if it gets wet. Wear layers of clothing which may be removed
or put back on depending on the degree of physical activity. Being wet from
sweat is just as dangerous as being wet from rain or snow.
Terminate Exposure:
If you do not have adequate clothing to stay warm and dry, get out of the wind
and rain or snow. Return to shelter or make camp while you still have a
reserve of energy. Build a fire. Make your camp as secure and as comfortable
as possible.
Page 21 of 49
Treatment of Hypothermia:
Be able to recognize the symptoms of hypothermia in yourself and others. The

victims may deny he or she is in trouble. Even mild symptoms demand
attention.
1. Get the victim out of wet and windy weather.

2. Remove all wet clothing.
3. If the person is only mildly affected,
a. Give warm drinks
b. Put into dry clothing and a warm sleeping bag.
4. If more seriously affected (very clumsy, confused, unable to shiver)
a. Treat very gently.
b. Place the victim naked into a warm sleeping bag.
c. Place a rescuer, also naked, into the same sleeping bag. If you
have a double bag, place the victim between two rescuers. Warmth
from the skin to skin contact is the safest method of re-warming.
Any warm objects such as rocks, hot water bottles, or heat packs
should be wrapped in towels or clothing. Arrange for evacuation.
Do not give warm drinks until the victim has a clear level of
consciousness, the ability to swallow, and is already starting to
warm up.
Frostbite:
Frostbite is the freezing of some part of the body. Fingers, toes, and even whole
arms and legs can be lost as a result of frostbite. Such injuries have happened
in cities and villages as well as in more isolated areas of Alaska.
Protection from the Cold:
In extreme cold it is important to prevent heat loss form as many areas of the
body as possible. Exposed limbs and head are major areas of heat loss, but
keeping enough blood flowing to the hands and feet is the key to preventing
frostbite. The trunk and the head, then, should be warm enough so that the
brain is able to command the blood vessels in the hands and feet to open up.
Page 22 of 49
Traveling:
The traveler, even on a snowmobile, or in a heated automobile, should always

be prepared to walk in severe cold. This means carrying along proper clothing
and more extensive survival gear. If in an accident, mechanical breakdown, or
other interruption occurs during travel, the clothes you have must provide
enough warmth to sustain life. Hands and feet should be well protected at all
times to hinder the development of frostbite until help arrives.
Some Special Warnings:
Don’t touch cold metal with bare or wet hands. You will freeze to the metal
and tear away skin. If necessary, thaw gently with heat, warm water or urine.
Be careful when handling gasoline, kerosene or liquids other than water.

Contact at cold temperatures can cause immediate frostbite.
Remember that frostbite is more likely to occur when you are injured,
frightened or careless.
Other Factors Leading to Frostbite:
Tall or thin persons are more likely to get frostbite than those of stocky build.
People in poor physical condition are more susceptible than those in good
health.
Certain diseases slow down the blood flow in the hands and feet especially in
elderly people, and encourage frostbite.
Heavy smokers often have poor circulation in the vital organs and to the arms
and legs, and are also susceptible.
Children and elderly people, unable to produce large amounts of body heat for
long periods of time, may experience a lowering of deep body temperature and
ultimately, frostbite.
Alcohol causes the blood vessels to dilate (become larger). This lends a sense
of warmth but it also insures a faster loss of body heat. More important,
people act with poor judgment after drinking.
In short, poor circulation and poor production of body heat will lower
resistance to frostbite.
Page 23 of 49
How to Recognize Frostbite:
Pain in the hands and feet is felt only when temperature of the tissue is
changing very rapidly. There may be no pain with gradual frostbite.
Loss of the sensations of touch, pressure, and pain may occur without
awareness of any numbness or other sensation. Therefore, it is important to
test these sensations often and to wear clothing that is lose and does not
restrict the flow of the blood to the limbs.
Exposed parts of the body should be inspected routinely. This is done best by
a partner. Just before freezing, the skin, especially the face with its many
blood vessels, becomes bright red.
The skin also becomes less elastic. This is best noted in the finger pads, which
remain pitted when touched or squeezed. Any further cooling will surely result
in frostbite.
Serious freezing is most common in the feet because of less awareness of them,
poor circulation and sensation, and inadequate foot gear. Hands are next in
order of serious injury. Exposed head parts are less likely to become
frostbitten than feet because they are conditioned to exposure and have a
better blood supply.
Early Treatment of Frostbite – Proper Re-warming:
Next to the extent of freezing, inadequate or improper treatment of a frozen part

is the most common cause of serious loss of tissue.
1. In many cases re-warming cannot be done without the part again becoming
frozen. For example, removing clothing from other parts of the body to
warm a frozen part may only result in the loss of more body heat, greater
extent of injury, and the ultimate re-freezing of the afflicted part. Thawing
and re-freezing should always be avoided. It is best to continue, even if it
means walking on a frozen foot, until shelter is available and re-warming
can be done satisfactorily.
2. Limbs should be re-warmed in stirred water just above normal body

temperature (about 100 – 105 degrees Fahrenheit). Using a thermometer is
the only accurate way to measure this temperature. Never try to thaw in
cold water or snow. Since feeling is lost, fires, stoves, exhaust pipes, etc.,
should never be used. Serious damage to the tissue could result.
Page 24 of 49
3. If the major part of the limb is frozen when re-warming is started, deep body
temperature will fall as the cooled blood begins to flow through the body. To
prevent such cooling, warm liquids by mouth should be given. Even total
immersion of the body in a warm bath may be necessary.
4. Re-warming is an acutely painful experience and medication to alleviate

pain should be given if available. After thawing, a deep aching pain may
persist for several days, depending upon the severity of the injury.
5. The affected part should be moved gently and voluntarily during re-
warming.
6. A dull purple color indicates more serious injury and requires medical
attention. So does swelling or blisters. Other means for improving
circulation are available but must be administered by medical personnel.
Summary:
Most cases of frostbite occur as a result of lack of knowledge, careless

preparation, unavoidable accident, or the effects of alcohol on judgment.
Intelligent forethought can prevent injury.
If freezing does occur, proper re-warming in warm water will give maximum
benefit. The injured limb should be handled gently and a medical judgment
made of the extent of the injury and the need for further treatment.
Frostbite information compiled and distributed by the Providence Hospital

Thermal Unit.
Page 25 of 49
HAND-ARM VIBRATION
Description:
Hand-arm vibration is caused by the use of vibrating hand-held tools, such as

pneumatic jack hammers, drills, gas powered chain saws, and electrical tools
such as grinders. The nature of these tools involves vibration (a rapid back
and forth type motion) which is transmitted from the tool to the hands and
arms of the person holding that tool.
Health Hazards:
Vibration Syndrome and Vibration-Induced White Finger (VWF) are the major
health hazards related to the use of vibrating tools. Carpal Tunnel Syndrome
is another health problem that has been linked in one study to the use of
smaller hand-held vibrating tools.
Vibration Syndrome:
Vibration Syndrome is a group of symptoms related to the use of vibrating tools

and includes some or all of the following: muscle weakness, muscle fatigue,
pain in the arms and shoulders, and vibration-induced white finger. Many
researchers believe that other symptoms – headaches, irritability, depression,
forgetfulness, and sleeping problems – should also be included in descriptions
of Vibration Syndrome.
Vibration-Induced White Finger (VWF):
Vibration-induced White Finger (VWF) also knows as “Dead Finger” or “Dead

Hand” is the result of impaired circulation (poor blood supply) in the fingers,
caused by the prolonged use of vibrating tools. VWF may appear after only
several months on the job, or may not appear until twenty to forty years on the
job.
The harmful health effects of vibrating tools are related to the length of time
that a worker has been using vibrating tools and to the frequency ( how fast the
tool goes back and forth). The longer a person uses a vibrating tool, and the
faster the tool vibrates, the greater the risk of health effects. The length of the
initial symptom-free period of vibration exposure, (i.e. from first exposure to the
first appearance of a white finger) is known as latent interval. It is related to
Page 26 of 49
the intensity to the vibration. The shorter the latent period, the more severe
the resulting VWF if vibration exposure continues.
Temporary tingling or numbness during or soon after use of a vibrating hand

tool is NOT considered to be VWF, however, tingling and numbness in the
fingers lasting more than an hour after finishing work may indicate early stares
of VWF. Table 1 lists the stages that Vibration White Finger may progress
through if exposure continues.
TABLE 1
Stages of Vibration White Finger
(Taylor-Pemear System)
STAGE CONDITION OF FINGERS WORK & SOCIAL

INTERFERENCE
00 No tingling, numbness or blanching No complaints

or fingers
0T Intermittent tingling No interference with activities
0N Intermittent numbness No interference with activities
TN Intermittent tingling and numbness No interference with activities
1 Blanching of a fingertip with or No interference with activities

without tingling and/or numbness
2 Blanching of one or more fingers Possible interference with

beyond tips, usually during winter activities outside work, no
interference at work
3 Extensive blanching of fingers; Definite interference at work, at

frequent episodes in both summer home, and with social activities;
and winter restriction of hobbies
4 Extensive blanching of most fingers; Occupation usually changed

frequent episodes in both summer because of severity of signs
and winter symptoms
The technical name for VWF is Raynaud’s Syndrome of Occupational Origin.

Raynaud’s Syndrome may also occur in people who do not use hand-held
vibrating tools. Several different kinds of medical illnesses can cause
Page 27 of 49
Raynaud’s syndrome. Raynaud’s syndrome also appears in some people who

are otherwise entirely healthy.
It is important that people with Raynaud’s Syndrome avoid the extensive use of
vibrating tools because they can develop the most severe complications of VWF
very quickly.
Many of the symptoms of Vibration Syndrome will disappear shortly after a

worker stops using the types of tools which transmit vibration to the hands
and arms. Fatigue and muscular pain in the arms and shoulders will generally
disappear. In the early stages, if a worker stops using vibrating tools VWF will
not get any worse an may get slightly better.
Carpal Tunnel Syndrome:
Carpal Tunnel Syndrome (CTS) is a group of symptoms in the hand which arise
from pressure on one of the nerves which passes through the palm side of the
wrist. The early symptoms are similar to the early symptoms of white finger
and consist of tingling in the fingers. For the most part only the thumb, index
and middle fingers are affected in CTS. Later, symptoms can progress to
numbness. Pain in the wrist and fingers may also develop. CTS may occur in
people using small hand tools like pneumatic screwdrivers. CTS also occurs
among people having repetitive motion of the wrist or fingers, such as using a
cash register, or picking fish from a net; or with forceful motion of the wrist,
such as in using a wrench. Pinching or flexing with the wrist bent upwards,
downwards or sideways increases the occurrence of CTS.
The symptoms of CTS are frequently worse at night and a person may be
awakened from sleep by pain or the feeling of pins and needles in fingers, hand
or wrist.
Carpal Tunnel Syndrome may improve if diagnosed in the early stages and
exposure to the type of activity which caused it is stopped. In moderate cases
most of the symptoms of CTS can be relieved by a surgical operation which
relieves the pressure on the nerve which causes the CTS symptoms. If the
surgery is performed too late, only some of the symptoms may be relieved. In
very severe cases the symptoms are irreversible and may include weakness of
the hand due to loss of muscle function.
Page 28 of 49
Preventing Hand-Arm Vibration Diseases:

Job Modification to Reduce Vibration Exposure
Wherever possible, jobs should be redesigned to minimize the use of hand-held

vibrating tools. Where job redesign is not feasible, ways to reduce tool
vibration should be found. Where practical, substitute a manual tool for a
vibrating tool. Whenever possible, high vibration tools should be replaced by
improved, low vibration tools designed to absorb vibration before it reached the
handgrip.
Determine vibration exposure time and introduce work breaks to avoid

constant, continued vibration exposure. A worker who is using a vibrating tool
continuously should take a 10 minute break after each hour of using the tool.
Medical Evaluation:
Workers whose occupations place them at risk for developing VWF should have
a pre-employment physical and thereafter should be checked at least annually,
by doctors who know about the diagnosis and treatment of VWF. Diagnostic
tests which can be used include plethysmography, ateriography, skin
thermography, and sensory test, such as two point discrimination depth sense,
pinprick touch and temperature sensation. X-rays may also be useful.
Workers that have a past history of abnormalities in blood circulation and

especially workers who have Raynaud’s Syndrome should not be permitted to
use vibrating hand-held tools. Workers who have moderate to severe
symptoms of VWF should be reassigned to work which removes them from
further direct exposure to vibrating tools.
If workers develop symptoms of tingling or numbness, or if their fingers

occasionally become white or blue, or painful especially when cold, they should
be examined by a doctor who knows about the diagnosis and treatment of VWF
or CTS.
Work Practices:
Workers using vibrating hand-held tools should wear multiple layers of warm
gloves and should wear anti-vibration gloves whenever possible. Before
starting the job, warm the hands. This is especially important when it is cold.
Workers using vibration tools should not allow the hands to become chilled. If
the hands of a worker using vibrating tools become wet or chilled, he should
dry them and put on dry, warm gloves before resuming exposure to vibration.
Page 29 of 49
Workers exposed to cold should dress adequately to keep the whole body warm
because low body temperature can make a worker more susceptible to VWF.
A worker using a vibrating hand-held tool should let the tool do the work by
grasping it as lightly as possible, consistent with safe work practice. The
tighter the tool is held, the more vibration is transmitted to the finger and
hand. The tool should rest on a support or on the work piece as much as
possible. The tool should be operated only when necessary and at the
minimum speed (and impact force) to reduce vibration exposure.
Tools should be regularly maintained to keep vibration to a minimum. Keeping
chisels and chain saws sharp, for example, will reduce vibration. Using new
grinder wheels will also reduce vibration.
Education:
Employees who use or will be using vibrating hand-held tools should receive
training about the hazards of vibration and they should be taught how to
minimize the ill effects of vibration.
Smokers are much more susceptible to VWF than nonsmokers, and VWF in
smokers is usually more severe, therefore workers who use vibrating hand-held
tools should not smoke.
Page 30 of 49
RADIOFREQUENCY AND MICROWAVE RADIATION
Description:
Radiofrequency and microwave radiation are both forms of energy called

electromagnetic radiation. Sunshine contains three other forms of
electromagnetic radiation: ultra violet rays, infrared (heat) waves, and visible
light waves.
These forms of energy are transmitted by waves. The distance between wave
peaks is the “wavelength”. The number of wave peaks passing a given point in
one second is the “frequency”.
Radiofrequency or radio waves have a range of frequencies and wave lengths.

Very High Frequency (VHF) radio waves are used for TV and FM radio. Medium
Frequency (MF) radio waves are used for AM radio. Radiofrequency is used in
heat sealers and glue dryers.
Microwaves are actually just radio waves of higher frequencies. Microwaves are
used for radar and satellite communications, for telephone and TV
transmissions, for microwave ovens, and for diathermy in medical clinics.
Electromagnetic radiation can interact with objects (or people) in three different
ways. The energy waves can pass through an object without being changed,
like light through a window. It can be reflected, like light off a mirror, or it can
be absorbed and cause the object to heat up, like a sidewalk in the sun.
The health hazards of electromagnetic radiation are related only to the

absorption of energy. The effects of absorbed energy depend of many different
factors such as its wavelength and frequency, its intensity and duration.
Different materials also absorb energy differently.
Health Hazards:
When microwaves of radio waves are absorbed by body tissues, localized or

spot heating can occur. The increased temperature can damage tissues,
especially those with poor temperature control such as the lens of the eye.
Cataracts, clouding of the lens of the eye, may occur at the very high energy
levels encountered close to radiating radar antennas. Heat damage to tissues
is caused by high levels of exposure for short periods of time.
Page 31 of 49
The health effects of low levels of exposure to radio waves or microwaves for
long periods of time are much harder to find and to prove. Some scientific
studies show health effects from long-term, low-level exposure. Other studies
do not.
The following list includes health effects which some researchers suspect may
be related to excessive radiofrequency/microwave exposure:
• Psychological changes, e.g. insomnia, irritability, mood swings,

depression
• Headaches
• Nervous system abnormalities
• Hormonal changes
• Miscarriages and birth defects
• Male infertility
• Altered immunity
• Leukemia
Of course, many of these health effects are relatively common, and most people
having these problems have NOT had excessive exposure to
radiofrequency/microwave radiation.
Safety and Health Precautions
Employers who have people working around devices which produce

radiofrequency/microwave radiation need to be sure that those devices are
properly shielded to prevent leakage of radiation. Safety information regarding
proper use and shielding of those devices can usually be obtained from
owner/operators manuals, manufacturers, and the Alaska Department of
Labor Occupational Safety and Health Section.
Radiofrequency sealers and heaters have been among the major sources of
employee exposure to radiofrequency/microwave radiation. When these
machines are used, employees should use mechanical or electrical devices that
allow them to stay as far away from the source of radiation as possible.
Whenever, possible, these sealers should be turned off when not being used.
Maintenance and adjustment of this type of equipment should be performed
only by trained technicians and only when the machines are turned off.
Page 32 of 49
Warnings should be posted to keep everyone away from the source of radiation
except for those workers who are absolutely essential to performing the job.
People who are regularly exposed to significant levels of

radiofrequency/microwave radiation should have pre-employment and annual
physical exams. The doctors should pay careful attention to the eyes to look
for cataracts, to the nervous system for any abnormalities to the blood, to
detect any early evidence of leukemia, and to the reproductive system to detect
any abnormalities. Information concerning the frequency and intensity of the
radiation exposures and duration of exposures should be provided to the
physician.
In work areas where there is known or suspected to be significant amounts of

radiofrequency/microwave radiation present, specialists should measure the
amounts of radiation present. If excessive radiofrequency/microwave radiation
is detected, modifications in the workplace should be made to reduce radiation
exposure of workers. Afterwards, additional measurements should be made to
determine if the radiation exposure has been reduced.
Permissible Exposure Limits
The State of Alaska’s permissible exposure limit is specified in Article 1 of

Subchapter 4, Occupational Health and Environmental Control Code
[04.0106(a)], Alaska Occupational Safety and Health Standards. For normal
environmental conditions and for incident electromagnetic energy of
frequencies from 10 MHz to 100 GHz, the radiation protection guide is 10
mW/cm (milliwatts per square centimeter) as averaged over any possible six-
minute period.
Further information can be obtained from the Alaska Department of Labor,

Occupational Safety and Health Section.
Microwave Cooking Ovens
Microwave ovens used for heating food, when used in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions, do not expose personnel to microwave radiation.
Microwave ovens do not need to be included in an employer’s Hazard

Communication Program.
Page 33 of 49
ULTRAVIOLET RADIATION
Description
Ultraviolet (UV) is the name for a band of energy on the electromagnetic

spectrum that lies between visible light and x-rays. UV has some of the
properties of visible light and other properties of the x-rays. Like visible light,
some UV is actually visible but most is invisible like x-rays. UV, like light,
cannot penetrate very far into most solids. Some UV, like x-rays, can ionize
atoms or molecules which visible light cannot do.
Common sources of UV include the sun (especially when reflected by water,

snow or ice), sun tanning lamps, mercury discharge lamps, welding arcs,
plasma torches, and some lasers.
Health Hazards
The nature and seriousness of UV injuries depend of the length of exposure,

the intensity of the UV, the type or wavelength of UV, the sensitivity of the
individual, and the presence of certain chemicals (photosensitizers).
SKIN
UV from the sun causes sunburns and skin cancer. UV from other
sources can also cause skin burns varying in degree from mild reddening
of the skin (first degree burns) to more severe and painful blistering
(second degree burns). Long term skin exposure to UV can cause actinic
skin (a dry, brown, inelastic wrinkled skin) and skin cancer.
Some drugs, such as the antibiotic tetracycline, can cause skin burns
from UV to happen faster and to be more severe. Products containing
coal tar can also cause this reaction. These substances are called
photosensitizers.
UV exposure may trigger cold sores (Herpes Simplex) in some

individuals.
EYES
When UV is absorbed by the eyes and eyelids, it can cause

kertoconjunctivitis or “welders’ flash”. This is a painful condition that
Page 34 of 49
feels like grit in the eyes and may make the eyes water and very sensitive
to light. The condition usually occurs 6-12 hours after exposure and
may last 6-24 hours. The painful injury may make a person unwilling or
unable to open his/her eyes during this time period. However, most
discomfort is gone within 48 hours with no lasting injury. The maximum
sensitivity of the eye occurs at a UV wavelength of 270 nanometers.
Cataracts or clouding of the lens of the eye can occur during high
exposures to wavelengths in the range of 295-300 nanometers.
Skin Safety and Health Precautions
Skin burns from high, short-term exposure to UV and skin cancer from long-
term exposure can be prevented by covering exposed skin with clothing and
protective equipment such as gloves and face shields.* Barrier creams or
lotions with sun protection factors (SPF) of 15-18 will also help prevent skin
burns.
*Welders’ helmets should provide protection for the neck area as well as the
face and eyes.
EYES
Tinted goggles and/or face shields should be worn to prevent burns of
the cornea and eyelids. Selection of the appropriate degree of tint should
be based on the anticipated wavelength and intensity of the UV source.
(see Table 1)
Table 1
Shade No 3.0: is for glare of reflected sunlight from snow, water,

sand, etc.; stray light from cutting and welding, metal pouring
and work around furnaces and foundries; and soldering (for
goggles or spectacles with side shields worn under helmets in arc
welding operations, particularly gas-shielded are welding
operations.
Shade No. 4.0 & 5.0: are for light acetylene cutting and
welding; light electric spot welding.
Shade No. 6.0 & 7.0: are for gas cutting, medium gas welding,
and non-gas-shielded arc welding using current values up to
amperes.
Shade No. 8.0 & 9.0: are for heavy gas cutting and non-gas-
shielded arc welding and cutting using current values from 30 to
Page 35 of 49
75 amperes.
Shade No. 10.0 & 11.0: are for arc welding and cutting using
current values from 75 to 200 amperes.
Shade No. 12.0 & 13.0: are for arc welding and cutting using
current values from 200 to 400 amperes.
Shade No. 14.0: is for arc welding and cutting using current
values over 400 amperes (including carbon arc welding and
cutting), and for atomic hydrogen welding.
NOTE: Ordinary window glass, 1/8” in thickness, is sufficient

protection for the eyes and skin against the ultraviolet radiation
from ordinary sources such as sunlight. In cases of extremely
intense sources of ultraviolet and visible radiation, it is not
adequate.
In sunny conditions on water, snow and ice, extra precautions should be

taken to protect against reflected sunlight. Sunglasses with side shields
should be worn. When applying protective ointments or lotions, special
attention should be paid to the nose, lips, underside of the chin, and
tops of the ears.
In workplaces, operations such as welding which produce high levels of

UV should be performed behind enclosures or barriers to absorb the
radiation and shield nearby workers.
UV sources like mercury discharge lamps should be operated only with

all safety devices in place and in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
First Aid Procedures
SKIN BURNS: Immediate application of cold (cold water, ice, cold clean cloths)
to the affected area will reduce the severity and relieve the pain associated with
first and second degree burns. Do not apply any burn ointments, creams, or
butter to skin burns.
EYES: Place sterile dressings over the eyes of a person suffering from UV
burns of the eyes and seek medical attention.
Page 36 of 49
Page 37 of 49
IONIZING RADIATION
Description
Ionizing Radiation is the name given to a band of energy on the electromagnetic

spectrum. X-rays and radioactive substances are examples of ionizing
radiation.
In order to understand the difference between ionizing and non-ionizing

radiation it is necessary to review the structure of an atom.
All matter is made up of molecules which are chains of atoms hooked together
in various combinations of shapes. An atom is the smallest unit of an element
(like helium, oxygen or carbon) that still has all the properties of that element.
Atoms are so small they can not be seen with even the most powerful
microscope.
All atoms are made up of three major subatomic particles: protons, neutrons,
and electrons. Protons have a positive electric charge but neutrons have no
electric charge. Electrons circle the nucleus and have a negative charge. In
most atoms the negative charges of the electrons exactly balance the positive
charges of the protons in the nucleus. If an atom has too many or too few
electrons in orbit to balance the protons, the atom is called an ion.
The number of protons in the nucleus of an atom determines which element it

is. An atom of helium has two protons and two neutrons. An atom of carbon
has six protons and six neutrons. If the atom has too many or too few
neutrons for the number of protons, the atom is unstable and is called an
isotope. It will give off bursts of energy (radiation) in an attempt to become
stable.
These bursts of energy or disintegrations may be in the form of alpha particles

(two protons and two neutrons), beta particles (a negatively-charged electron),
or gamma rays (an energy wave). If these charged particles or waves interact
with another atom, they have enough energy to knock an electron out of its
orbit, creating an ion. That is why this type of radiation is called ionizing
radiation.
Page 36 of 49
Other forms of energy, like visible light, radio waves and infrared light do not
have enough power to knock electrons out of their orbits so they are called
non-ionizing radiation.
Amounts of ionizing radiation can be expressed in several different units. A
roentgen (R) is an amount of ionization among the atoms and molecules in a
cubic centimeter of air. Another unit is the RAD which applies to all ionizing
radiation. It is a measure of the amount of energy absorbed from radiation in a
specific volume of material.
A third unit which is more useful and used more commonly is the REM
(Roentgen Equivalent Man). Measuring radiation in REMs or millirems (one
thousandth of a REM) allows direct comparison of the biological effects of
different types of radiation. Alpha particles, beta particles and x-rays or
gamma radiation differ in their ability to cause damage in the tissues due to
their differences in ionizing and penetrating ability. Alpha particles are 20
times more damaging in tissue as the same amount of x-rays. Measuring
radiation in REMs takes this difference into account so that one REM of alpha
radiation or one REM of x-rays. A REM is a relatively large quantity of
radiation so most human exposures so most human exposures are measured
in millirems. An easy way to remember the difference between these units is
that a roentgen is a measure of how much you are exposed to, the RAD is how
much you absorb, and the REM is how much damage it does.
All people receive ionizing radiation from naturally occurring sources.

Depending on where you live, most people receive an exposure in the range of
100-200 millirems per year from cosmic radiation from outer space and from
naturally occurring isotopes (excluding radon) in the ground, air, food, and
water. Radon is estimated to add another 150-200 millirems per year to our
background.
Medical and dental uses of x-rays can also contribute to a person’s yearly
radiation exposure. A typical well conducted chest x-ray involves an exposure
of 10-30 milliroentgens.
With the use of radioactive isotopes in industry and the increasing use of x-ray
sources, ionizing radiation exposures may occur in a wide variety of
occupations. The following examples show the diversity of occupations
potentially exposed to ionizing radiation.
Aircraft Workers Military Personnel

Atomic Energy Plant Workers Nurses
Biologists Oil Well Loggers
Page 37 of 49
Cathode Ray Tube Workers Ore Assayers

Ceramic Workers Pathologists
Chemists Petroleum Refinery Workers
Density Testers Physicians
Dental Assistants Physicists
Dentists Pipeline Oil Flow Testers
Dermatologists Pipeline Weld Radiographers
Drug Makers Plasma Torch Operators
Drug Sterilizers Plastic Technicians
Electron Microscope Makers Prospectors
Electron Microscopists Radar Tube Makers
Electrostatic Eliminator Operators Radiologists
Embalmers Radium Laboratory Workers
Fire Alarm Makers Radium Refinery Workers
Food Preservers Research Workers
Food Sterilizers Television Tube Makers
Gas Mantle Makers Thickness Gauge Operators
High Voltage Television Repairmen Thorium-Aluminum Alloy Workers
High Voltage Vacuum Tube Makers Thorium-Magnesium Alloy
Workers
High Voltage Vacuum Tube Users Thorium Ore Producers
Industrial Fluoroscope Operators Tile Glaziers
Industrial Radiographers Uranium Dye Workers
Inspectors using, and workers in Uranium Mill Workers
proximity to , sealed gamma ray Uranium Miners Sources
sources (cesium-13, cobalt-60, Veterinarians
and iridium-192) X-ray Aides
Klystron Tube Operators X-ray Diffraction Apparatus
Operators
Liquid Level Gauge Operators X-ray Technicians
Luminous Dial Painters X-ray Tube Makers
Machinists, Fabricated Metal
Product
Health Effects
The health risks and effects of exposure to ionizing radiation are dependent on
the type of radiation (alpha, beta, gamma or x-ray), the energy, the dose rate,
the quantity, and the body part exposed.
Alpha particles, due to their relatively large size and mass, do not travel very
far in air (a few centimeters) and cannot pass through skin or even a sheet of
Page 38 of 49
paper. Alpha radiation is only hazardous if inhaled or ingested. Beta particles

are more penetrating than Alpha; a thin sheet of aluminum will stop beta
radiation, but beta radiation is not as damaging to the tissue.
X-rays (and gamma) are the most penetrating and least damaging to tissue.
Their penetrating capability makes them useful for medical diagnosis.
Some body parts are more sensitive to damage from ionizing radiation than
other body parts. The reproductive and blood forming organs and the eyes are
the most sensitive while the extremities such as arms, hands, and feet are less
sensitive.
The quantity of ionizing radiation to which a person is exposed is the greatest

factor in the risk and severity of a radiation related injury. Information on the
health effects of a single large dose of ionizing radiation is readily available
from studies of the casualties and survivors of the atomic explosions in
Hiroshima and Nagasaki, from studies of people exposed to radioactive fallout
from the early atom bomb testing and from accidents involving ionizing
radiation.
Table 1 briefly outlines the health effects of a single acute dose of whole body
radiation.
Page 39 of 49
Table 1
DOSE ACUTE EFFECTS
Less than 25 REMs No detectable effect
25 – 50 REMs Drop in white blood cell count;

No serious injury
50 – 100 REMs Possible injury and sickness;

No disability
100 – 200 REMs Acute radiation sickness;

Vomiting, diarrhea, weakness, shock
skin sores, hair loss;
Possible disability
200 – 400 REMs Acute radiation sickness;

Disability certain, possible death
without
treatment
400 – 500 REMs 50% death rate without treatment
> 600 REMs 100% death rate
Occupational exposure to ionizing radiation is usually limited to a small area of

the body such as the hands resulting in reddening of the skin or dermatitis.
Whole body radiation and acute radiation sickness occurs very rarely in
occupational settings.
The health effects of long term exposure to low levels of ionizing radiation are
less easily studied and documented. The concern about possible health effects,
cancer and genetic effects in particular, from low level radiation stems from the
known health effects of high doses of radiation and the assumption that the
degree of risk is directly related to the degree of exposure. It is assumed (not
proven) for safety sake, that any exposure to radiation above natural
background levels contributes to small increases in the risk of developing
cancer. Reducing exposure to the lowest level possible will, therefore, reduce
the risk to the lowest level possible.
Page 40 of 49
Emergency Procedures
The following emergency procedures were developed for medical facilities by

can be generally applied to any workplace where radioactive substances are
used.
A. SPILLS
Accidental spillage of radioactive material is rare, but cannot be prevented

absolutely, and may occur in any laboratory, in any hall or passageway
traversed by messengers transporting such material.
Except for a major accident to a shipping container or a serious spill in the

hot laboratory, the amount of radioactive material involved in a spill will
usually be small and the radiation from it will not constitute a serious
hazard. The real danger is the spread of the contamination on shoes or
other contaminated garments. The following is a general outline of the
procedure to be followed in the event of a spill.
1. Confine the spill immediately, by dropping paper towels or other

absorbent material onto it.
2. Put on waterproof gloves.
3. Check shoes for visible signs of contamination. If it appears possible
that they are contaminated, remove shoes when leaving the
contaminated region.
4. If fans, ventilators, or air conditioners are operating in the area, they
should be shut off. Preferably this should be done by someone not
involved in the spill and therefore not likely to spread contamination.
5. Mark off or isolate in some way the entire suspect area and police it to be
sure that no one walks through it.
6. CALL THE RADIATION PROTECTIONS SUPERVISOR. If the number is
not posted in a convenient place, and you do not know it, call the
telephone operator, report an emergency and ask the operator to find the
supervisor.
7. In general, inexperienced personnel should not attempt to clean up a
spill. It is better to wait a little while for the supervisor than to risk
spreading the contamination by erroneous procedures. If the spilled
Page 41 of 49
material is covered and bystanders are kept a few feet away, there is little
or not danger from the radiation.
8. If any of the spilled material has splashed onto a person or clothing,
immediate steps should be taken to remove it. Laboratory coats or outer
garments should be taken off and left in the contaminated area. Hands
or other skin areas should be washed thoroughly with soap. If it is
certain that shoes or feet are not contaminated, it is permissible to walk
to a washing facility, which subsequently, however, must be treated as a
contaminated area until cleared by the Radiation Protection Supervisor.
If there is doubt about contamination of the feet, a washbowl and soap
should be brought to the suspect area for cleaning them.
9. The Radiation Protection Supervisor should bring decontamination
materials and a survey meter, and the cleanup operation will proceed
under the supervision of the RSP.
10. If the RPS is not immediately available, or clean-up must proceed with
him or her, one person should do the work. This person should put on
waterproof gloves, shoe covers and a surgical face mask if it is available.
He will then take up the spilled material with absorbent paper, which
must be handled with forceps or tongs, and deposit it immediately in a
waterproof container. After as much as possible has been removed in
this way, the surface should be washed with damp, not wet, rags held in
forceps, always working toward the center of the contaminated area
rather than away from it.
11. A survey meter should have been obtained from the office of the
Radiation Protection Supervisor, and careful monitoring carried out
during this procedure, on area and personnel. The meter should
preferable be operated by someone who is not involved in the spill, so
that the instrument is not likely to be contaminated.
12. Reduction of counting rate to five times background, over an area of 1 or
2 square feet or to ten times background over a few square inches is
usually satisfactory, especially for short-lived nuclides. Eventually, the
Radiation Protection Supervisor should check the area and give it
clearance.
13. When the operation is finished, gloves and other protective garments
should be carefully checked for residual contamination. If any is found,
the garments should be left with the other contaminated material for
ultimate clearance or disposal by the RPS.
Page 42 of 49
B. LOSS OF A SEALED SOURCE
The following is a general outline of the procedure to be followed in the event

of loss of a sealed source:
1. Call the Radiation Protection Supervisor.

2. If all sources are supposed to have been removed from the patient, he or
she should be checked with a survey meter to make sure that none has
inadvertently been left behind.
3. Try to make sure that all bandages, linen, and bedding have been kept in
the patient’s room. If this is not the case, try to stop them on the way to
the laundry or the incinerator.
4. Check all this material, a little at a time. Then check the room, to be
sure the source is not on the floor or furniture.
5. Check the drain tap of any accessible plumbing facility.
6. Check the incinerator.
7. Check all barrels of ashes or garbage. The more active the source, the
easier it should be to find it.
C. A RUPTURED OR BROKEN SEAL SOURCE
1. Shut off all fans and ventilators.

2. Drop damp towels on the suspect material; throw nothing away.
3. Call the Radiation Protection Supervisor. The RPS will remove the
questionable material and check the area for contamination.
4. If possible, evacuate the room. If not, keep all personnel several feet
from the suspect material until the RPS arrives.
D. A MAJOR CALAMITY: FIRE, EARTHQUAKE, A MASSIVE SPILL
1. Call the Radiation Protection Supervisor.

2. Prevent access to the suspect areas or removal of anything from them.
Shut off ventilating system; close drains if possible.
3. Do not try to do anything until the RPS arrives. The RPS must be give
complete charge.
4. If for any reason the RPS can not take charge, call the Radiological
Physicist with the Alaska Department of Health and Social Services in
Juneau.
Page 43 of 49
5. (907) 465-3019
Medical Treatment
Medical treatment of a person who has been accidentally over exposed to

ionizing radiation will depend on the dose. Exposure less than 25 REMs
generally do not require treatment. The treatment will also depend on whether
the source of the radiation is outside the body such as from x-ray equipment or
a gamma emitter, or from inside the body such as when a radioactive dust is
inhaled or ingested.
When the source of radiation is outside the body, and treatment is considered
necessary, it is started after the entire radiation dose has been received. The
dose cannot be lessened, therefore the objective of the treatment is to lessen
the acute effect of radiation sickness, prevent secondary infections and provide
transfusions to supplement weaken and damage blood cells.
When the source of the radiation (the emitter) has been inhaled or swallowed,
radiation exposure will continue and the goal of treatment is to reduce the
quantity of the emitter in the body. This may be accomplished by speeding up
the excretion of the emitter by chelation therapy. A chelating agent is a
chemical which binds with radioactive heavy metals enabling the body to
excrete them faster. Chelation therapy is effective for internal emitters which
are soluble in body fluids. Insoluble emitting substances which have been
inhaled can be removed to some extent by bronchiopulmonary lavage, a
procedure which rinses out the lung’s air sacs and air ways.
Safety Procedures and Control Measures
The specific aspects, equipment and procedures of a workplace radiation safety

program will depend on the nature of the source, the type of radiation emitted
and the circumstances of its use. Only general concepts of protection and
control can be covered in a data sheet of this scope. The National Council on
Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP) offers recommendations for
specific uses of radiation emitting substances and equipment.
RESTRICTED ACCESS: Only authorized trained personnel should be allowed

in work areas where radiation emitting substances or equipment is used.
Signs and warning notices using the standard radiation symbol must be
posted.
Page 44 of 49
SHIELDING: The selection of materials and designs for shielding will depend
on the type of radiation, the use factor of the equipment, occupancy times, and
work load.
VENTILATION: Operations that routinely produce airborne contamination

should utilize engineered containment and ventilation systems to prevent
airborne releases. Appropriate respirators may be used but only when effective
engineering controls are not feasible.
RADIATION MONITORING: Radiation survey equipment appropriate for the

type of radiation to me be measured must be maintained and used to evaluate
exposure conditions for employees. Working area must be monitored at a
frequency which will ensure safe working conditions. Individuals working in
most industrial settings and many medical facilities must wear appropriate
radiation monitoring devices to measure actual occupational exposures.
Records of results for area and personal monitoring must be maintained.
LICENSING AND REGISTRATION: All by-product radioactive material and

special nuclear material must be licensed by the Nuclear Regulatory
Commission, and conditions of that license are met by the user. Radioactive
materials not under the jurisdiction of the Nuclear Regulatory Commission and
all x-ray sources must be registered with the Alaska Department of Health and
Social Services. Use must beet requirements of the Alaska Radiation Protection
Regulations, DH & SS, in addition to the Occupational Health and
Environmental Control regulations of the Department of Labor. The NRC and
the state may conduct inspections of licensees and registrants to ensure
compliance.
CONSULTATION: The Radiological Physicist with the Alaska Department of

Health and Social Services is available for consultation on all radiation safety
matters involving both ionizing and non-ionizing radiation sources.
Respirators used for protection against airborne contamination should be

approved by the National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH).
If air-purifying respirators are used, only high efficiency (HEPA) cartridges
approved for dusts, fumes, mists and radionuclides or radon daughters
(progeny) may be used. A good respirator program must include consideration
of respirator type, fit, maintenance, testing and training.
Page 45 of 49
Protective clothing must be provided if the potential for skin or clothing

contamination exists. Selection must be based on the nature of the
contaminate (liquid or dry material) and the type of radiation emitted.
Appropriate methods of laundering or disposal are also required.
Contaminated clothing must not be taken home.
Permissible Exposure Limit
The Occupational Health and Environmental Control regulations of the Alaska

Administrative Code (8AAC) in 04.0105(b)(2), no employer shall possess, use,
or transfer sources of ionizing radiation in such a manner as to cause any
individual in a restricted area to receive in any period of one calendar quarter
from sources in the employer’s possession or control a dose in excess of the
limits specified in Table 1–18.
TABLE 1-18
REMs per calendar quarter
Whole body:
Head and trunk; active blood-

forming organs; lens of eyes;
or gonads………………………………………………………………1¼
Hand and forearms; feet and ankles ………………………………………………18¾
Skin of whole body ……………………………………………………………………7½
A. An employer may permit an individual in a restricted area to receive doses

to the whole body greater than those permitted under 4.0105 (b)(1) so long
as:
1. During any calendar quarter the dose to the whole body shall not exceed
three REMs; and
2. The dose to the whole body, when added to the accumulated

occupational dose to the whole body, shall not exceed five (N-18) REMs,
where “N” equals the individual’s age in years at his last birthday; and
3. The employer maintains adequate past and current exposure records

which show that the addition of such a dose will not cause the individual
to exceed the amount authorized in 04.0105 (b)(1). As used in 04.0105
(b), “Dose to the whole body” shall be deemed to include any dose to the
Page 46 of 49
whole body, gonad, active blood-forming organs, head and trunk, or lens
of the eye.
4. No employer shall permit any employee who is under 18 years o of age to

receive, in any period of one calendar quarter, a dose in excess of ten
percent of the limits specified in Table 1-18.
These regulations (OHEC 04.0105) also cover definitions, exposure to airborne
radioactive material, precautionary measures and personal monitoring, caution
signs, labels and symbols, evacuation warnings, instruction of personnel,
waste disposal, notification of incidents, reports of overexposure, records and
disclosure.
Page 47 of 49
TAB 9 – FALL PROTECTION
AND EMERGENCY RESCUE
Fall Prevention and Protection

1.0 Introduction
The purpose of the Fall Prevention and Protection Plan (FPPP) is to
establish minimum requirements for the use of fall protection and
prevention devices for employees exposed to fall hazards.
The FPPP applies to all Davis Constructors & Engineers, Inc. (Davis)
projects and activities when working within the scope of our Health and
Safety Policies.
2.0 Policy
Anytime employees are working from an unprotected elevation of six (6)
feet or more above the ground or next lower level, fall protection must be
used. Working (as just described) means while traveling, stationary or at
anytime exposed to a fall from a surface not protected by a standard
guardrail or other approved fall prevention device.
3.0 References
• 29 CFR 1926.500-.503: Fall Protection
• 29 CRF 1910.66 Appendix C: Personal Fall Arrest System
• ANSI Z359.1 – 1992: Fall Protection in General Industry
4.0 Definitions
Term Definition
A secure point of attachment to which the fall
Anchorage
protection system is ultimately connected.
One who is capable of identifying hazardous and
dangerous conditions regarding fall protection
Competent Person equipment, is knowledgeable in the application and
the use of the equipment, and has the authority to
take prompt corrective actions.
Deceleration Device Any device which serves to dissipate a substantial
(Shock Absorber) amount of the energy during fall arrest or otherwise
Page 1 of 17
limits the energy imposed on the body during fall

arrest.
A fall prevention system composed of a warning line
Designated Area and stanchions erected 6′ or more from a fall hazard
(unprotected roof edge).
An attachment point on the full-body harness for
“D” Ring
attaching a lanyard or other fall protection device.
Installation of barriers or use of restraining devices
Fall Prevention physically preventing a person from being exposed to
a fall hazard.
The use of passive equipment designed to stop
Fall Protection
and/or control the free fall once a fall is initiated.
Distance the D-ring travels from the onset of a fall to
the time when the fall arrest system is activated
Free Fall
(excludes deceleration distance and any system
elongation).
A personal fall-protection device secured around the
body, and a lanyard device attached. It’s designed to
Full-body Harness
distribute fall-arresting forces primarily over the
buttocks and thighs.
A flexible strap connected to the full-body harness at
Lanyard one end and an anchorage or anchorage connector at
the other end.
A flexible line for connection to an anchorage at one
end to hang vertically (vertical lifeline), or for
Lifeline connection at both ends to stretch horizontally
(horizontal lifeline) and to which other elements of a
fall-arrest system are attached.
A roof having a slope of less than or equal to 4 on 12
Low-sloped Roof
(vertical to horizontal).
Recognized professional with an extensive knowledge
of fall-prevention system who is capable in design,
Qualified Person
analysis, evaluation, and specification of fall-
protection equipment.
A line from a fixed anchorage to which an employee
Restraint Line is secured in such a way as to prevent the employee
from reach an identified fall hazard.
A fall-protection device that eliminates slack
Self-retracting
automatically as the worker moves. These units
Lifeline
have a braking mechanism which senses and arrests
Page 2 of 17
free falls.
A self-closing, self-locking connector used for
Snap Hook attaching lanyard devices to the full-body harness D-
ring and to the anchorage.
5.1 Site Management

Site management is (safety manager, superintendent, foreman)
responsible for ensuring the overall implementation of and
compliance with Davis fall-protection policies and procedures.
They must be familiar with the fall-protection policy and utilize the
expertise at their disposal to ensure employees are protected from
fall hazards.
5.2 Site Supervision

Supervisors responsible for employees performing work covered by
the Davis Fall-Protection policy must:
• Continuously monitor the work to assure compliance with
this procedure.
• Confirm each job is properly evaluated for fall hazards and

confirm that these hazards are properly eliminated or con-
trolled.
• Ensure employees are aware of any hazards associated with

their work.
• Ensure employees receive proper training on fall hazard rec-

ognition and use of fall-protection/prevention equipment.
• Ensure employees adhere to all requirements of the fall-

protection policy.
5.3 Employees
Employees performing work tasks covered by this procedure must:
• Be aware of potential fall hazards associated with their work
and ensure these hazards are properly addressed prior to the
work beginning.
• Know the uses and limitations of fall-protection equipment.
Page 3 of 17
• Inspect fall-protection equipment prior to each use and

remove any defective equipment from service.
• Report any fall or close call to supervisor and remove from

service any fall-protection equipment subjected to a fall.
5.4 Corporate Health and Safety Department

The Safety Department assists site management and supervision
in the implementation, training, monitoring, and documentation
associated with the fall protection program. It’s also a
responsibility of the Safety Department to provide the expertise
and guidance necessary to help ensure employees are adequately
protected from fall hazards.
5.5 Competent Persons

Competent persons are responsible for ensuring:
• During mobilization and early project development,
Davis project safety manager, Carl Francis will be
“competent person” for Fall Protection. As the project
progresses, sub contractors may designate their own
“competent persons” however designation approval will
go through the Davis Project Safety Manager
• Thorough, documented in-depth inspections of fall- protec-

tion equipment was performed.
• Fall-protection equipment is used in compliance with this

procedure and all manufacturers’ and regulatory
requirements.
6.0 Training
Employees are trained in the proper use, care, and limitations of fall-
protection equipment prior to using the equipment.
At a minimum, training must address the following areas:
• Davis Fall Protection Policy and Procedures.
Page 4 of 17
• Evaluating fall hazards.
• Fall prevention.
• Equipment use, care, and limitations.
• Proper fitting and wearing of fall-protection equipment.
• Requirements and proper use of anchor points.

• Inspections.
Training is documented, signed, dated by the employee and instructor,

and maintained in the employee’s safety training file.
Re-training is required if a lack of proficiency is observed or when new

equipment or new hazards are introduced.
7.0 Inspection and Storage

7.1 Storage
Fall-protection equipment is stored in a clean dry location away
from exposure to abrasive cutting tools and equipment, corrosive
materials, excessive heat, and other sources of damage.
Full-body harnesses are hung by the D-ring for storage.
7.2 Inspections
Prior to each use the employee/user inspects all fall-protection
equipment.
Inspection consists of an evaluation of the following areas:
• Harness components:
o Stitching
o Rivets
o Buckle tabs
Page 5 of 17
o Snap hooks
• “D” Rings
• Lanyards and lifelines
• Connectors
• No tears or cuts
• No burns
• No abrasion
• No rust or corrosion
• No mildew
Defective equipment is immediately removed from service, tagged

as defective, then repaired or destroyed and replaced.
7.3 In-depth Inspections

Designated Competent Persons must conduct in-depth inspections
of all jobsite fall-protection equipment prior to job start up and
periodically (at least annually).
These in-depth fall protection inspections are documented using

Appendix 1-4 or an equivalent.
The Competent Person utilizes the specific fall-protection

equipment manufacturer’s inspection instructions to perform the
in-depth inspections. Or, at a minimum for harnesses and
lanyards, utilize the items outlined in 7.2 of this Section.
Fall-protection equipment passing the in-depth inspection is

documented and the documentation is kept on file at the jobsite.
Care is taken not to cover with tape or markers any equipment

component vital to inspection or performance. Do not cover
stitching, grommets, adjusting mechanisms, labels, etc.
Page 6 of 17
Some types of fall-protection equipment (such as self-retracting

lifelines) require periodic recertification by the manufacturer at
scheduled intervals. The Competent Person is familiar with these
requirements and has recertification performed and documented.
Defective fall-protection equipment subjected to fall forces must be

immediately removed from service, destroyed and replaced, or
recertified by the manufacturer.
8.0 Procedure
8.1 Fall Hazards: General Discussion/Information
The key factor in protecting against falls is the recognition of the
hazard. Falls are generally a result of inadequate planning, poor
work practices, poor work conditions, or a combination of these.
A fall-protection work plan is developed for all work activities

requiring fall protection using Appendix 5 or equivalent. Planning
begins prior to the start of a project or task and consists of:
• Layout and arrangement of tools and equipment.
• Identifying aisles, passageways, entrances, exits, and

ensuring these are maintained free of obstruction and trip
hazards.
• Ensuring proper illumination.
• Addressing inclement weather conditions (wind, rain, sleet,

snow, ice and mud).
• Use of personnel hoisting equipment (aerial lifts, personnel

baskets, etc.)
The Competent Person determines whether walking and working

surfaces are structurally capable of supporting workers safely.
Employees on the edge of excavations deeper than six feet must be

protected from falling by guardrails, fences, or barricades when the
excavations are not easily visible.
Page 7 of 17
Employees working from elevated positions with less than a six-

foot fall hazard, but above dangerous equipment or conditions,
must be protected from falling onto the hazard by fall prevention,
fall protection or equipment guards.
8.2 Same-Level Fall Hazards

• Good housekeeping is the key to preventing same-level falls.
• Material are stored in designated areas out of passageways

and not allowed to accumulate in the work area or around
worktables, desks, threading machines, etc. causing a
hazard.
• Surfaces are kept free of slipping hazards (ice, grease, oil,

chemicals, metal shavings etc.)
• Floor holes and openings are covered and secured to not

create tripping hazards.
• Attempts must be made to maintain even floor surfaces.
• Electrical cords, welding leads, hoses, etc. must be elevated

or positioned so they don’t create tripping hazards.
8.3 Falls From Elevation

A momentary loss of balance resulting from a slip or trip can often
lead to an elevated fall. Grabbing on to something to catch oneself
after balance is lost rarely succeeds. Fall prevention or protection
is required to protect employees from injuries due to falls from
elevation.
The objective of elevated fall “protection” is to stop or control the

free fall once a fall is initiated, therefore reducing the potential for
injury.
Fall hazard distance begins and is measured from the level of a

workstation on which an employee must initially step and where a
fall hazard exists. It ends with the greatest distance of possible
Page 8 of 17
continuous fall, including steps, openings, projections, roofs, and

direction of fall (interior or exterior).
8.4 Fall Prevention

Fall “prevention” as defined, eliminates potential for exposure to a
fall. For this reason, it’s preferred over fall-protection devices and
should be the first choice for eliminating exposure to fall hazards.
Examples of fall-prevention devices include:
• Guardrails: Approved guardrails are used to form a barrier

at a fall exposure. It consists of a top rail, mid-rail, and a
toe board.
• Hole Covers: Hole or floor opening covers must be strong

enough to support at least twice the maximum intended load
and must be installed and secured in a manner which
prevents their accidental displacement or removal. They
must also be clearly marked: “Danger, Hole Cover. Do Not
Remove” or “Hole” or “Cover.”
• Restraint Lines: Restraint lines are designed to limit travel

so no physical hazard is reachable in any direction of
movement. Restraint lines and their anchorage points must
be capable of supporting at least 3,000 lbs. tensile load.
8.5 Standard Protection

Standard protection against falls is the assurance of adequate
guardrails, handrails, mid-rails, and toe boards are installed on all
work surfaces including platforms, scaffolds, etc.
Attempts are made to either install permanent guardrails or install

temporary guardrails on or around surfaces four feet above the
floor level.
Scaffolds, ladders, aerial lifts, or other work platforms are used in

compliance with all Davis, manufacturer, and regulatory
requirements.
Page 9 of 17
8.6 Fall Protection

Only fall-protection equipment approved for use by a Davis
Competent Person is allowed.
All fall-protection equipment is inspected prior to each use and is

maintained in good working order at all times. Equipment or
components found to be defective must be immediately removed
from service and replaced or repaired by qualified repair personnel.
Fall-protection equipment is for fall protection use only and is not

to be used for any other purpose such as positioning or hoisting.
All components of personal protection; e.g. harnesses, lanyards,

anchorage, lifelines and connectors must have a minimum break
strength of 5,000 pounds.
Any equipment designated for a fall-protection system, but useable

for other activities (i.e. slings, choker, carabineers, etc.) must be
tagged, identified, or otherwise controlled for use only for fall
protection. The Competent Person, prior to incorporation into a
fall-protection system, approves equipment manufactured for use
other than fall protection.
All fall-protection equipment is designed, purchased and used in

accordance with this procedure and all applicable manufacturer
and regulatory requirements.
Fall-protection equipment is designed and/or protected from “hot-

work” operations, chemicals or other damaging conditions.
8.6.1 Distance Requirements

A fall-protection must not allow for more than a six-foot free
fall.
The fall-protection system is used and secured in a fashion

so the user cannot contact the next lower level—if a fall
occurs. This includes all of the following:
• Free-fall distance, plus
Page 10 of 17
• System elongation, plus
• Deceleration device/shock absorbers, plus
• Employee height (distance from anchor point to D-

ring).
Site management uses provisions in the “Elevated Surface

Work Emergency Action and Rescue Plan” for prompt rescue
of employees in the event of a fall.
8.7 Use of Fall-Protection Equipment
8.7.1 Full-body Harness

An approved full-body harness is used as protection against
falls to a lower level when guardrails or other approved fall
prevention cannot be utilized.
Full-body harnesses must also be worn and properly

anchored when employees are working from aerial lifts, scis-
sor lifts, personnel baskets, and similar equipment.
Full-body harnesses must fit and be worn properly with

straps tucked so they don’t catch on equipment or cause a
hazard. Chest straps are worn between the chest and
collarbone, with the D-ring worn between the shoulder
blades.
Full-body harnesses used on Davis projects must, at a

minimum, be equipped with various “D-rings” with use
based on location:
• Back: general fall protection use
• Front: used with climbing system
• Side: positioning device only, not to be used as fall

protection
• Shoulder: rescue line attachment.
Page 11 of 17
8.7.2 Snaphooks
Only self-closing, self-locking snap-hooks are allowed for fall
protection use on Davis projects.
Snap-hooks must open and close properly and be fully

closed around their anchorage point.
8.7.3 Anchorage Points

Anchorage points must be capable of supporting at least a
5000 lb. load per person or a safety factor of two designed by
a qualified person. The points are independent of the work
surface when possible.
The anchorage point is at least as high as the harness D-ring

and preferably higher, to minimize free-fall distance with no
more than a six-foot free fall.
8.7.4 Deceleration Devices (Shock Absorbers)

• Shock absorbers are required as part of an overall fall-
protection system.
• At a minimum shock absorbers are required as part of

fall-protection lanyards.
8.7.5 Lanyards
• The shortest length lanyard possible should always be
used.
• Lanyards must have a maximum length to provide for

a free-fall distance of no more than six feet.
• Lanyards are used in conjunction with a shock

absorber or shock-absorbing agent.
• Do not attach more than one person to a lanyard.
• Dual or “Y” lanyards may be required to achieve 100

percent fall protection in some work situations.
Page 12 of 17
• When not in use lanyards are secured in a manner not

causing tripping hazards or becoming entangled in
equipment.
• Flexible steel cable lanyards are not used by personnel

performing work on or in close proximity to electrical
equipment. A non-conductive lanyard must be used
when near electrical equipment.
8.7.6 Retractable Devices

• Retractable devices are designed to arrest fall within
two feet.
• Tag lines are used to prevent the uncontrolled

retracting of these devices.
• Retractable devices are used with the person at less

than a 45-degree angle from the device to prevent the
hazards of a swing fall.
• Only retractable devices bearing current manufactur-

ers certification are used.
8.7.7 Vertical Lifelines

• Only one employee may use a vertical lifeline at a time.
Separate vertical lifelines are required for each
employee when multiple users are required.
• Vertical lifelines are equipped with a formed eye

termination at one end for suspension from the
anchorage point and must extend below the lowest
level of travel.
• The lower end is either attached to a second anchor

point or weighted down to provide stability.
• Grab devices are compatible with the type and size of

rope or cable used and will remain above the shoulder
of the user.
Page 13 of 17
• Manufacturers specify maximum lanyard length for

use on their vertical lifelines (usually nine inches).
Standard six-foot lanyards are generally not permitted.
8.7.8 Horizontal Lifelines

Horizontal lifelines are either designed by a qualified person
with a safety factor of at least two, or manufactured
components erected by competent persons and used in
compliance with all manufacturer requirements and safety
factors.
8.7.9 Safety Nets

Only safety nets designed by the manufacturer as fall-
protection nets are used. These are installed in accordance
with all manufacturer requirements, as close to work level as
possible and extend outward from the surface. (See OSHA
29 CFR 1926.502 (c) for distances).
Nets may have maximum 6” by 6” openings and are either

certified by a qualified person or pass a 400 lb. drop test at
the following intervals: prior to use, whenever relocated,
after repair, and every six months if left in place.
Nets in use are inspected by a competent person at least
weekly for wear, damage, and deterioration. Inspections are
documented.
8.8 Work on Rooftop Equipment

When performing work on equipment located on low-sloped
rooftops, fall prevention or fall protection is required only if the
work demands the employee be within six feet of the roof edge, not
including access to and egress from the roof.
Fall prevention or fall protection is required at all times when

performing work on equipment located on any roof other than a
low-sloped roof.
8.9 Roofing Work

Persons involved in roofing work are protected by either a fall-
prevention or fall-protection system.
Page 14 of 17
A designated area is acceptable for work on low-sloped roofs (4 on

12 vertical to horizontal) as long as employees are not required to
be within six feet of the edge. If employees are within six feet of the
edge, then the following is required: guardrails, restraint lines, or
fall protection must be provided within six feet of the edge.
A designated area is not acceptable fall prevention for work on

steep roofs (greater than 4 on 12 vertical to horizontal).
9.0 Minimum Specifications for Fall-Prevention Systems
9.1 Guardrails
Must be constructed and surfaced in a way to prevent punctures,
lacerations, and snags.
9.1.1 Top Rails

• Capable of 200 lbs. with less than 3″ deflection with no
permanent deformation;
• Should be 42″ high, but can be no less than 39″ high
and no more than 45″ high.
9.1.2 Mid-rails
• Capable of 150 lbs. with no permanent deformation.
• Maximum opening of 19 inches between rails.
9.1.3 Wood Rails

• At least 2″ by 4″ top rail.
• At least 1″ by 6″ mid rail.
• On 8′ maximum centers.
• Minimum 1500 psi construction grade lumber.
9.1.4 Pipe Rails

• 1.5″ outside diameter on 8′ maximum centers.
9.1.5 Steel Rails

• 2″ by 2″ by 3/8″ angle iron on 8′ maximum centers.
Page 15 of 17
9.1.6 Wire Rope Rails

• ¼″ diameter cable stretched taunt; less than 3″
deflection.
• Flagged at 6′ intervals with high visibility materials.
9.2 Restraint Lines

• Capable of 3000 lb. tensile load.
• Limit travel so no fall hazard is reachable in ANY direction.
9.3 Designated Areas

• Used only if low sloped area (less than or equal to 4 on 12;
vertical on horizontal),
• Area must be designated six feet or more from the
unprotected edge.
• Access path with warning lines to ladders, storage areas, etc.
9.3.1 Stanchions
• Capable of 16 lbs. tipping strength horizontally.
9.3.2 Line/Rope
• Capable of 500 lbs. break or tensile strength between
34″ and 39″ above the work surface.
• Flagged at 6′ intervals with high visibility materials.
10.0 Fall-Protection Work and Rescue Plan

A fall-protection work plan is created for each situation that fall-
protection or fall-arrest systems are used. Incorporated within this
plan are details of rescue procedures used in the event of an accident
or fall. Jobsites will use Appendix 5 for this procedure.
Appendix 1-4 FPS inspection documents
Page 16 of 17
Appendix 5 FPS work plan document
Page 17 of 17
TAB 9 – FALL PROTECTION AND
EMERGENCY RESUCE
Elevated Surface Work

Emergency Action and Rescue Plan
1.0 Purpose
The purpose of this Emergency Action and Rescue Plan (EARP) is to
ensure employee safety whenever fall-arrest systems are in use and
when personnel may not be able to self-rescue, if a fall occur. This
written document is prepared to demonstrate compliance with 29 CFR
1926.500. It provides a written document detailing the actions and
procedures to be followed in case of a fall emergency.
Employees must know what’s expected of them in all such rescue

situations in order to provide assurance of their safety (from injury or
fall) as well as the safety of the person being rescued. This plan
contains the required information for employee knowledge.
2.0 Types of Fall Rescues

At this location, the following types of fall hazards exist while using
fall-arrest systems:
1. Fall from a platform or walking/working surface.
2. Fall from an articulating boom lift.
3. Fall from a scaffold.
3.0 Employee Training

All employees involved in emergency rescues are trained in safe
rescue procedures and refresher training is conducted whenever the
employee’s responsibilities or designated actions under the plan
change and whenever the plan itself is changed. In addition, the
employer must review with each employee upon initial assignment the
parts of the plan which the employee must know to protect the
employee in the event of a rescue emergency. The training includes
the communication process and the use of equipment to rescue
workers should a fall occur.
Page 1 of 3
EMERGENCY RESUCE
4.0 Communication
In the event of a fall the Emergency Activation Plan or Man Down
Procedure is initiated. Evaluate the emergency to decide whether the
emergency responders should be contacted (911). If emergency
responders are called (911) all foremen in the EAP should immediately
proceed to the locations assigned to guide responders to the
emergency site. The foremen assigned to the work area where the fall
occurred are in charge of rescue coordination.
5.0 Emergency Rescue Procedures and Medical-duty

Assignments
The following are the rescue procedures in the event of a fall:
If needed, immediately call 911 emergency responders. Professional

emergency services responding to an emergency will assist with and
direct all rescue and medical-duty assignments upon their arrival.
1. If fall victim is stable, in good condition, and can communicate,

evaluate the scene and decide if job personnel can rescue
victim.
2. If rescue is required and incident foreman believes rescue

actions by personnel are unsafe; the local fire department
responding to the emergency is responsible for performing any
rescue.
3. If any of the following conditions arise, activate rescue plan:

• Fall victim becomes unstable.
• Fall victim has pain from hanging in the harness.
• Fall victim was suspended for more than 10 minutes and
emergency responders have not arrived.
• Fall victim is at a height that fire department cannot
reach.
6.0 Rescue Plan

Evaluate the scene and best means available for rescue. All rescue
personnel must have fall-protection systems in place before
attempting a rescue.
Page 2 of 3
EMERGENCY RESUCE
1. Can you safely gain access with ladders, man lifts, crane basket
or hoists? If yes, move equipment into place and carefully
secure and rescue victim. If no, go to next option.
2. Can victim be accessed through an opening or window in the

building by pulling into opening and securing? If yes, gather
personnel to support operation. Secure rescue positioning
device (RPD) to secure anchor point and have enough personnel
at access point to connect and secure victim. If no, go to next
option.
3. Is there’s an access point for lowering or raising the victim from

an above elevation? If yes, gather enough personnel to raise or
lower victim. Secure RPD to an anchor point above victim.
Attach the RPD to the victim. If no, wait for responders.
NOTE: If a victim is lowered or raised, rescuers must

attach a secondary line (RPD) to victim. Responder must
have approved RPD system to perform this rescue.
4. If victim is removed from arrest situation, evaluate victim’s

condition to decide if medical treatment is necessary.
5. Designated personnel trained in first aid and cardiopulmonary

resuscitation (CPR) are to provide medical assistance within
their capacities.
Page 3 of 3
Davis Constructors & Engineers, Inc. Appendix 1 - 4
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 9 – FALL PROTECTION
Full-Body Harness
Annual Inspection Checklist
Harness Model/Name: _____________________________________________________________
Serial Number: ____________________________ Lot Number: __________________________
Date of Manufacture: ______________________ Date of Purchase: ____________________
Comments: _______________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Accepted/ Supportive
General Factors
Rejected Details/Comments
1. Hardware: includes D-rings,
buckles, keepers and back pads. Accepted
Inspect for damage, distortion,
sharp edges, burrs, cracks and Rejected
corrosion.
2. Webbing: Inspect for cuts, Accepted
burns, tears, abrasions, frays,
excessive soiling and Rejected
discoloration.
3. Stitching: Inspect for pulled or Accepted
cut stitches.
Rejected
4. Labels: Inspect, making certain Accepted
all labels are securely held in
place and are legible. Rejected
5. Other: Accepted
Rejected
6. Other: Accepted
Rejected
7. Overall Disposition: Accepted Inspected by: __________________
Rejected Date Inspected: _______________

Davis Constructors & Engineers, Inc. Appendix 1- 4
Lanyards
Lanyard Model/Name: ______________________________________________________
Serial Number: ___________________________ Lot Number: ____________________
Date of Manufacture: _____________________ Date of Purchase: ______________
Comments: ________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Accepted/ Supportive Details/

General Factors
Rejected Comments
1) Hardware: (includes snaphooks, Accepted
carabiners, adjusters, keepers,
thimbles, and D-rings) Inspect for Rejected
damage, distortion, sharp edges,
burrs, cracks, corrosion, and
proper operation.
2) Webbing: Inspect for cuts, burns, Accepted
tears, abrasions, frays, excessive
soiling and discoloration. Rejected
3) Stitching: Inspect for pulled or Accepted
cut stitches.
Rejected
4) Synthetic Rope: Inspect for Accepted
pulled or cut yarns, burrs,
abrasions, knots, excessive soiling Rejected
and discoloration.
5) Energy Absorbing Component: Accepted
Inspect for elongation, tears, and
excessive soiling. Rejected
6) Labels: Inspect, making certain all Accepted
labels are securely held in place
and are legible. Rejected
7) Overall Disposition: Accepted Inspected by: _________________
Rejected Date inspected: _______________
Page 2 of 4
Snaphooks/Carabiners
Hook/Carabiner Model Name: _______________________________________________
Serial Number: _____________________________ Lot Number: __________________
Date of Manufacture: _______________________ Date of Purchase: _____________
Comments: _________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________

General Factors
Rejected Comments
1) Physical Damage: Inspect for Accepted
cracks, sharp edges, burrs,
deformities and locking operations. Rejected
2) Excessive Corrosion: Inspect for Accepted
corrosion, which affects the
operation and/or the strength. Rejected
3) Markings: Inspect and make Accepted
certain marking(s) are legible.
Rejected
4) Other: Accepted
Rejected
5) Other: Accepted
Rejected
6) Other: Accepted
Rejected
7) Overall Disposition: Accepted Inspected by: ________________
Rejected Date inspected: _____________
Page 3 of 4
Self-Retracting Lanyard/Lifeline
Self-retracting Lanyard/Lifeline Model Name: _________________________________
Serial Number: _________________________ Lot Number: ______________________
Date of Manufacture: ___________________ Date of Purchase: _________________
Department/Location: ______________________________________________________
Comments: _________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
General Factors
Rejected Comments
1) Impact Indicator: Inspect indicator Accepted
for activation (rupture of red
stitching, elongated indicator, etc.) Rejected
2) Screws/Fasteners: Inspect for Accepted
damage and make certain all screws
and fasteners are tight. Rejected
3) Housing: Inspect for distortion, Accepted
cracks and other damage. Inspect
anchoring loop for distortion or Rejected
damage.
4) Laynard/Lifeline: Inspect for cuts, Accepted
burns, tears, abrasion, frays,
excessive soiling and discoloration. Rejected
(See impact indicator section.)
5) Locking Action: Inspect for proper Accepted
lock-up of brake mechanism.
Rejected
6) Retraction/Extension: Inspect Accepted
spring tension by pulling lanyard out
fully and allowing it to retract fully Rejected
(lifeline must be taut with no slack).
7) Hooks/Carabiners: Inspect for Accepted
physical damage, corrosion, proper
orientation and markings. Rejected
8) Labels: Inspect making certain all Accepted
labels are securely held in place and
are legible. Rejected
9) Overall Disposition: Accepted Inspected by: _______________
Rejected Date inspected: _____________
Page 4 of 4
FALL PROTECTION WORK PLAN-UAF LIFE SCIENCE FACILITY

Note: Employees review the requirements of this fall protection work plan prior to starting work. This plan is
available at the jobsite during work activities. Also, employees are trained and instructed in
accordance with 29 CFR 1926 Subpart M, Fall Protection.
Job Location Description:
1. Identify all fall hazards 1.83 m (6 ft) or more in the work area:
Leading edge Stairways Floor openings

Perimeter edge Ladders Steel erection
Scaffold erection/disassembly Through a roof
Other (describe):
2. Method of fall protection to be provided:
Fall restraint Guardrails Warning line

Fall arrest Catch platform Safety monitor
Describe:
3. Describe the correct procedure for assembly, maintenance, inspection, and disassembly of the fall
protection system to be used:
4. Describe the correct procedure for handling, storage, and securing of tools and material:
5. Describe the method of providing overhead protection for workers who may be in, or pass through, the
area below the work site:
Barricading Toeboards on scaffolds and floor openings

Hard hats required Warning signs
Describe:
6. Describe the method for prompt, safe removal of injured workers:
Initiate emergency response (911) Use drop lines or retraction Use ladders
devices
Utilize lift truck or personnel Utilize scaffolds
platform
Other (describe):
7. Describe the method used to determine the adequacy of attachment points:
Page 1 of 2
FALL PROTECTION WORK PLAN-UAF LIFE SCIENCE FACILITY

Manufacturer’s data Existing engineering/design documents
Evaluation by qualified engineer Good faith assessment
8. Identify the employees working at/near a “leading edge.”
9. Identify the safety monitor(s) (if used – or N/A):
10. Justify selecting controlled access zone and/or safety monitor (if used – or N/A):
Approvals
Fall Protection Plan Completed By:

Approved By:
Responsible Supervisor Date Project Safety Date
Page 2 of 2
Tab 10 – Trenching and
Excavation Procedures
Trenching and Excavation Procedures
1.0 Introduction
Anytime Davis Constructors & Engineers, Inc. (Davis) or a Davis
subcontractor’s employees are working near or in an excavation it’s
considered a trenching and excavation activity. An excavation is a
trench, hole, pit, or other circumstance where an engulfment or cave-
in hazard may exist. This program provides the safety requirements
for activities involving excavations in accordance with 29 CFR 1926,
Subpart P – Excavations.
2.0 Scope
The purpose of the Trenching and Excavation Procedures (TEP) is to
establish basic criteria for safe trenching and excavation during earth
moving operations. Variances in site conditions, project scope, and
design features may warrant alterations to these general safety
procedures. The TEP will apply to all Davis and Davis subcontractor’s
projects and activities when working within the scope of our Health
and Safety Policies.
3.0 Definitions
Term Definition
Is a method of protecting employees from cave-ins by
excavating the sides of an excavation forming one set of
Benching
horizontal levels or steps usually vertical or near vertical
surfaces between levels. Benching is prohibited in “C” soils.
A competent person is capable of identifying existing and
predictable hazards in the surroundings or working
Competent Person conditions that are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to
employees, and who has authorization to take prompt
corrective measures to eliminate hazards.
Any man-made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in an earth
Excavation
surface formed by earth removal.
An atmosphere that by reason of being explosive, flammable,
Hazardous poisonous, corrosive, oxidizing, irritating, oxygen deficient,
Atmosphere toxic or otherwise harmful, may cause death, illness, or
injury.
Page 1 of 7
A method of protecting employees from cave-ins from material

that could fall or roll from an excavation or from the collapse
Protective Systems of adjacent structures. Protective systems include support
systems, sloping and benching systems, shield systems, and
other systems providing the necessary protection.
A method of protecting employees from cave-ins by excavation
to form sides of an excavation inclined away from the
excavation preventing cave-ins. The angle of incline required
Sloping
to prevent a cave-in varies with differences in factors as well
as the soil type, environmental conditions of exposure, and
application of surcharge loads.
A structure such as underpinning, bracing, or shoring,
Support System providing support to an adjacent structure, underground
installation, or the sides of an excavation.
A narrow excavation made below the surface of the ground.
In general the depth is greater than the width, but the width
of a trench measured at the bottom is not greater than 15′. If
Trench forms or other structures are installed or constructed in an
excavation so as to reduce the dimension measured from the
forms or structure to the side of the excavation of 15′ or less,
the excavation is also considered to be a trench.
4.1 Competent Person
The competent person(s) is responsible for:
• Day-to-day oversight of open excavations and trenches.
• Conducting soil classifications.
• Selection of protective systems.
• Conducting daily inspections of open excavations and

trenches.
• Providing the Safety Manager with all required

documentation on a daily basis.
4.2 Line Management

The Safety Manager, in conjunction with the Superintendent is
responsible for:
Page 2 of 7
• Ensuring compliance with this procedure.
• Providing the necessary resources for compliance with

this procedure.
• Designating competent personnel.
4.3 Project Safety Manager

The Project Safety Manager is responsible for:
• Conducting review of open trenches and excavations.
• Maintaining required records.
5.0 Procedures
The following sections provide general requirements governing
activities in and around open excavations and trenches as well as the
requirements for the selection and use of protective systems. The
requirements are presented in Section 5.1 and 5.2 respectively.
5.1 Designation of Competent Person

Prior to starting any excavation work the superintendent
designates a competent person to fulfill the requirements of this
procedure. Until the civil subcontractor designates a competent
person for his activities, Carl Francis Project Safety Manager is
designated for this position.
5.2 General Requirements

• Surfaces surrounding open trenches and excavations
have all surface hazards removed.
• All utilities are located and cleared prior to initiating

digging, public or facility utility groups are utilized where
possible for this purpose. In the absence of either, the
subcontractor specifies the procedure to use to clear
utilities in consultation with the Davis Superintendent
and Project Safety Manager. When the excavation is open
utilities are supported and protected from damage.
Clearance and support methods are documented on the
daily inspection checklist.
Page 3 of 7
• Where structural ramps are used for egress, they’re

installed in accordance with 1926.651 (c) (1).
• Stairways, ladders, or ramps are provided as means of

egress in all trenches 4 feet or more in depth. Travel
distance is no more than 50 feet between means of exit,
thus limiting maximum travel 25 feet.
• Employees shall wear traffic vests.
• No employee is permitted under loads being lifted or

under loads being unloaded from vehicles.
• When vehicles and machinery are operating adjacent to

excavations, warning systems such as stop logs or
barricades are used to prevent vehicles from entering the
excavation or trench.
• Scaling or barricades are used to prevent rock and soils

from falling on employees.
• Excavated and loose material is kept at least 3 feet from

the edge of excavations.
• Walkways or bridges with standard railing are provided at

points employees cross over excavations or trenches.
• Barriers are provided to prevent personnel from

inadvertently falling into an excavation.
5.3 Hazardous Atmospheres

Where atmospheres containing less than 19.5 percent oxygen or
other types of hazardous atmospheres may exist the following
requirements are implemented:
• Atmospheric testing is done prior to employees entering
excavations 4 feet or greater in depth.
• Testing methods are listed on the daily inspection

checklist and results documented daily in field logs.
Page 4 of 7
• Control measures such as ventilation and PPE are used

to control employee exposure to hazardous atmospheres
below published exposure limits.
• Ventilation is used to control flammable and combustible

vapors to below 10 percent of their lower explosive limit.
• Testing is repeated as often as necessary to ensure safe

levels of airborne contaminants.
• Emergency equipment is provided and present when the

potential for a hazardous atmosphere exists. This
equipment includes (but, is not limited to) an emergency
breathing apparatus, harnesses, lifelines, and basket
stretchers. Required equipment is listed on the daily
inspection checklist and reviewed daily.
5.4 Protection From Water Hazard

When water collects in excavations and trenches the following is
required:
• Employees do not work in excavations in which water
has, or is, accumulating without the use of additional
protection such as special support systems or water
removal.
• Water removal is monitored by a competent person.
• Barriers such as ditches and dikes are used to divert

runoff from excavations and trenches.
• Trenches are re-inspected prior to re-entry after water

accumulation due to heavy rainfall or seepage.
5.5 Stability of Adjacent Structures

When excavating or trenching near an adjacent structure the
following practices are implemented:
• Support systems such as shoring, bracing, or underpin-
ning are provided when the stability of buildings, walls, or
other such structures is endangered by excavation.
Page 5 of 7
• Excavations at bases or footings of foundations are

prohibited unless:
o support systems are used,
o the excavation is in stable rock,
o a professional engineer (PE) determines the
structure sufficiently removed from the site does
not pose a hazard,
o or the PE determines the excavation does not pose
a hazard to employees due to the structure.
• Support systems are used when it’s necessary to

undermine sidewalks, pavements, and appurtenant
structures.
• Surcharge load sources and adjacent encumbrances are

listed with their evaluation date on the daily inspection
checklist.
5.6 Daily Inspections

Inspections are performed daily on all excavations, adjacent
areas, and protective systems before personnel enter the trench.
The checklist provided in Appendix 1 or equivalent is used.
5.7 Soil Classifications

To perform soil classifications, the competent person uses a
thumb test, pocket penetrometer, or shear vane to determine
the unconfined compressive strength of the soils being
excavated. In soils with changing properties (i.e. one soil type
mixed with another within a given area) several tests may be
necessary. When different soil types are present, the overall
classification is that of the type with the loosest unconfined
compressive strength. Classifications result in a soil rating of
Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, or Type C in daily inspection
checklist. The soil analysis checklist provided in Appendix 2 or
equivalent is used for soil classifications.
5.8 Sloping and Benching

All sloping and benching is done in accordance with 29CFR
1926.652, Appendix B. Selection of the sloping method and
evaluation of the surface surcharge loads is made by a
competent person familiar with the requirements of 29CFR
Page 6 of 7
1926.652, Appendix B. Sloping and benching methods and

specifications are listed on the daily inspection checklist.
5.9 Protective Systems

Protective systems are required on all excavations over 4 feet in
depth or in excavations less than 4 feet when examination of
the ground by a competent person reveals conditions may result
in cave-ins.
6.0 Training
Competent person has an adequate combination of experience and
training to classify soil types and select protective systems as outlined
in 29 CFR 1926.652. Training and experience pertaining to
qualification as a competent person is documented and include the
following:
• General safety practices related to working in or near open

excavations.
• Inspection requirements and techniques.
• Classifications of soils in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.652.
• Uses, limitations, and specifications of protective systems in

accordance with 29 CFR 1926.652.
7.0 References
OSHA (U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration) 29 CFR 1926, subpart P, Excavations.
Page 7 of 7
Site Specific Safety Plan Appendix 1
TAB 10: TRENCHING AND EXCAVATION
Daily Trench/Excavation Inspection
Site Name: __________________________________________ Date: _________ Time: _______
Excavation Location_________________________________________________________________
Site Evaluation
Ok Unsafe Ok Unsafe
___ ___ Surface encumbrances ___ ___ Warning system for mobile equipment
___ ___ Underground installations ___ ___ Protection from water accumulation
___ ___ Access and egress ___ ___ Stability of adjacent structures
___ ___ Exposure to vehicular traffic ___ ___ Employee protection - loose rock/soil
___ ___ Exposure to falling loads ___ ___ Inspections
___ ___ Hazardous atmospheres ___ ___ Fall protection
___ ___ % Oxygen (O2) ___ ___ % Flammables (L.E.L.)
Note: The air is tested in excavations deeper than 4 feet and in areas where oxygen
deficiency or gaseous conditions. Air samples are taken prior to each shift or more often if
required. A log is maintained on site. Samples are taken for oxygen deficiency, toxicity and
explosive environment.
Soil Classification
Soil classification is made based on the results of at least one visual, and one manual test.
_____ Stable rock _____ Type A _____ Type B _____ Type C
Visual Tests Manual Tests
Inspect worksite for: Analyze soil for:
_____ Fissured ground _____ Plasticity
_____ Layered soil _____ Dry strength
_____ Previously disturbed earth _____ Thumb penetration
_____ Seepage _____ Pocket penetrometer
_____ Vibration _____ Sherevane
_____ Poor drainage _____ Drying test
Protective Support Systems

Sloping & Benching Shoring & Shielding
_____ Stable rock: 90 degrees _____ Timber or hydraulic
_____ Type A: 53 degrees _____ Trench boxes, trench shields
_____ Type B: 45 degrees _____ Design using tabulated data
_____ Type C: 34 degrees _____ RPE design
Additional Comments or Information:
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Inspection performed by: __________________________________________________________________
Authorized Competent Person
TAB 10 – TRENCHING AND EXCAVATION
Soil Analysis Checklist

A competent person completes this form.
This checklist must be completed when soil analysis is made to determine the
soil type(s) present in the excavation. A separate analysis is performed on each
layer of soil in excavation walls. A separate analysis is also performed, if the
excavation (trench) is stretched over a distance where soil type may change.
Site location: _________________________________ Date:

_________________________
Time: _____________ Name of Comp. Person:
VISUAL TEST
Particle type:  Fine Grained (cohesive)  Coarse grained (sand or gravel)
Water conditions:  Wet  Dry  Surface water present Submerged
Previously disturbed soils? _____ Yes _____ No
Underground utilities? _____ Yes _____ No
Layered soils? _____ Yes _____ No
Layered soil dipping into excavation? _____ Yes _____ No
Excavation exposed to vibrations? _____ Yes _____ No
Crack-like openings or spallings observed? _____ Yes _____ No
Conditions that may create a hazardous atmosphere? _____ Yes _____ No
If yes, identify condition and source:

______________________________________________________________________
Surface encumbrances? _____ Yes _____ No
Work to be performed near public vehicular traffic? _____ Yes _____ No
Possible confined space exposure? _____ Yes _____ No
Page 1 of 3
MANUAL TEST
Plasticity:  Cohesive  Non-cohesive
Dry Strength:  Granular (crumbles easily)  Cohesive (broken with

difficulty)
NOTE: The following unconfined compressive strength tests should be performed

on undisturbed soil.
THUMB TEST
(Used to estimate unconfined compressive strength of cohesive soil)
Test Performed: _____ Yes _____ No
_____ Type A (soil indented by thumb with very great effort)
_____ Type B (soil indented by thumb with some effort)
_____ Type C (soil with unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 tsf or less). Soil is
submerged, seeping water, subject to surface water, runoff, exposed to
wetting.
WET SHAKING TEST
(Used to determine percentage of granular and cohesive materials) Compare _____

to soil textural classification chart to determine soil type.
Test performed: _____ Yes _____ No
 Type A (clay, silty clay, sandy clay, clay loam, and in some cases silty clay,
loam and silty clay loam)
 Type B (angular gravel [similar to crushed rock], silt, silt loam, sandy loam,
and in some cases clay loam and sandy clay loam)
 Type C (granular soil including gravel, sand and loamy sand)
_____ % granular _____ % cohesive _____ % silt
Page 2 of 3
NOTE about Type A: No soil is Type “A” if soil is fissured, subject to vibration,
previously disturbed, layered, dipping into the excavation on a slope of 4H:1V.
Soil Classification:
 Type A
 Type B
 Type C
Selection of Protective System:
 Sloping, Specify angle: _____
 Timber Shoring
 Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring
NOTE: Although Federal OSHA accepts the above tests in most cases,
some states do not. Check Alaska’s safety requirements for trenching
regulations.
Page 3 of 3
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 10 – TRENCHING AND EXCAVATION PROCEDURES
ATMOSPHERIC TEST RECORD Meter I.D. # __________________________________

JOB #
Note: This form shall be used for monitoring temporary enclosed spaces and for tabulating data for Confined Space Reclassification
Activity _____________________________________________________
DATE AREA TIME CO O2 H2S LEL ID
TWA CEILING STEL

CO 35 PPM 200 PPM
H2S 10 PPM 15 PPM
TAB 11 – CONFINED SPACE PROCEDURES
Confined Space Procedures
1.0 Introduction
Davis Constructors & Engineers, Inc. (Davis) established control proce-
dures to protect all personnel entering a permit-required confined space
(PRCS) and to comply with applicable regulatory standards. (29CFR
1910.146) These include planning, general precautions, evaluations of
hazards, ventilation requirements, personal protection and isolation
responsibilities.
Note: Confined Space OSHA Regulations for CFR 1926 have been revised
and fall under 1926.1201-1213. Any confined space work on this site will
follow the new regulation. A new procedure for confined space work is
currently under revision and will be available to replace this procedure
before work on project begins.
2.0 Definitions
Term Definition
Any space with a limited means of entry and egress, is
large enough to enter and perform work, and is not
Confined Space
intended for human occupancy or, has unfavorable
natural ventilation.
Is a confined space not containing or (with respect to
Non-Permit atmospheric hazards) having the potential to contain
Required Con- any hazard capable of causing death or serious physical
fined Space harm. Design or historical records are used to docu-
ment no potential hazard(s) exists.
(PRCS) A confined space with a known or potentially
hazardous atmosphere, is subject to accumulation of
Permit-Required toxic or flammable contaminants, has an oxygen-
Confined Space deficient atmosphere, engulfs hazards, inwardly sloping
walls, dangerously sloping floors, or has any other
serious safety hazard.
Flammable atmospheres are atmospheres with readings
Flammable
in excess of 10% of the lower explosive limit (LEL) for
Atmospheres
the chemical sampled.
Oxygen-deficient atmospheres are deemed to exist if the
Oxygen-Deficient
atmospheres contain less than 19.5% oxygen by
Atmospheres
volume.
Oxygen- Oxygen enriched atmospheres are deemed to exist if the
Page 1 of 4
Enriched atmospheres contain more than 23% oxygen by volume.

Atmospheres
Toxic atmospheres are atmospheres having concentra-
Toxic Atmos-
tion of airborne chemicals in excess of state or federal
pheres
exposure limits.
3.1 Employer
It’s the employer’s responsibility to train its supervisors and crafts
for the hazards of working in a confined space and the procedures
that must be followed for such work. The employer’s procedures
address general precautions, evaluation of hazards, including
ventilation requirements, personal protection requirements, etc.
3.2 Employee
It’s the employee’s responsibility to follow the confined-space entry
programs and procedures to the fullest extent possible and report
any deviations from this policy to the entry supervisor, project
safety manager, or foreman immediately.
3.3 Project Safety Manager/Competent Person

It’s the project safety manager and Competent Person
responsibility to ensure a confined space is safe to work in.
Personnel are not sent into a confined space, if any questions exist
about the safety of that work space.
3.4 Superintendent/Foreman
The superintendent uses an employee selection process ensuring
employees are physically able to perform the job. This means
they’re able to gain entry and egress and able to work with
respiratory and other required equipment.
4.0 Training
Through safety meetings and orientations employees receive periodic
training on confined-space work. It includes hazards they’re likely to
encounter, permitting procedures, personal protective equipment
Page 2 of 4
requirements, purpose and function of testing, monitoring and life

supporting system(s), and rescue procedures (including drills). It must
be clearly understood employees are not allowed to enter any confined
space without having received confined-space entry training with
documentation of training/testing on file in the jobsite office.
5.0 PRCS Pre-entry

5.1 Air Monitoring
Where work is performed by Davis the project safety manager
ensures confined spaces and vessels are steamed, flushed, or
purged of flammable or toxic atmospheres prior to entry. Once
safe entry is determined, the confined space is tagged. However,
before employees are allowed to enter any confined space, backup
monitoring must be completed by the project safety manager who
then issues a confined-space entry permit (Appendix I) and
conducts periodic monitoring throughout the duration of the
confined-space entry. The confined-space entry permit is
displayed at the entrance as long as workers are in the space.
Confined-space entries that may include welding, cutting,

respiratory protection, or have the possibility of an IDLH
(Immediate Dangerous to Life or Health) atmosphere include
continual full-time monitoring for percent of oxygen, combustibles,
and toxic fumes.
5.2 PRCS Checklist

Before entry into confined space is granted a Davis Entry Checklist
(Appendix I) is completed in detail by the foreman or competent
designee requesting entry and reviewed by the safety officer. In
addition, the Emergency Planning Procedures (Appendix I) is
reviewed by all employees involved in the confined space work
including the attendant.
5.3 PRCS Attendant

All personnel working in a confined space are advised by their
PRCS attendant or foreman to immediately evacuate if any
unusual or noxious odors develop within the confined space. A
trained PRCS attendant is posted outside the limits of the confined
space at all times employees are working inside. At no time does
the attendant enter the confined space. If trouble is observed, it’s
Page 3 of 4
the attendant’s responsibility to notify the proper personnel. If the

work is in a remote area or the employees are not constantly within
observation or hearing range, the attendant is equipped with a
two-way radio or cell. phone to summon help, if necessary. In
addition, the attendant has available and ready for use an
emergency self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA).
6.0 Chemicals and Compressed Gases

The use of any chemicals in a confined space requires the approval of the
project safety manager or project superintendent prior to their use. A
review of the MSDS is a minimum requirement prior to the approval of
use. The use of compressed gas cylinders is allowed inside the confined
space only with the special permission from the project safety manager.
7.0 Personal Protective Equipment

Suitable protective equipment is worn when entering a confined space.
Although the equipment can vary from job to job it may include
respiratory equipment, acid or caustic resistant apparel, suitable gloves,
eye and face protection, head protection, hearing protection, and foot
protection.
8.0 Rescue
Fire department dispatch is contacted prior to entry into a PRCS. The
fire department dispatch is notified of the location of entry, the number
of workers entering and any other information they require. Entry
proceeds once the dispatch verified the entry. The attendant calls the
dispatch every hour to update the status of the entry. When entry is
complete the dispatch is notified.
If there’s an emergency requiring rescue services, the attendant calls the

dispatch directly or calls 911. If the possibility exists of a highly,
flammable, or oxygen-deficient atmosphere or could develop, workers
wear a safety harness or wrist straps with lifeline attached. A method of
rescue such as a tripod is provided.
Page 4 of 4
Confined Spaces Emergency Planning and Procedures
Overview:
• Anticipated hazards
• Type of incidents
• Response plan
• Training of personnel (confined space workers, attendants, and
rescuers)
Essentials of the Plan:

• Who is responsible for rescue operation?
• Who to call off-premises and when?
• Communication: Worker to Attendant – Attendant to Rescuers
• Location and type of rescue equipment
• Special training on rescue equipment
• Lighting (Location and type)
• Medical facilities and personnel
• Power ventilation and air compressors
• Need for specially trained staff (HazMat, radiation, fire).
• Permit plan in use – special information shown (physical structure,
chemicals in use, nature of work, etc)
The Six Essentials of Rescue:

• Rescue from outside if possible
• Enter to rescue only after help arrives
• Always assume presence of an IDLH atmosphere
• Only use SCBA or SAR (P/D) with escape bottle
• Never use same air (or atmosphere) as confined space workers
• Safety harnesses and lifelines in addition to PPE
Rescue Personnel Training:

• Hands-on, repetitive, on-site
• Torches, saws, ventilation principles, fire fighting, first aid, CPR,
decontamination, spill containment, etc.
All confined space rescue and other emergencies will be provided by the UAF
Fire and Police Departments. At this time an agreement has been reached but
written documentation has not occurred.
Page 1 of 1
PRCS Entry Checklist
All applicable items shall be ‘YES’ or ‘N/A’ for the permit to be valid.
Yes No N/A
1. Procedure provided, reviewed, and enforced?
a. All job procedures reviewed, understood, and training

completed?
b. Person on site at all times to enforce all procedures?
c. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) reviewed?
2. Welding, cutting, open flame present, welding permit approved and
posted?
3. Confined space isolated?
a. Lockout/Tagout procedure followed?

b. Power sources off and locked out?
c. Electrical hazards isolated, removed, and tagged?
d. Rotating equipment locked out, removed, or disconnected?
e. Lines carrying materials to and from confined space blanked off,
section removed or locked by two valves and drained? Drain valve
locked open and tagged?
f. Contents removed and flushed?
4. Confined space atmosphere prepared and monitored?
a. Purged?
b. Flanges and access doors removed or manholes opened?
c. Continuous ventilation provided?
d. Oxygen level maintained over 19.5% but less than 23%?
e. Air monitoring equipment provided?
5. PPE provided and specific instructions giving for its use?
a. Air lines, SCBA or other approved respirators provided?

b. Safety harnesses with D-ring and life line provided?
c. Head, hearing, hand, foot and body protection provided?
d. Lighting equipment of approved type provided and grounded?
e. Fire extinguishers readily available?
f. Walking/working surfaces protected from slippage?
6. Attendant standing outside of space trained and ready to respond to
emergencies?
a. Rescue equipment provided at confined space?
b. Emergency alarms or communications available?
Supervisor Date
Supervisor Date
Supervisor Date
Page 1 of 1
Confined-Space Entry Permit

1. Location of Space
2. Description of Space
3. Employee authorizing entry 4. Date
5. Purpose of authorization
6. Entry authorized from to 7. Date
8. Authorized entrants
9. Authorized attendants(s)
Space Hazards and Controls
1. Asphyxiating: Oxygen deficiency [ ] Chemical [ ] Engulfment [ ]
2. Flammable/Explosive: Dust [ ] Chemical (specify)
3. Toxic: Chemical (specify)
4. Unauthorized Activation: Mechanical Electrical
5. The confined space shall be isolated or potential hazards controlled by:

Depressurization [ ] Purging and cleaning pipe [ ] Ventilation [ ]
Lockout/tagout [ ] Blanking/capping pipe [ ] Other (specify) [ ]
6. Rescue services/equipment are available: Onsite [ ] Outside [ ]
7. Communications equipment procedures to be used:
8. The following personal protective equipment have been assigned to, and shall be worn by
entrants:
9. Hot work [ may | shall not ] be conducted in this space. If hot work is permitted, the following
controls shall be utilized:
Page 1 of 2
Testing and Monitoring
1. The space has an oxygen content of and is [ safe | unsafe ].
2. The space has been monitored and contains the following concentrations of toxic hazards:
Carbon Monoxide Hydrogen Sulfide Methane
Other (specify)
3. The space has been tested and contains the following percentages of lower flammable limit of
flammable/explosive chemicals (specify):
4. Monitoring will be conducted: continuously[ ]or at intervals.
Authorization: All actions and conditions necessary for safe entry to, work
in, and exit from the confined space have been performed. Entry is permitted
on the date and time, and for the duration, specified above.
Time
(Signature of individual authorizing entry)
Cancellation: All entrants have exited the confined spaces and this permit is cancelled.
Time
(Signature of individual canceling entry)
Page 2 of 2
ATMOSPHERIC TEST RECORD Meter I.D. # __________________________________

UAF LIFE SCIENCE FACILITY, JOB # 10-322
Note: This form shall be used for monitoring temporary enclosed spaces and for tabulating data for Confined Space Reclassification
Activity _____________________________________________________
DATE AREA TIME CO O2 H2S LEL ID
TWA CEILING STEL

CO 35 PPM 200 PPM
H2S 10 PPM 15 PPM
TAB 11 – CONFINED SPACE PROCEDURE
Confined Space Pre-entry Checklist for Non-permit Required Spaces
This form must be completed prior to entering non-permit confined spaces.

This applies to authorized Davis Constructors & Engineers, Inc. employees as
well as subcontractors. A second person must be present during all non-
permit confined space entries.
Date: ________________
Name of person completing this checklist (print): _____________________________
Space name and location: _________________________________________________
Reason for entry into the space: ____________________________________________
1. Review the confined space policy in the Site Specific Safety Plan.
2. Verify that there have not been any changes to the space since the
hazard evaluation.
3. Answer the following questions below and proceed accordingly.
Will there be any activities conducted inside the confined space (e.g.,
welding, line breaking) or any chemicals (e.g., solvents) brought into the
confined space that could create a hazardous atmosphere inside the space?
 NO  YES If yes, Do Not Enter. Contact

Safety Department for assistance.
Are there conditions in or around this confined space that could adversely
affect anyone entering the confined space?
 NO  YES If yes, Do Not Enter. Contact

Safety Department for assistance.
If both questions were answered No:

1. Secure the site.
2. Install barriers and post warning signs.
3. Take measures to prevent any hazards on the outside of the space.
4. Control vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
5. Ensure second person is present.
Note: Any indication of an abnormal condition inside the space is cause to
evacuate the space immediately. Return this form to the Project Safety
Manager or jobsite office. Debrief personnel involved after entry.
Page 1 of 1
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 12 – LOCK OUT/TAG OUT PROGRAM
Lockout/Tagout Program
Purpose
Isolating hazardous energy to prevent sudden and unexpected energization of
machines, equipment and processes is an important component in our safety
and health program.
Authorization and affected employees will participate in the lockout / tagout

program. All other employees will be trained in lockout awareness.
Scope
This program will apply to all project personnel engaged in activities where the
release of hazardous energy is a possibility. Only lockout / tagout (LO/TO)
procedures will be allowed. Tagout procedures are prohibited and shall not be
used.
LO/TO procedures will be used whenever machines, equipment or processes

are being serviced, maintained or repaired. LO/TO procedures must also be
used when an employee must by-pass a machine safeguard to service or repair
a machine.
When LO/TO provisions cannot be met, such as in hot-tap operations, full

protection of employees through the use of additional mechanisms.
Procedure
This procedure established the minimum level of protection and ensures that
all machinery or equipment is isolated from all sources of energy until the work
I complete.
Responsibility
Appropriate employees shall be instructed in the safety significance of the
LO/TO procedure. Each new or transferred employee and other employees
whose work operations are or may be in the area shall be instructed in the use
and purpose of the procedure.
Preparation for LO / TO
Conduct and document a survey of all isolating devices for the equipment to be
locked and tagged out. More than one energy source may be involved.
Sequence
Page 1 of 2
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 12 – LOCK OUT/TAG OUT PROGRAM
1. Notify all affected employees that a LO/TO system is going to be used

and the reason. The authorized employee shall know the type and
magnitude of energy that the machine or equipment uses and shall
understand the hazards of the machine or equipment.
2. If the machine or equipment is operating, shut it down using the normal

procedure.
3. Operate the switch, valve or other energy-isolating device so that the

equipment is isolated from its energy source. Stored energy sources such
as springs, flywheels, hydraulic systems, steam, air pressure, etc. must
be dissipated by bleeding, blocking, jacking, etc. Lockout and tagout the
energy isolating devices with assigned individual locks and tags.
4. After reviewing the procedure, push or operate the start up device

(switch, valve, etc.) to make certain the equipment will not operate.
Remember to restore the controls to neutral or off after the test.
5. The equipment is now locked and tagged out.
Restoring Machines or Equipment to Normal Production Operations

1. After the servicing and/or maintenance is complete and equipment is
ready for normal operations, check the area around the machines or
equipment to ensure that no one is exposed.
2. After all tools have been removed from the machine or equipment, guards
have been reinstalled and employees are in the clear, remove all LO/TO
devices. Operate the energy-isolating devices to restore energy to the
equipment.
Procedure Involving More Than One Person

In the preceding steps, if more than one person is required to LO/TO the
equipment, each shall place his or her own personal LO/TO device on the
energy isolating device. When an energy isolating device cannot accept multiple
locks or tags, a multiple lockout device must be used. As each person no longer
needs to maintain his or her lockout protection that person will remove his or
her lock from the multiple lockout device.
All equipment shall be lock and tagged out to protect against accidental or
inadvertent operation when such operation could cause injury to personnel. Do
not attempt to operate any switch, valve or other energy-isolating device where
it is locked or tagged out.
Page 2 of 2
TAB 12: LOCK OUT/TAG OUT PROGRAM
Hazardous Energy Control Register

(Lock-out Tag-out)
Date Time Lock/Tag Location Device Secured System Primary Installer Name Primary Installer
Number Signature
Authorized Secondary Name Authorized Removal Name Authorized Removal Signature Removal Date
Date Removal
Procedure Verification By Designated
Authority Authority For Transfer of Removal Authority Superintendent or Project Safety Manager
Date
Transferred Signature
Date Time Lock/Tag Location Device Secured System Primary Installer Name Primary Installer
Number Signature
Authorized Secondary Name Authorized Removal Name Authorized Removal Signature Removal Date
Date Removal Procedure Verification By Designated

Authority Transferred Authority For Transfer of Removal Authority
Page 1 of 1
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 13 – FORKLIFT PROCEDURES
AND TRAINING
Forklift Procedures and Training
1.0 Introduction
Material handling is a significant safety concern. Numerous
possibilities for personal injury and property damage exist when
moving products and materials, if proper procedures and cautions are
not used. This information applies to all forklifts, powered-industrial
trucks, hoists, and lifting gear. This information is for training
prospective industrial-truck operators and for providing the basis for
refresher and annual retraining. OSHA reference for Powered-
Industrial Trucks is 1910.178.
2.1 Management
• Provide adequate training in safe operation of all
equipment used to move or access materials.
• Provide safe equipment to operate.
• Implement an “Out of Service” program for damaged

equipment.
• Prohibit modification of equipment except those

authorized in writing by the equipment manufacturer.
• Establish safe operating rules and procedures.
2.2 Superintendents
• Monitor safe operations of material-handling equipment.
• Ensure all equipment is safety checked daily.
• Tag “Out of Service” any damaged equipment.
• Ensure all subcontractors using our equipment are

trained (show documentation) and evaluated by Davis
Constructors and Engineers, Inc. (Davis) personnel.
Page 1 of 14
AND TRAINING
2.3 Employees
• Employees operate only equipment they’re specifically
trained and authorized to operate.
• Conduct required daily pre-use inspections.
• Report any equipment damage or missing safety gear.
• Follow all safety rules and operating procedures.
3.0 Hazards
• Falling loads.
• Overloading of equipment.
• Impact with equipment.
• Piercing of containers.
• Loading dock roll off.
• Chemical contact, battery acid.
• Fires during refueling.
4.0 Hazard Controls

• Control of equipment keys.
• Planning tasks.
• Authorized fueling and recharge areas
• Proper palletizing and stabilizing of material.
• Ensure routes of travel.
• Equipment warning lights.
• Seat belts.
Page 2 of 14
AND TRAINING
• Mounted fire extinguishers.
5.0 Pre-qualification
All candidates for powered-industrial truck (PIT) operators must meet
the following basic requirements prior to starting initial or annual
refresher training:
• Must have no adverse vision problems that cannot be corrected

by glasses or contacts.
• No adverse hearing loss that cannot be corrected with hearing

aids.
• No physical impairments that would impair safe operation of

the PIT.
• No neurological disorders affecting balance or consciousness.
• Not taking any medication affecting perception, vision, or

physical abilities.
6.0 Training
6.1 Training for Forklifts and PITs
Training is conducted by an experienced operator selected by
management. All operational training is conducted under close
supervision. All training and evaluation is completed before an
operator is permitted to use a powered-industrial truck (forklift,
etc) without continual and close supervision. See Appendix 1-
3 for Training Program, Training Outline and Operator
Evaluation.
6.2 Powered-Industrial Truck Operating Requirements

Trainees may operate a powered-industrial truck only:
• Under the direct supervision of persons, selected by

management, with knowledge, training, and experience to
train operators and evaluate their competence.
• Where such operation does not endanger the trainee or

other employees.
Page 3 of 14
AND TRAINING
6.3 Training Content

Training consists of a combination of formal instruction,
practical training (demonstrations performed by the trainer and
practical exercises performed by the trainee), and evaluation of
the operator’s performance in the workplace.
6.4 Initial Training

Powered-industrial truck operators receive initial training in the
following topics:
• Operating instructions, warning, and precautions for the

types of truck the operator will be authorized to operate.
• Differences between the truck and an automobile.
• Truck controls and instrumentation, location of controls,

what they do, and how they work.
• Engine or motor operation.
• Steering and maneuvering.
• Visibility (including restrictions due to loading).
• Fork and attachment adaptation, operation, and use

limitations.
• Vehicle capacity.
• Vehicle stability.
• Any vehicle inspection and maintenance the operator is

required to perform.
• Refueling and/or charging and recharging of batteries.
• Operating limitations.
• Any other operating instructions, warnings, or

precautions listed in the operator’s manual for the types
of vehicle the employee is being trained to operate.
Page 4 of 14
AND TRAINING
6.5 Workplace-related Topics

• Surface conditions where the vehicle will operate.
• Composition of loads to be carried and load stability.
• Load manipulation, stacking and unstacking.
• Pedestrian traffic in areas where the vehicle will be

operated.
• Narrow aisles and other restricted places where the

vehicle will be operated.
• Hazardous (classified) locations where the vehicle will be

operated.
• Ramps and other sloped surfaces that could affect the

vehicles stability.
• Closed environments and other areas where insufficient

ventilation or poor vehicle maintenance could cause a
build up of carbon monoxide or diesel exhaust.
• Other unique or potentially hazardous environmental

conditions in the workplace that could affect safe
operation.
6.6 Refresher Training and Evaluation

Refresher training, including an evaluation of the effectiveness
of that training, is conducted to ensure the operator has
knowledge and skills needed to operate the powered-industrial
truck safely. Refresher training in relevant topics is provided to
the operator when:
• The operator is observed operating the vehicle in an

unsafe manner.
• The operator is involved in an accident or near-miss

incident.
• The operator receives an evaluation revealing the operator

is not operating the truck safely.
Page 5 of 14
AND TRAINING
• The operator is assigned to drive a different type of truck.
• A condition in the workplace changes in a manner that

could affect safe operation of the truck.
• Once every three (3) years and evaluation is conducted of

each powered-industrial truck operator’s performance.
7.0 Safe Operating Procedures (SOP) and Rules

• Only authorized and trained personnel will operate PITs.
• All PITs are equipped with a headache rack, fire extinguisher,

rotating beacon, back-up alarm, and seat belts. Seat belts are
worn at all times by the operator.
• The operator performs daily pre- and post-trip inspections.
• Any safety defects (such as hydraulic fluid leaks, defective

brakes, steering, lights, or horn, and/or missing fire extin-
guisher, lights, seat belt, or back-up alarm) is reported for
immediate repair or have the PIT taken “Out of Service.”
• Operators follow the proper recharging or refueling safety

procedures.
• Loads are tilted back and carried not more than six inches from
the ground. Loads restricting operator’s vision are transported
backwards.
• PITs travel no faster than 5 mph or faster than a normal walk.
• Hard hats are worn by PIT operators at all times.
• Operators sound the horn and use extreme caution when

meeting pedestrians, making turns, and cornering.
• Passengers may not ride on any portion of a PIT. Only the

operator rides PITs.
• If PITs are used as a man lift, an appropriate man-lift platform

(care with standard rails and toe-boards) is used.
Page 6 of 14
AND TRAINING
• Aisles are maintained free from obstructions, marked, and wide

enough (six foot minimum) for vehicle operation.
• Lift capacity is marked on all PITs. Operator assures load does

not exceed rated weight limits.
• When unattended PITs are turned off, forks lowered to the

ground, and parking brake applied.
• All PITs (with exception of pallet jacks) are equipped with a

multi-purpose dry chemical fire extinguisher (minimum rating
is 2A:10B:C).
• Operators are instructed to report all accidents, regardless of

fault or severity, to management. Management conducts an
accident investigation.
7.1 Changing and Charging Storage Batteries

• Battery charging installations are located in areas
designated for the purpose.
• Facilities are provided for flushing and neutralizing

spilled electrolyte, for fire protection, for protecting
charging apparatus from damage by trucks and for
adequate ventilation for dispersal of fumes from gassing
batteries.
• A conveyor, overhead hoist, or equivalent material

handling equipment is provided for handling batteries.
• Reinstalled batteries are properly positioned and secured

in the truck.
• A carboy tilter or siphon is provided for handling

electrolyte.
• When charging batteries, acid is poured into water; water

is not poured into acid.
• Trucks are properly positioned and brake applied before

attempting to change or charge batteries.
Page 7 of 14
AND TRAINING
• Care is taken to assure vent caps are functioning. The

battery (or compartment) cover(s) is open to dissipate
heat.
• Smoking is prohibited in charging areas.
• Precautions are taken to prevent open flames, sparks, or

electric arcs in battery charging areas.
• Tool and other metallic objects are kept away from the top
of uncovered batteries.
7.2 Operations
• If at anytime a powered-industrial truck is found to need
repair, is defective, or in any way unsafe, the truck is
taken out of service until it’s restored to safe operating
condition.
• Trucks are not driven up to anyone standing in front of a

bench or other fixed object.
• No person is allowed to stand or pass under the elevated

portion of any truck—whether loaded or empty.
• Unauthorized personnel are not permitted to ride on

powered-industrial trucks.
• Arms or legs are not placed between the uprights of the

mast or outside the running lines of the truck.
• When a powered-industrial truck is left unattended, load

engaging means are fully lowered, controls are neutra-
lized, power shut off, and brakes set. Wheels are blocked,
if the truck is parked on an incline.
• A safe distance is maintained from the edge of ramps or

platforms while on any elevated dock, or platform, or
freight car. Trucks are not used for any activity other
than what it was designed for. Follow manufac-
turer’s procedures.
• There’s sufficient headroom under overhead installation,

lights, pipes, sprinkler systems, etc.
Page 8 of 14
AND TRAINING
• An overhead guard is used as protection against falling

objects. It should be noted that an overhead guard is
intended to offer protection from the impact of small
packages, boxes, bagged material, etc. representative of
the job application. But, not to withstand the impact of a
falling capacity load.
• A load backrest extension is used whenever necessary to

minimize the possibility of the load (or part of it) falling
backwards.
• Trucks are not parked in a way to block fire aisles, access

to stairways, or fire equipment.
•
7.3 Traveling
• All traffic regulations are observed including authorized
speed limits. A safe distance is maintained approximately
three truck lengths from the truck ahead, and the truck
is kept under control at all times.
• The right of way is yielded to ambulances, fire trucks, or

other vehicles in emergency situations.
• Other trucks traveling in the same direction at inter-

sections, blind spots, or other dangerous locations are not
passed.
• The driver is required to slow down and sound the horn

at cross aisle and other locations where vision is
obstructed. If the load being carried obstructs forward
view, the driver is required to travel with the load trailing.
• Railroad tracks are crossed diagonally wherever possible.

Parking closer than 8 feet from the center of railroad
tracks is prohibited.
• The driver is required to look in the direction of and keep

a clear view of the path of travel.
• Grades are ascended and descended slowly. When

ascend-ing or descending grades in excess of 10 percent
Page 9 of 14
AND TRAINING
loaded trucks are driven with the load upgrade. On all

grades the load and load-engaging means are tilted back
if applicable, and raised only as far as necessary to clear
the road surface.
• Under all travel conditions the truck is operated at a

speed permitting it to be brought to a stop in a safe
manner.
• Stunt driving and horseplay are not permitted.
• The driver is required to slow down for wet and slippery

floors.
• Dock board or bridge plates are properly secured before

driven over. Dock board or bridge plates are driven over
carefully and slowly and their rated capacity never
exceeded.
• Running over loose objects on the roadway is avoided.
• While negotiating turns speed is reduced to a safe level by

means of turning the hand steering wheel in a smooth,
sweeping motion. Except when maneuvering at very low
speed, the hand steering wheel is turned at a moderate,
even rate.
7.4 Loading
• Only stable or safely arranged loads are handled.
Caution is exercised when handling off-center loads
which cannot be centered.
• Only loads within the rated capacity of the truck are

handled.
• The long or high (multiple-tiered) loads which may affect

capacity are adjusted.
• Trucks equipped with attachments are operated as

partially loaded trucks when not handling a load.
Page 10 of 14
AND TRAINING
• A load engaging means is placed under the load as far as

possible; the mast is carefully tilted backward to stabilize
the load.
• Extreme care is used when tilting the load forward or

backward particularly when high tiering. Tilting forward
with load engaging means elevated is prohibited except to
pick up a load. An elevated load is not tilted forward
except when the load is in a deposit position over a rack
or stack. When stacking or tiering, only enough
backward tilt to stabilize the load is used.
7.5 Fueling Safety

• Fuel tanks are not filled while the engine is running.
Spillage is avoided.
• Spillage of oil or fuel is carefully washed away or

completely evaporated and the fuel tank cap replaced
before restarting engine.
• No truck operates with a leak in the fuel system!
• Open flames are not used for checking electrolyte level in

storage batteries or gasoline level in fuel tanks.
7.6 Maintenance of Powered-Industrial Trucks

• Any power-operated industrial truck not in safe operating
condition is removed from service. All repairs are made
by authorized personnel.
• Those repairs to the fuel and ignition system of industrial

trucks which involve fire hazards are conducted only in
locations designated for such repairs.
• Trucks needing repair to the electrical system have the

battery disconnected prior to such repairs.
• All industrial truck parts are replaced only with parts

equivalent to those used in the original design so safety is
maintained.
Page 11 of 14
AND TRAINING
• Industrial trucks are not altered in ways changing the

relative positions of the various parts from what they were
when originally received from the manufacturer. Nor, are
they altered either by the addition of extra parts not
provided by the manufacturer or by the elimination of any
parts. Additional counter-weighting of fork trucks is not
done unless approved by the truck manufacturer.
• Industrial trucks are examined before placing in service,

and are not placed in service if the examination shows
any condition adversely affecting the safety of the vehicle.
Such examinations are made at least daily. Where
industrial trucks are used on a round-the-clock basis,
they’re examined prior to each shift. Defects found are
immediately reported and corrected.
• When the temperature of any part of any truck is found to

be in excess of its normal operating temperature (creating
a hazardous condition) the vehicle is removed from
service and not returned until the cause for overheating is
eliminated.
• Industrial trucks are kept in a clean condition, free of lint,

excess oil, and grease. Non-combustible agents are used
for cleaning trucks. Low flash point (below 100 deg. F.)
solvents are not used. High flash point (at or above 100
deg. F.) solvents may be used.
8.0 Safe Operation Procedure for Charging LPG Tank

• No smoking.
• Move LPG PIT outside for refueling.
• Turn off PIT.
• LPG tanks are removed in following order:
1. Shut off service valve.
2. Disconnect tank from hose.
3. Unbuckle and remove tank from bracket.
Page 12 of 14
AND TRAINING
• LPG tanks are replaced in to following order:
1. Place tanks in bracket and re-buckle.
2. Reconnect hose to tank and tighten firmly.
3. Open valve slowly and assure proper seal.
NOTE: Federal law prohibits dispensing an improper fuel type into

any vehicle or into a non-approved fuel container.
8.1 In Case of LPG Leaks or Tank Rupture

• DO NOT start or move the PIT.
• If fuel hose is leaking, close valve immediately and place

PIT “Out of Service” until repaired.
• If tank ruptures, warn others to immediately leave the

area (at least 50 feet), and notify management. Do not re-
enter the area until cleared by management.
9.0 Powered-Industrial Truck Pre-use Checklist

A check of the following items (as applicable) is conducted by the
operator prior to use each shift:
• Lights
• Horn
• Brakes
• Leaks
• Warning beacon
• Back-up warning alarm
• Fire extinguisher
If any deficiencies are noted, the unit is placed “Out of Service” until
the problem is corrected. Additionally, it’s the operator’s
Page 13 of 14
AND TRAINING
responsibility to notify the immediate supervisor and fill out a

maintenance request. See Daily and Monthly inspection
checklists.
Page 14 of 14
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 13: FORKLIFT PROCEDURES
AND TRAINING
Forklift Training Program

Davis Constructors & Engineers, Inc. (Davis) ensures each powered-
industrial truck (forklift) operator is competent to operate. Prior to
permitting an employee to operate a forklift, Davis ensures the employee
successfully completes the training outlined below.
Trainers
Training and evaluation of forklift operators is conducted by persons with
the knowledge, training, and experience to train forklift operators and
evaluate their competence.
Initial Training
Forklift operators receive initial training, are evaluated, and found
competent in the following topics:
1. Forklift related topics:

a. Operating instructions, warnings, and precautions for the types
of forklift the operator will be authorized to operate,
b. Differences between the forklift and an automobile,
c. Forklift controls and instrumentation: where they are, what
they do, and how they work,
d. Engine or motor operation,
e. Steering and maneuvering,
f. Visibility (including restrictions due to loading),
g. Fork and attachment adaptation, operation, and use
limitations,
h. Vehicle capacity,
i. Vehicle stability,
j. Any vehicle inspection and maintenance the operator is
required to perform,
k. Refueling and/or charging of batteries,
l. Operating limitations,
m. Any other operating instructions, warnings, or precautions
listed in the operator’s manual for the types of vehicle the
employee is being trained to operate.
2. Workplace-related topics:
a. Surface conditions where the vehicle operates,
b. Composition of loads carried and load stability,
Page 1 of 3
AND TRAINING
c. Load manipulation, stacking, and unstacking,
d. Pedestrian traffic in areas where the vehicle operates,
e. Narrow aisles and other restricted places where the vehicle
operates,
f. Hazardous (classified) locations where the vehicle operates,
g. Ramps and other sloped surfaces that could affect the vehicle’s
stability,
h. Closed environments and other areas where insufficient
ventilation or poor vehicle maintenance could cause a buildup
of carbon monoxide or diesel exhaust,
i. Other unique or potentially hazardous environmental
conditions in the workplace that could affect safe operation.
Refresher Training and Evaluation

Refresher training in relevant topics is provided to the operator when:
1. The operator is observed operating the forklift in an unsafe manner,

2. The operator is involved in an accident or near-miss incident,
3. The operator received an evaluation revealing he/she isn’t operating
the forklift safely,
4. The operator is assigned to drive a different type of forklift, or
5. A condition in the workplace changes in a manner that could affect
safe operation of the truck.
Additionally, an evaluation of each forklift operator’s performance is

conducted at least once every three (3) years.
Avoid Duplicate Training

If an operator previously received training meeting the requirements out-
lined above and can show proof of that training, then additional training is
not required. Instead, such operator must be evaluated and found
competent to operate the forklift safely.
Subcontractor Training and Evaluation

A subcontractor’s employee driving a Davis forklift must be competent to do
so. If the subcontractor’s employee has not had forklift training, Davis may
provide the training. If a subcontractor employee gives Davis
documentation showing he/she received forklift training on the type of
forklift to be operated, the employee may operate Davis equipment without
further training. However, Davis may choose to evaluate the employee’s
Page 2 of 3
AND TRAINING
capabilities first. Documentation will be maintained in the jobsite safety
files.
Recordkeeping
Davis will certify each forklift operator is trained and evaluated as required
by this program.
Each jobsite maintains a:

1. List of approved forklift trainers/evaluators including the:
a. name of the trainer,
b. type of equipment authorized,
c. date approved.
2. General training log for classes held,
3. List of approved forklift operators including the:

a. Name of the operator,
b. Name of the evaluator,
c. Date of evaluation,
d. Type of forklift the operator is authorized to operate.
These lists are forwarded periodically to the Safety Coordinator for the
master training log.
Page 3 of 3
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 14 – AERIAL LIFT AND
SCISSOR LIFT PROCEDURE
Aerial Lift and Scissor Lift Procedure

This safety procedure provides minimum requirements for use of
aerial and scissor lifts. This work instruction applies to all aerial
lifts including extensible and articulating boom platforms, aerial
ladders, vertical towers, vertical mast lifts, and scissor lifts. This
procedure applies to all employees and subcontractors covered by the
UAF Life Science Facility, Site-Specific Safety Plan (SSSP).
General responsibilities for SSSP implementation are stated in Tab 4 –
Safety Policy and Procedures of this document. Additional management,
staff, specific to this topic is stated in this procedure.
2.1 Superintendent and or Project Safety Manager

• Designate a Competent Person(s) to conduct all aerial lift
training and inspection using the form/procedures found in
appendices.
• Ensure only approved lifts are used.
• Determine whether egress and access from elevated lifts are
necessary and document approval or disapproval for each
specific request.
2.2 Supervisors
• Ensure all employees operating aerial devices are trained in
accordance with this SSSP and relevant national legislation and
other regulatory requirements.
• Ensure approved lifts are used and that they’re properly
inspected and maintained.
• Monitor aerial and scissor lift operations to assure compliance
with this safety plan.
2.3 Employees
• Successfully complete the aerial lift operator training required
by this SSSP prior to operating an aerial or scissor lift.
Page 1 of 11
• Operate aerial lifts in accordance with training received,

manufacturer’s recommendations, and this SSSP.
• Promptly report defective or malfunctioning equipment and any

incident involving the use of aerial or scissor lifts to the
supervisor.
3.0 Definitions
Term Definition
A manually or self-propelled aerial device consisting of a
single or multiple section extensible ladder with a
Aerial Ladder
personnel platform.
Self-propelled elevating work platform positioned by

telescoping boom, articulating boom, or vertical mast
primarily designed as a personnel carrier attached to a
Aerial Lift
rotating or non-rotating base that permits elevation of the
free or outer end.
See Paragraph 4.2

Approved Lifts
A boom with two or more hinged sections that extends by
Articulating Boom unhinging.
One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable

hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which
are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees,
Competent Person
and who has the authorization to take prompt corrective
measures to eliminate hazards.
An aerial device with a telescopic boom and personnel

Extensible Boom
platform attachment.
Platform
A fall-protection system that prevents the user from falling
any distance. The system is comprised of a full-body
harness, along with an anchorage, connectors, and other
Fall Restraint necessary equipment. The system prevents and/or
restrains the user from reaching the open edge of the
structure or platform.
An aerial device designed for work on energized electrical

Insulated Aerial Lift lines and apparatus.
Page 2 of 11
Any vehicle mounted, manually propelled, or self-propelled

device, extensible or articulating, or both, designed to
Lift(s) position personnel. This term is also used as an
abbreviation for aerial devices and aerial platforms
including aerial lifts and scissor lifts.
A qualified person who controls the movement of the lift.
Lift Operator
Any personnel-carrying device (e.g. basket or bucket),
Platform which is a component of an aerial device.
A system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a

working level. It includes anchorage, connectors, a full-
Personal Fall body harness, and may include a lanyard, deceleration
device, lifeline, or a suitable combination of these.
A self-propelled elevating work platform utilizing a scissor

Scissor Lift type framework for positioning the platform vertically and
is primarily designed as a personnel carrier.
4.0 Procedure
Only trained, qualified, and authorized employees are to operate lifts
and, where necessary, the employees are named in the work plan.
Plan the work! Inspect work area for hazards, such as overhead and
ground-level obstructions and electrical hazards, other lifts,
conflicting work operations, traffic, potholes, and wind speeds above
manufacturer limits. Do not operate above 30 mph (45 kmh).
Always use approved lifts. See paragraph 4.4.
Maintain required distances for work near or on live electrical lines.

See paragraph 4.5.
Always select the proper type of lift based on the intended use.

Aerial lifts should only be operated on firm, level surfaces. Lifts
will not be driven on grades, side slopes, or ramps with slopes
exceeding manufacturer’s incline limits.
If the machine has a separate power source to operator the

movement of the base (e.g. truck mounted) vs. the movement of
Page 3 of 11
the platform, the vehicle engine must be shut off and the key
removed before using the platform.
Truck mounted aerial devices are lowered and secured prior

to driving the truck or vehicle on the highway.
When so equipped, outriggers or stabilizers and extendable

axels are fully extended and placed on firm level surfaces or
mats. Outrigger or stabilizer mats and pads are:
o At least three (3) times larger in surface area than the

float they support,
o Flat where the outrigger or stabilizer contacts it to prevent
the lift from sliding off, and
o Strong enough to withstand the loads imposed by the
outrigger.
Lift controls are operated in a smooth, controlled manner

at all times. Avoid sudden starts, stops, or change in direction.
Never jam the controls from one travel direction to another.
Keep all body parts inside the machine while moving

equipment.
When boom lifts must be moved on an incline, the boom is

always positioned uphill of the wheels and the wheels chocked,
if it’s parked on an incline. See manufacturer instructions for
incline limits.
Never use the boom to push or pull the aerial lift base or any
other object.
Boom and basket load limits specified by the manufacturer are

not exceeded.
Care is taken to prevent electric cords, rope, and hoses from

becoming entangled in the aerial platform. Only the tools
and materials required to perform the work are permitted in the
platform and must fit completely inside the basket. Small tools
and materials are kept in a properly secured container on
the floor of the platform.
Page 4 of 11
Supporting equipment, material, or rigging loads from the

boom, handrails, or platform is prohibited.
If lift or supporting assembly becomes caught or otherwise

prevented from normal motion by adjacent structures or
obstacles, and control reversal does not free the lift, all
personnel are removed from the platform before additional
attempts are made to free the lift using the ground controls.
A fire extinguisher of not less than 5 BC rating must be

available and secured on the platform of lifts.
4.2 Fall Protection

Employees must wear a personal fall-protection harness and
lanyard which is attached to a manufacturer-approved
attachment point in the platform or basket when working from
a lift. If a manufacturer-approved attachment point is not
provided, a Qualified Person determines the proper anchor
point location specific to each type of lift. It’s recommended
that lanyards used for lifts be as short as possible to restrain an
employee from being thrown from the platform.
Guardrails are in place and access gates closed while lift is

in use.
Employees always stand firmly on the floor of the basket and do

not sit or climb on the edge of the basket or use planks,
ladders, or other objects in the platform to gain a work position
or as a climbing device to access other work levels.
The floor of the platforms must be kept clear of trash, debris,

etc.
Lifts are not moved when the platform is elevated with

personnel in the basket unless:
 the travel surface is level,
 the equipment is designed for that purpose, and
 manufacturer’s instructions allow it.
For aerial lifts the platform is below horizontal for traveling.

The operator limits travel speed according to conditions of
ground surface, congestion, visibility, slope, location of
Page 5 of 11
personnel, and other factors that could cause collisions or

injuries.
4.3 Protection of Personnel in Immediate Work Area

The counterweight swing radius of articulating or extensible
boom lifts is barricaded to prevent crushing injuries to
employees on the ground.
When the lift is operated in elevated positions the area

underneath the work is barricaded.
Elevated platforms are attended at all times or lowered to grade.
When lowering elevated platforms the operator must inspect

the area around the machine to ensure no personnel,
equipment, or obstructions are in the path of travel. If the area
in the path of movement is not visible, i.e., in a cloud of steam
or fog, the basket is not lowered until vision is restored or the
area is otherwise determined to be clear.
A spotter is utilized whenever the operator cannot see the

machine base during movement of the base. A spotter is used
when operating lifts in close proximity to obstructions,
operating equipment, vehicles, or personnel.
4.4 Approved Aerial/Scissor Lifts
4.4.1 General Requirements

Only lifts meeting Davis and regulatory requirements are used.
Articulating boom and extensible boom platforms must have

both upper (platform level) and lower (ground level) controls.
Lower controls override upper controls but are not operated
unless permission was obtained from the employee in the lift,
except in case of emergency.
All lift platform controls have two points of activation contact

(normally a foot pedal and control lever) by the operator to
activate the directional controls (horizontal and vertical
movement). With a time-delay feature the delay is set to no
more than three (3) seconds. Any other manufacturer supplied
interlocks are operational.
Page 6 of 11
Lifts have:
• Top rails, mid-rails, and toe boards unless completely
enclosed on the sides,
• Anchor points for fall-arrest equipment (see TAB ### in
SSSP), and
• Provision for storage of the equipment manual and the
manual are available on each machine.
Scissor lifts have provision for manually blocking the lift

open during inspection and maintenance operations.
Electric- or propane-powered lifts are considered for indoor

applications.
Gasoline- or diesel-powered lifts are only used outdoors or in

well-ventilated areas.
Modifications, attachments, or use for purposes other than as

designed are approved in writing by the manufacturer prior to
use.
Only lifts approved for use in hazardous locations and

atmospheres such as areas with explosive vapors, dust, etc. are
used in defined hazardous locations.
4.5 Elevated Lift Egress and Access

Exiting and accessing an elevated platform is permissible only
when it’s determined to be the safest means of access to an
elevated work area. This determination is documented and has
prior approval by the site manager or the site safety supervisor.
When authorized the following minimum procedures are used

to access or exit an elevated platform.
• Obtain documented approval from site manager or site

safety supervisor.
• The platform is attended at all times by a lift operator
while any personnel are exiting or accessing an elevated
platform.
• 100 percent tie-off is maintained while exiting or entering
the platform. The employee secures a second lanyard to
Page 7 of 11
an anchorage point outside the basket before

disconnecting his lanyard from the lift and exiting. When
re-enter-ing secure second lanyard to the lift only after
both feet are on the floor of the basket then release the
lanyard tied to outside anchorage.
• The floor of the basket is at the same level as the
structure to be accessed.
• At no time do employees exit or enter over the lift
controls.
• Access gates are utilized if at all possible to exit or enter
the elevated platform.
• If the manufacturer prohibits egress and access of an
elevated lifting platform, such practices are prohibited
unless written approval is obtained from the
manufacturer.
4.6 Fueling and Recharging Equipment

The equipment is lowered to grade, parked, and shut down
prior to refueling or battery charging.
Fueling and battery charging is done in a well-ventilated

area free from flame, sparks, or other hazards that may cause
a fire or explosion because of the fuel or the hydrogen generated
from battery charging.
Follow all manufacturer requirements for fueling or charging

batteries.
For battery charging connect charger to battery prior to turning

it on. Turn the charger off prior to removing charger leads.
Wear appropriate PPE while fueling or charging batteries.
4.7 Inspections
All lifts are inspected by a competent person:
• Upon arrival at a jobsite and
• Quarterly or every 200 hours, whichever comes first.
Lifts must have visual inspections performed by the operator

prior to use.
Page 8 of 11
Defective equipment is tagged out-of-service and is immediately

removed from service.
4.7.1 Visual Pre-use Inspection

Prior to use all aerial lifts are inspected using a pre-
shift inspection log sheet.
The subsequent operator using the lift during the same

shift ensures a pre-shift inspection was completed prior
to use.
Lift controls are tested prior to each use to determine

whether they’re in safe working condition. The ground
controls are checked first for those units with ground
controls.
Visual inspection items include the following:

• Controls plainly and legibly marked as to their
function,
• Evidence that safety devices and interlocks are
operational,
• Personal protective equipment for operator and
riders, e.g. fall protection, gloves,
• Hydraulic system for tight connections, hose
damage, and leaks,
• Cables and wiring,
• Loose or missing parts,
• Legible warning placards and decals (replace
defective placards or decals prior to equipment
use),
• Outriggers, stabilizers, and extensible axles,
• Guardrail systems and gate latches,
• Other items recommended by manufacturer.
4.7.2 Documented Periodic Inspection

A documented periodic inspection is performed by a
competent person.
**All equipment coming on the site, whether rental, Davis
owned or subcontractor owned shall be subject to the
following criteria. Equipment not in compliance will not be
Page 9 of 11
allowed to be used on the site for any activity. The required

elements are:
1. A legible operating manual complete with
maintenance requirements;
2. daily and quarterly inspection forms;
3. and a completed inspection form filled out by
the equipment vendor or owner immediately
prior to delivery.
• When a lift is delivered to a site,
• At least quarterly or every 200 hours of operation
(whichever comes first), and
• After any incident involving the lift.
4.8 Maintenance
A preventive maintenance program is established ensuring
manufacturer maintenance requirements are met. Maintenance
personnel assist with periodic inspections.
Only qualified personnel perform repairs on lifts.
Any problems or malfunctions affecting safe operations are

repaired and functionally tested before use.
Properly support booms, extended scissor sections, etc., during

maintenance operations on the hydraulic systems. Follow
lockout procedures.
All repairs are documented.
5.0 Operator Qualification and Training

The aerial and scissor lift qualification for lift operators includes
training and a skills demonstration.
5.1 Training
A valid motor vehicle license is used as proof of adequate vision
and is substituted for the vision-screening requirement on the
medical questionnaire.
Lift operators are trained by a designated Competent Person.

Manufacturer representatives are recognized as being
Page 10 of 11
competent on their equipment and are considered Competent

Persons to satisfy the requirements of this work instruction.
As a part of the training, prospective operators must review t

operations manual, the site specific safety requirement for each
lift they need to qualify for.
Lift operators may require additional training when:

• assigned to a different type or model lift
• has not been operating safely, or
• is involved in a lift-related accident and/or incident
5.2 Operator Skills Demonstration:

The skills portion of this procedure is designed to verify
the prospective operator possesses the actual skills
required to operate each type of aerial or scissor lift.
The exercise is performed with the exact type of

equipment the prospective operator may be authorized to
operate.
A designated Competent Person administers the practical

skills portion of this procedure in a safe environment
and under controlled conditions.
Skills demonstration includes inspecting the lift, starting

/stopping, raising/lowering, where applicable rotating
/extending/retracting the boom, and moving the lift from
one location to another.
The Competent Person documents completion of the

operators skills exercise by informing the Project Safety
Manager in writing. These records will be maintained in
the Project Safety Office.
Page 11 of 11
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 15 – LADDER SAFETY PROGRAM
LADDER SAFETY PROGRAM
Purpose
To set forth rules and regulations that will give direction in the building of ladders
that not only meet Federal and State OSHA regulations but also provide a safe
access and work area for Davis’ employees.
Background
Falls from ladders account for a very large number of injuries and deaths in the
construction industry each year. It is the goal of Davis to eliminate these hazards
from our projects.
Procedure
Ladders are used on most construction projects. They may be fixed or portable
and be either manufactured or job-made. Ladders can be made of wood,
aluminum, steel, fiberglass or a combination of these materials.
The regulations covering the construction, components and use of ladders are
contained in OSHA (federal/State) Standards and ANSI Standards A14.l, A14.2,
and Al4.3, and they should be referred to for complete details and specifications.
Ladder safety criteria

1. All ladders must be in good condition without damage.
2. Stepladders shall be used only in the full open position and never be leaned
up against something and used as an extension ladder.
3. All other types of ladders, except for some special fixed ladders, must be
used in a position that is no less than one-fourth the distance from the
ladder base to the top support.
4. Straight ladders shall have safety feet or be blocked or scabbed to prevent

slippage, be tied off or otherwise secured at the top and extend at least 3’
above the level they are accessing if it is a roof, floor or other elevated area.
5. Aluminum and steel ladders shall not be used when electrical power
sources are present.
6. Personnel should always face the ladder when they are using it and they
should use both hands while climbing.
Page 1 of 6
7. If materials are needed for work tasks, they should be placed in a work belt
or be raised to the work point using ropes or cables.
8. Personnel should clean their shoes before they climb a ladder.
9. Ladders should not be placed in front of doors or other devices that may be
moved into the ladder.
10. The maximum length of a single cleat ladder must not exceed 30’.
11. Permanent fixed ladders over 20’ in length should be equipped with safety
cages (121-5(j)). They may also require platforms at twenty-foot intervals.
12. The minimum standards for job made ladders are:

• Side rails on single cleat ladder up 16’ should be made of 2” x 4”
lumber. Those over l6’up to the maximum limit of 30’ should be 3” x 6”
lumber.
• Side rails and midrails on double cleat ladders up to 12’ should be made
of 2” x 4” lumber. Those over l2’up the maximum of 24’ should 2 x 6”
lumber.
• Cleats should be made from 2” x 4” lumber, be spaced at 12” intervals
and be neither less than 15” wide nor more than 20” wide.
Page 2 of 6
LADDER PLACEMENT
• Feet shall be placed on a substantial base and the area around the top and
bottom kept clear.
• Pitch shall be 1/4 of the working length.
• Side rails shall extend 36 inches above the landing or grab rails provided.
• Ladders shall be tied, blocked or otherwise secured to prevent their being
displaced.
• Ladders shall not be used in a horizontal position as platforms, runways, or
scaffolds
Page 3 of 6
CLEATS
Cleats shall be inset into the edges of the side rails V2 inch, or filler blocks used
between the cleats.
Cleats shall be secured with three 10d common wire nails (or equivalent). Double
headed nails shall not be used.
Cleats shall be spaced 12 inches top to top.
When using ¾” thick ________________________________________________

Cleats, the width shall Width
be determined by the Length of Cleat (inches) (inches)
length of the cleat as Up to and including 20 ……………………………………………….... 3
indicated at the right. Over 20 and up to and including 30………………………………… 3 ¾
Species of Wood Acceptable for ¾’ Thick Cleats
Oregon Ash Western Larch

Pumpkin Ash Locust
White Ash Hard Maple
Beech Red Maple
Birch Red Oak
Rock Elm White Oak
Soft Elm Pecan
Hackberry Persimmon
Hickory Southern Yellow Pine
Holly Tamarack
Page 4 of 6
UAF Life Science Facility 2010100LRF
Site Specific Safety Plan 10-322 TAB 15– LADDER SAFETY PROGRAM
SINGLE CLEAT LADDER
Single cleat ladders, for use by 24 or less employees, shall not exceed 30 feet in
length.
Width shall be between 15 and 20 inches at the top and side rails shall be
parallel or flared top to bottom not more than 1/4 inch for each two feet of
length.
2 x 4 inch lumber shall be used for side rails up to 16 feet long; 3 x 6 inch
lumber shall be used for ladders 16 to 30 feet long.
Page 5 of 6
UAF Life Science Facility 2010100LRF
Site Specific Safety Plan 10-322 TAB 15– LADDER SAFETY PROGRAM
DOUBLE CLEAT LADDER
Double cleat ladders shall be provided for 25 or more employees or tvvo way
traffic and shall not exceed 24 feet in length.
Side and middle rails shall be 2 x 4 inch lumber up to 12 feet in length and 2 x
6 inch lumber from 12 to 24 feet in length.
Page 6 of 6
TAB 16 – RESPIRATORY PROTECTION PLAN
Respiratory Protection Plan
1.0 Introduction
The Respiratory Protection Plan described in this document is intended
to conform to the current OSHA Regulations, 29 CFR 1910.134.
The law states a written Respiratory Protection Plan must be established

by the employer for selection and use of respirators, for use at existing or
potentially hazardous or toxic work sites, or for any asbestos abatement
work. The Respiratory Protection Plan includes a specifically mandated
11-point program. This 11-point program was used as an outline for a
written Respiratory Protection Plan, as described in the following
paragraphs.
2.0 Program
2.1 Selection and Use of Respirators
Appropriate types of administrative and engineering controls are
used to reduce the levels of exposure to hazardous and toxic
materials before selecting respirators. These controls may include
establishing policies such as appropriate air monitoring of areas
prior to entering, using wet techniques for dust control, and
effective use of ventilation, negative air machines, enclosures, or
sprays, and wind direction when applicable.
When such controls are not feasible or the containment level after
use of controls is still potentially above the permissible exposure
level, appropriate respiratory protection is provided by Davis
Constructors & Engineers, Inc. (Davis) and used by the employee.
Employees are required to sign a respirator fit test (Appendix 2)
and training form (Appendix 4) stating they’ve read and
understand this program prior to using respiratory equipment.
The respirator protection program is administered by the Safety

Coordinator or a designee. This includes proper use, fit testing of
respirators, training programs, and recordkeeping.
Page 1 of 8
2.2 Respiratory Selection

Respiratory equipment is selected based on the hazards the worker
may be exposed to. This selection is based on the criteria found in
ANSI Z88.2. Both personal and environmental air monitoring is
performed on a level, intensity, and schedule sufficient for initial
selection of respiratory equipment and to either upgrade or
downgrade as necessary during the course of the work.
All respiratory equipment selected conforms to National Institute

for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) guidelines and will
retain NIOSH approvals. Respirators include the following
information:
• an assigned identification number,
• a label identifying the type of hazard the unit is designed to
protect against and,
• information concerning the limitations and approved com-
ponent parts for this type of unit.
2.3 Training in the Use of Respirators

All employees using or who may use respirators are properly
trained. Training addresses selection of the respirator, seal
checking the face piece, proper use of the respirator in the
situation, hazards anticipated, inspection and maintenance of the
respirator, cleaning and disinfecting, and storage techniques.
Most of these topics are covered in subsequent sections of this
plan.
Training is documented (Appendix 4) and made a part of each

employee’s permanent records. The program also includes formal
qualitative-fit testing using amyl acetate and/or irritant smoke
before using a particular type of respirator. Each employee
completes a fit-test form upon completion of his or her fit test
(Appendix 2). Employees are allowed to wear the unit in an
uncontaminated area for at least 30 minutes before using them in
a contaminated area. Fit tests, medical determinations and other
records related to the respiratory protect-ion program are kept by
the health and safety department for the period of time required by
regulation.
Page 2 of 8
2.4 Respirator Assignment

Whenever possible employees are assigned their own respirator.
They mark their unit with a unique number to use and be
responsible for the unit for the duration of a specific project or for
the life of the unit, if appropriate. This tends to cause employees
to take better care of the unit and do a better job of cleaning and
maintaining it. It also prevents germs from colds, flu, etc. from
passing from one individual to another.
If individual assignment of units is not possible, the units are

thoroughly cleaned and disinfected by each person immediately
after using the unit and by the next person before using it.
When different types of respirators including different brands,

sizes, or basic types (supplied vs. air purified) are used, the worker
receives brief instructions on the use of the different respirator and
undergoes and passes a qualitative-fit test. A card is issued to
each person telling what respirator they’re assigned and fit tested
for.
2.5 Respiratory Cleaning and Disinfecting

Respirators are cleaned after each day’s use. The filter cartridges
are disposed of after each day’s use or more often if required by the
site safety person or as the situation dictates. The respirators are
rinsed off in the shower or in the washbasin with the headbands
removed, depending on the type of respirator. The entire unit is
cleaned in hot, soapy water (less than 120 degrees F). A pliable
hand brush is used if the unit is exceptionally dirty. The unit is
rinsed in clean, warm water and then rinsed in a disinfectant
solution such as 50 ppm iodine or chlorine (1 teaspoon in 1 gallon
of water) then thoroughly dried both inside and outside the face
piece.
The units are air dried overnight in a clean area. If not being used
again immediately, units are:
• inspected and any worn or defective parts replaced,
• reassembled and placed in clean, marked Ziploc® plastic
bags for storage in a cool, dry place.
• inserted in the storage bag so the unit’s unique number is
visible.
Page 3 of 8
Organic solvents are not used for cleaning, because they

deteriorate the rubber of the face piece. Respirator bags are not
closed until units are completely dry (at least 48 hours).
2.6 Storage
Respirators are stored in a cool, dry, dark location inside plastic
bags and/or boxes clearly marked with the unique number, the
brand name, model number, and the unit size.
The unit is stored with the face piece down to protect the rubber
from assuming an abnormal shape and essentially ruining it. The
storage location affords protection against dust, chemicals,
sunlight, and extreme heat or cold, like inside a metal or wood
cabinet. Cartridges are not stored in bags with face pieces.
The inhalation valve of each mask is taped over with duct tape
during temporary or long-term storage, if not kept in a Ziploc® bag
to prevent dust or fibers from entering the unit.
Stored units are inspected at least once a month to ensure no

distortion of the rubber is taking place.
2.7 Maintenance and Inspection

Inspection of respirators includes checking condition of the:
• glass faceplate for scratches, cracks, etc,
• condition of the rubber of the face piece,
• headbands for elasticity and damage,
• valves, both inhalation and exhalations, for fit, presence of
dirt, hair and pliability,
• cartridge fittings are checked for cracks,
• Hoses are inspected, all fittings and connections are checked
for leaks, cracks and pliability,
• clamps for tightness and exposure,
• quick-connects or threads for damage,
• dangerous clamps (those that might cut you) and other
safety problems are eliminated from each unit.
Special care is taken if exposures to Permissible Exposure Limits

(PELs) greater than the Short-Term Exposure Limits (STELs) or
Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH) atmospheres are
encountered.
Page 4 of 8
2.8 Medical Surveillance

Prior to participating in situations requiring respirators, employees
receive baseline physical exams including the medical
questionnaire in 1910.134 Appendix C. A copy of this medical
questionnaire is at the end of this section (Appendix 1). The
physician may also perform a Forced Expiratory Volume in one
second (FEV 1.0) and a Total Vital Capacity (TVC) test on each
person intending to use a respirator to help determine physical
ability to safely wear respiratory equipment.
The physician then issues a written medical opinion as to the abil-

ity of the employee to wear a respirator and perform the tasks in
question.
Medical examinations are:

• repeated annually,
• after a major change in job responsibilities,
• after an incident involving exposure or onset of any
symptoms or,
• upon termination of the employee.
Employee records concerning medical surveillance are kept for 30
years after employment.
2.9 Approved Respirators

As stated previously, only NIOSH-approved respiratory equipment,
including cartridges, are used. Respirators are not used when out
of date. Cartridges and filters must be color coded for use
according to NIOSH.
2.10 The Evaluation of Respiratory Protection Plan

On the basis of inspections, comments, and changes in the
workplace, the program administrator and employees review this
written Respiratory Protection Plan annually. This ensures the
plan is adequate and achieves state-of-the-art practices.
Necessary changes are made to the Respiratory Protection Plan as
required to conform to new or existing state or federal regulations.
An independent Industrial Hygienist also reviews the program on
an annual basis and comments on and updates the program when
required.
Page 5 of 8
2.11 Other Items

The following items are also covered under Davis Respiratory
Protection Plan:
a) A Quality Assurance Plan is employed ensuring the

respirator plan is used and enforced.
b) Facial hair in the form of beards and long sideburns (which

may interfere with the fit of the respirator) are not allowed
for employees required to wear respirators.
c) IDLH (those Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health), Level

A work, work in explosive atmospheres, and SCBA
respirators are not covered by this Plan and are not worked
in by Davis employees unless the plan is updated to include
such activities.
d) If entered, Permit Required Confined Spaces requires:
1) An attendant in verbal or sight communication with

the worker at all times.
2) Respiratory protection for the attendant is worn at

least equivalent to the worker.
3) Written permission from Davis management in the

form of a signed entry permit.
4) Workers never enter areas with low oxygen (less than

19.5 percent) with air-purifying respirators.
5) Temple eyepieces cannot be worn while using full-face

respirators. Eyeglass lens clips are provided, if
requested.
6) Contact lenses are never worn with respirators.
7) All employees involved in confined-space entry are

trained to the extent required by law for their duties.
Page 6 of 8
3.0 Fit-Testing Procedure

The employer ensures an employee using a right-fitting face piece
respirator is fit tested prior to initial use of the respirator, whenever a
different respirator face piece (size, style, model or make) is used, and at
least annually thereafter.
The fit test is administered using an OSHA-accepted Qualitative Fit Test

protocol. The OSHA-accepted QLFT protocols and procedures are
contained in Appendix A of 1910.134.
QLFT may only be used to fit test negative pressure air-purifying

respirators that must achieve a fit factor or 100 or less.
Fit testing of tight-fitting atmosphere-supplying respirators and tight-

fitting powered air purifying respirators are accomplished by performing
quantitative or qualitative fit testing in the negative pressure mode,
regardless of the mode of operation (negative or positive pressure) used
for respiratory protection.
4.0 Voluntary Use Of Respirators

Respirator use is encouraged, even when exposures are below the
exposure limit to provide an additional level of comfort and protection
for the worker. Voluntary use of a filtering face piece respirator (dust
mask/disposable paper type dust respirator) does not require medical
evaluation.
The supervisor needs only to ensure:

• the dust masks are not dirty or contaminated,
• their use does not interfere with the employee’s ability to work
safely.
• provide a copy of Appendix 3 (Appendix D 1910.134) to each
voluntary wearer. The same applies to voluntary air-purifying
respirators.
Appendix 1: Medical Questionnaire For Respirator Use

Appendix 2: Respirator Fit Test Report
Appendix 3: Voluntary Use Of Dust Mask Document
Appendix 4: Respiratory Equipment and Training Log
Page 7 of 8
Page 8 of 8
Appendix 1 – Medical Questionnaire for Respirator Users

Section 1 Yes No
To the employee: Can you read?
Your employer must allow you to answer this questionnaire during
normal work hours or at a time and place that is convenient to you. To
maintain your confidentiality, your employer or supervisor must not look
at or review your answers, and your employer must tell you how to
deliver or send this questionnaire to the health care professional who
will review it.
Answer the following questions. (Please print.)
Today’s date:
Your name:
Your age:
Sex :
Male/Female
(circle one)
Your height: Feet: inches:
Your weight: Pounds:
Employee ID
number:
Your job title:
Telephone
number:
Have you worn a respirator?
If “yes,” what type(s):
What respirator will you wear for your job?
Air purifying respirator (full or half facepiece)
Air purifying respirator (powered air purifying respirator)
Air purifying respirator (single use, filtering facepiece)
Supplied air respirator (full or half facepiece)
Supplied air respirator (airline)
Self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA)
Supplied air respirator (escape only)
Page 1 of 7
Section 2 Yes No
1. Do you currently smoke tobacco or have you smoked in the last
month? If “yes,” explain:
2. Have you ever had any of the following conditions?

a. Seizures (fits)
b. Diabetes (sugar disease)
c. Allergic reactions that interfere with your breathing
d. Claustrophobia (fear of closed-in places)
e. Trouble smelling odors
3. Have you ever had any of the following pulmonary or lung problems?
a. Asbestosis
b. Asthma
c. Chronic bronchitis
d. Emphysema
e. Pneumonia
f. Tuberculosis
g. Silicosis
h. Pneumothorax (collapsed lung)
i. Lung cancer
j. Broken ribs
k. Any chest injuries or surgeries
l. Any other lung problem that you’ve been told about
If “yes,” explain:
4. Do you currently have any of the following symptoms of pulmonary

or lung illness?
a. Shortness of breath
b. Shortness of breath when walking fast on level ground or walking up
a slight hill or incline
c. Shortness of breath when walking with other people at an ordinary
pace on level ground
d. Have to stop for breath when walking at own pace on level ground
e. Shortness of breath when washing or dressing yourself
f. Shortness of breath that interferes with your job
g. Coughing that produces phlegm (thick sputum)
h. Coughing that wakes you early in the morning
i. Coughing that occurs mostly when you are lying down
j. Coughing up blood in the last month
k. Wheezing
l. Wheezing that interferes with your job
m. Chest pain when you breathe deeply
n. Other symptoms that you think may be related to lung problems
5. Have you ever had any of the following cardiovascular or heart
Page 2 of 7
problems?
a. Heart attack
b. Stroke
c. Angina
d. Heart failure
e. Swelling in your legs or feet (not caused by walking)
f. Heart arrhythmia (heart beating irregularly)
g. High blood pressure
h. Any other heart problem that you’ve been told about
6. Have you ever had any of the following cardiovascular or heart

symptoms?
a. Frequent pain or tightness in your chest
b. Pain or tightness in your chest during physical activity
c. Pain or tightness in your chest that interferes with your job
d. In the past two years, heart skipped or missed a beat
e. Heartburn or indigestion that is not related to eating
f. Other symptoms that may relate to heart or circulation problems
7. Do you currently take medication for any of the following problems?

a. Breathing or lung problems
b. Heart trouble
c. Blood pressure
d. Seizures (fits)
8. If you’ve used a respirator, have you ever had any of the following
problems?
a. Eye irritation
b. Skin allergies or rashes
c. Anxiety
d. General weakness or fatigue
e. Any other problem that interferes with your use of a respirator
Page 3 of 7
9. Would you like to talk to the health care professional who will review
this questionnaire about your answers to this questionnaire
10. Have you ever lost vision in either eye (temporarily or permanently)
11. Do you currently have any of the following vision problems?

Yes No
a. Wear contact lenses?
b. Wear glasses?
c. Color blind?
d. Any other eye or vision problem?
12. Have you ever had an injury to your ears, including a broken ear
drum?
13. Do you currently have any of the following hearing problems?

a. Difficulty hearing
b. Wear a hearing aid
c. Any other hearing or ear problem
If “yes”, explain:
14. Have you ever had a back injur?

15. Do you currently have any of the following musculoskeletal

problems?
a. Weakness in any of your arms, hands, legs, or feet
b. Back pain
c. Difficulty fully moving your arms and legs
d. Pain or stiffness when you lean forward or backward at the waist
e. Difficulty fully moving your head up or down
f. Difficulty fully moving your head side to side
g. Difficulty bending at your knees
h. Difficulty squatting to the ground
i. Climbing a flight of stairs or a ladder carrying more than 25 lbs
j. Muscle or skeletal problem that interfere with respirator
Page 4 of 7
Section 3 Yes No
1. In your present job, are you working at high altitudes (over 5,000
feet) or in a place that has lower than normal amounts of oxygen
If "yes," do you have feelings of dizziness, shortness of breath,
pounding in your chest, or other symptoms when you're working
under these conditions
2. At work or at home, have you ever been exposed to hazardous
solvents, hazardous airborne chemicals (e.g., gases, fumes, or dust),
or have you come into skin contact with hazardous chemicals
If "yes," name the chemicals if you know them:
3. Have you ever worked with any of the materials, or under any of the
conditions, listed below:
a. Asbestos
b. Silica (e.g., in sandblasting)
c. Tungsten/cobalt (e.g., grinding or welding this material)
d. Beryllium
e. Aluminum
f. Coal (for example, mining)
g. Iron
h. Tin
i. Dusty environments
j. Any other hazardous exposures
If "yes," describe these exposures:
4. List any second jobs or side businesses you have:
5. List your previous occupations:
6. List your current and previous hobbies:
7. Have you been in the military services

If "yes," were you exposed to biological or chemical agents (either in
training or combat)
8. Have you ever worked on a HAZMAT team
9. Other than medications for breathing and lung problems, heart
trouble, blood pressure, and seizures mentioned earlier in this
questionnaire, are you taking any other medications for any reason
(including over-the-counter medications)
If "yes," name the medications if you know them:
10. Will you be using any of the following items with your respirator(s)
a. HEPA Filters
b. Canisters (for example, gas masks)
c. Cartridges
11. How often are you expected to use the respirator(s) (circle "yes" or
"no" for all answers that apply to you)
Page 5 of 7
a. Escape only (no rescue)
Yes No
b. Emergency rescue only
c. Less than 5 hours per week
d. Less than 2 hours per day
e. 2 to 4 hours per day
f. Over 4 hours per day
12. During the period you are using the respirator(s), is your work effort
a. Light (less than 200 kcal per hour)
If "yes," how long does this period last during the average
shift:____________hrs.____________mins.
Examples of a light work effort are sitting while writing, typing,
drafting, or performing light assembly work; or standing while
operating a drill press (1-3 lbs.) or controlling machines.
b. Moderate (200 to 350 kcal per hour)
shift:____________hrs.____________mins.
Examples of moderate work effort are sitting while nailing or filing;
driving a truck or bus in urban traffic; standing while drilling,
nailing, performing assembly work, or transferring a moderate load
(about 35 lbs.) at trunk level; walking on a level surface about 2 mph
or down a 5-degree grade about 3 mph; or pushing a wheelbarrow
with a heavy load (about 100 lbs.) on a level surface.
c. Heavy (above 350 kcal per hour)
shift:____________hrs.____________mins.
Examples of heavy work are lifting a heavy load (about 50 lbs.) from
the floor to your waist or shoulder; working on a loading dock;
shoveling; standing while bricklaying or chipping castings; walking
up an 8-degree grade about 2 mph; climbing stairs with a heavy load
(about 50 lbs.).
13. Will you be wearing protective clothing and/or equipment (other
than the respirator) when you're using your respirator
If "yes," describe this protective clothing and/or equipment:
14. Will you be working under hot conditions (temperature exceeding

77º F)
15. Will you be working under humid conditions
16. Describe the work you'll be doing while you're using your
respirator(s):
17. Describe any special or hazardous conditions you might encounter

when you're using your respirator(s) (for example, confined spaces,
life-threatening gases):
Page 6 of 7
18. Provide the following information, if you know it, for each toxic
substance that you'll be exposed to when you're using your
respirator(s):
a. Name of the first toxic substance:
b. Estimated maximum exposure level per shift:
c. Duration of exposure per shift:
Yes No
d. Name of the second toxic substance:
e. Estimated maximum exposure level per shift:
f. Duration of exposure per shift:
g. Name of the third toxic substance:
h. Estimated maximum exposure level per shift:
i. Duration of exposure per shift:
j. The name(s) of any other toxic substances that you'll be exposed to
while using your respirator:
19. Describe any special responsibilities you'll have while using your
respirator(s) that may affect the safety and well-being of others (for
example, rescue, security):
Page 7 of 7
Davis Constructors & Engineers I nc.
Appendix 2
Respirator Fit Test Report
Test Date: Fit Test Expires:
Name: License or SS #
Address:
City: State: Zip:
Respirator Type: 1/2 Face Negative Full-Face Negative PAPR

(Circle) Pressure Pressure
Manufacturer: Model Number: Size:
Cartridge Type Tested:
Restrictions:
Test
Type of Test Quantitative Qualitative
(Circle) Test Device: Isoamyl Acetate
Saccharin
Bitrex
Results Pass Fail Pass Fail
Test Given By: Test Subject:
Appendix 3
Voluntary Use of Dust Masks
This program is designed to protect employee health even though it has been
determined that respirators are not required. Filtering face-piece dust masks
will be allowed for those employees who wish to use them. This program is
designed for compliance with OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1910.134(c)(2)(i) with the
exception in 1910.134(c)(2)(ii).
The position title has determined that respirators are not required for the
following jobs, tasks, or departments:
The use of dust mask respirators by employees is strictly voluntary.
The position title will provide and employees are to read Appendix D of the
OSHA Respirator Standard 29 CFR 1910.134, a copy of which follows:
Appendix D 1910.134 (Non-Mandatory) Information for Employees Using

Respirators When Not Required Under the Standard
Respirators are an effective method of protection against designated hazards when

properly selected and worn. Respirator use is encouraged, even when exposures are
below the exposure limit, to provide an additional level of comfort and protection for
workers. However, if a respirator is used improperly or not kept clean, the respirator
itself can become a hazard to the worker. Sometimes, workers may wear respirators
to avoid exposures to hazards, even if the amount of hazardous substance does not
exceed the limits set by OSHA standards. If your employer provides respirators for
your voluntary use, or if you provide your own respirator, you need to take certain
precautions to be sure that the respirator itself does not present a hazard.
You should do the following:
1. Read and heed all instructions provided by the manufacturer on use, maintenance,
cleaning and care, and warnings regarding the respirators limitations.
2. Choose respirators certified for use to protect against the contaminant of concern.
NIOSH, the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health of the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services, certifies respirators. A label or
Page 1 of 2
Appendix 3
statement of certification should appear on the respirator or respirator packaging.

It will tell you what the respirator is designed for and how much it will protect you.
3. Do not wear your respirator into atmospheres containing contaminants for which
your respirator is not designed to protect against. For example, a respirator
designed to filter dust particles will not protect you against gases, vapors, or very
small solid particles of fumes or smoke.
4. Keep track of your respirator so that you do not mistakenly use someone else’s
respirator.
Page 2 of 2
Davis Constructors and Engineers, inc.
Appendix 4 Tab 16 - Respiratory Protection Plan
Respiratory Equipment and Training
Jobsite: Date:
Time:
Instructor:
* Signing this form is acknowledging you've received DCE Respiratory Protection Plan and
understand the procedures and equipment discussed as noted below.
ATTENDEES:
Name Signature
Items Discussed
Davis Constructors and Engineers Respiratory Protection Program
Use of adminisrative and engineering controls
Hazards and exposure levels
Medical requirements
Respirator inspection, components, and care
Respirator limitations and cautions
Respirator cartridges and filters selection
Donning respirator and user seal check
Fit testing procedure - Qualatitive Test

Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 17 – INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONTROLS
Indoor Air Quality Controls

In case of need for work associated with any surrounding buildings
or commissioning and startup of other critical areas. -- may be
amended or replaced as necessary.
Part 1 General
1.1 Section Includes:
A. Construction procedures to promote adequate indoor air quality after
construction.
B. Building flush-out after construction and before occupancy.
C. Testing indoor air quality before commencement of construction;

existing building areas only.
D. Testing indoor air quality after completion of construction.
1.2 Project Goals

A. See Section 013515, LEED Certification Procedures for overall project
goals relating to environment and energy.
B. Dust and Airborne Particulates: Prevent deposition of dust and other

particulates in HVAC ducts and equipment.
1. Cleaning of ductwork is not contemplated under this contract.
2. Contractor shall bear the cost of cleaning required due to
failure to protect ducts and equipment from construction dust.
C. Airborne Contaminants: Procedures and products have been

specified to minimize indoor air pollutants.
1. Furnish products meeting the specifications.
2. Avoid construction practices that could result in contamination
of installed products leading to indoor air pollution.
D. Ventilation: HVAC system has been designed to achieve the

minimum requirements for ventilation specified in ASHRAE 62.1.
1.3 Related Requirements

A. Section 013515, LEED Certification Procedures: LEED credits
relating to indoor air quality.
B. Section 014000, Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection

services.
Page 1 of 7
C. Section 016116, Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content

Restrictions.
D. Section 234000, HVAC Air Cleaning Devices: HVAC filters.
E. Section 230593, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC: Testing

HVAC systems for proper air flow rates, adjustment of dampers and
registers, and setting for equipment.
1.4 Reference Standards

A. ASHRAE Std. 52.2, Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-
cleaning devices for removal efficiency by particle.
B. ASHRAE Std. 62.1, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality;

2007 (errata 2008).
C. SMACNA (OCC), IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under

Construction; 207.
1.5 Definitions
A. Adsorptive Materials: Gypsum board, acoustical ceiling tile and
panels, carpet and carpet tile, fabrics, fibrous insulation, and other
similar products.
B. Contaminants: Gases, vapors, regulated pollutants, airborne mold

and mildew and the like, as specified.
C. Particulates: Dust, dirt, and other airborne solid matter.
D. Wet Work: Concrete, plaster, gypsum board joint compound,

coatings, and other products that emit water vapor or volatile organic
compounds during installation, drying, or curing.
1.6 Submittals
A. See Section 013000, Administrative Requirements for submittal
procedures.
B. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan: Describe in detail measures to

be taken to promote adequate indoor air quality upon completion; use
SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction
as a guide.
1. Submit not less than 60 days before enclosure of building.
2. Identify potential sources of odor and dust.
3. Identify construction activities likely to produce odor or dust.
4. Identify areas of project potentially affected, especially occupied
areas.
Page 2 of 7
5. Evaluate potential problems by severity and describe methods

of control.
6. Describe construction ventilation to be provided including type
and duration of ventilation, use of permanent HVAC systems,
types of filters and schedule for replacement of filters.
7. Describe cleaning and dust control procedures.
8. Describe coordination with commissioning procedures.
C. Interior Finishes Installation Schedule: Identify each interior finish

that either generates odors, moisture, or vapors or is susceptible to
adsorption of odors and vapors, and indicate air handling zone,
sequence of application, and curing times.
D. Duct and Terminal Unit Inspection Report.
E. Air Contaminant Test Plan: Identify:

1. Testing agency qualifications.
2. Locations and scheduling of air sampling.
3. Test procedures in detail.
4. Test instruments and apparatus.
5. Sampling methods.
F. Air Contaminant Test Reports: Show:

1. Location where each sample was taken and time.
2. Test values for each air sample; average the values of each set
of 3.
3. HVAC operating conditions.
4. Certification of test equipment calibration.
5. Other conditions or discrepancies that might have influenced
results.
G. Ventilation Effectiveness Test Plan: Identify:

1. Testing agency qualifications.
2. Description of test spaces including locations of air sampling.
3. Test procedures in detail; state whether tracer gas decay or
step-up will be used.
4. Test instruments and apparatus; identify tracer gas to be used.
5. Sampling methods.
H. Ventilation Effectiveness Test Reports: Show:

1. Include preliminary tests of instruments and apparatus and of
test spaces.
2. Calculation of ventilation effectiveness, E.
3. Location where each sample was taken and time.
4. Test values for each air sample.
5. HVAC operating conditions.
Page 3 of 7
6. Other information specified in ASHRAE 129.

7. Other conditions or discrepancies that might have influences
results.
1.7 Quality Assurance

A. Testing and Inspection Agency Qualifications: Independent testing
agency having minimum of five years experience in performing the
types of testing specified.
Part 2 Products
2.1 Materials
A. Low VOC Materials: See Section 016116.
B. Auxiliary Air Filters: MERV 14 when tested in accordance with

ASHRAE 52.2.
Part 3 Execution
3.1 Construction Procedures

A. Prevent the absorption of moisture and humidity by adsorptive
materials by:
1. Sequencing the delivery of such materials so they are not
present in the building until wet work is completed and dry.
2. Delivery and storage of such materials in fully sealed moisture-
impermeable packaging.
3. Provide sufficient ventilation for drying within reasonable time
frame.
B. Begin construction ventilation when building is substantially

enclosed.
C. If extremely dusty or dirty work must be conducted inside the

building, shut down HVAC systems for the duration; remove dust and
dirt completely before restarting systems.
D. When working in a portion of an occupied building prevent movement

of air from construction area to occupied area.
E. HVAC equipment and supply air ductwork may be used for

ventilation during construction:
Page 4 of 7
1. Operate HVAC system on 100 percent outside air with 1.5 air
changes per hour, minimum, or as required for adjacent
occupied spaces outside construction areas as applicable.
2. Ensure that air filters are correctly installed prior to starting
use; replace filters when they lose efficiency.
3. Do not use return-air ductwork for ventilation.
4. Seal return air inlets or otherwise positively isolate return air
system to prevent recirculation of air; provide alternate return-
air pathways.
F. Do not store construction materials or waste in mechanical or

electrical rooms.
G. Prior to use of return-air ductwork without intake filters clean up and

remove dust and debris generated by construction activities.
1. Inspect duct intakes, return-air grilles, and terminal units for
dust.
2. Clean plenum spaces including top sides of lay-in ceilings,
outsides of ducts, tops of pipes and conduit.
3. Clean tops of doors and frames.
4. Clean mechanical and electrical rooms including tops of pipes,
ducts, and conduit, equipment, and supports.
5. Clean return plenums of air handling units.
6. Remove intake filters last after cleaning is complete.
H. Do not perform dusty or dirty work after starting use of return-air

ducts without intake filters.
I. Use other relevant recommendations of SMACNA IAQ Guideline for

Occupied Buildings Under Construction for avoiding unnecessary
contamination due to construction procedures.
3.2 Building Flush-out

A. Contractor’s Option: Either full continuous flush-out or satisfactory
air contaminant testing is required, not both.
B. Perform building flush-out before occupancy.
C. Do not start flush-out until:

1. All construction is complete.
2. HVAC systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced for
proper operation.
3. Inspection of inside of return air ducts and terminal units
confirms that cleaning is not necessary.
4. New HVAC filtration media has been installed.
Page 5 of 7
D. Building Flush-out: Operate all ventilation systems at normal flow

rates with 100 percent outside air until a total air volume of 14,000
cubic feet per square foot of floor area has been supplied.
1. Obtain Owner’s concurrence that construction is complete
enough before beginning flush-out.
2. Maintain interior temperature of at least 60 degrees F and
interior relative humidity no higher than 60 percent.
3. If additional construction involving materials that produce
particulates or any of the specified contaminants is conducted
during flush-out, start flush-out over.
4. If interior spaces must be occupied prior to completion of the
flush-out, supply a minimum of 25 percent of the total air
volume prior to occupancy and:
a. begin ventilation at least three hours prior to daily
occupancy.
b. continue ventilation during all occupied periods.
c. provide minimum outside air volume of 0.30 cfm per
square foot or design minimum outside air rate,
whichever is greater.
E. Install new HVAC filtration media after completion of flush-out and

before occupancy or further testing.
3.3 Air Contaminant Testing

A. Contractor’s Option: Either full continuous flush-out or further
testing.
B. Perform air contaminant testing before starting construction as base

line for evaluation of post-construction testing.
C. Perform air contaminant testing before occupancy.
D. Do not start air contaminant testing until:

1. All construction is complete including interior finishes.
2. HVAC systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced for
proper operation.
3. New HVAC filtration media have been installed.
E. Indoor Air Samples: Collect from spaces representative of occupied

areas:
1. Collect samples while operable windows and exterior doors are
closed, HVAC system is running normally as if occupied with
design minimum outdoor air, but with the building
unoccupied.
2. Collect samples from spaces in each contiguous floor area in
each air handler zone, but not less than one sample per 12,000
Page 6 of 7
square feet; take samples from areas having the least

ventilation and those having the greatest presume source
strength.
3. Collect samples from height from 36″ to 72″ above floor.
4. Collect samples from same locations on 3 consecutive days
during normal business hours; average the results of each set
of 3 samples.
5. When retesting the same building areas take samples from at
least the same locations as in the first test.
F. Outdoor Air Samples: Collect samples at outside air intake of each

air handler at the same time as indoor samples are taken.
G. Analyze air samples and submit report to Owner.
H. Air Contaminant Concentration Determination and Limits:

1. Carbon Monoxide: Not more than 9 parts per million and not
more than 2 parts per million higher than outside air.
2. Carbon Dioxide: Measure in ppm, in relation to outdoor air;
not more than 700 ppm higher than outdoor air.
3. Airborne Mold and Mildew: Measure in relation to outside air;
not higher than outside air.
4. Formaldehyde: Measure in micrograms per cubic meter, in
relation to outside air, not more than 20 micrograms per cubic
meter higher than outside air.
5. Total Volatile Organic Compounds (TVOC): Measure in
micrograms per cubic meter in relation to outside air, not more
than 200 micrograms per cubic meter higher than outside air.
6. 4-Phenylcyclohexene (4-PC): Measure in micrograms per cubic
meter in relation to outside air; not more than 50 micrograms
per cubic meter.
7. Particulates (PM10): Not more than 50 micrograms per cubic
meter.
8. Total Particulates (PM): Measure in micrograms per cubic
meter in relation to outside air; not more than 20 micrograms
per cubic meter higher than outside air.
9. Regulated Pollutants: Measure in relation to outside air; not
more than contained in outside air.
I. If air samples show concentrations higher than those specified,

ventilate with 100 percent outside air and retest at no cost to Owner,
or conduct full building flush-out specified above.
Page 7 of 7
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 18 – ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROGRAM
ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROGRAM
Purpose
To prevent injury to employees due to the inadvertent contact with energized
tools and cords. To ensure a system that will de-energize electrical equipment
before it can create a danger to employees.
Background
This policy and procedure has been promulgated to ensure compliance with
OSHA (federal/state) regulations and to provide a safe and healthful work
place.
Responsibility
All supervisors and employees of Davis are required to comply fully with this
policy and procedure. Failure to do so will result in disciplinary action up to
and including termination of employment
Definitions
A Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter is a device for the protection of personnel
that functions to de-energize a circuit or portion thereof within an established
period of time when a current to ground exceeds some predetermined value
that is less than that required to operate the overcurrent protective device of
the supply circuit
Procedures
This ground- fault circuit interrupter procedure shall meet the requirements
set forth in Safety Standards for Construction Work.
1. Visual inspection of all electrical cords will be the responsibility of the

user at the start of each workday. If the cord shows signs of wear and/or
fraying, missing pins, etc, it shall be immediately removed from service,
tagged with a “DO NOT USE” notice and brought to the attention of a
supervisor and/or the Project Safety Manager.
2. Visual inspection of all power tools prior to use and at the start of each
workday shall be the responsibility of the tool operator. If the tool shows
signs of cord-plug separation, pins missing, etc., it must be removed
from service, and tagged with a “DO NOT USE” notice until it has been
repaired by a person qualified to make such repairs. The condition of the
tool should be brought to the attention of a supervisor and/or the Project
Safety Manager.
Page 1 of 2
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 18 – ELECTRICAL SAFETY PROGRAM
3. A Davis supervisor or Project Safety Manager shall perform testing of all

temporary power boxes at least monthly. Use of approved circuit testing
equipment such as the Greenlee or Unitest GFI circuit tester is required.
Results of such tests will be documented and maintained in the project
office. If results show a temporary power box is malfunctioning, the box
shall be immediately removed from service and replaced with an operable
power box. The disabled power box will be marked with a “DO NOT USE”
tag and appropriate supervisors shall be advised of the condition of the
power box.
4. All 120-volt, single phase, 15 and 20-ampere receptacle outlets on Davis

projects, which are in use by Davis employees or subcontractors, must
have approved ground- fault circuit interrupters for personnel protection.
Page 2 of 2
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB #19 SCAFFOLD PROGRAM
SCAFFOLD SAFETY PROGRAM
Purpose
To set forth rules and regulations that will give direction in the building of
scaffolds that not only meet Federal and State OSHA regulations but also
provide a safe access and work area for Davis employees.
Background
Falls from scaffolds account for a very large number of injuries and deaths in
the construction industry each year. It is the goal of Davis to eliminate these
hazards from our projects.
Procedure
Each scaffold must be inspected prior to initial use and after alteration or
moving by a competent person.
There is no such thing as a temporary scaffold. All scaffolding must be erected

and maintained to conform to established standards (OSHA (Federal/State).
The following guidelines should be used to ensure compliance with the

regulatory requirements.
Capacity
• Each scaffold and scaffold component shall be capable of supporting,
without failure, its own weight and at least 4 times the maximum
intended load applied or transmitted to it.
• Each suspension rope, including connecting hardware, used on
adjustable suspension scaffolds shall be capable of supporting, without
failure, at least 6 times the maximum intended load applied or
transmitted to that rope with the scaffold operating at either the rated
load of the hoist, or 2 (minimum) times the stall load of the hoist,
whichever is greater.
• Scaffolds shall be designed by a qualified person and shall be
constructed and loaded in accordance with that design.
Scaffold platform construction

1. Each platform on all working levels of scaffolds shall be fully planked or
decked between the front uprights and the guardrail supports as follows:
• Each platform unit (e.g., scaffold plank, fabricated plank, fabricated
deck, or fabricated platform) shall be installed so that the space
between adjacent units and the space between the platform and the
uprights is no more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) wide, except where a wider
space is necessary (for example, to fit around uprights when side
brackets are used to extend the width of the platform).
Page 1 of 16
• The platform shall be planked or decked as fully as possible and the

remaining open space between the platform and the uprights shall not
exceed 9 ½ inches (24.1 cm).
• Each scaffold platform and walkway shall be at least 18 inches (46
cm) wide.
• Each ladder jack scaffold, top plate bracket scaffold, roof bracket
scaffold, and pump jack scaffold shall be at least 12 inches (30 cm)
wide. There is no minimum width requirement for boatswains' chairs.
• Where scaffolds must be used in areas that are so narrow that
platforms and walkways cannot be at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide,
platforms and walkways shall be as wide as feasible, and employees
protected from fall hazards by the use of guardrails and/or personal
fall arrest systems.
2. The front edge of all platforms shall not be more than 14 inches (36 cm)
from the face of the work, unless guardrail systems are erected along the
front edge and/or personal fall arrest systems are used to protect
employees from falling.
3. The maximum distance from the face for outrigger scaffolds shall be 3
inches (8 cm);
4. The maximum distance from the face for plastering and lathing
operations shall be 18 inches (46 cm).
5. Each end of a platform, unless cleated or otherwise restrained by hooks

or equivalent means, shall extend over the centerline of its support at
least 6 inches (15 cm).
6. Each end of a platform 10 feet or less in length shall not extend over its
support more than 12 inches (30 cm) unless the platform is designed and
installed so that the cantilevered portion of the platform is able to
support employees and/or materials without tipping, or has guardrails
which block employee access to the cantilevered end.
7. Each platform greater than 10 feet in length shall not extend over its
support more than 18 inches (46 cm), unless it is designed and installed
so that the cantilevered portion of the platform is able to support
employees without tipping, or has guardrails which block employee
access to the cantilevered end.
8. On scaffolds where scaffold planks are abutted to create a long platform,

each abutted end shall rest on a separate support surface. This provision
does not preclude the use of common support members, such as “T”
Page 2 of 16
sections, to support abutting planks, or hook on platforms designed to

rest on common supports.
9. On scaffolds where platforms are overlapped to create a long platform,

the overlap shall occur only over supports, and shall not be less than 12
inches (30 cm) unless the platforms are nailed together or otherwise
restrained to prevent movement.
10. At all points of a scaffold where the platform changes direction, such as
turning a corner, any platform that rests on a bearer at an angle other
than a right angle shall be laid first, and platforms which rest at right
angles over the same bearer shall be laid second, on top of the first
platform.
11. Wood platforms shall not be covered with opaque finishes, except that
platform edges may be covered or marked for identification. Platforms
may be coated periodically with wood preservatives, fire-retardant
finishes, and slip-resistant finishes; however, the coating may not
obscure the top or bottom wood surfaces.
12. Scaffold components manufactured by different manufacturers shall not

be intermixed unless the components fit together without force and the
scaffold’s structural integrity is maintained by the user. Scaffold
components manufactured by different manufacturers shall not be
modified in order to intermix them unless a competent person
determines the resulting scaffold is structurally sound.
13. Scaffold components made of dissimilar metals shall not be used

together unless a competent person has determined that galvanic action
will not reduce the strength of any component.
Criteria for supported scaffolds

1. Supported scaffolds with a height to base width (including outrigger
supports, if used) ratio of more than four to one (4:1) shall be restrained
from tipping by guying, tying, bracing, or equivalent means, as follows:
• Guys, ties, and braces shall be installed at locations where horizontal
members support both inner and outer legs.
• Guys, ties, and braces shall be installed according to the scaffold
manufacturer’s recommendations or at the closest horizontal member
to the 4:1 height and be repeated vertically at locations of horizontal
members every 20 feet (6.1 m) or less thereafter for scaffolds 3 feet
(0.91 m) wide or less, and every 26 feet (7.9 m) or less thereafter for
scaffolds greater than 3 feet (0.91 m) wide. The top guy, tie or brace of
completed scaffolds shall be placed no further than the 4:1 height
Page 3 of 16
from the top. Such guys, ties and braces shall be installed at each end
of the scaffold and at horizontal intervals not to exceed 30 feet (9.1 m)
(measured from one end [not both] towards the other).
• Ties, guys, braces, or outriggers shall be used to prevent the tipping of
supported scaffolds in all circumstances where an eccentric load,
such as a cantilevered work platform, is applied or is transmitted to
the scaffold.
2. Supported scaffold poles, legs, posts, frames, and uprights shall bear on
base plates and mudsills or other adequate firm foundation.
3. Footings shall be level, sound, rigid, and capable of supporting the

loaded scaffold without settling or displacement.
4. Unstable objects shall not be used to support scaffolds or platform units.
5. Unstable objects shall not be used as working platforms.
6. Front-end loaders and similar pieces of equipment shall not be used to

support scaffold platforms unless the manufacturer for such use has
specifically designed them.
7. Forklifts shall not be used to support scaffold platforms unless the entire
platform is attached to the fork and the forklift is not moved horizontally
while the platform is occupied and meets the following criteria: The
platform has been manufactured and supplied by the manufacturer of
the forklift and is machine specific, or the platform is constructed per the
design of a registered professional engineer who is experienced in such
designs. Said design must specify as a minimum that the overall width of
the platform does not extend more than 9 inches beyond the stabilized
width of the forklift (extended stabilizers for machines so equipped or the
outside dimension of the front tire spread for machines not equipped
with stabilizers); the weight of the platform and its maximum intended
load multiplied by a factor of 4, do not exceed the capacity of the
machine at its maximum extension. In addition, workers may not ride on
the platform except during raising and lowering operation.
8. Supported scaffold poles, legs, posts, frames, and uprights shall be

plumb and braced to prevent swaying and displacement.
Criteria for suspension scaffolds

1. All suspension scaffold support devices, such as outrigger beams,
cornice hooks, parapet clamps, and similar devices, shall rest on
surfaces capable of supporting at least 4 times the load imposed on them
Page 4 of 16
by the scaffold operating at the rated load of the hoist (or at least 1.5
times the load imposed on them by the scaffold at the stall capacity of
the hoist, whichever is greater).
2. Suspension scaffold outrigger beams, when used, shall be made of

structural metal or equivalent strength material, and shall be restrained
to prevent movement.
3. The inboard ends of suspension scaffold outrigger beams shall be

stabilized by bolts or other direct connections to the floor or roof deck, or
they shall have their inboard ends stabilized by counterweights, except
masons’ multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold outrigger beams
shall not be stabilized by counterweights.
4. Before the scaffold is used, direct connections shall be evaluated by a

competent person who shall confirm, based on the evaluation, that the
supporting surfaces are capable of supporting the loads to be imposed.
In addition, an engineer experienced in such scaffold design shall design
masons’ multi-point adjustable suspension scaffold connections.
5. Counterweights shall be made of non-flowable material. Sand, gravel and

similar materials that can be easily dislocated shall not be used as
counterweights.
6. Only those items specifically designed, as counterweights shall be used

to counterweight scaffold systems. Construction materials such as, but
not limited to, masonry units and rolls of roofing felt, shall not be used
as counterweights.
7. Counterweights shall be secured by mechanical means to the outrigger

beams to prevent accidental displacement.
8. Counterweights shall not be removed from an outrigger beam until the

scaffold is disassembled.
9. Outrigger beams, which are not stabilized by bolts or other direct

connections to the floor or roof deck, shall be secured by tiebacks.
10. Tiebacks shall be equivalent in strength to the suspension ropes.
11. Outrigger beams shall be placed perpendicular to its bearing support

(usually the face of the building or structure). However, where the
employer can demonstrate that it is not possible to place an outrigger
beam perpendicular to the face of the building or structure because of
Page 5 of 16
obstructions that cannot be moved, the outrigger beam may be placed at

some other angle, provided opposing angle tiebacks are used.
12. Tiebacks shall be secured to a structurally sound anchorage on the

building or structure. Sound anchorages include structural members,
but do not include standpipes, vents, other piping systems, or electrical
conduit.
13. Tiebacks shall be installed perpendicular to the face of the building or

structure, or opposing angle tiebacks shall be installed. Single tiebacks
installed at an angle are prohibited.
14. Suspension scaffold outrigger beams shall be

• Provided with stop bolts or shackles at both ends;
• Securely fastened together with the flanges turned out when channel
iron beams are used in place of I-beams;
• Installed with all bearing supports perpendicular to the beam center
line;
• Set and maintained with the web in a vertical position; and
15. When an outrigger beam is used, the shackle or clevis with which the
rope is attached to the outrigger beam shall be placed directly over the
centerline of the stirrup.
16. Suspension scaffold support devices such as cornice hooks, roof hooks,
roof irons, parapet clamps, or similar devices shall be:
• Made of steel, wrought iron, or materials of equivalent strength
• Supported by beating blocks; and
• Secured against movement by tiebacks installed at right angles to the
face of the building or structure, or opposing angle tiebacks shall be
installed and secured to a structurally sound point of anchorage on
the building or structure. Sound points of anchorage include
structural members, but do not include standpipes, vents, other
piping systems, or electrical conduit.
• Tiebacks shall be equivalent in strength to the hoisting rope.
17. When winding drum hoists are used on a suspension scaffold, they shall
contain not less than four wraps of the suspension rope at the lowest
point of scaffold travel. When other types of hoists are used, the
suspension ropes shall be long enough to allow the scaffold to be lowered
to the level below without the rope end passing through the hoist, or the
rope end shall be configured or provided with means to prevent the end
from passing through the hoist.
Page 6 of 16
18. The use of repaired wire rope as suspension rope is prohibited.
19. Wire suspension ropes shall not be joined together except through the
use of eye splice thimbles connected with shackles or coverplates and
bolts.
20. The load end of wire suspension ropes shall be equipped with proper size
thimbles and secured by eyesplicing or equivalent means.
21. A competent person prior to each work shift shall inspect ropes for
defects and after every occurrence which could affect a rope’s integrity.
Ropes shall be replaced if any of the following conditions exist:
• Any physical damage that impairs the function and strength of the
rope.
• Kinks that might impair the tracking or wrapping of rope around the
drum(s) or sheave(s).
• Six randomly distributed broken wires in one rope lay or three broken
wires in one strand in one rope lay.
• Abrasion, corrosion, scrubbing, flattening or peening causing loss of
more than one-third of the original diameter of the outside wires.
• Heat damage caused by a torch or any damage caused by contact
with electrical wires.
• Evidence that the secondary brake has been activated during an
overspeed condition and has engaged the suspension rope.
22. Swaged attachments or spliced eyes on wire suspension ropes shall not
be used unless the wire rope manufacturer or a qualified person makes
them.
23. When wire rope clips are used on suspension scaffolds:

• There shall be a minimum of 3 wire rope clips installed, with the clips
a minimum of 6 rope diameters apart
• Clips shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations;
• Clips shall be retightened to the manufacturer’s recommendations
after the initial loading;
• Clips shall be inspected and retightened to the manufacturer’s
recommendations at the start of each work shift thereafter
• U-bolt clips shall not be used at the point of suspension for any
scaffold hoist;
• When U-bolt clips are used, the U-bolt shall be placed over the dead
end of the rope, and the saddle shall be placed over the live end of the
rope.
Page 7 of 16
24. A qualified testing laboratory shall test suspension scaffold power-

operated hoists and manual hoists.
25. Gasoline-powered equipment and hoists shall not be used on suspension

scaffolds.
26. Gears and brakes of power-operated hoists used on suspension scaffolds

shall be enclosed.
27. In addition to the normal operating brake, suspension scaffold power-

operated hoists and manually operated hoists shall have a braking device
or locking pawl which engages automatically when a hoist makes either
of the following uncontrolled movements: an instantaneous change in
momentum or an accelerated overspeed.
28. Manually operated hoists shall require a positive crank force to descend.
29. Two-point and multi-point suspension scaffolds shall be tied or otherwise

secured to prevent them from swaying, as determined to be necessary
based on an evaluation by a competent person. Window clearers’ anchors
shall not be used for this purpose.
30. Devices whose sole function is to provide emergency escape and rescue
shall not be used as working platforms. This provision does not preclude
the use of systems, which are designed to function both as suspension
scaffolds and emergency systems.
Access
1. When scaffold platforms are more than 2 feet (0.6 m) above or below a
point of access, portable ladders, hook-on ladders, attachable ladders,
stair towers (scaffold stairways/towers), stairway-type ladders (such as
ladder stands), ramps, walkways, integral prefabricated scaffold access,
or direct access from another scaffold, structure, personnel hoist, or
similar surface shall be used. Crossbraces shall not be used as a means
of access.
2. Portable, hook-on, aid attachable ladders shall be positioned so as not to

tip the scaffold,
3. Hook-on and attachable ladders shall be positioned so that their bottom

rung is not more than 24 inches (61 cm) above the scaffold supporting
level.
Page 8 of 16
• When hook-on and attachable ladders are used on a supported

scaffold more than 35 feet (10.7 m) high, they shall have rest
platforms at 35-foot (10.7 m) maximum vertical intervals.
• Hook-on and attachable ladders shall be specifically designed for use
with the type of scaffold used,
• Hook-on and attachable ladders shall have a minimum rung length of
11¼ inches (29 cm); and
• Hook-on and attachable ladders shall have uniformly spaced rungs
with a maximum spacing between rungs of l6 ¾ inches.
4. Stairway-type ladders shall:

• Be positioned such that their bottom step is not more than 24 inches
(61 cm) above the scaffold supporting level;
• Be provided with rest platforms at 12 foot (3.7 m) maximum vertical
intervals;
• Have a minimum step width of 16 inches (41 cm), except that mobile
scaffold stairway-type ladders shall have a minimum step width of
11½ inches (30 cm); and
• Have slip-resistant treads on all steps and landings.
5. Scaffold stairway/towers shall:

• Be positioned such that their bottom step is not more than 24 inches
(61 cm.) above the scaffold supporting level.
• A stair rail consisting of a top rail and a midrail shall be provided on
each side of each scaffold stairway.
• The toprail of each stair rail system shall also be capable of serving as
a handrail, unless a separate handrail is provided.
• Handrails, and toprails that serve as handrails, shall provide an
adequate handhold for employees grasping them to avoid falling.
• Stair rail systems and handrails shall be surfaced to prevent injury to
employees from punctures or lacerations, and to prevent snagging of
clothing.
• The ends of stair rail systems and handrails shall be constructed so
that they do not constitute a projection hazard.
• Handrails and toprails that are used as handrails shall be at least 3
inches (7.6 cm) from other objects.
• Stair rails shall be not less than 28 inches (71 cm) nor more than 37
inches (94 cm) from the upper surface of the stair rail to the surface of
the tread, in line with the face of the riser at the forward edge of the
tread.
• A landing platform at least 18 inches (45.7 cm) wide by at least 18
inches (45.7 cm) long shall be provided at each level.
Page 9 of 16
• Each scaffold stairway shall be at least 18 inches (45.7 cm) wide

between stair rails.
• Treads and landings shall have slip-resistant surfaces.
• Stairways shall be installed between 40 degrees and 60 degrees from
the horizontal.
• Guardrails meeting the requirements of paragraph (g)(4) of this
section shall be provided on the open sides and ends of each landing.
• Riser height shall be uniform, within ¼ inch, (0.6 cm) for each flight
of stairs. Greater variations in riser height are allowed for the top and
bottom steps of the entire system, not for each flight of stairs.
• Tread depth shall be uniform, within ¼ inch, for each flight of stairs.
6. Ramps and walkways:

• 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels shall have guardrail systems
which comply with subpart M—Fall Protection.
• No ramp or walkway shall be inclined more than a slope of one (1)
vertical to three (3) horizontal (20 degrees above the horizontal).
• If the slope of a ramp or a walkway is steeper than one (1) vertical in
eight (8) horizontal, the ramp or walkway shall have cleats not more
than fourteen (14) inches (35 cm) apart which are securely fastened to
the planks to provide footing.
7. Integral prefabricated scaffold access frames shall:

• Be specifically designed and constructed for use as ladder rungs;
• Have a rung length of at least 8 inches (20 cm);
• Not be used as work platforms when rungs are less than 11½ inches
in length, unless each affected employee uses fall protection, or a
positioning device, which complies with §1926.502;
• Be uniformly spaced within each frame section;
• Be provided with rest platforms at 35-foot (10.7 m) maximum vertical
intervals on all supported scaffolds more than 35 feet (10.7 m) high;
and
• Have a maximum spacing between rungs of 16 ¾ inches (43 cm).
Non-uniform rung spacing caused by joining end frames together is
allowed, provided the resulting spacing does not exceed 16 ¾ inches
(43 cm).
• Steps and rungs of ladder and stairway type access shall line up
vertically with each other between rest platforms.
• Direct access to or from another surface shall be used only when the
scaffold is not more than 14 inches (36 cm) horizontally and not more
than 24 inches (61 cm) vertically from the other surface.
Page 10 of 16
• Effective September 2, 1997, access for employees erecting or

dismantling supported scaffolds shall be in accordance with the
following:
• The employer shall provide safe means of access for each employee
erecting or dismantling a scaffold where the provision of safe access is
feasible and does not create a greater hazard. The employer shall have
a competent person determine whether it is feasible or would pose a
greater hazard to provide, and have employees use a safe means of
access. This determination shall be based on site conditions and the
type of scaffold being erected or dismantled.
• Hook-on or attachable ladders shall be installed as soon as scaffold
erection has progressed to a point that permits safe installation and
use.
• When erecting or dismantling tubular welded frame scaffolds, (end)
frames, with horizontal members that are parallel, level and are not
more than 22 inches apart vertically may be used as climbing devices
for access, provided they are erected in a manner that creates a
usable ladder and provides good hand hold and foot space.
• Cross-braces on tubular welded frame scaffolds shall not be used as a
means of access or egress.
Use
1. Scaffolds and scaffold components shall not be loaded in excess of their
maximum intended loads or rated capacities, whichever is less.
2. The use of shore or lean-to scaffolds is prohibited.
3. A competent person before each work shift shall inspect scaffolds and
scaffold components for visible defects, and after any occurrence which
could affect a scaffolds structural integrity.
4. Any part of a scaffold damaged or weakened such that its strength is less
than that required by paragraph (a) of this section shall be immediately
repaired or replaced, braced to meet those provisions, or removed from
service until repaired.
5. Scaffolds shall not be moved horizontally while employees are on them,

unless a registered professional engineer specifically for such movement
or, for mobile scaffolds has designed them, where the provisions of §
1926.452(w) are followed.
Page 11 of 16
6. Scaffolds shall not be erected, used, dismantled, altered, or moved such

that they or any conductive material handled on them might come closer
to exposed and energized power lines.
7. Scaffolds and materials may be closer to power lines than specified above
where such clearance is necessary for performance of work, and only
after the utility company, or electrical system operator, has been notified
of the need to work closer and the utility company, or electrical system
operator, has deenergized the lines, relocated the lines, or installed
protective coverings to prevent accidental contact with the lines.
8. Scaffolds shall be erected, moved, dismantled, or altered only under the

supervision and direction of a competent person qualified in scaffold
erection, moving, dismantling or alteration. Only experienced and trained
employees selected for such work by the competent person shall perform
such activities.
9. Employees shall be prohibited from working on scaffolds covered with

snow, ice, or other slippery material except as necessary for removal of
such materials.
10. Where swinging loads are being hoisted onto or near scaffolds such that
the loads might contact the scaffold, tag lines or equivalent measures to
control the loads shall be used.
11. Suspension ropes supporting adjustable suspension scaffolds shall be of

a diameter large enough to provide sufficient surface area for the
functioning of brake and hoist mechanisms.
12. Suspension ropes shall be shielded from heat-producing processes.

When acids or other corrosive substances are used on a scaffold, the
ropes shall be shielded, treated to protect against the corrosive
substances, or shall be of a material that will not be damaged by the
substance being used.
13. Work on or from scaffolds is prohibited during storms or high winds

unless a competent person has determined that it is safe for employees
to be on the scaffold and those employees are protected by a personal fall
arrest system or windscreens. Windscreens shall not be used unless the
scaffold is secured against the anticipated wind forces imposed.
14. Debris shall not be allowed to accumulate on platforms.
Page 12 of 16
15. Makeshift devices, such as but not limited to boxes and barrels, shall not
be used on top of scaffold platforms to increase the working level height
of employees.
16. Ladders shall not be used on scaffolds to increase the working level
height of employees, except on large area scaffolds where employers have
satisfied the following criteria:
17. When the ladder is placed against a structure which is not a part of the
scaffold, the scaffold shall be secured against the sideways thrust exerted
by the ladder;
18. The platform units shall be secured to the scaffold to prevent their
movement;
19. The ladder legs shall be on the same platform or other means shall be
provided to stabilize the ladder against unequal platform deflection; and
20. The ladder legs shall be secured to prevent them from slipping or being
pushed off the platform.
21. Platforms shall not deflect more than 1/60 of the span when loaded.
22. To reduce the possibility of welding current arcing through the

suspension wire rope when performing welding from suspended
scaffolds, the following precautions shall be taken, as applicable:
• An insulated thimble shall be used to attach each suspension wire
rope to its banging support (such as cornice hook or outrigger).
Excess suspension wire rope and any additional independent lines
from grounding shall be insulated;
• The suspension wire rope shall be covered with insulating material
extending at least 4 feet (1.2 m) above the hoist. If there is a tail line
below the hoist; it shall be insulated to prevent contact with the
platform. The portion of the tail line that hangs free below the scaffold
shall be guided or retained, or both, so that it does not become
grounded,
• Each hoist shall be covered with insulated protective covers;
• In addition to a work lead attachment required by the welding
process, a grounding conductor shall be connected from the scaffold
to the structure. The size of this conductor shall be at least the size of
the welding process work lead, and this conductor shall not be in
series with the welding process or the work piece;
• If the scaffold grounding lead is disconnected at any time, the welding
machine shall be shut off; and
Page 13 of 16
• An active welding rod or uninsulated welding lead shall not be allowed

to contact the scaffold or its suspension system.
Fall protection
• Each employee on a scaffold more than 6 feet above a lower level shall
be protected from falling to that lower level.
• The top edge height of toprails or equivalent member on supported

scaffolds manufactured or placed in service after January 1, 2000
shall be installed between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 45 inches (1.2 m)
above the platform surface. The top edge height on supported
scaffolds manufactured and placed in service before January 1, 2000,
and on all suspended scaffolds where both a guardrail and a personal
fall arrest system are required shall be between 36 inches (0.9 m) and
45 inches (1.2 in). When conditions warrant, the height of the top
edge may exceed the 45-inch height; provided the guardrail system
meets all other criteria of paragraph (gX4).
• When midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid
panels, or equivalent structural members are used, they shall be
installed between the top edge of the guardrail system and the
scaffold platform.
• When midrails are used, they shall be installed at a height
approximately midway between the top edge of the guardrail system
and the platform surface.
• When screens and mesh are used, they shall extend from the top edge
of the guardrail system to the scaffold platform, and along the entire
opening between the supports.
• When intermediate members (such as balusters or additional rails)
are used, they shall not be more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart.
• Each toprail or equivalent member of a guardrail system shall be
capable of withstanding, without failure, a force applied in any
downward or horizontal direction at any point along its top edge of at
least 100 pounds (445 n) for guardrail systems installed on single-
point adjustable suspension scaffolds or two-point adjustable
suspension scaffolds, and at least 200 pounds (890 n) for guardrail
systems installed on all other scaffolds.
• Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate vertical members, solid panels,
and equivalent structural members of a guardrail system shall be
capable of withstanding, without failure, a force applied in any
downward or horizontal direction at any point along the midrail or
other member of at least 75 pounds (333 n) for guardrail systems with
a minimum 100 pound toprail capacity, and at least 150 pounds (666
n) for guardrail systems with a minimum 200 pound toprail capacity.
Page 14 of 16
• Suspension scaffold hoists and non-walk-through stirrups may be

used as end guardrails, if the space between the hoist or stirrup and
the side guardrail or structure does not allow passage of an employee
to the end of the scaffold.
• Crossbracing is acceptable in place of a midrail when the crossing
point of two braces is between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 30 inches (0.8
m) above the work platform or as a toprail when the crossing point of
two braces is between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 48 inches (1.3 m) above
the work platform. The end points at each upright shall be no more
than 48 inches (1.3 m) apart.
Falling object protection

• In addition to wearing hardhats each employee on a scaffold shall be
provided with additional protection from falling hand tools, debris,
and other small objects through the installation of toeboards, screens,
or guardrail systems, or through the erection of debris nets, catch
platforms, or canopy structures that contain or deflect the falling
objects. When the falling objects are too large, heavy or massive to be
contained or deflected by any of the above-listed measures, the
employer shall place such potential falling objects away from the edge
of the surface from which they could fall and shall secure those
materials as necessary to prevent their falling.
• Where there is a danger of tools, materials, or equipment falling from
a scaffold and striking employees below, the following provisions
apply:
• The area below the scaffold to which objects can fall shall be
barricaded, and employees shall not be permitted to enter the hazard
area; or
• A toeboard shall be erected along the edge of platforms more than 6
feet above lower levels for a distance sufficient to protect employees
below, except on float (ship) scaffolds where an edging of ¼’ 1½ inch
(2 ‘4cm) wood or equivalent may be used in lieu of toeboards;
• Where tools, materials, or equipment are piled to a height higher than
the top edge of the toeboard, paneling or screening extending from the
toeboard or platform to the top of the guardrail shall be erected for a
distance sufficient to protect employees below; or
• A guardrail system shall be installed with openings small enough to
prevent passage of potential falling objects; or
• A canopy structure, debris net, or catch platform strong enough to
withstand the impact forces of the potential falling objects shall be
erected over the employees below.
• Canopies, when used for falling object protection, shall comply with
the following criteria:
Page 15 of 16
• Canopies shall be installed between the falling object hazard and the
employees.
• When canopies are used on suspension scaffolds for falling object
protection, the scaffold shall be equipped with additional independent
support lines equal in number to the number of points supported,
and equivalent in strength to the strength of the suspension ropes.
• Independent support lines and suspension ropes shall not be
attached to the same points of anchorage.
• Where used, toeboards shall be:
• Capable of withstanding, without failure, a force of at least 50 pounds
(222 n) applied in any downward or horizontal direction at any point
along the toeboard (toeboards built in accordance with Appendix A to
this subpart will be deemed to meet this requirement); and
• At least three and one-half inches (9 cm) high from the top edge of the
toeboard to the level of the walking/working surface. Toeboards shall
be securely fastened in place at the outermost edge of the platform
and have not more than ¼ inch (0.7 cm) clearance above the
walking/working surface. Toeboards shall be solid or with openings
not over one inch (2.5 cm) in the greatest dimension.
Scaffold erection and dismantling:

• A serious accident potential can occur during those moments when
scaffolds are being erected or dismantled.
• Workers must keep both hands empty for secure handholds when
moving about on scaffolds.
• Pockets, pouches, and tool belts are to be used to carry the necessary
tools for the work.
• Scaffold members shall be hoisted or lowered with a hand line or
passed from hand to hand. Throwing items up to co-workers or
dropping them is not permitted.
• Scaffold leg bases shall be established on a firm and level base of
support.
• When scaffold ties to fixed structures or outriggers are to be used,
they shall be made as soon, as is prudently possible.
• Attention to the coordination of this activity with surrounding
operations and environment shall be given prior consideration.
Note:
Specific regulations regarding the type of scaffolding in use should be followed as
Page 16 of 16
TAB 20 – STEEL ERECTION PROCEDURE
Steel Erection Procedure

This Health and Safety Procedure provides the minimum site set up
procedures, engineering requirements, and operating procedures to be
followed when employees are performing steel erection and dismantling
operations.
This procedure applies to all employees and on-site contractors covered
by the Company Health, Safety, and Environment (HSE) Program.
General responsibilities for HSE procedures implementation and position
descriptions are stated in Tab 2 of this plan. Additional responsibilities
specific to this procedure include the following.
Project Manager
The Project Manager is responsible for assuring that the engineering
requirements are followed and that the site manager and steel erection
subcontractors are in compliance with this HSEP.
Site Superintendent
The Site Superintendent is responsible for assuring implementation of
and compliance with this procedure. Site Superintendent must be
familiar with these procedures and utilize the expertise at their disposal
to ensure that employees are protected during steel erecting and/or
dismantling operations.
Where required by this procedure, the Steel Erection Superintendent
must designate a competent person to supervise steel work activities.
When Davis Constructors is the Controlling Contractor, the
Superintendent shall ensure that the following is provided and
maintained:
• Adequate access roads into and through the site for the safe delivery
and movement of derricks, cranes, trucks, other necessary
equipment, the material to be erected, and means and methods for
pedestrian and vehicular control.
• A firm, properly graded, drained area, readily accessible to the work,
with adequate space for the safe storage of materials, and the safe
operation of the erector's equipment.
• All hoisting operations in steel erection shall be pre-planned to ensure
that employees and others are not exposed to overhead loads.
• All requirements for Mobile Cranes, must be followed.
• Before authorizing the commencement of steel erection, the
controlling contractor shall ensure that the steel erector is provided
with the following written notifications:
− The concrete in the footings, piers, and walls and the mortar in the
masonry piers and walls has attained, on the basis of an
appropriate ASTM standard test method of field-cured samples,
either 75 percent of the intended minimum compressive design
strength or sufficient strength to support the loads imposed during
steel erection.
− Any repairs, replacements, and modifications to the anchor
rods/bolts are adequate and have been approved by the Project
Structural Engineer.
Project Structural Engineer
The Project Structural Engineer responsible for ensuring that the design
of the structure meets the requirements of all applicable codes,
standards, and this Procedure and for issuing special instructions, where
additional guying, bracing, bolting, etc. are required during erection
operations.
Supervisor/Foreman
Supervisors/Foreman responsible for employees performing steel
erection/dismantling work must:
• Ensure that employees have received training on the requirements of
Steel Erection Regulations.
• Confirm that each job has been properly evaluated for hazards
associated with steel work and be certain that their employees know
exactly what part each plays in the operation.
• Continuously monitor the work to assure compliance with this
procedure.
Employee
Employees shall perform work based on instructions received from
supervision and training received on this procedure.
Competent Person
Competent Persons shall be designated by the steel erection contractor to
ensure that work proceeds in accordance with this Procedure and OSHA
Steel Erection Regulations. The Site Manager will also assign competent
person(s) to provide oversight and guidance, when Davis is the named
controlling contractor.
In addition to the basic steel erection/dismantling safety requirements
established by this Procedure, Competent Persons shall be relied upon
for instructions regarding completing specific steel erection/dismantling
tasks safely such as where plumbing-up guys and related equipment are
used to maintain stability.
Site HSE Supervisor
The Site HSE Supervisor shall assist site management with his/her duty
to implement the requirements set forth in this Procedure.
The HSE Supervisor shall monitor field activities for compliance with this
Procedure and shall keep site management informed of these monitoring
results.
3.0 Definitions
Term Definition
Means that the steel joist bridging is connected to a
Anchored Bridging
bridging terminus point.
Bolted Diagonal Diagonal bridging that is bolted to a steel joist or
Bridging joists.
A device that is attached to the steel joist to allow the
Bridging Clip bolting of the bridging to the steel joist.
Bridging Terminus A wall, a beam, tandem joists (with all bridging
Point installed and a horizontal truss in the plane of the
top chord) or other element at an end or intermediate
point(s) of a line of bridging that provides an anchor
point for the steel joist bridging.
Column A load-carrying vertical member that is part of the
primary skeletal framing system. (Columns do not
include posts.)
Competent Person One who is capable of identifying existing and
predictable hazards in the surroundings or working
conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or
dangerous to employees, and who has the
authorization to take prompt corrective measures to
eliminate them.
Connector An employee who, working with hoisting equipment,
is placing and connecting structural members
and/or components.
Constructability The ability to erect structural steel members per the
drawings and this procedure without having to alter
the over-all structural design.
Construction Load (For joist erection.) Any load other than the weight of
the employee(s), the joists, and the bridging bundle.
Controlled Decking An area in which certain work (for example, initial
Zone (CDZ) installation and placement of metal decking) may
take place without the use of guardrail systems,
personal fall arrest systems, fall restraint systems, or
safety net systems where access to the zone is
controlled.
Controlled Load Lowering a load by means of mechanical hoist drum
Lowering device using gear train or hydraulic components of
the hoist mechanism.
Controlling A prime contractor, general contractor, construction
Contractor manager, or any other legal entity, which has overall
responsibility for the construction of the project, its
planning, quality, and completion.
Critical Lift Note per this procedure, a critical lift is also one,
which exceeds 75% of the lifting equipment’s
capacity.
Decking Hole A gap or void more than 2 inches (5.1 cm) in its least
dimension and less than 12 inches (30.5 cm) in its
greatest dimension in a floor, roof, or other
walking/working surface.
Derrick Floor An elevated floor of a building or a structure that has
been designated to receive hoisted pieces of material
prior to final placement.
Double Connection An attachment method where the connection point is
intended for two pieces of steel which share common
bolts on either side of a central piece.
Double Connection A structural attachment that, during the installation
Seat of a double connection, supports the first member
while the second member is connected.
Erection Bridging The bolted diagonal bridging that is required to be
installed prior to releasing the hoisting cables from
the steel joists.
Fall Restraint A fall prevention system that prevents the user from
System falling any distance. The system is comprised of a
full-body harness, along with an anchorage,
connectors, and other necessary equipment. The
system prevents and/or restrains the user from
reaching the open edge of the structure or platform.
Anchorage shall be capable of resisting 400 lbs. (1.82
kN) of force minimum (same as two times force
required for a barricade/handrail) or two times the
employee’s weight, whichever is greater.
Girt For Systems-Engineered Metal Buildings. A “Z” or
“C” shaped member formed from sheet steel
spanning between primary framing and supporting
wall material.
Leading Edge The unprotected side and edge of a floor, roof, or
formwork for a floor or other walking and/or working
surface, such as deck, which changes locations as
additional floor, roof, decking, or formwork sections
are placed, formed, or constructed.
Metal Decking Metal floor and roof decks, standing seam metal
roofs, other metal roof systems, and other products
such as bar grating, checker plate, expanded metal
panels, and similar products.
Multiple Lift Rigging A rigging assembly of wire rope that facilitates the
(Christmas Treeing) attachment of up to five independent loads to the
hoist rigging of a crane. Jacobs does not allow
multiple lift rigging without written approval by a
Senior HSE Manager and a site-specific plan to
prevent exposure to overhead loads.
Opening A gap or void 12 inches (30.5 cm) or more in its least
dimension in a floor, roof, or other walking and/or
working surface. Unguarded or un-reinforced
skylights are considered openings.
Permanent Floor A structurally completed floor at any level or
elevation.
Personal Fall Arrest A system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a
System working level. It includes anchorage, connectors, a
full body harness, and may include a lanyard,
deceleration device, lifeline or suitable combination
of these.
Positioning Device A full body harness rigged to allow an employee to be
supported on an elevated, vertical surface, such as a
wall or column and work with both hands free while
leaning.
Post A structural member with the longitudinal axis that
is essentially vertical that:
(1) Weighs 300 pounds or less and is axially loaded
(a load presses down on the top end), or
(2) Is not axially loaded, but is laterally restrained by
the above member. Posts typically support stair
landings, wall framing, mezzanines, and other
substructures.
Project Structural The registered, licensed professional responsible for
Engineer of Record the design of structural steel framing and whose seal
appears on the structural contract documents.
Qualified Person One who, by possession of a recognized degree,
certificate, or professional standing, or who by
extensive knowledge, training, and experience, has
successfully demonstrated the ability to solve or
resolve problems relating to the subject matter, the
work, or the project.
Safety Deck An initial attachment that is used to secure an
Attachment initially placed sheet of decking to keep proper
alignment and bearing with structural support
members.
Shear Connector Headed steel studs, steel bars, steel lugs or similar
devices, which are attached to a structural member
for the purpose of achieving composite action with
concrete.
Steel Erection The construction, alteration, or repair of steel
buildings, bridges, and other structures including
the installation of metal decking and all planking
used during the process of erection. It does not
include electrical transmission towers,
communication and broadcast towers, or tanks.
Steel Joist Open web, secondary load-carrying member of 144
feet (43.9 m) or less, designed by the manufacturer,
to be used for the support of floors and roofs. This
does not include structural steel trusses or cold-
formed joists.
Steel Joist Girder An open web, primary load carrying member,
designed by the manufacturer, used for the support
of floors and roofs. This does not include structural
steel trusses.
Steel Truss An open web member designed of structural steel
components by the project structural engineer of
record. For this procedure, a steel truss is
considered equivalent to a solid web structural
member.
Structural Steel A steel member, or a member made of a substitute
material such as, but not limited to fiberglass,
aluminum, or composite members. These members
include, but are not limited to, steel joists, joist
girders, purlins, columns, beams, trusses, splices,
seats, metal decking, girts, and all bridging, and cold
formed metal framing which is integrated with
structural steel framing of a building.
Systems-Engineered A metal, field-assembled building system consisting
Metal Building of framing, roof, and wall coverings. The engineering
design of the system is normally the responsibility of
the systems-engineered metal building
manufacturer.
Unprotected Sides Any side or edge, except at entrances to points of
and Edges access, of walking and/or working surfaces, such as
a floor, roof, ramp, or runway, where there is no wall
or guardrail system at least 39 inches (1.0 m) high.
4.0 Engineering Requirements
4.1 Column Anchorage

All columns shall be anchored by a minimum of 4 anchor rods/bolts.
Each column anchor rod/bolt assembly, including the column-to-base
plate weld and column foundation, shall be designed to resist a
minimum eccentric gravity load of 300 lbs (136.2 kg) located 18 inches
(0.46 m) from the extreme outer face of the column in each direction at
the top of the column shaft. Columns shall be set on level finished
floors, pre-grouted leveling plates, leveling nuts, or shim packs, which
are adequate to transfer the construction loads.
All columns shall be evaluated by a competent person to determine
whether guying or bracing is needed during construction. If needed, it
should be shown on the erection drawings and it shall be installed.
Anchor rods/bolts shall not be repaired, replaced, or field modified
without the approval of the Project Structural Engineer of Record. If
anchor bolts have been repaired, replaced, or field modified the
controlling contractor shall provide written notification to the steel
erector prior to the erection of the column.
4.2 Beams and Columns
All connection of solid web structural members shall be designed such
that two bolts per connection of the same size and strength as shown in
the erection drawings for the completed joint, drawn up wrench-tight (or
equivalent welding as specified by the Structural Engineer of Record) will
be able to withstand the construction loads.
If two bolts cannot withstand the construction loads, the minimum
required bolting shall be specified on the erection drawings. An example
where more than two bolts may be required is for the stability of
cantilevered members; if additional bolts are required during erection,
they shall be specified on the drawings. The one exception for the two-
bolt-minimum requirement is for diagonal bracing. Diagonal bracing
shall be secured by at least one bolt per connection drawn up wrench
tight (or the equivalent welding as specified by the Project Structural
Engineer of Record).
When double connections at columns and/or at beam webs over a
column share common connection holes, at least one bolt with its
wrench-tight nut shall remain connected to the first member unless a
shop-attached or field attached seat or equivalent connection device is
supplied with the member to secure the first member and prevent the
column from being displaced.
Rather than provide a seat or connection device, engineering may off set
the connection points or use a clipped end connection such that at least
one bolt for the double connection does not interfere with the setting of
the second side of the double connection. If a seat or equivalent device is
used, the member shall be designed to support the load during the
double connection process. It shall be adequately bolted or welded to
both a supporting member and the first member before the nuts on the
shared bolts are removed to make the double connection.
4.3 Walking/Working Surfaces
To avoid tripping hazards, such as shear connectors (headed steel studs,
steel bars, or steel lugs), reinforcing bars, deformed anchors or threaded
studs shall not be attached to the top flanges of beams, joists or beam
attachments so that they project vertically from or horizontally across the
top flange of the member until after the metal decking, or other
walking/working surface, has been installed.
4.4 Column Splices
Each column splice shall be designed to resist a minimum eccentric
gravity load of 300 pounds (136.2 kg) located 18 inches (.46 m) from the
extreme outer face of the column in each direction at the top of the
column shaft.
4.5 Perimeter Columns
The perimeter columns shall extend a minimum of 48 inches (1.2 m)
above the finished floor to permit installation of perimeter safety cables
prior to erection of the next tier, except where constructibility does not
allow.
When the perimeter columns extend above the finished floor, they shall
have holes (⅝” +/-) or other devices in or attached to perimeter columns
at 42 – 45 inches (107 –- 114 cm) above the finished floor and at the
midpoint between the finished floor and the top cable to permit
installation of top and-mid rail perimeter safety cables, except where
constructibility does not allow.
In multi-story structures, when holes in the column web are used for
perimeter safety cables, the column splice must be placed sufficiently
high so as not to interfere with any attachments to the column necessary
for the perimeter safety cables. Column splices are recommended to be
placed at every other or fourth levels as design allows. Column splices at
third levels are detrimental to the erection process and should be
avoided.
4.6 Open Web Steel Joists
Where steel joists are used and columns are not framed in at least two
directions with solid web structural steel members: a steel joist shall be
field-bolted at the column to provide lateral stability to the column
during erection. For the installation of this joist, engineering shall do the
following and place appropriate notes on erection drawings:
• A vertical stabilizer plate shall be provided on each column for steel
joists. The plate shall be a minimum of 6 inch by 6 inch (152 mm by
152 mm) and shall extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) below the bottom
chord of the joist with a 13/16-inch (21 mm) hole to provide an
attachment point for guying or plumbing cables.
• The bottom chords of steel joists at columns shall be stabilized to
prevent rotation during erection.
• Hoisting cables shall not be released until the seat at each end of the
steel joist is field-bolted, and each end of the bottom chord is
restrained by the column stabilizer plate.
Where constructibility does not allow a steel joist to be installed at the
column:
Alternate means of stabilizing joists shall be installed on both sides near
the column and shall:
• Provide stability equivalent to that required in the first paragraph of
4.6 of this document;
• Be designed by a qualified person;
• Be shop installed; and
• Be included in the erection drawings.
• Hoisting cables shall not be released until the seat at each end of the
steel joist is field-bolted and the joist is stabilized.
Where steel joists at or near columns span 60 feet (18.3 m) or less, the
joist shall be designed with sufficient strength to allow one employee to
release the hoisting cable without the need for erection bridging.
Where steel joists at or near columns span more than 60 feet (18.3 m),
the joists shall be set in tandem with all bridging installed unless an
alternative method of erection, which provides equivalent stability to the
steel joist, is designed by a qualified person and is included in the site-
specific erection plan.
Field-bolted joists, except for steel joists that have been pre-assembled
into panels, connections of individual steel joists to steel structures in
bays of 40 feet (12.2 m) or more shall be fabricated to allow for field
bolting during erection. These connections shall be field-bolted unless
constructibility does not allow.
Erection bridging, where the span of the steel joist is equal to or greater
than those shown in Figures 1 and 2, a row of bolted diagonal erection
bridging shall be installed near the midspan of the steel joist and
anchored (connected to a bridging terminus point) prior to releasing the
hoisting cables.
Where the span of the steel joist is over 60 feet (18.3m) through 100 feet
(30.5m), all rows of bridging shall be bolted diagonal bridging and two
rows of bolted diagonal erection bridging shall be installed and anchored
near the third points for the steel joist prior to releasing the hoisting
cables.
Where the span of the steel joist is over 100 feet (30.5 m) through 144
feet (43.9 m), all rows of bridging shall be bolted diagonal bridging, all
bridging will be installed and anchored prior to releasing hoisting cables.
Where any steel joist listed in this section is a bottom chord-bearing
joist, a row of bolted diagonal bridging shall be provided near the
support(s).
When bolted diagonal erection bridging is required by this section, the
following shall apply:
• The bridging shall be indicated on the erection drawing;
• The erection drawing shall be the exclusive indicator of the proper
placement of this bridging;
• Shop-installed bridging clips, or functional equivalents, shall be used
where the bridging bolts to the steel joists;
• When two pieces of bridging are attached to the steel joist by a
common bolt, the nut that secures the first piece of bridging shall not
be removed from the bolt for the attachment of the second; and
• Bridging attachments shall not protrude above the top chord of the
steel joist.
4.7 Systems-Engineered Metal Buildings
Each structural column shall be anchored by a minimum of four anchor
rods (anchor bolts).
Rigid frames shall have 50 percent of their bolts or the number of bolts
specified by the manufacturer (whichever is greater) installed and
tightened on both sides of the web adjacent to each flange before the
hoisting equipment is released.
In girt and eave strut-to-frame connections, when girts or eave struts
share common connection holes, at least one bolt with its nut wrench-
tight shall remain connected to the first member unless a manufacturer-
supplied, field-attached seat or similar connection device is present to
secure the first member so that the girt or eave strut is always secured
against displacement.
5.0 Site Specific Erection Plan
If a site-specific erection plan is deemed necessary, due to conditions

specific to the site, a site-specific erection plan shall be developed by a
qualified person and be available at the work site.
A pre-construction conference(s) and site inspection(s) should be held
between the erector and the controlling contractor, and others such as
the project engineer and fabricator before the start of steel erection. The
purpose of such conference(s) is to develop and review the site- specific
erection plan.
5.1 Components of a Site-specific Erection Plan
In developing a site-specific erection plan, a steel erector considers the
following elements:
• The sequence of erection activity, developed in coordination with the
controlling contractor, that includes the following:
− Material deliveries;
− Material staging and storage; and
− Coordination with other trades and construction activities.
• A description of the crane and derrick selection and placement
procedures, including the following:
− Site preparation;
− Crane or derrick set-up including addressing overhead and
underground utility interferences.
− Path for overhead loads; and
− Critical lifts, including rigging supplies and equipment.
• A description of steel erection activities and procedures, including the
following:
− Stability considerations requiring temporary bracing and guying;
− Erection bridging terminus points;
− Anchor rod (anchor bolt) notifications regarding repair,
replacement and modifications;
− Columns and beams (including joists and purlins);
− Connections;
− Decking; and
− Ornamental and miscellaneous iron.
• A description of the fall protection procedures to be used.
• A description of the procedures that will be used to prevent or protect
from falling objects.
• A description of the special procedures required for hazardous non-
routine tasks.
• A certification for each employee who has received training for
performing steel erection operations as required by this HSE
Procedure.
• A list of the qualified and competent persons for steel erection, crane
use, etc.
• A description of the procedures to be used in the event of rescue or
emergency response situations.
5.2 Other Plan Information
Includes the identification of the site and project; and
Is signed and dated by the qualified person(s) responsible for its
preparation and modification.
6.0 Procedure Structural Steel Assembly, Erection, and

Dismanteling
6.1 Notifications
Before beginning steel erection, obtain from the controlling contractor
written notifications related to the following:
• The concrete in the footings, piers and walls, and the mortar in the
masonry piers and walls has attained either 75 percent of the
intended minimum compressive design strength or sufficient strength
to support the loads imposed during steel erection.
• Any repairs, replacements, and modifications to the anchor rods/bolts
are adequate and have been approved by the Project Structural
Engineer.
Containers will be used for storing any loose materials (bolts, drift pins,
tools, etc.) and the container must be secured to prevent displacement.
“DANGER - MEN WORKING ABOVE” signs and barricades (if applicable)
shall be erected on lower exposed levels to keep unauthorized personnel
out of the area.
Impalement hazards, such as vertical rebar, must be removed or
adequately covered because they could endanger persons working above
if they should fall.
Impact wrenches must be provided with a locking device for retaining the
socket.
At no time will work be allowed directly below any steel erection and/or
dismantling operation. As a general rule, it is recommended that a ratio
of 2:1 (height of load to horizontal distance to load) be maintained for
loads that are less than 50 feet (15.3 m) off the ground or above
employees on the structure. Thus, for a 40-foot (12.2 m) high load, a 20-
foot (6.1m) horizontal distance to the edge of the load should be
maintained. For loads above 50 feet (15.3 m) in height, use the greater of
25 feet (7.6 m) or a 30% ratio of load height to horizontal distance. For
special lifts such as tall thin structures, greater distances should be
utilized to ensure the safety of site personnel.
When bolts or drift pins are being knocked out, a means will be provided
to tether or prevent them from falling.
During installation of solid web structural members, the load will not be
released from the hoisting line until the member is secured at each
connection with at least two bolts (columns 4 bolts minimum) or the
minimum number of bolts specified on the erection drawings or by the
competent person, they are wrench tight, and all other requirements of
this HSEP are completed.
A competent person shall determine if more than two bolts are required
for cantilevered members and if needed, they shall be installed.
Solid web structural members used as diagonal bracing shall be secured
by at least one bolt per connection drawn up wrench-tight or equivalent
welding as specified by the Project Structural Engineer of Record, before
the hoisting cables are released.
When two structural members on opposite sides of a column web, or a
beam web over a column, are connected sharing common connection
holes, at least one bolt with its wrench tight nut shall remain connected
to the first member unless a shop-attached or field-attached seat or
equivalent connection device is supplied with the member to secure the
first member while the second member is connected.
If a seat or equivalent device is used, the seat (or device) shall be
designed to support the load during the double connection process. It
shall be adequately bolted or welded to both a supporting member and
the first member before the nuts on the shared bolts are removed to
make the double connection.
No modification that affects the strength of a steel joist or steel joist
girder shall be made without the approval of the project structural
engineer of record.
When feasible attach a freestanding lifeline to structural steel members
while they are still on the ground. This allows 100% fall protection when
someone is required to access the member.
Tag lines will be used to control loads.
“Wind” loading on large structural members must be considered for the
safety of the tag line holder. It is not recommended to lift loads at wind
speeds above 20 mph (32 kph).
6.3 Fall Prevention/Protection During Steel Erection/Dismantling
Steel Erection And Dismantling Operations
The following requirements, and those given in Tab 9, Fall
Prevention/Protection, apply to all steel erection and dismantling
operations.
• Anytime employees are working from an unprotected elevation
of six feet (1.8 m) or more above the grade, fall protection must
be used. “Working” means while traveling, stationary, or at
anytime exposed to a fall from a surface not protected by a
standard guardrail or other approved fall prevention device.
• This fall protection requirement means no exposure to any fall
greater than six feet without protection by means of an
approved positioning device, fall restraint system, personal fall
arrest system, or guardrails.
• Personal fall arrest systems shall be used and inspected in
accordance with Tab 9, Fall Protection.
• Steel joists and steel joist girders shall not be used as
anchorage points for a fall arrest system unless written
approval to do so is obtained from a qualified person.
• Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, installed, and used, under
the supervision of a qualified person, as part of a complete
personal fall arrest system. This system shall provide a safety
factor of at least two.
• When vertical lifelines are used, each employee shall be
attached to a separate lifeline.
• The permanent floors shall be installed as the erection of
structural members progresses.
• At no time will there be more than four floors (or 48 feet) of
unfinished bolting or welding above the foundation or
uppermost permanently secured floor.
• On multi-story structures, guardrails such as perimeter safety
cables (top and midrail) shall be installed at the final interior
and exterior perimeters of the floors as soon as the metal
decking or flooring has been installed.
• A standard guardrail meeting the requirements of Tab 9, Fall
Prevention/Protection shall be installed around all temporary
planked, decked floors or completed floors w/o walls. The top
rail shall be installed between a maximum 45 inch (1.14m),
(standard 42 inch (1.1m)), and a minimum 39 inch (0.99m)
height above the walking/working surface, with a midrail
installed midway between deck and top rail.
• Where perimeter cable handrails are used as a guardrail they
should be minimum ⅜-inch (0.95 cm) diameter cable. High
visibility streamers (12” pieces of barricade tape is acceptable)
will be tied to cable handrails not more than every 6 feet. The
lowest point on the cable (deflected with a 200 # load) is 39
inches (0.99m). It is suggested to use interconnecting cable
eyes to connect cables or at end point(s). The correct number,
size, and distance between cable clamps for making cable
connections shall be utilized. Manufacturer’s requirements are
to be strictly followed. Crosby cable clamps are recommended.
• Extreme caution must be used on partially completed
stairways. Personal fall protection must be utilized until the
stairs are completed and safe for general use.
Custody of Fall Protection
Fall protection provided by the steel erector shall remain in the
area where steel erection activity has been completed, to be used
by other trades, only if Davis as the controlling contractor or its
authorized representative:
• Has directed the steel erector to leave the fall protection in
place; and
• Has inspected and accepted control and responsibility of the fall
protection prior to authorizing persons other than steel erectors
to work in the area; and
• The subcontract document for the other users of the equipment
clearly addresses their responsibility and liabilities for
maintaining the system during their use.
Walking/Working Surfaces
Tripping hazards, shear connectors (such as headed steel studs,
steel bars or steel lugs), reinforcing bars, deformed anchors, or
threaded studs shall not be attached to the top flanges of beams,
joists, or beam attachments so that they project vertically from or
horizontally across the top flange of the member until after the
metal decking or other walking/working surface, has been
installed.
When shear connectors are used in construction of composite
floors, roofs and bridge decks, employees shall lay out and install
the shear connectors after the metal decking has been installed,
using the metal decking as a working platform.
6.4 Overhead Hoisting Operations
General
All hoisting operations in steel erection shall be pre-planned to
ensure that the requirements of this procedure. For this Procedure
an additional critical lift requirement is that loads over 75%
capacity are also considered critical lifts and the critical lift
procedure must be followed.
Pre-planning requires the following data is identified: the total
lifted load weight is known and is within the capacity of the
hoisting equipment, the maximum lift radius, lift path, details of
hooking and unhooking the load, and signal person(s) designated.
A TSA (Task Safety Awareness) meeting must be held prior to the
lift to communicate the lift data to the employees.
A “Christmas Tree” load, having several structural members
suspended/rigged one below the other, is allowed on Jacobs
projects without Senior HSE Manager and Senior Operations
Manager written approval and a site-specific approved plan
developed to prevent exposure to overhead loads.
Hoisting, Landing, And Placing Of Metal Decking Bundles
Bundle packaging and strapping shall not be used for hoisting
unless specifically designed for that purpose.
If loose items such as dunnage, flashing, or other materials are
placed on the top of metal decking bundles to be hoisted, such
items shall be secured to the bundles.
Bundles of metal decking on joists shall be landed such that no
bundle of decking may be placed on steel joists until all bridging
has been installed and anchored and all joist bearing ends
attached, unless all of the following conditions are met:
• A qualified person has determined and documented in a site-
specific erection plan that the structure or portion of the
structure is capable of supporting the load;
• The bundle of decking is placed on a minimum of three steel
joists;
• The joists supporting the bundle of decking are attached at both
ends;
• At least one row of bridging is installed and anchored;
• The total weight of the bundle of decking does not exceed 4,000
pounds (1816 kg); and
• The edge of the bundle of decking load shall be placed within 1
foot (.30 m) of the bearing surface of the joist end.
Metal decking bundles shall be landed on framing members so that
enough support is provided to allow the bundles to be unbanded
without dislodging the bundles from the supports.
At the end of the shift or when environmental or jobsite conditions
require, metal decking shall be secured against displacement.
Landing And Placing Loads On The Structure
During the construction period, any load(s) on steel joists shall be
distributed so as not to exceed the carrying capacity of any steel
joist.
Except for Decking rules under paragraph 6.4.2, no construction
loads are allowed on the steel joists until all bridging is installed
and anchored (“connected to a bridging terminus point”) and all
joist-bearing ends are attached.
The weight of a bundle of joist bridging shall not exceed a total of
1,000 pounds (454 kg). A bundle of joist bridging shall be placed
on a minimum of three steel joists that are secured at one end. The
edge of the bridging bundle shall be positioned within 1 foot (0.30
m) of the secured end.
A steel joist or steel joist girder shall not be placed on any support
structure unless such structure is stabilized.
When steel joist(s) are landed on a structure, they shall be secured
to prevent unintentional displacement prior to installation.
6.5 Structural Stability and Plumbing-up
All columns shall be anchored by a minimum of 4 anchor bolts.
Columns shall be set on level finished floors, pre-grouted leveling
plates, leveling nuts, or shim packs which are adequate to transfer
the construction loads.
When deemed necessary (see paragraph 4.1) by a competent
person or if noted on the erection drawings, plumbing-up
equipment/guys shall be installed during steel erection to ensure
the stability of the structure.
When used, plumbing-up equipment shall be properly installed
before the structure is loaded with construction material such as
loads of joists, bundles of decking or bundles of bridging.
Turnbuckles used on “plumbing-up” equipment/guys shall be
secured to prevent unwinding while under load.
Plumbing-up guys and related equipment shall be removed only under
the supervision of a competent person.
Structural stability shall be maintained at all times during the erection
process.
The following additional requirements shall apply for multi-story
structures:
• The permanent floors shall be installed as the erection of structural
members progresses, and there shall be not more than eight stories
between the erection floor and the upper-most permanent floor,
except where the structural integrity is maintained as a result of the
design.
• At no time shall there be more than four floors or 48 feet (14.6 m),
whichever is less, of unfinished bolting or welding above the
foundation or uppermost permanently secured floor, except where the
structural integrity is maintained as a result of the design.
• A fully planked/decked floor or nets shall be maintained within two
stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever is less, directly under any
erection work being performed.
6.6 Open Web Steel Joists
General
Where steel joists are used and columns are not framed in at least
two directions with solid web structural steel members: a steel
joist shall be field-bolted at the column to provide lateral stability
to the column during erection. For the installation of this joist
follow the appropriate notes on erection drawings and:
• Use the hole in the vertical column stabilizer plate provided on
each column as an attachment point for guying or plumbing
cables (See paragraph 4.6),
• The bottom chords of steel joists at columns shall be stabilized
to prevent rotation during erection.
• Hoisting cables shall not be released until the seat at each end
of the steel joist is field-bolted, and each end of the bottom
chord is restrained by the column stabilizer plate.
• Where constructibility does not allow a steel joist to be installed
at the column, alternate means of stabilizing joists shall be
installed on both sides near the column and shall:
• Provide stability equivalent to the column being framed in at
least two directions with solid web structural members;
• Be designed by a qualified person;
• Be shop installed; and
• Be included in the erection drawings.
Hoisting cables shall not be released until the seat at each end of
the steel joist is field-bolted and the joist is stabilized.
Attachment Of Steel Joists And Steel Joist Girders
Each end of "K" series steel joists shall be attached to the support
structure with a minimum of two ⅛-inch (3 mm) fillet welds 1 inch
(25 mm) long or with two ½ -inch (13 mm) bolts, or the equivalent.
Each end of "LH" and "DLH" series steel joists and steel joist
girders shall be attached to the support structure with a minimum
of two ¼ -inch (6 mm) fillet welds 2 inches (51 mm) long, or with
two ¾ -inch (19 mm) bolts, or the equivalent.
Except for panels that have been pre-assembled from steel joists
with bridging, each steel joist shall be attached to the support
structure, at least at one end on both sides of the seat,
immediately upon placement in the final erection position and
before additional joists are placed.
Panels that have been pre-assembled from steel joists with
bridging shall be attached to the structure at each corner before
the hoisting cables are released.
Erection Of Steel Joists That Require Bridging
Where steel joists at or near columns span 60 feet (18.3 m) or less,
the joist shall be designed with sufficient strength to allow one
employee to release the hoisting cable without the need for erection
bridging.
Where steel joists at or near columns span more than 60 feet
(18.3m), the joists shall be set in tandem with all bridging installed
unless an alternate method of erection, which provides equivalent
stability to the steel joists in tandem, is designed by a qualified
person and is included in the site-specific erection plan.
Both sides of the seat of one end of each steel joist that requires
bridging under provisions found in Figures 1 and 2 shall be
attached to the support structure before hoisting cables are
released.
For joists over 60 feet, both ends of the joist shall be attached as
specified in this section and the provisions other parts of this
section met before the hoisting cables are released.
On steel joists that do not require erection bridging under
provisions found in Figures 1 and 2 only one employee shall be
allowed on the joist until all bridging is installed and anchored.
Erection Bridging
Where the span of the steel joist is equal to or greater than the
span shown in Figures 1 and 2, the following shall apply:
• A row of bolted diagonal erection bridging shall be installed near
the midspan of the steel joist;
• Hoisting cables shall not be released until this bolted diagonal
erection bridging is installed and anchored (connected to a
bridging terminus point); and
• No more than one employee shall be allowed on these spans
until all other bridging is installed and anchored.
Where the span of the steel joist is over 60 feet (18.3 m) through
100 feet (30.5 m), the following shall apply:
• All rows of bridging shall be bolted diagonal bridging;
• Two rows of bolted diagonal erection bridging shall be installed
near the third points of the steel joist;
• Hoisting cables shall not be released until this bolted diagonal
erection bridging is installed and anchored; and
• No more than two employees shall be allowed on these spans
until all other bridging is installed and anchored.
Where the span of the steel joist is over 100 feet (30.5 m) through
144 feet (43.9 m), the following shall apply:
• All rows of bridging shall be bolted diagonal bridging;
• Hoisting cables shall not be released until all bridging is
installed and anchored; and
• No more than two employees shall be allowed on these spans
until all bridging is installed and anchored.
For steel members spanning over 144 feet (43.9 m), the erection
methods used shall be in accordance with the erection plan.
Where any steel joist specified in this section is a bottom chord-
bearing joist, a row of bolted diagonal bridging shall be provided
near the support(s). This bridging shall be installed and anchored
before the hoisting cable(s) is released.
When two pieces of bridging are attached to the steel joist by a
common bolt, the nut that secures the first piece of bridging shall
not be removed from the bolt for the attachment of the second.
6.7 Floors, Roofs, and Metal Decking
Roof And Floor Holes And Openings
Metal decking at roof and floor holes and openings shall be
installed as follows:
• Framed metal deck openings shall have structural members
turned down to allow continuous deck installation except where
not allowed by structural design constraints or constructibility.
• Roof and floor holes and openings shall be decked over. Where
large size, configuration or other structural design does not
allow openings to be decked over (such as elevator shafts, stair
wells, etc.) employee shall be protected with appropriate
barricades.
• Metal decking holes and openings shall not be cut until
immediately prior to being permanently filled with the
equipment or structure needed or intended to fulfill its specific
use and which meets the strength requirements of the next
paragraph, or shall be immediately covered.
Covering Roof And Floor Openings
Covers for roof and floor openings shall be capable of supporting,
without failure, twice the weight of the employees, equipment and
materials that may be imposed on the cover at any one time. For
large openings, etc that cannot be decked over, use barricades to
protect employees.
All covers shall be secured when installed to prevent accidental
displacement by the wind, equipment or employees.
All covers shall be painted with high-visibility paint or shall be
marked with the word "HOLE" or "COVER" to provide warning of
the hazard.
Smoke dome or skylight fixtures that have been installed, are not
considered covers for the purpose of this section unless they meet
the strength requirements of covers listed above.
Decking Gaps Around Columns
Wire mesh, exterior plywood, or equivalent, shall be installed
around columns where planks or metal decking do not fit tightly.
The materials used must be of sufficient strength to provide fall
protection for personnel and prevent objects from falling through.
Installation Of Decking
Decking sections shall be laid tightly and immediately secured
upon placement to prevent accidental movement or displacement.
During initial placement, decking sections shall be placed in such
a manner to ensure full support by structural members and each
piece shall be individually secured.
Pre-installation or shake-out of multiple sections of decking using
only temporary methods of attachment, such as tack welding, is
not allowed.
Derrick Floors
A derrick floor shall be fully decked and/or planked and the steel
member connections completed to support the intended floor
loading.
Temporary loads placed on a derrick floor shall be distributed over
the underlying support members so as to prevent local overloading
of the deck material.
6.8 Systems-Engineered Metal Buildings
Each structural column shall be anchored by a minimum of four
anchor prior to releasing hoisting equipment.
Rigid frames shall have 50 percent of their bolts or the number of
bolts specified by the manufacturer (whichever is greater) installed
and tightened on both sides of the web adjacent to each flange
before the hoisting equipment is released.
6.9 Dismantling Steel Structures (General)
Prior to demolition operations of a structure, an engineering survey
shall be made by a competent person to determine the condition of
the framing, floors, and walls, and possibility of collapse. Written
evidence of this survey will be available to the employees.
A demolition plan shall be developed and reviewed by a competent
person prior to commencing work.
When more than one crew is to be involved in a dismantling job,
the responsible site manager must appoint one supervisor as Steel
Erection Coordinator.
Supervisors must be certain that their employees know exactly
what part each plays in the operation.
If a bolt crew prepares the structure for a dismantling crew, at
least two bolts in each connection in a pattern that prevents rolling
when walked on.
If partial cutting of structural members is to be done prior to
actual dismantling, the Superintendent or the Coordinating
Supervisor must approve (and supervise) the amount to be cut.
Tag lines are recommended to be on both ends of beams being
removed from structures until the center of gravity is found.
Only a very slight strain should be taken on a load line before
burning off (or unbolting) completely. Any structural member
being dismembered shall not be overstressed.
Hoisting lines must always be kept plumb above the load to
prevent uncontrolled swinging.
“DANGER — MEN WORKING ABOVE” and ground barricades must
be used during any dismantling job.
Note: These are minimum basic steel dismantling safety
requirements. Competent Supervision should be contacted for
additional requirements for given specific situations. The
Corporate Safety Department may also be consulted for additional
guidance.
7.0 Training
All employees involved in steel erection and/or dismantling shall be
trained in the safe work requirements of this procedure and Tab 9, Fall
Protection, prior to work. Employees shall also have training in all
pertinent aspects of other activities associated with steel erection such as
rigging, aerial lifts, ladders, welding hazards, hazard communication,
and any other equipment use.
Figures
Erection Bridging for Short Span Joists
Erection Bridging for Long Span Joists
Figure 1
Erection Bridging for Short Span Joists
Joist Span 20K10 NM 28K8 44-0

8L1 NM 22K4 34-0 28K9 45-0
10K1 NM 22K5 35-0 28K10 49-0
12K1 23-0 22K6 36-0 28K12 53-0
12K3 & K5 NM 30K7 44-0
14K1 27-0 Joist Span 30K8 & K9 45-0
14K3, K4 & 22K7, K9, 30K10 50-0
NM 40-0
K6 K10 , & K11 30K11 52-0
16K2 29-0 24K4 36-0 Joist Span
16K3 30-0 24K5 38-0 30K12 54-0
16K4 32-0 24K6 39-0 10KCS1 to
24K7 & K8 43-0 NM
16K5 32-0 CS3
16K6, K7, & 24K9 44-0 12KCS1 to
NM NM
K9 24K10 & K 12 NM CS3
18K3 31-0 26K5 38-0 14KCS1 to
NM
18K4 32-0 CS3
26K6 39-0
18K5 33-0 16KCS2 to
26K7 43-0 NM
CS5
18K6 35-0 26K8 44-0
18KCS2 35-0
18K7, K9, & 26K9 45-0
NM 18KCS3 to
K10 NM
26K10 49-0 CS5
20K3 32-0
26K12 NM 20KCS2 36-0
20K4 & K 5 34-0
28K6 40-0 20KCS3 39-0
20K6 36-0
28K7 43-0 20KCS4 & NM
20K7 & K 9 39-0
CS5 CS5 CS5
22KCS2 36-0 26KCS2 39-0 30KC53 45-0
22KCS3 40-0 26KCS3 44-0
30KCS4 &
22KCS4 & 26KCS4 & 54-0
NM NM CS5
CS5 CS5
24KCS2 39-0 28KCS2 40-0
24KCS3 44-0 28KCS3 45-0
24KCS4 & NM 28KCS4 & 53-0
NM = diagonal bolted bridging not mandatory for joists under 40 feet.

Employees shall not be allowed on steel joists where the span of the steel joist
is equal to or greater than the span shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2 except as
set forth in Paragraph 6.6.
When permanent bridging terminus points cannot be used during erection,
additional temporary bridging terminus points are required to provide stability.
Figure 2
Erection Bridging for Long Span Joists
Joist Span
18LH02 33-0
18LH03 Thru
NM
LH09
20LH02 33-0
20LH03 38-0
20LH04 thru
NM
LH10
24LH03 35-0
24LH04 39-0
24LH05 40-0
24LH06 45-0
24LH07 thru
NM
LH11
28LH05 42-0
28LH06 46-0
28LH07 thru
NM
LH13
47-0
32LH06 &
through
LH07
60-0
55-0
32LH08 through
60-0
NM
32LH09 thru
through
LH15
60-0
47-0
36LH07 &
through
LH08
60-0
57-0
36LH09 through
60-0
NM
36LH10 thru
through
LH15
60-0
UAF CPHR Power Plant
Site Specific Safety Plan 14-411 TAB 20 – STEEL ERECTION PROCEDURE
NM = diagonal bolted bridging not mandatory for joists under 40 feet.

Employees shall not be allowed on steel joists where the span of the steel joist
is equal to or greater than the span shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2 except as
set forth in Paragraph 6.6.
When permanent bridging terminus points cannot be used during erection,
additional temporary bridging terminus points are required to provide stability.
Page 1 of 26
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 21 – ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN
& CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Environmental Protection Plan &

Control of Hazardous Materials
1.0 Purpose
This is the written Hazardous Material Control Plan for the control,
prevention, management, containment, cleanup, and disposal of
petroleum products or other hazardous substances which may be
generated on this project.
2.0 Identification of Hazardous Materials

2.1 Materials
The following material is assumed to be hazardous or to
contain hazardous substances (toxic, corrosive, ignitable,
explosive, or chemically reactive) and is subject to control:
• Petroleum products (including diesel fuel or fuel oil,
gasoline, grease, motor oil, hydraulic oil, and gear lube)
• Petroleum-contaminated materials
• Solvents
• Paints
• Antifreeze
• Lead/acid batteries
2.2 Control Measures

Control measures include safe storage and containment,
recovery of spills, and identification and accountability.
3.0 Storage, Containment, and Disposal

3.1 Diesel Fuel, Fuel, Oil, and Gasoline
The Project Superintendent, Project Safety Manager or SWPPP Control
Lead directs measure to control and prevent accidental discharge during
storage and transfer. Any onsite storage is in approved containers. Absorbent
pads and other recovery equipment is available to contain and recover any fuel
accidentally spilled. Any spills and contaminated soils are cleaned and
disposed of in accordance with applicable requirements of the State of Alaska
Department of Environmental Conservation and the US Environmental
Protection Agency.
3.2 Petroleum-Contaminated Materials
Page 1 of 5
Petroleum-contaminated materials such as used oil filters and old

hydraulic hoses are retained and safely stored until disposal in an area or
container where discharge of petroleum is prevented or contained. Disposal is
in accordance with regulations.
3.3 Grease and Gear Lube (solidified)

Solid lubricants are stored in a protected area where containers
are not damaged. Spent containers are appropriately disposed
of in accordance with regulations. Accidental discharges are
recovered.
3.4 Motor Oil, Hydraulic Oil, and Liquid Gear Lube

Unused motor oil and other liquid lubricants are stored in
protected areas where the containers are not damaged. Bulk
containers are placed in a lined area. Spent containers are
disposed of in accordance with regulations. Absorbent material
is available and used to recover any oil accidently
discharged during transfer operations or at any other time.
Used oil is recovered, stored in the same manner as new oil,

and disposed of in accordance with regulations. Used oil is
not stored in open containers.
All equipment using hydraulic hoses and cylinders are

inspected on a regular basis and furnished with absorbent pads
and other spill recovery materials to mitigate discharges to the
environment in case of equipment failure.
When equipment operating on or adjacent to waterways has

a petroleum leak which cannot be immediately repaired or
controlled, it’s removed from service until repairs are made.
3.5 Solvent and Paints

Solvent and paints are stored in a protected area where the
containers are not damaged. Spent solvents are retained
and disposed of in accordance with regulations, as are leftover
paints. Accidental discharges are recovered.
3.6 Cement and Epoxies
Page 2 of 5
Cement and epoxies are stored in dry protected areas. No

discharge or diluted cement is allowed outside of concrete
forms. Cleaning of ready mix trucks and disposal of leftover
ready mix are only accomplished in an appropriate manner.
Leftover epoxy is stored and disposed of in accordance with
regulations.
3.7 Lead/Acid Batteries

Lead/acid batteries are stored in a protected area. Used
batteries which cannot be recharged, are returned to the
dealer or to a battery recycling facility.
3.8 Explosives
Explosives are securely stored and accounted for in accordance
with regulations covering the storage and handling of
explosives. Transport is only in approved equipment. Handling
is by licensed explosive handlers. Surplus explosives are
returned to the vendor.
3.9 Antifreeze
Antifreeze is stored in the same manner as liquid petroleum.
Spent antifreeze is recovered and retained until proper
disposal is accomplished. Antifreeze accidentally discharged is
recovered with absorbent materials.
4.0 Emergency Response Procedures

4.1 Brief Jobsite Employees
All employees are briefed on emergency response procedures
and the use of emergency response equipment and materials.
4.2 Phone Numbers

The contact phone numbers for spill reporting, spill, or
hazardous material emergency response organizations, and the
fire department are posted at the jobsite.
5.0 Equipment and Material

5.1 Equipment
Page 3 of 5
Equipment is available on site for hazardous substance

containment and cleanup.
5.2 Pads
Absorbent pads are carried in all maintenance vehicles
readily available to clean any oil discharges.
5.3 Bags
Plastic bags are carried in all maintenance vehicles readily
available for storage of absorbent pads and/or contaminated
soil that must be removed from the jobsite.
5.4 Spill Recovery

Any spill recovery supplies used for spill cleanup are stored
in a protected dry area until the materials are removed from
the site and shipped to a proper disposal area.
6.0 Housekeeping
6.1 Housekeeping Practices
Good housekeeping practices are continually followed.
Refueling and maintenance areas are kept clean and free of
debris and are monitored daily for compliance. Additional
housekeeping items are as follows:
• Hazardous and non-hazardous wastes are not mixed. This
will keep the total volume of hazardous waste to a minimum.
Waste oil is not mixed with non-hazardous material. It’s
separated and properly labeled until it’s demobilized and
disposed of offsite.
• Original containers of hazardous products are completely
used before discarding the container.
• Excess amounts of hazardous products are not used; only
enough for the job intended.
• Original product labels and Material Safety Data Sheets
(MSDS) are kept onsite for each produce in use.
7.0 Reporting Requirements

7.1 Notification
Telephone notification to Davis Constructors & Engineers, Inc.
(Davis) home office and to the State of Alaska Department of
Page 4 of 5
Environmental Conservation of any discharge of oil or

hazardous substances is required as follows:
• Discharge to water: as soon as discharge is noticed.
• Discharge to land: as soon as discharge is noticed, if in
excess of 55 gallons. Within 48 hours if in excess of 10
gallons. Fifty-five gallons or less: maintenance of written
record of any petroleum product discharge from one to ten
gallons.
7.2 Written
Written notification is required within 15 days after the cleanup
is completed or, if no cleanup occurs, within 15 days after the
discharge.
7.3 Documentation
Written documentation in the form of the Oil and Hazardous
Materials Incident Final Report must be submitted to the State
of Alaska Department of Environmental Conservation.
Note: Environmental protection and hazardous materials control is

also addressed in the site Storm Walter Pollution Prevention
Plan (SWPPP).
Page 5 of 5
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 22 – CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
Anticipated Special Hazard Considerations

Cast in Place Concrete Forming
Initial plan review and staff discussions relative to special considerations for
concrete placement on this project have revealed the following issues which will
be resolved prior to the Preparatory Meeting.
Simply put, foundation wall heights vary but in some areas extend up to 17
feet, creating special hazards relative to blow-out potential, form stability and
safe work positions for employees. Although no final specific decisions relative
to form design or types have been made, several system engineered form
designs with integrated scaffold are being evaluated. Typically, these systems
are available for rent or purchase with engineering included. The decision
making process will include use of the Davis “SPA” planning system that can
be found in the “Forms” section of this program.
Davis Engineering, Construction and Safety Departments will be included in
this process.
Page 1 of 1
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 22– CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
Fall Protection Program

Wall and Deck Forming
Scope
The OSHA fall protection standard contains several requirements for protecting
against falls from elevated work areas. Concrete wall and deck forming
compromise a variety of tasks that require special fall protection solutions.
Purpose
This guide describes some fall protection solutions for wall and deck forming.
Gang and flying forms present additional hazards that are not addressed in
this plan.
Wall Framing
Setting Forms
During wall form erection, retractable lines are anchored to the wall panels. A
crane is used to set the wall panels. While the crane is still hooked onto the
panel, the worker climbs a ladder to release the hook. The worker performing
this task is tied off to a retractable life line and positioning hooks while he/she
braces the wall form. The hooks but not the retractable may be released while
changing positions. After the form has been braced, the crane hook is released.
(Note: Stakes and lower level braces may be installed prior to the upper braces
subject to alignment)
Placing Wales
Workers hook their full body harnesses to retractable lines anchored to the top
of the form. After the workers are off ground, they use positioning hooks in
conjunction with their fall protection as they Wale the forms.
Stripping Forms
A cast in place concrete anchor is placed of top of wall when concrete is being
placed. When stripping the wall forms, the retractable lines are hooked to the
anchors throughout the process.
Setting Column Forms

During the process of forming columns, workers use retractable lines, full body
harnesses and positioning devices throughout the process.
Page 1 of 2
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 22– CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
Piers
Piers are framed and stripped using the same procedures as in wall framing.
Full platforms and handrails shall be placed top of elevated piers and walls to
assist the crew in placing concrete.
Decking
Forming
Workers shall use fall protection when forming is being done above 6 feet.
Retractable lines anchored to engineered anchors in the columns or walls, or
horizontal static lines shall be used.
Workers setting the shoring frames shall be tied off to retractable lines
anchored to the columns, walls or horizontal static lines during the placement
of U-heads and stringers. Aluminum or steel beams are set on the stringers
with a crane and then are spread by hand. Workers are anchored with
retractable lines to engineered anchors in the columns or walls. Workers laying
plywood also are tied off to acceptable anchors in the columns or walls with
retractable life lines or static lines.
Perimeter guard rails shall follow the deck as it is completed. Leading edge
protection at least 6 feet back from the edge follows the deck as it progresses.
This moving, temporary edge indicator shall be a substantial rope on posts that
designates a “controlled access Zone.” No other trades are allowed onto the
deck until the fall protection is completed.
Stripping
The area to be stripped shall be flagged off prior to the start of the operation.
All workers shall be tied off to the horizontal static line when stripping at a
height of 6 feet or greater. A work platform with a guard rail shall be used
when practical.
Page 2 of 2
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 22– CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Safe Plan of Action
Job/Task Work Area Date
Work Plan: Material Needed: Hazards: Safe Plan:
Crew Members:
The Supervisor certifies the completion of the Work Plan.
Supervisor: Date
Instructions: 1. Write the name of the job or task in the space provided. 2. In the 1st column, write the steps of the task. 3. In the 2nd column, list material needed to complete task at
hand. 4. In the third column, identify the hazards that the crew will be exposed to. 5. In the Safe Plan column, provide the corrective actions that will be taken to prevent the hazards
and injury from reaction to failure. 6. Review the Work Plan at the end of the task for improvements. (NOTE THE WORK SHALL STOP IF CONDITIONS CHANGE, JOB CHANGES, OR
DEFICIENCY IN PLAN IS NOTED.)
Page 1 of 2
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 22 – CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE
SPA Checklist Review

Review the following after the Task Hazard Assessment has been completed to ensure all hazards have been identified and a safe plan has
been noted.
Permit Supplements Hazards Safe Plan
 High Work  Inspect for trip hazards  Hazards marked  Tools & mat. properly stored
 Slips, Trips Falls
 Hot Work  Extension cords properly secured  Work zone free of debris  Addnl. info
below
 Pipe Opening  Pinch Points List potential pinch points: ____________________________________________
 Confined Space  Working near mobile equip.  Hand/Body positioning  Ad d
 Limited Lift  Hand Hazards List sharp tools, material, equipment: ___________________________________
 Critical Lift  PPE  Protected sharp edges as necessary Addnl. info below
 Excavation
 Water Blasting
Required PPE  Working near  Traffic Barricades  Cones  Signs  Flagmen  Lane closure
Vehicular
 Hard Hat Traffic or Heavy Equip.  Communication with equipment operator  Addnl. info below
 Safety Vest  Potential for Fire  Permit  (2) 10lb (or equiv.) Fire Extinguishers  Fire watch
Eye Protection: or Sparks  Adj. area protected  Unnecessary flammable mat. removed  Addnl. info
below
 Safety Glasses  Heavy Lifting  Reviewed proper lifting tech.  Identified material requiring lifting equipment
 Face Shield  Hand protection required  Back support belts  Addnl. info below
 Chemical Goggles  Power Tools:  Inspect general cond.  GFCI in use  Identified PPE required for each tool
 Welding Hood  Reviewed safety requirements in operators manual(s)  Addnl. info below
Hand Protection: List:
 Cloth Gloves  Hand Tools:  Inspect general condition  Identified PPE required for each tool
 Leather Gloves  Reviewed hand tool safety  Addnl. info below
 Nytrel Gloves List:
 Cut Resistant Gloves  Working on electrical  Lock Out/Tag Out -energized
 C h e c k e q u ip . d e
 Rubber Gloves Equip.  Reviewed electrical safety procedures  Ad d n l. in fo b e low
 Surgical Gloves  Heat Stress Potential  Heat stress monitoring (>70o)  Proper amount of liquids avail
Foot Protection:  Sun Screen  Reviewed Heat Stress symptoms  Addnl. info below
 Safety Toe Boots  Cold Stress Potential  Proper clothing (i.e.. gloves, coat, coveralls)  Wind chill <32o
 Rubber Boots  Reviewed Cold Stress symptoms  Addnl. info below
 Neoprene Boots  Lifting with Crane  Signalman assigned  Tag lines in use  Area around crane barricaded
 Metatarsal Guard or Lifting Equipment  Lifting equip. inspected  Personnel protected from overhead load
Respiratory  Noise >85 Db Hearing protection is required:  Ear plugs  Ear Muffs  Both  Addnl. info
Protection: below
 Dust Mask  Working on ladder  Inspect general cond. before use  Ladder inspected with in last quarter
 Respirator  Ladder tied off  Proper angle and placement  Reviewed ladder safety
 SCBA  Excavations  Permits  Inspected prior to entering  Proper sloping/shoring
Coveralls:  Pedestal  Access/egress provided  Protection from accumulated water
 Cotton Coveralls  Working w/ Chemicals  Reviewed MSDS for each chemical form PPE requirements and precautions
 Tyvek Suit  Overhead Utilities  Power outage req'd  Insulation blankets req'd  Additional spotters req'd
 Tychem Suit Required clearance distance = _______ Ft.  Safe work zone Marked
Fall Protection: Additional Information:
 Harness
 Double Lanyard
 Anchorage Point
 Cross Arm Strap
 Retractable Device
 HLL System
 Miller Hook
 Clearance Distance
 Rescue
Page 2 of 2
Site Specific Safety Plan T
Job Hazard Analysis

Contract No.:
Job Title: Date:
Location: Temperature:
Work Activity: Analyzed By/Date:
Sequence of Work Activities
Principal Steps Potential Safety/Health Hazards Recommended Controls
Equipment Inspection Training

To Be Used Requirements Requirements
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 23 – JOB HAZARD ANALYSIS
Job Hazard Analysis
1.0 Purpose
One way to increase knowledge of hazards in the workplace is by
conducting a job hazard analysis on individual tasks. A job hazard
analysis (JHA) is a procedure which helps integrate accepted safety
and health principles and practices into a particular operation. In a
JHA each basic step of the job is examined to identify potential
hazards and to determine the safest way to do the job. The analysis
process may identify previously undetected hazards and increase the
job knowledge of those participating.
Jobs with frequent or infrequent accidents resulting in disabling

injuries.
2.0 Procedure
Four basic steps are used in conducting a job hazard analysis. The
JHA is documented by using the appropriate JHA forms or tablets.
• Selecting the job to be analyzed.
• Breaking the job down into a sequence of steps.
• Identifying potential hazards.
• Determining preventive measures to overcome these hazards.
3.0 Job Selection

Ideally all jobs should be subjected to a JHA. In some cases practical
constraints exist posed by the amount of time and effort required to
do a JHA. Factors considered in assigning a priority for analysis of
jobs include:
3.1 Accident frequency and severity
3.2 Potential for severe injuries or illnesses

The consequences of an accident, hazardous condition, or
exposure to harmful substance are potentially severe.
Page 1 of 4
3.3 Newly established jobs

Due to lack of experience hazards may not be evident or
anticipated.
3.4 Modified jobs

New hazards may be associated with changes in job procedures.
3.5 Infrequently performed jobs

Workers may be at greater risk when undertaking non-routine
jobs and a JHA provides a means of reviewing hazards.
4.0 Break the Job Into Steps

After the job is chosen for analysis the next stage is to break the job
down into steps. A job step is defined as a segment of the sequence in
the operation necessary to advance the work. An important point to
remember is to keep the steps in correct sequence. Any “out of order”
steps may miss potential hazards or introduce hazards which do not
actually exist.
5.0 Identifying Potential Hazards

To help identify potential hazards the job analyst may use questions
such as these (this is not a complete list):
• Could a body part be caught in or between objects?

• Do tools, machines, or equipment present any hazards?
• Could the worker make harmful contact with objects?
• Could the worker slip, trip, or fall?
• Could the worker suffer strain from lifting, pushing, or pulling?
• Is the worker exposed to extreme heat or cold?
• Is excessive noise or vibration a problem?
• Is there a danger of falling objects?
• Is lighting a problem?
• Could weather conditions affect safety?
• Is harmful radiation a possibility?
• Could contacts be made with hot, toxic, or caustic substances?
• Are there dusts, fumes, mists, or vapors in the air?
• Is there a confined space?
Page 2 of 4
6.0 Determining Preventive Measures

The final stage in a JHA is to determine ways to eliminate or control
the hazards. The generally accepted measures (in order of preference)
are:
6.1 Eliminate the hazard

This is the most effective measure. These techniques should be
used to eliminate the hazards:
• Choose a different process
• Modify an existing process
• Substitute with less hazardous substance
• Improve environment (ventilation)
• Modify or change equipment or tools
6.2 Contain the hazard

If the hazard cannot be eliminated, contact might be prevented
by using enclosures, machine guards, worker booths, or similar
devices.
6.3 Revise work procedures

Consideration might be given to modifying hazardous steps,
changing the sequence of steps, or adding additional steps.
6.4 Reduce the exposure

These measures are the least effective and should only be used
if no other solutions are possible. One way of minimizing
exposure is to reduce the number of times the hazard is
encountered. Personal protective equipment is a means of
reducing exposures.
In listing the preventive measures use of general statements

such as “be careful” or “use caution” are avoided. Specific
statements which describe both what action is taken and how
it’s performed are preferable.
7.0 Communication
JHA is a useful technique for identifying hazards so measures can be
taken to eliminate or control them. Once the analysis is completed
the results must be communicated to all workers performing that job.
JHA can also be used for review when repetitive tasks are performed.
Page 3 of 4
Appendices
JHA and Safe Work Plan Template
Page 4 of 4
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 23– JHA
Safe Plan of Action
Crew Members:
Supervisor: Date
been noted.
below
 Excavation
 Water Blasting
Vehicular
below
Respiratory Protection:  Noise >85 Db Hearing protection is required:  Ear plugs  Ear Muffs  Both  Addnl. info
below
 Harness
 Double Lanyard
 Anchorage Point
 Cross Arm Strap
 HLL System
 Miller Hook
 Rescue
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 24 – FORMS
Safety Orientation
Policy for Before a new employee or subcontractor may begin work they must
Safety participate in a Site Safety Orientation which explains the policies and
Orientation mandatory safety requirements for working on a Davis construction project.
General Job The following information has been conveyed to me:

1. Safety needs to be integrated into everything we do—think safe, don’t do
Safety
anything you feel is unsafe.
Procedures
2. Attendance at daily or weekly safety meetings is required. Monday at
12:30.
3. How to obtain, use, and care for personal protective equipment.
 Appropriate clothing must be worn at all times on the jobsite.
 Work boots, 4” sleeves, and long-legged pants (No tank tops or shorts).
 Hardhats and safety glasses must be worn at all times. Exceptions
must be approved.
 Reflective vest shall be worn when working outside.
4. How to perform initial job assignments in a safe manner through job

hazard analysis (JHA).
5. Hazard Communication (HAZCOMM), jobsite postings, and environmental
issues (SWPPP).
6. Actions to take in an emergency, including exit routes from the site, and
safe gathering areas.
7. Employees are required to report to their supervisor immediately any and
all unsafe conditions, injuries or illnesses, regardless of the degree of
severity.
8. The location of first aid kits, fire extinguishers, and eyewash station.
9. Keep in mind that all employees are responsible for housekeeping. .
10. Inspect all electrical equipment and cords daily before use. All power
sources must be GFCI protected.
11. Daily inspection of all equipment prior to use. Equipment will be used
according to manufactures specifications.
12. Accident and injury reporting and employee rights and obligations
regarding workers’ compensation.
13. Operation, qualifications, and lockout/tag out of equipment.
14. Davis Constructors employees must undergo required drug testing prior
to the first day of employment.
15. Profane language will not be tolerated.
16. Cell phone policy.
Site Specific 1. Fall protection is required for any activity that exposes an employee to a
Safety fall of six or more feet, if employees need to use fall protection they must
Procedures attend specific training.
Page 1 of 2
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 24 – FORMS
2. Emergency phone numbers are located on each safety station positioned at

the site entrance points.
3. No Smoking except in authorized areas.
4. SWPPP, report all spills and any water or liquids flowing off site. Spill kit.
5. Park only in authorized areas and observer posted speed limits on site as
these are strictly enforced.
6. Maintain the security of the jobsite by securing tools in locked gangboxes,
locking doors and gates.
7. Working around the public and traffic considerations.
8. Other site issues as needed.
Acts That Are 1. The use of alcohol or narcotics on the job or arrival on the job under the
Grounds For influence of these substances.
2. No gambling, fighting, inciting riots, practical joking, horseplay, or
Immediate
sexual/racial harassment.
Dismissal 3. Carrying firearms or dangerous weapons to the job site.
4. Theft of material, equipment, or supplies.
5. Unauthorized use of company vehicles, reckless driving, and operating
tagged out equipment.
6. Repeated minor, or a major violation of safety regulations
This informational form provides an overview and is not intended to be an all-

Employee or inclusive list. Davis Constructors reserves the right to revise any policy at its
Subcontract- sole discretion, at any time, without prior notice.
or All information in this orientation checklist was explained to me, and I agree
to comply with Davis Constructors Safety policies.
Signature
Print Name ________________________ Company _____________________
Sign Name ________________________ Date _____________________
Supervisor or I explained all items in this orientation checklist to the employee.

Briefer Print Name _________________________ Title ________________________
Signature
Sign Name _________________________ Date ________________________
Page 2 of 2
DAVIS CONSTRUCTORS & ENGINEERS, INC.
SITE SPECIFIC SAFETY PLAN TAB # – NAME OF TAB
Safety Observation Report
Date: Superintendent:
Day: General Foreman:
---Notes---
Time Observed: (am) (pm) Description:
1 Location:
Date Corrected: ______________Verified By: _____________________________________

Safety Deficiency: Signature
2 Location:
Safety Deficiency:
Date Corrected: ______________Verified By: _______________________________________

Signature
3 Location:
Safety Deficiency:

Signature
4 Location:
Safety Deficiency:

Signature
5 Location:
Safety Deficiency:

Signature
6 Location:
Safety Deficiency:

Signature
The above safety deficiencies were observed on the jobsite as indicated. Please ensure the safety
deficiencies are corrected and have the person verifying the correction sign and date where
indicated.
Project Safety Manager:__________________________________________________ Date: __________________________________________
Return Completed Form to Project Safety Manager
PAGE 1 OF 1
Site Specific Safety Plan TAB 2: FORMS
Safe Plan of Action
Crew Members:
Supervisor: Date
been noted.
below
 Excavation
 Water Blasting
Vehicular
below
Respiratory Protection:  Noise >85 Db Hearing protection is required:  Ear plugs  Ear Muffs  Both  Addnl. info
below
 Harness
 Double Lanyard
 Anchorage Point
 Cross Arm Strap
 HLL System
 Miller Hook
 Rescue
Davis Constructors and Engineers, Inc.
Weekly Safety Meeting Sign in Sheet
Jobsite: Date:
Time:
Meeting held by:

Attendees:
Name Employer Name Employer
Davis Constructors and Engineers, Inc.
Weekly Safety Meeting
Jobsite: Date:
Time:
Meeting held by:

Items Discussed
Action to be Taken
SAFETY PROGRAM
Swanson Steel Erectors, Inc.

1130 N Nimitz Hwy # A221
Honolulu, Hawaii
Revision Date: 11/20/09
Manual Approval: Dustin Swanson
1 of 100 1
Table of Contents
1. Safety Policy & Quality Policy 3

2. Erection Contract Review 4
3. Preparation of the Project Specific Erection and Safety Plan 5
4. Required Training for Steel Erectors 7
5. Procedure For Approval To Begin Steel Erection 8
6. Pre-Installation Verification 9
7. Installation of High Strength Bolts 10
8. Pre Tensioned Bolt Inspection 12
9. Nonconformance 15
10. Erection Equipment Inspection 16
11. Reference Standards 17
12. Fall Protection 18
13. Falling Object Protection 20
14. Control and Protection of Openings 21
15. Personal Protection Equipment 22
16. Identification of Smoke, Fumes and Dust 27
17. Removal of Rivets 28
18. Lead Exposure 29
19. LO/TO of Circuits 38
20. Confined Space 39
21. Definitions Confined Space 43
22. Pre-Entry checklist 47
23. Respiratory Protection Program 49
24. User Seal Check Procedures 59
25. Respirator Cleaning Procedures 60
26. Respirator Medical Evaluation Questionnaire 61
27. Respiratory Protection Program Definitions 68
28. OSHA-Accepted Fit Test Protocols 71
29. Hazard Communication Program 71
2 of 100 2
Safety Policy
Our goal is to have ZERO accidents. It is the policy of Swanson Steel Erectors, Inc. to perform
work in the safest manner possible and consistent with good construction practices. In order to
fulfill this policy, certain responsibilities, rules, forms and practices have been initiated.
Quality Policy
Our goal is to meet all contract requirements and have ZERO nonconformance.
3 of 100 3
Responsibility For The Job Safety Program
The Job Superintendent has direct responsibility for the safety of our employees, the safe
operation of our equipment, and protection of the general public. Supervisory personnel at all
levels have a responsibility to report unsafe conditions and implement corrective action to
eliminate safety hazards.
In carrying out his safety related duties, the Job Superintendent must:
A. Study the plans and specifications, lay out a tentative plan arrangement and determine a
plan of operation.
B. Determine and list potential hazards. Indicate possible hazard locations such as:
1. People and equipment working in the same area.
2. Equipment crossing public roads.
3. Obstructions that interfere with equipment operations.
C. Consider change of layout, the installation of suitable guards or barricades and other
methods to minimize hazards.
D. Provide for adequate lighting.
E. Consider the need for dust control to prevent obscured vision, damage to equipment,
occupational diseases and third-party claims for dust damage.
F. Check noise levels and provide hearing protection as necessary.
G. Make sure that the job is adequately supplied with personal protective equipment, such
as: hard hats, safety harnesses, safety belts, flagman vest, goggles, face shields and
respirators.
H. See that approved hard hats are worn by all personnel on the project. Additional eye
protection, such as goggles and face shields, will be worn whenever employees are
involved in operations which present a hazard to the eyes, i.e., chipping, cutting or
grinding.
I. Insure that Weekly Safety Meetings are held by the foremen and attended by all
employees.
J. Insure that a “Report of Occupational Injury or Illness Form” is filled out on all accidents
requiring the attention of a doctor. The Foreman’s Report of Injury will be sufficient for
first aid cases (obtain from office).
K. Verify that all new employees are indoctrinated in our Company Safety Program and Job
Working Rules.
4 of 100 4
Supervision Of Safety
(Assignment for specific job responsibility will be made upon the starting of each new project.)
Safety Inspection And Reports
A. Job sill be inspected by King & Neel, Inc.’s personnel, as requested, to verify the
effectiveness of our safety program. King & Neel, Inc. is a full service insurance and
surety bonds carrier. They provide professional services in all phases of safety for the
construction industry.
B. Job Superintendent will inspect the jobsite daily to insure full compliance with Federal,
State and Local regulations.
Indoctrination In Safety
Job Superintendent is responsible for the new employee indoctrination to job safety rules and
procedures as outlined in this booklet and employment package.
Weekly Safety Meetings
Meetings will be conducted by the Superintendent and will be held every week. The minutes of
the meeting will be recorded on a Company form: Weekly Safety Meeting (reference jobsite
book). One copy will be kept on the job and another copy will be forwarded to the Honolulu
office.
Special Instructions/ Training
A. All supervisory personnel, including Foremen, will be given instructions in first aid
training and will maintain a valid first aid card.
B. Foremen will instruct employees in the proper use and care of respirators, fall protection
devices and other personal protective equipment.
C. All operators will be instructed in the safe operation of their equipment by their Foreman.
D. Other training, as specified in Federal and State regulations, will be implemented as the
need arises.
Accident Reporting And Investigation
A. Newly hired employees will be instructed to report all injuries to their foreman,
regardless of severity.
B. The Foreman is responsible for investigating accidents which occur under his
jurisdiction. Corrective measures necessary to prevent reoccurrence of the accident are
also the Foreman’s responsibility. However, he is normally assisted by the Job
Superintendent and King & Neel, Inc.
C. The Job Superintendent is responsible for reviewing the facts, approving corrective
measures instituted by the Foreman, and following up to see that corrective actions are
accomplished.
5 of 100 5
Drinking Water
A. Proper means of obtaining, storing and dispensing drinking water will be maintained per
Federal, Stet and/or Local Health Standards.
B. Outlets which are not suitable for drinking water will be properly marked.
Toilet Facilities
Portable sanitary toilets will be provided in sufficient numbers to accommodate crew size.
Toilets will be services regularly and their use will be in accordance with Federal, State and
Local codes.
Medical Facilities
A. Arrangements will be made for transporting employees requiring medical attention.

B. The proper size and number of first aid kits will be maintained on the job in relation to
the number of employees. A first aid kit sufficient to handle one hundred (100)
employees will be located in the job office trailer. In the event there is no job office
trailer, the first aid kit can be found in the tool box. A ten unit (10) first aid kit will be
located in all company vehicles.
C. All Foremen and Supervisors will have a current and valid first aid card.
Personal protective equipment will be worn by all employees as required by State and Federal
standards. Equipment will be periodically inspected and maintained in a ready to use condition
(see pg. 23 for more info.).
Protective Headgear
All employees and visitors on the construction site will be required to wear and approved hard
hat rated Class “A” and Class “B”.
Physical Qualifications Of Employees
A. All new employees will be required to fill out a Health Questionnaire to aid in
determining their ability to handle assigned tasks.
B. Equipment operators will be required to read and understand signs, signals and operating
instructions.
Signal, Warning Signs, Signalmen
A. Operating signals will be posted in the operator’s cab of all cranes.

B. Only fully qualified persons shall be designated to give signals to equipment operators.
C. Warnings signs shall be posted when hazards exist.
6 of 100 6
Material Handling
A. Work areas are to be kept free of debris and in a reasonably clean condition at all times.
B. Safety clips shall be used on all hooks.
C. Skip boxes will be used to store scrap material until it can be removed from the site and
disposed of properly.
To insure that information about the dangers of all hazardous chemicals used by Swanson Steel
Erectors, Inc. are known by all affected employees, a Hazard Communication Program has been
implemented (see page 71).
Fire Prevention
A. Fire prevention program shall comply with applicable Federal, State and Local
regulations.
B. The program shall be flexible to meet the changing character of the construction project.
Flammable And Combustible Liquids
A. Fire extinguisher rated at 20B units shall be located not less than 25 feet nor more than 75
feet from any flammable liquid storage area located outside.
B. Interior flammable liquid storage areas shall be well ventilated.
C. Safety containers with a flame arrestor shall be used for dispensing all flammable liquids.
D. Further requirements for the handling of flammable and combustible liquids shall be in
accordance with Federal, State and Local fire codes.
Fire Protection
A. All cranes and company vehicles shall be equipped with at least a 1A:10 B:C unit fire
extinguisher.
B. Combustible materials shall be adequately protected when in close proximity to welding
operations.
C. Skip boxes or other containers are to be used for rubbish, including scrap lumber,
sawdust and other materials. Skip boxes shall be emptied on a periodic basis to prevent
accumulation.
D. All oils spills will be cleaned up immediately following the Hazardous Materials Program
specifications.
E. Fire extinguisher rated not less than 4A:60 B:C units shall be provided for every 3,000
square feet of building area. All fire extinguisher locations shall be clearly marked.
F. Gasoline shall not be used to wash or clean parts.
G. Lock out procedures shall be followed for maintenance and repair of equipment and
electrical systems.
H. Good housekeeping will be practiced at all times.
I. No smoking will be allowed in shops and other hazardous areas.
J. Fire protection rules shall conform with all Federal, State and Local codes.
7 of 100 7
Welding And Cutting
A. All welding and cutting equipment and operations shall be in accordance with the
standards and recommended practices of the “American Welding Society, Safety in
Welding and Cutting ANSI Z49.1” and the recommendations of the National Fire
Protection Association.
B. Proper protection shall be provided for employees involved in welding operations.
C. Compressed gas cylinders shall be stored, handled and used in accordance with the
Hazardous Materials Programs.
Electrical Wiring And Apparatus
A. All work shall be performed by persons familiar with code requirements and qualified for
the class of work to be performed.
B. Electrical wire shall be located to minimize the exposure to damage.
C. Electrical boxes shall be properly marked.
Hand Tools And Power Tools
A. All hand tools shall be kept in good repair and used only for the purpose for which
designed.
B. Tools shall be kept away from the edge of scaffolds or floor openings and returned to
storage when not in use.
C. Power tools shall be operated only by designated personnel.
D. All tolls and their operations and maintenance shall conform to applicable Federal, State
and Local codes.
Ropes, Slings, Chains And Hooks
Use of ropes, slings, chains and hooks shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications
and Federal, State and Local standards.
Machinery And Mechanized Equipment
A. A Preventative Maintenance Program will be performed on all equipment to keep it in a

safe and work wise condition.
B. No machinery requiring an operator shall be left unattended, unless all lock-out
procedures have been completed.
C. All safety devices shall be in working order, i.e., backup alarms, safety belts, etc.
D. A competent Swanson Steel Erectors, Inc. employee will inspect the working surface(s)
where the equipment will be operated to ensure that the surface is adequate and
compatible with the specific piece of equipment being used.
Scaffolds
A. Scaffold use will be in accordance with all State and Federal requirements.
B. Scaffolds shall have all proper guardrails and planking in place before use.
C. Workers using scaffolds shall be trained in proper scaffold use and material handling on
scaffolds.
D. Guardrails/ perimeter structure shall not be used for anything other than their intended
purposes.
8 of 100 8
Guarding and Safety Devices
A. Seat belts are to be installed in all company cars, pickups and trucks (driver’s seat only
on hauling units where no riders are allowed- use “No Rider” decals).
B. All roll-over protection shall meet with Federal, State and Local codes for the type of
unit.
C. Overhead protection shall be provided on equipment working around falling hazards.
Scissorlifts
A. Used in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Employee trained in proper use and awareness of hazards associated with Scissorlifts.
Aerial Work Platforms
A. Used in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Employee trained in proper use and awareness of hazards associated with Aerial work
platforms.
Hoisting Equipment- General
A. All hoisting equipment shall be in proper operating condition before being placed into
service on the project.
B. Equipment shall not be modified without manufacturer’s written consent.
Crane Testing
A. Testing shall conform to manufacturer’s and Federal, State and Local codes.
B. Load capacities shall be enforced and posted where clearly visible.
C. A positive backstop will be used on all crane booms.
D. Boom stops will be in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and Federal, State
and Local codes.
Compressed Gas Cylinders
A. Cylinders shall be stored in well ventilated locations. Oxygen, acetylene or other fuel gas
shall not be taken into confined spaces.
B. No smoking signs shall be posted wherever cylinders are stored.
C. Cylinders in storage shall be separated from flammable or combustible material by at
least 40 feet or by a fire resistant partition.
D. Cylinder valve caps shall be in place when cylinders are in storage, in transit, not in use,
or empty.
E. Cylinders shall be secured in an upright position at all times.
Ramps, Runways, Platforms, Scaffolds And Towers
All load bearing structures shall be installed, erected, used, maintained and disassembled
according to applicable Federal, State and Local codes.
9 of 100 9
Launches, Motorboats And Skiffs
Safety skiffs will be used in accordance with Federal, State and Local codes.
Noise Control
A. Administrative or engineering controls shall first be utilized to reduce the sound level to
those allowed by Federal, State and Local codes. If this does not remedy the situation,
some type of ear protection will be required.
B. Ear protection shall be used when the noise level is at an injurious level over an extended
period of time. Protection shall be in accordance with ANSI A24.22.62.
Overhead Protection
A. To be accomplished by barricading area below to eliminate access by other trades.

B. Warning signs to be posted overhead.
C. Workers/ hard hat required- CAUTION.
D. Toe boards to be installed around floor openings.
Fall Hazards In Work Area
Following are examples of fall hazards:
Leading edge
Perimeter edge
Elevator openings
Stairway openings
Vent, mechanical openings
Steel skeleton structure
Open-sided floors- platforms
Articulated snorkel lifts
Scaffolds
Stairways
Ladders
Fall Protection
A. Personal fall protection shall consist and conform to the following:

1. Safety harness shall conform to ANSI standard:
Class III- full body harness
Class IV- suspension/ position belt
2. All safety harness and lanyard hardware assemblies will be capable of
withstanding a tensile loading of 5,000 pounds without cracking, breaking or
taking a permanent deformation.
3. The components of fall restraint systems will be inspected prior to each use for
mildew, wear, damage and other deterioration, and defective components shall be
removed from service if their function or strength have been adversely affected.
4. Anchorage points used for fall restraint will be capable of supporting four (4)
times the intended load.
5. Restraint protection will be rigged to allow the movement of employees and only
as far as the sides and edges of the walking/ working surface.
10 of 100 10
Steel Erection General Requirements
A. Erection gangs on structural steel erection shall work under the direction of an
experienced foreman.
B. Workers shall not ride on steel being hoisted, nor slide down ropes, columns or ladders.
C. Wire rope slings shall be used when lifting loads.
D. If float scaffolds are used during steel erection, they shall be used in accordance with
Federal, State and Local codes.
Flooring Requirements
A. Permanent flooring- skeleton steel construction in tiered buildings:

1. The permanent floors shall be installed as the erection of structural members
progresses and there shall not be more than eight storied between the erection
floor and the uppermost permanent floor, except where the structural integrity is
maintained as a result of the design.
2. At no time shall there be more than four floors or 48 feet of unfinished bolting or
welding above the foundation or uppermost permanently secured floor.
B. Temporary flooring- skeleton steel construction in tiered buildings:
1. The derrick or erection floor shall be solidly planked or decked over its entire
surface except for access openings. Planking or decking of equivalent strength
shall be of proper thickness to carry the working load. Planking shall not be less
than 2 inches thick full size undressed, and shall be laid tight and secured to
prevent movement.
a) On buildings of structures not adaptable to temporary floors, and where
scaffolds are not used, safety nets shall be installed and maintained
whenever the potential fall distance exceeds two stories or 25 feet. The
nets shall be hung with sufficient clearance to prevent contacts with the
surface of structures below.
b) Floor periphery- safety railing. A standard railing including midrail of ½
inch wire rope or equivalent shall be installed at the periphery (including
all floor openings) of all temporarily planked or temporarily metal decked
floors of tier buildings and other multi-floored structures during structural
steel assembly.
11 of 100 11
Erection Contract Review
Responsibility: President
General:
The following issues shall be addressed:
1. Technical contract requirements are defined and known by affected personnel.
2. Technical contract requirements differing from that bid must be resolved.
3. The company must have the capability to meet the technical contract
requirements.
4. Resources are available for performance of the work.
5. Prior to start of erection, a written Project-Specific Erection Plan is developed for

accomplishing the work in accordance with the technical contract requirements
and the company's quality requirements.
6. Development of Project-Specific Erection Plans and maintenance of those plans

throughout the progress of the work. Management must determine quality
requirements prior to start of erection.
Records: Contract Review Record
12 of 100 12
Preparation of the Project Specific Erection and Fall Protection Plan
Responsibility: President
Procedure:
 A Project Specific Erection and Fall Protection Plan is developed for all projects.
 If possible, a pre-construction conference and site inspection are held between the erector
and the controlling contractor, and others such as the project engineer and fabricator
before the start of steel erection. The purpose of the conference is to develop and review
the site-specific erection plan.
 The following requirements will be developed, reviewed and recorded.
 The sequence of erection activity, developed in coordination with the controlling

contractor, that includes the following:
1. Material deliveries
2. Material staging and storage
3. Coordination with other trades and construction activities
 A description of the crane and derrick selection and placement procedures, including the
following:
1. Site preparation
2. Path for overhead loads
3. Critical lifts, including rigging supplies and equipment
 A description of steel erection activities and procedures, including the following:

1. Stability considerations requiring temporary bracing and guying
2. Erection bridging terminus point
3. Anchor rod (anchor bolt) notifications regarding repair, replacement and
modifications
4. Columns and beams (including joists and purlins)
5. Connections
6. Decking
7. Ornamental and miscellaneous iron
 A description of the fall protection procedures that will be used to comply with §
1926.760.
 A description of the procedures that will be used to comply with § 1926.759 Falling
Objects
 A description of the special procedures required for hazardous non-routine tasks.
 A certification for each employee who has received training for performing steel erection
operations as required by § 1926.761.
 A list of the qualified and competent persons.

13 of 100 13
 A description of the procedures that will be utilized in the event of rescue or emergency
response.
 The plan is to include the identification of the site and project.
 The plan shall be signed and dated by the qualified person(s) responsible for its
preparation and modification.
Records:
Site Specific Erection and Fall Protection Plan
14 of 100 14
Required Training for Steel Erectors
Fall hazard training

Training shall include:
 The recognition and identification of fall hazards in the work area.
 The use and operation of guardrail systems (including perimeter safety cable systems),
personal fall arrest systems, positioning device systems, fall restraint systems, safety net
systems, and other protection to be used.
 The correct procedures for erecting, maintaining, disassembling, and inspecting the fall
protection systems to be used.
 The procedures to be followed to prevent falls to lower levels and through or into holes
and openings in walking/working surfaces and walls.
 The fall protection.
Multiple lift rigging procedure

 The nature of the hazards associated with multiple lifts.
 The proper procedures and equipment to perform multiple lifts required by the Hoisting
and rigging Procedure section for Multiple lift rigging.
Connector procedures
 The nature of the hazards associated with connecting.
 The establishment, access, proper connecting techniques and work practices required by
the Beams and Columns procedure section for Double connections at columns and/or at
beam webs over a column and Fall Protection procedure section for Connectors.
Controlled Decking Zone Procedures

 The nature of the hazards associated with work within a controlled decking zone.
 The establishment, access, proper installation techniques and work practices required by
the Fall Protection procedure section for Controlled Decking Zone and the Structural
Steel Assembly procedure section for Metal decking.
Training Documentation
 All training shall be documented and conducted by a qualified instructor.
 Training documentation shall contain each employee's name, the signatures or initials of
the trainers, and the dates of training.
Records:
Training Records
15 of 100 15
Procedure For Approval To Begin Steel Erection
Responsibility: Jobsite Foreman
Procedure:
 The jobsite foreman shall receive the following written notification from the controlling
contractor before he begins any steel erection.
o Written notification that the concrete in the footings, piers and walls and the mortar in
the masonry piers and walls has attained, on the basis of an appropriate ASTM
standard test method of field-cured samples, either 75 percent of the intended
minimum compressive design strength or sufficient strength to support the loads
imposed during steel erection.
o Written notification that any repairs, replacements and modifications to the anchor
bolts were conducted only with the approval of the project structural engineer of
record.
 When this document is received, it shall be filed in the office file and in the project file at the
jobsite.
 The document shall be signed by the controlling contractor’s project manager or the project
structural engineer of record.
 If there is any doubt of the strength of the concrete or the condition of the anchor rods, the
foreman shall communicate to the management of Swanson Steel Erectors, Inc. in writing
describing his concerns, who may ask for the concrete data test record and compare it to the
intended minimum compressive design strength or strength to support the loads imposed
during steel erection.
Records:
 Notification of Concrete Compressive Strength and Anchor Rod Modification Form
16 of 100 16
Pre-Installation Verification
Responsibility: Jobsite Foremen
General:
 A representative sample of not fewer than three complete fastener assemblies of each
combination of diameter, length, grade and lot to be used in the work shall be checked at
the site of installation in a tension calibrator to verify that the pretensioning method
develops a pretension that is equal to or greater than 1.05 times that specified for
installation and inspection in Table 8.1.
 Washers shall be used in the pre-installation verification assemblies as required in the

work in accordance with the requirements in Section 6.2 of RCSC “Specification for
Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” Date June 30, 2004.
 If the actual pretension developed in any of the fastener assemblies is less than 1.05 times
that specified for installation and inspection in Table 8.1, the cause(s) shall be determined
and resolved before the fastener assemblies are used in the work.
17 of 100 17
Installation of High Strength Bolts
General:
Snug Tight:
 All bolt holes shall be aligned to permit insertion of the bolts without undue damage to
the threads. Bolts shall be placed in all holes with washers positioned as required in
Section 6.1 of RCSC “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490
Bolts” Date June 30, 2004 and nuts threaded to complete the assembly.
 Compacting the joint to the snug-tight condition shall progress systematically from the
most rigid part of the joint.
 The snug-tightened condition is the tightness that is attained with a few impacts of an
impact wrench or the full effort of an ironworker using an ordinary spud wrench to bring
the connected plies into firm contact.
Turn-of-Nut:
 All bolts shall be installed in accordance with the requirements in Section 8.1, with
washers positioned as required in Section 6.2. of RCSC Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” Date June 30, 2004.
 Subsequently, the nut or head rotation specified in Table 8.2 shall be applied to all
fastener assemblies in the joint, progressing systematically from the most rigid part of the
joint in a manner that will minimize relaxation of previously pretensioned bolts.
 The part not turned by the wrench shall be prevented from rotating during this operation.
18 of 100 18
Calibrated Wrench Pretensioning:
 The pre-installation verification procedures specified in Section 7 of RCSC

“Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” Date June 30,
2004 shall be performed daily for the calibration of the installation wrench.
 Torque values determined from tables or from equations that claim to relate torque to
pretension without verification shall not be used.
 All bolts shall be installed in accordance with the requirements in Section 8.1, of RCSC
“Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” Date June 30,
2004 with washers positioned as required in Section 6.2 of RCSC “Specification for
Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” Date June 30, 2004.
 Subsequently, the installation torque determined in the pre-installation verification of the

fastener assembly (Section 7 of RCSC “Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM
A325 or A490 Bolts” Date June 30, 2004) shall be applied to all bolts in the joint,
progressing systematically from the most rigid part of the joint in a manner that will
minimize relaxation of previously pretensioned bolts.
 The part not turned by the wrench shall be prevented from rotating during this operation.
 Application of the installation torque need not produce a relative rotation between the
bolt and nut that is greater than the rotation specified in Table 8.2.
Twist-Off-Type Tension-Control Bolt Pretensioning:
 Twist-off-type tension control bolt assemblies that meet the requirements of ASTM
F1852 shall be used.
 All fastener assemblies shall be installed snug tight in accordance with the requirements
in Section 8.1 of RCSC “Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490
Bolts” Date June 30, 2004 without severing the splined end and with washers positioned
as required in Section 6.2 of RCSC “Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM
A325 or A490 Bolts” Date June 30, 2004.
 If a splined end is severed during this operation, the fastener assembly shall be removed
and replaced.
 Subsequently, all bolts in the joint shall be pretensioned with the twist-off-type tension-
control bolt installation wrench, progressing systematically from the most rigid part of
the joint in a manner that will minimize relaxation of previously pretensioned bolts.
19 of 100 19
Direct-Tension-Indicator Pretensioning:
 Direct tension indicators that meet the requirements of ASTM F959 shall be used. The
pre-installation verification procedures specified in Section 7 of RCSC “Specification for
Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” Date June 30, 2004 shall
demonstrate that, when the pretension in the bolt reaches 1.05 times that specified for
installation and inspection in Table 8.1, the gap is not less than the job inspection gap in
accordance with ASTM F959.
 All bolts shall be installed in accordance with the requirements in Section 8.1, with
washers positioned as required in Section 6.2 of RCSC “Specification for Structural
Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” Date June 30, 2004.
 The installer shall verify that the direct-tension-indicator protrusions have not been
compressed to a gap that is less than the job inspection gap during this operation, and if
this has occurred, the direct tension indicator shall be removed and replaced.
 Subsequently, all bolts in the joint shall be pretensioned, progressing systematically from
the most rigid part of the joint in a manner that will minimize relaxation of previously
pretensioned bolts.
 The installer shall verify that the direct tension indicator protrusions have been
compressed to a gap that is less than the job inspection gap.
20 of 100 20
Pre Tensioned Bolt Inspection
All point numbers refer to the RCSC “Specification for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” Date June 30, 2004.
Procedure:
Prior to the start of work, it shall be ensured that all fastener components to be used in the work meet the
following requirements
2.1. Manufacturer Certification of Fastener Components

Manufacturer certifications documenting conformance to the applicable specifications required in
Sections 2.3 through 2.8 for all fastener components used in the fastener assemblies shall be available to
the Engineer of Record and inspector prior to assembly or erection of structural steel.
2.2. Storage of Fastener Components

Fastener components shall be protected from dirt and moisture in closed containers at the site of
installation. Only as many fastener components as are anticipated to be installed during the work shift
shall be taken from protected storage. Fastener components that are not incorporated into the work shall
be returned to protected storage at the end of the work shift. Fastener components shall not be cleaned or
modified from the as-delivered condition. Fastener components that accumulate rust or dirt shall not be
incorporated into the work unless they are requalified as specified in Section 7. ASTM F1852 twist-off-
type tension-control bolt assemblies and alternative-design fasteners that meet the requirements in Section
2.8 shall not be relubricated, except by the manufacturer.
2.3.3. Reuse:
ASTM A490 bolts and galvanized ASTM A325 bolts shall not be reused. When approved by the
Engineer of Record, black ASTM A325 bolts are permitted to be reused. Touching up or re-tightening
bolts that may have been loosened by the installation of adjacent bolts shall not be considered to be a
reuse.
3.1. Connected Plies

All connected plies that are within the grip of the bolt and any materials that are used under the head or
nut shall be steel (uncoated, coated or galvanized) as defined in Section 3.2. Compressible materials shall
not be placed within the grip of the bolt. The slope of the surfaces of parts in contact with the bolt head
and nut shall be equal to or less than 1:20 with respect to a plane that is normal to the bolt axis.
3.3. Bolt Holes
21 of 100 21
The nominal dimensions of standard, oversized, short-slotted and long-slotted holes for high-strength
bolts shall be equal to or less than those shown in Table
3.1
Thermally cut bolt holes

Shall be permitted if approved by the Engineer ofRecord. For statically loaded joints, thermally cut
surfaces need not be ground. Forcyclically loaded joints, thermally cut surfaces shall be round smooth.
3.3.1. Standard Holes:

In the absence of approval by the Engineer of Record for the use of other hole types, standard holes shall
be used in all plies of bolted joints.
3.3.2. Oversized Holes:

When approved by the Engineer of Record, oversized holes are permitted in any or all plies of slip-
critical joints as defined in Section 4.3.
3.3.3. Short-Slotted Holes:

When approved by the Engineer of Record, short-slotted holes are permitted in any or all plies of snug-
tightened joints as defined in Section 4.1, and pretensioned joints as defined in Section 4.2, provided the
applied load is approximately perpendicular (between 80 and 100 degrees) to the axis of the slot. When
approved by the Engineer of Record, short-slotted holes are permitted in any or all plies of slip-critical
joints as defined in Section 4.3 without regard for the direction of the applied load.
3.3.4. Long-Slotted Holes:

When approved by the Engineer of Record, long-slotted holes are permitted in only one ply at any
individual faying surface of snug-tightened joints as defined in Section 4.1, and pretensioned joints as
defined in Section 4.2, provided the applied load is approximately perpendicular (between 80 and 100
degrees) to the axis of the slot. When approved by the Engineer of Record, long-slotted holes are
permitted in one ply only at any individual faying surface of slip-critical joints as defined in Section 4.3
without regard for the direction of the applied load. Fully inserted finger shims between the faying
surfaces of load-transmitting elements of bolted joints are not considered a long-slotted element of a joint;
nor are they considered to be a ply at any individual faying surface.
3.4. Burrs
Burrs that extend 1/16 in. or less above the surface are permitted to remain on the faying surfaces of snug-
tightened joints as defined in Section 4.1 and pretensioned joints as defined in Section 4.2. Burrs that
extend over 1/16 in. above the surface shall be removed from all joints. Burrs that would prevent solid
seating of the connected plies prior to the pretensioning of slip-critical joints as defined in Section 4.3
shall be removed.
22 of 100 22
9.1. Snug-Tightened Joints
After the connections have been assembled, it shall be visually ensured that the plies of the connected
elements have been brought into firm contact and that washers have been used as required in Section 6.
No further evidence of conformity is required for snug-tightened joints. The magnitude of the clamping
force that exists in a snug-tightened joint is not a consideration.
9.2.1 Turn-of-Nut Pretensioning:

The inspector shall observe the pre-installation verification testing required above. Subsequently,
it shall be ensured by routine observation that the bolting crew properly rotates the turned
element relative to the unturned element by the amount specified in Table 8.2. Alternatively,
when fastener assemblies are match-marked after the initial fit-up of the joint but prior to
pretensioning, visual inspection after pretensioning is permitted in lieu of routine observation.
No further evidence of conformity is required. A pretension that is greater than the value
specified in Table 8.1 shall not be cause for rejection.
9.2.2 Calibrated Wrench Pretensioning:

The inspector shall observe the pre-installation verification testing required in Section 8.2.2.
Subsequently, it shall be ensured by routine observation that the bolting crew properly applies the
calibrated wrench to the turned element. No further evidence of conformity is required. A pretension that
is greater than the value specified in Table 8.1 shall not be cause for rejection.
9.2.3. Twist-Off-Type Tension-Control Bolt Pretensioning:

The inspector shall observe the pre-installation verification testing required in Section 8.2.3.
Subsequently, it shall be ensured by routine observation that the splined ends are properly severed during
installation by the bolting crew. No further evidence of conformity is required. A pretension that is greater
than the value specified in Table 8.1 shall not be cause for rejection.
9.3 Slip-Critical Joints

Prior to assembly, it shall be visually verified that the faying surfaces of slipcritical joints meet the
requirements in Section 3.2.2. of the RCSC “Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or
A490 Bolts” Date June 30, 2004. Subsequently, the inspection required in Section 9.2 shall be performed.
3.2.2 Slip-Critical Joints:

The faying surfaces of slip-critical joints as defined in Section 4.3, including those of filler plates and
finger shims, shall meet the following requirements:
(a) Uncoated Faying Surfaces:

Uncoated faying surfaces shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale, and free of coatings, including
inadvertent overspray, in areas closer than one bolt diameter but not less than 1 in. from the edge of any
hole and in all areas within the bolt pattern.
(b) Coated Faying Surfaces:

Coated faying surfaces shall first be blast cleaned and subsequently coated with a coating that is qualified
in accordance with the requirements in Appendix A as a Class A or Class B coating as defined in Section
5.4.
(c) Galvanized Faying Surfaces:

Galvanized faying surfaces shall first be hotdip galvanized in accordance with the requirements of ASTM
A123 and subsequently roughened by means of hand wire brushing. Power wire brushing is not
permitted. When prepared by roughening, the galvanized faying surface is designated as Class C for
design.
23 of 100 23
Nonconformance
Responsibility: Jobsite Foremen & President
General:
 All nonconforming items must be reviewed by appropriate personnel to determine

method of repair, replacement, or approval.
 The jobsite foreman is notified of the nonconforming material and records the pieces
affected and nature of the nonconformance.
 If repairs cannot be made onsite, the piece is marked and segregated.
 Any material that cannot be repaired is marked up and is then scrapped.
 All nonconformance records will be summarized and reviewed by management.

Repetitive nonconformities will be considered for corrective action.
Records:
Nonconformance Log
24 of 100 24
Erection Equipment Inspection
Responsibility: Jobsite Foreman
General:
 The office will maintain a list of equipment to receive regular inspection.
 The list will show the schedule for each piece of equipment that is to be inspected.
 The record will show the person performing the inspection and note what was done on
the inspection record.
Records: Inspection Logs
25 of 100 25
Reference Standards
The current edition of the following standards and specification shall be maintained.
1. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges

A. AISC Specification for Buildings
B. RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts
2. ANSI/AWS DI.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel
3. ANSI/AASHTO/AWS DI.5 Bridge Welding Code
4. ANSI A l0.13 Safety Requirements for Steel Erection
5. ANSI A l0.38 Construction and Demolition Safety and Health
6. OSHA 29 CFR 1926
7. AREMA
8. Operating manuals for Hoisting Equipment
9. Operating manuals for Power tools
The following references will be made available if needed for contract requirements.
1. ANSI 10.42 Qualified Rigger

2. ANSI/ASME B30
26 of 100 26
Fall Protection
General:
Any employee engaged in a steel erection activity who is on a walking/working surface with an
unprotected side or edge more than 10 feet (4.6 m) above a lower level shall be protected from
fall hazards by guardrail systems, safety net systems, personal fall arrest systems, positioning
device systems or fall restraint systems.
Any Connector or employee working at heights over 10 feet above a lower level where metal
decking is initially being installed shall comply with the section below for Connectors and
Controlled Decking Zones (CDZ).
Perimeter safety cables. On multi-story structures, perimeter safety cables shall be installed at
the final interior and exterior perimeters of the floors as soon as the metal decking has been
installed.
Connectors
For fall hazards of more than two stories or 10 feet (9.1 m) above a lower level, whichever is
less;
 Each connector shall be protected from fall hazards by guardrail systems, safety net
systems, personal fall arrest systems, positioning device systems or fall restraint systems.
Each connector shall have completed connector training in accordance with 29CFR 1926.761
and the Training procedure of this manual.
For fall hazards of 10 feet above a lower level, one of the following two provisions will be
required.
 Each connector shall be provided with a personal fall arrest system, positioning device
system or fall restraint system and wear the equipment necessary to be able to be tied off.
 Each connector shall be provided with protection from fall hazards by guardrail systems,
safety net systems, personal fall arrest systems, positioning device systems or fall
restraint systems.
27 of 100 27
Controlled Decking Zone (CDZ)
A controlled decking zone may be established in that area of the structure over 15 and up to 30
feet above a lower level where metal decking is initially being installed and forms the leading
edge of a work area. In each CDZ, the following shall apply:
Each employee working at the leading edge in a CDZ shall be protected from fall hazards of
more than two stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever is less.
Access to a CDZ shall be limited to only those employees engaged in leading edge work.
Boundaries
The boundaries of a CDZ shall be designated and clearly marked. The CDZ shall not be more
than 90 feet (27.4 m) wide and 90 (27.4 m) feet deep from any leading edge. The CDZ shall be
marked by the use of control lines or the equivalent. Examples of acceptable procedures for
demarcating CDZ's can be found in Appendix D to this subpart.
Required Training
Each employee working in a CDZ shall have completed CDZ training in accordance with 29CFR
1926.761 and the Training procedure of this manual.
Unsecured Decking
Unsecured decking in a CDZ shall not exceed 3,000 square feet (914.4 m 2).
Safety deck attachments shall be performed in the CDZ from the leading edge back to the control
line and shall have at least two attachments for each metal decking panel.
Final deck attachments and installation of shear connectors shall not be performed in the CDZ.
Custody of fall protection
Fall protection provided by the erector shall remain in the area where steel erection activity has
been completed, to be used by other trades, only if the controlling contractor or its authorized
representative:
 Has directed the steel erector to leave the fall protection in place; and
 Has inspected and accepted control and responsibility of the fall protection prior to
authorizing persons other than steel erectors to work in the area.
Records:
Inspection record
28 of 100 28
Falling Object Protection
General:
Securing loose items aloft
 All materials, equipment, and tools, which are not in use while aloft, shall be secured
against accidental displacement.
Protection from falling objects other than materials being hoisted
 The controlling contractor shall bar other construction processes below steel erection
unless overhead protection for the employees below is provided.
Records:
Inspection record
29 of 100 29
Control and Protection of Openings
General:
Roof and floor holes and openings.
Metal decking at roof and floor holes and openings shall be installed as follows:
 Framed metal deck openings shall have structural members turned down to allow
continuous deck installation except where not allowed by structural design constraints or
construct-ability.
 Roof and floor holes and openings shall be decked over. Where large size, configuration
or other structural design does not allow openings to be decked over (such as elevator
shafts, stair wells, etc.) employees shall be protected in accordance with the Fall
Protection procedure of this manual.
 Metal decking holes and openings shall not be cut until immediately prior to being
permanently filled with the equipment or structure needed or intended to fulfill its
specific use.
 The equipment or structure needed or intended to fulfill the decking hole or opening’s
specific use shall be capable of supporting, without failure, twice the weight of the
employees, equipment and materials that may be imposed on the cover at any one time.
Covering roof and floor openings
 Covers for roof and floor openings shall be capable of supporting, without failure, twice
the weight of the employees, equipment and materials that may be imposed on the cover
at any one time.
 All covers shall be secured when installed to prevent accidental displacement by the
wind, equipment or employees.
 All covers shall be painted with high-visibility paint or shall be marked with the word
"HOLE" or "COVER" to provide warning of the hazard.
 Smoke dome or skylight fixtures that have been installed, are not considered covers for
the purpose of this section unless they are capable of supporting, without failure, twice
the weight of the employees, equipment and materials that may be imposed on the cover
at any one time.
Decking gaps around columns
 Wire mesh, exterior plywood, or equivalent, shall be installed around columns where
planks or metal decking do not fit tightly. The materials used must be of sufficient
strength to provide fall protection for personnel and prevent objects from falling through.
Records:
Inspection record
30 of 100 30
Personal Protection Equipment
General:
Foot Protection
 The Jobsite Foremen shall ensure that each affected employee uses protective footwear
when working in areas where there is a danger of foot injuries due to falling or rolling
objects, or objects piercing the sole, and where such employee's feet are exposed to
electrical hazards.
 Safety-toe footwear for employees shall meet the requirements and specifications in
American National Standard for Men's Safety-Toe Footwear, Z41.1-1967
Head Protection
 Employees working in areas where there is a possible danger of head injury from impact,
or from falling or flying objects, or from electrical shock and burns, shall be protected by
protective helmets.
 The employer shall ensure that a protective helmet designed to reduce electrical shock
hazard is worn by each such affected employee when near exposed electrical conductors
which could contact the head.
 Helmets for the protection of employees against impact and penetration of falling and
flying objects shall meet the specifications contained in American National Standards
Institute, Z89.1-1969, Safety Requirements for Industrial Head Protection.
 Helmets for the head protection of employees exposed to high voltage electrical shock
and burns shall meet the specifications contained in American National Standards
Institute, Z89.2-1971.
Eye and Face Protection
Employees shall be provided with eye and face protection equipment when machines or
operations present potential eye or face injury from physical, chemical, or radiation agents.
Eye and face protection equipment required by this Part shall meet the requirements specified in
American National Standards Institute, Z87.1-1968, Practice for Occupational and Educational
Eye and Face Protection.
Employees whose vision requires the use of corrective lenses in spectacles, when required by
this regulation to wear eye protection, shall be protected by goggles or spectacles of one of the
following types:
1. Spectacles whose protective lenses provide optical correction;

31 of 100 31
2. Goggles that can be worn over corrective spectacles without disturbing the adjustment of
the spectacles;
3. Goggles that incorporate corrective lenses mounted behind the protective lenses.
Face and eye protection equipment shall be kept clean and in good repair. The use of this type
equipment with structural or optical defects shall be prohibited. Protectors shall meet the
following minimum requirements:
1. They shall provide adequate protection against the particular hazards for which
they are designed.
2. They shall be reasonably comfortable when worn under the designated
conditions.
3. They shall fit snugly and shall not unduly interfere with the movements of the
wearer.
4. They shall be durable.
5. They shall be capable of being disinfected.
6. They shall be easily cleanable.
7. Every protector shall be distinctly marked to facilitate identification only of the
manufacturer.
8. When limitations or precautions are indicated by the manufacturer, they shall be
transmitted to the user and care taken to see that such limitations and precautions
are strictly observed.
The following shall be used as a guide in the selection of face and eye protection for the hazards
and operations noted.
1. GOGGLES, Flexible Fitting - Regular Ventilation

2. GOGGLES, Flexible Fitting - Hooded Ventilation
3. GOGGLES, Cushioned Fitting - Rigid Body
4. SPECTACLES, Metal Frame, with Sideshields (1)
5. SPECTACLES, Plastic Frame - with Sideshields (1)
6. SPECTACLES, Metal-Plastic Frame - with Sideshields (1)
7. WELDING GOGGLES, Eyecup Type - Tinted Lenses (2)
7A CHIPPING GOGGLES, Eyecup Type - Clear Safety Lenses
8. WELDING GOGGLES, Coverspec Type - Tinted Lenses (2)
8A CHIPPING GOGGLES, Coverspec Type - Clear Safety Lenses
9. WELDING GOGGLES, Coverspec Type - Tinted Plate Lens (2)

10. FACE SHIELD (Available with Plastic or Mesh Window)
11. WELDING HELMETS
Acetylene-Burning, | Sparks, harmful rays, | 7, 8, 9.

Acetylene-Cutting,| molten metal, flying |
Acetylene-Welding | particles............ |
Chemical Handling | Splash, acid burns, | 2, 10 (For sever exposure

| fumes................ | add 10 over 2).
32 of 100 32
Chipping...........| Flying particles.......| 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7A, 8A.
Electric (arc) | Sparks, intense rays, | 9, 11,(11 in combination

welding...........| molten metal..........| with 4, 5, 6, in tinted
| | lenses advisable)
Furnace operations.| Glare, heat, molten | 7, 8, 9 (For severe

| metal.................| exposure add 10).
Grinding-Light.....| Flying particles.......| 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.
Grinding-Heavy.....| Flying particles.......| 1, 3, 7A, 8A (For severe

| | exposure add 10)
Laboratory.........| Chemical splash, | 2 (10 when in combination

| glass breakage........| with 4, 5, 6).
Machining..........| Flying particles.......| 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.
Molten metals......| Heat, glare, sparks, | 7, 8, (10 in combination

| splash................| with 4, 5, 6, in tinted
| | lenses)
Spot welding.......| Flying particles, | 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10

| sparks................|
33 of 100 33
Selection of shade numbers for welding filter
The Following shall be used as a guide for the selection of the proper shade numbers of filter
lenses or plates used in welding. Shades more dense than those listed may be used to suit the
individual's needs.
Welding operation……………………………………………………..Shade number
Shielded metal-arc welding 1/16-, 3/32-, 1/8-, 5/32-inch diameter

electrodes...........................………………………………………………………..….10
Gas-shielded arc welding (nonferrous) 1/16-, 3/32-, 1/8-, 5/32-inch diameter

electrodes...............……………………………………………………………………11
Gas-shielded arc welding (ferrous) 1/16-, 3/32-, 1/8-, 5/32-inch diameter

electrodes..................………………………………………………………………….12
Shielded metal-arc welding 3/16-, 7/32-, 1/4-inch diameter electrodes........................12
5/16-, 3/8-inch diameter electrodes.................……………………………………..….14
Atomic hydrogen welding.....................……………………………………………10-14
Carbon-arc welding...................................…………………………………………….14
Soldering...................................……………………………………………….………..2
Torch brazing....................................……………………………………….……..3 or 4
Light cutting, up to 1 inch.....................……………………………………….…..3 or 4
Medium cutting, 1 inch to 6 inches.................…………………………………….4 or 5
Heavy cutting, over 6 inches......................………………………………………..5 or 6
Gas welding (light), up to 1/8-inch...........…………………………………………4 or 5
Gas welding (medium), 1/8-inch to 1/2-inch..……………………………………..5 or 6
Gas welding (heavy), over 1/2-inch............………………………………………..6 or 8
34 of 100 34
Hearing protection
 Wherever it is not feasible to reduce the noise levels or duration of exposures to those
specified in Table D-2, Permissible Noise Exposures, in 1926.52, ear protective devices
shall be provided and used.
 Ear protective devices inserted in the ear shall be fitted or determined individually by
competent persons.
 Plain cotton is not an acceptable protective device.
__________________________________________________
|
| Sound level
Duration per day,hours | dBA slow
| response
___________________________________|______________
|
8..................................| 90
6..................................| 92
4..................................| 95
3..................................| 97
2..................................| 100
1 1/2..............................| 102
1..................................| 105
1/2................................| 110
1/4 or less........................| 115
___________________________________|______________
Records:
Inspection record
35 of 100 35
Identification of Smoke, Fumes and Dust
Responsibility:
The jobsite foremen are responsible for inspecting the site conditions for smoke, dust or fumes
that can cause a hazard to personnel or to site operations. This inspection may be delegated to a
competent person.
General:
Any smoke dust or fumes found on site will be reported to job site foremen and evaluated for
hazardous conditions. PPE will be utilized when necessary in accordance the appropriate
procedure. For smoke, dust and fumes that are highly flammable, or in a confined space, refer to
the appropriate procedures.
Records:
The site evaluations are to be documented. Any special instructions for site operations
concerning smoke, dust or fumes will be documented in the Site Specific Erection and Safety
Plan
36 of 100 36
Removal of Rivets
Responsibility:
The jobsite foremen are responsible for selecting and following the proper method for rivet
removal. An engineer will be consulted on structural stability before rivets are removed.
General:
 Before work begins, a thorough examination for lead is conducted. If lead is present, the
Lead Exposure procedure in this manual will be followed.
 Rivets shall be removed either by drilling and shearing off the head or completely drilling
the shank.
 Replacement of rivets with bolts should be simultaneous with their removal to prevent
structural instability.
 Barricades shall be use to prevent anyone from walking below the area where the work is
being performed. If necessary, a person shall be assign to guard the area.
Records:
Engineer’s Requirements on stability
37 of 100 37
Lead Exposure
Responsibility:
President and jobsite foremen
General:
Permissible exposure limit
The employers shall assure that no employee is exposed to lead at concentrations greater than
fifty micrograms per cubic meter of air (50 ug/m(3)) averaged over an 8-hour period.
If an employee is exposed to lead for more than 8 hours in any work day the employees'
allowable exposure, as a time weighted average (TWA) for that day, shall be reduced according
to the following formula:
Allowable employee exposure (in ug/m(3)) = 400 divided by hours worked in the day.
When respirators are used to limit employee exposure as required under paragraph (c) of this
section and all the requirements of paragraphs (e)(1) and (f) of this section have been met,
employee exposure may be considered to be at the level provided by the protection factor of the
respirator for those periods the respirator is worn. Those periods may be averaged with exposure
levels during periods when respirators are not worn to determine the employee's daily TWA
exposure.
Exposure assessment
The employer shall initially determine if any employee may be exposed to lead at or above the
action level.
Employee exposure is that exposure which would occur if the employee were not using a
respirator.
The employer shall collect personal samples representative of a full shift including at least one
sample for each job classification in each work area either for each shift or for the shift with the
highest exposure level.
Full shift personal samples shall be representative of the monitored employee's regular, daily
exposure to lead.
Protection of employees during assessment of exposure
With any task where lead is present, until The employer performs an employee exposure
assessment and documents that the employee performing any of the listed tasks is not exposed
above the PEL, The employer shall treat the employee as if the employee were exposed above
the PEL, and not in excess of ten (10) times the PEL, and shall implement employee protective
measures prescribed in this procedure
38 of 100 38
Until The employer performs an employee exposure assessment as required, The employer shall
provide to employees protection as follows:
1. Appropriate respiratory protection in accordance with paragraph (f) of this section.
2. Appropriate personal protective clothing and equipment
3. Change areas.
4. Hand washing facilities.
5. Biological monitoring in accordance with paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this section, to consist of

blood sampling and analysis for lead and zinc protoporphyrin levels,
6. Training as required regarding 29 CFR 1926.59, Hazard Communication; training as

required regarding use of respirators; and training in Safety training and education.
Methods of compliance
The employer will subcontract all Lead removal. The subcontractor will be required to comply
with all requirements of 29CFR 1926.62
Respiratory protection
The employer shall provide respirators for:
1. Periods when an employee's exposure to lead exceeds the PEL.
2. Work operations for which engineering and work-practice controls are not
sufficient to reduce employee exposures to or below the PEL.
3. Periods when an employee requests a respirator.
If an employee has breathing difficulty during fit testing or respirator use, The employer must
provide the employee with a medical examination to determine whether or not the employee can
use a respirator while performing the required duty.
Respirator selection
The employer must select the appropriate respirator or combination of respirators from Table I of
this section.
The employer must provide a powered air-purifying respirator when an employee chooses to use
such a respirator and it will provide adequate protection to the employee.
39 of 100 39
Protective work clothing and equipment
"Provision and use". Where an employee is exposed to lead above the PEL without regard to the
use of respirators, where employees are exposed to lead compounds which may cause skin or eye
irritation (e.g. lead arsenate, lead azide), and as interim protection for employees, The employer
shall provide at no cost to the employee and assure that the employee uses appropriate protective
work clothing and equipment that prevents contamination of the employee and the employee's
garments such as, but not limited to:
1. Coveralls or similar full-body work clothing;
2. Gloves, hats, and shoes or disposable shoe coverlets; and
3. Face shields, vented goggles, or other appropriate protective equipment which complies
with 1910.133 of this chapter.
Cleaning and replacement
The employer shall provide the protective clothing in a clean and dry condition at least weekly,
and daily to employees whose exposure levels without regard to a respirator are over 200
ug/m(3) of lead as an 8-hour TWA.
The employer shall provide for the cleaning, laundering, and disposal of protective clothing and
equipment
The employer shall repair or replace required protective clothing and equipment as needed to
maintain their effectiveness.
The employer shall assure that all protective clothing is removed at the completion of a work
shift only in change areas provided for that purpose.
The employer shall assure that contaminated protective clothing, which is to be cleaned,
laundered, or disposed of, is placed in a closed container in the change area which prevents
dispersion of lead outside the container.
40 of 100 40
The employer shall inform in writing any person who cleans or launders protective clothing or
equipment of the potentially harmful effects of exposure to lead.
The employer shall assure that the containers of contaminated protective clothing and equipment
are labeled as follows:
Caution: Clothing contaminated with lead. Do not remove dust by blowing or
shaking. Dispose of lead contaminated wash water in accordance with applicable
local, state, or federal regulations.
The employer shall prohibit the removal of lead from protective clothing or equipment by
blowing, shaking, or any other means, which disperses lead into the air.
Housekeeping
All surfaces shall be maintained as free as practicable of accumulations of lead.
Clean-up of floors and other surfaces where lead accumulates shall wherever possible, be
cleaned by vacuuming or other methods that minimize the likelihood of lead becoming airborne.
Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping, and brushing may be used only where vacuuming or other
equally effective methods have been tried and found not to be effective.
Where vacuuming methods are selected, the vacuums shall be equipped with HEPA filters and
used and emptied in a manner, which minimizes the reentry of lead into the workplace.
Compressed air shall not be used to remove lead from any surface unless the compressed air is
used in conjunction with a ventilation system designed to capture the airborne dust created by the
compressed air.
Hygiene facilities and practices
The employer shall assure that in areas where employees are exposed to lead above the PEL
without regard to the use of respirators, food or beverage is not present or consumed, tobacco
products are not present or used, and cosmetics are not applied.
Change areas
The employer shall provide clean change areas for employees whose airborne exposure to lead is
above the PEL, and as interim protection for employees without regard to the use of respirators.
The employer shall assure that change areas are equipped with separate storage facilities for
protective work clothing and equipment and for street clothes, which prevent cross-
contamination.
The employer shall assure that employees do not leave the workplace wearing any protective
clothing or equipment that is required to be worn during the work shift.
Showers
41 of 100 41
The employer shall provide shower facilities, where feasible, for use by employees whose
airborne exposure to lead is above the PEL.
The employer shall assure, where shower facilities are available, that employees shower at the
end of the work shift and shall provide an adequate supply of cleansing agents and towels for use
by affected employees.
Eating facilities
The employer shall provide lunchroom facilities or eating areas for employees whose airborne
exposure to lead is above the PEL, without regard to the use of respirators.
The employer shall assure that lunchroom facilities or eating areas are as free as practicable from
lead contamination and are readily accessible to employees.
The employer shall assure that employees whose airborne exposure to lead is above the PEL,
without regard to the use of a respirator, wash their hands and face prior to eating, drinking,
smoking or applying cosmetics.
The employer shall assure that employees do not enter lunchroom facilities or eating areas with
protective work clothing or equipment unless surface lead dust has been removed by vacuuming,
downdraft booth, or other cleaning method that limits dispersion of lead dust.
Hand Washing facilities
The employer shall provide adequate hand washing facilities for use by employees exposed to
lead.
Where showers are not provided The employer shall assure that employees wash their hands and
face at the end of the work-shift.
Medical surveillance
The employer shall make available initial medical surveillance to employees occupationally
exposed on any day to lead at or above the action level. Initial medical surveillance consists of
biological monitoring in the form of blood sampling and analysis for lead and zinc
protoporphyrin levels.
The employer shall assure that all medical examinations and procedures are performed by or
under the supervision of a licensed physician.
The employer shall make available the required medical surveillance including multiple
physician review without cost to employees and at a reasonable time and place.
Medical removal protection
The employer shall remove an employee from work having an exposure to lead at or above the
action level on each occasion that a periodic and a follow-up blood sampling test conducted
pursuant to this section indicate that the employee's blood lead level is at or above 50 ug/dl
42 of 100 42
Temporary removal due to a final medical determination
The employer shall remove an employee from work having an exposure to lead at or above the
action level on each occasion that a final medical determination results in a medical finding,
determination, or opinion that the employee has a detected medical condition which places the
employee at increased risk of material impairment to health from exposure to lead.
"final medical determination" means the written medical opinion on the employees' health status
by the examining physician or, where relevant, the outcome of the multiple physician review
mechanism or alternate medical determination mechanism used pursuant to the medical
surveillance provisions of this section.
Where a final medical determination results in any recommended special protective measures for
an employee, or limitations on an employee's exposure to lead, The employer shall implement
and act consistent with the recommendation.
The employer shall return an employee to his or her former job status:
For an employee removed due to a blood lead level at or above 50 ug/dl when two
consecutive blood sampling tests indicate that the employee's blood lead level is at or
below 40 ug/dl;
The employer shall provide an employee up to eighteen (18) months of medical removal
protection benefits on each occasion that an employee is removed from exposure to lead or
otherwise limited pursuant to this section.
"Definition of medical removal protection benefits". For the purposes of this section, the
requirement that an employer provide medical removal protection benefits means that, as long as
the job the employee was removed from continues, The employer shall maintain the total normal
earnings, seniority and other employment rights and benefits of an employee, including the
employee's right to his or her former job status as though the employee had not been medically
removed from the employee's job or otherwise medically limited.
If a removed employee files a claim for workers' compensation payments for a lead-related
disability, then The employer shall continue to provide medical removal protection benefits
pending disposition of the claim. To the extent that an award is made to the employee for
earnings lost during the period of removal, The employer's medical removal protection
obligation shall be reduced by such amount. The employer shall receive no credit for workers'
compensation payments received by the employee for treatment-related expenses.
The employer's obligation to provide medical removal protection benefits to a removed

employee shall be reduced to the extent that the employee receives compensation for earnings
lost during the period of removal either from a publicly or employer-funded compensation
program, or receives income from employment with another employer made possible by virtue
of the employee's removal.
Employee information and training
The employer shall communicate information concerning lead hazards according to the
requirements of OSHA's Hazard Communication Standard for the construction industry, 29 CFR
43 of 100 43
1926.59, including but not limited to the requirements concerning warning signs and labels,
material safety data sheets (MSDS), and employee information and training. In addition,
employers shall comply with the following requirements:
For all employees who are subject to exposure to lead at or above the action level on any day or
who are subject to exposure to lead compounds which may cause skin or eye irritation (e.g. lead
arsenate, lead azide), The employer shall provide a training program in accordance with
paragraph (l)(2) of this section and assure employee participation.
The employer shall provide the training program as initial training prior to the time of job
assignment or prior to the start up date for this requirement, whichever comes last.
The employer shall also provide the training program at least annually for each employee who is
subject to lead exposure at or above the action level on any day.
The employer shall assure that each employee is trained in the following:
The content of this standard and its appendices;

The specific nature of the operations which could result in exposure to lead above the action
level;
1. The purpose, proper selection, fitting, use, and limitations of respirators;

2. The purpose and a description of the medical surveillance program, and the medical
removal protection program including information concerning the adverse health effects
associated with excessive exposure to lead (with particular attention to the adverse
reproductive effects on both males and females and hazards to the fetus and additional
precautions for employees who are pregnant);
3. The engineering controls and work practices associated with the employee's job
assignment including training of employees to follow relevant good work practices
described in Appendix B of this section;
4. The contents of any compliance plan in effect;
5. Instructions to employees that chelating agents should not routinely be used to remove
lead from their bodies and should not be used at all except under the direction of a
licensed physician; and
6. The employee's right of access to records under 29 CFR 1910.20.
Signs
The employer may use signs required by other statutes, regulations or ordinances in addition to,
or in combination with, signs required by this paragraph.
The employer shall assure that no statement appears on or near any sign required by this
paragraph which contradicts or detracts from the meaning of the required sign.
The employer shall post the following warning signs in each work area where an employees
exposure to lead is above the PEL.
44 of 100 44
WARNING
LEAD WORK AREA
POISON
NO SMOKING OR EATING
The employer shall assure that signs required by this paragraph are illuminated and cleaned as
necessary so that the legend is readily visible.
Recordkeeping
The employer shall establish and maintain an accurate record of all monitoring and other data
used in conducting employee exposure assessments.
Exposure monitoring records shall include:

1. The date(s), number, duration, location and results of each of the samples taken if any,
including a description of the sampling procedure used to determine representative
employee exposure where applicable;
2. A description of the sampling and analytical methods used and evidence of their
accuracy;
3. The type of respiratory protective devices worn, if any;
4. Name, social security number, and job classification of the employee monitored and of
all other employees whose exposure the measurement is intended to represent; and
5. The environmental variables that could affect the measurement of employee exposure.
The employer shall maintain monitoring and other exposure assessment records in accordance
with the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.20.
The employer shall establish and maintain an accurate record for each employee subject to
medical surveillance.
This record shall include:

1. The name, social security number, and description of the duties of the employee;
2. A copy of the physician's written opinions;
3. Results of any airborne exposure monitoring done on or for that employee and provided
to the physician; and
4. Any employee medical complaints related to exposure to lead.
The employer shall keep, or assure that the examining physician keeps, the following medical
records:
1. A copy of the medical examination results including medical and work history required
under paragraph (j) of this section;
2. A description of the laboratory procedures and a copy of any standards or guidelines used
to interpret the test results or references to that information;
3. A copy of the results of biological monitoring.
4. The employer shall maintain or assure that the physician maintains medical records in
accordance with the provisions of 29 CFR 1910.20.
The employer shall establish and maintain an accurate record for each employee removed from
current exposure to lead.
45 of 100 45
Each record shall include:
1. The name and social security number of the employee;
2. The date of each occasion that the employee was removed from current exposure to lead
as well as the corresponding date on which the employee was returned to his or her
former job status;
3. A brief explanation of how each removal was or is being accomplished; and
4. A statement with respect to each removal indicating whether or not the reason for the
removal was an elevated blood lead level.
The employer shall maintain each medical removal record for at least the duration of an
employee's employment.
Observation of monitoring
The employer shall provide affected employees or their designated representatives an

opportunity to observe any monitoring of employee exposure to lead conducted.
Whenever observation of the monitoring of employee exposure to lead requires entry into an area
where the use of respirators, protective clothing or equipment is required, The employer shall
provide the observer with and assure the use of such respirators, clothing and equipment, and
shall require the observer to comply with all other applicable safety and health procedures.
Without interfering with the monitoring, observers shall be entitled to:
1. Receive an explanation of the measurement procedures;
2. Observe all steps related to the monitoring of lead performed at the place of exposure;
3. Record the results obtained or receive copies of the results when returned by the
laboratory.
46 of 100 46
LO/TO of Circuits
Responsibility:
Jobsite foremen
General:
This procedure sets requirements for the lockout and tagging of circuits in accordance to 29CFR
1926.417
Controls
 Controls that are to be deactivated during the course of work on energized or de-
energized equipment or circuits shall be tagged.
Equipment and circuits

 Equipment or circuits that are de-energized shall be rendered inoperative and shall have
tags attached at all points where such equipment or circuits can be energized.
Tags
 Tags shall be placed to identify plainly the equipment or circuits being worked on.
47 of 100 47
Confined Space
Responsibility: President and Jobsite Forman
General
The Safety Director and Jobsite Forman shall evaluate the jobsite to determine if any spaces are
permit-required confined spaces.
Confined space is defined as:

 Is large enough and so configured that an employee can bodily enter and perform
assigned work.
 Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit (for example, tanks, vessels, silos,
storage bins, hoppers, vaults, and pits are spaces that may have limited means of entry.
 Is not designed for continuous employee occupancy.
If the jobsite contains permit spaces, the Safety Director and Jobsite Forman shall inform
exposed employees, by posting danger signs or by any equally effective means, of the existence
and location of and the danger posed by the permit spaces.
If the Safety Director and Jobsite Forman decide that that a written permit space program is
required to protect the employees entering the permit space, the pre-entry checklist shall be
completed and the following procedure shall apply.
Equipment
The following equipment will be provided when needed:
 Testing and monitoring equipment
 Ventilating equipment needed to obtain acceptable entry conditions;
 Communications equipment
 Personal protective equipment
 Lighting equipment needed to enable employees to see well enough to work safely and to
exit the space quickly in an emergency;
 Barriers and shields
 Equipment, such as ladders, needed for safe ingress and egress by authorized entrants;
 Rescue and emergency equipment
 Any other equipment necessary for safe entry into and rescue from permit spaces.
Before Entry
Pre-entry testing shall be performed to the extent feasible before entry is authorized.
Provide at least one attendant outside the permit space into which entry is authorized for the
duration of entry operations;
Develop and implement procedures for

 summoning rescue and emergency services
48 of 100 48
 for rescuing entrants from permit spaces
 for providing necessary emergency services to rescued employees
 for preventing unauthorized personnel from attempting a rescue.
During Entry
Test or monitor the permit space as necessary to determine if acceptable entry conditions are
being maintained during the course of entry operations.
Program Review
Review the permit space program, using the canceled permits retained and revise the program as
necessary, to ensure that employees participating in entry operations are protected from permit
space hazards.
Permit Duration
The entry supervisor shall terminate entry and cancel the entry permit when:
 The entry operations covered by the entry permit have been completed.
 A condition that is not allowed under the entry permit arises in or near the permit space.
Training Requirements
All Affected employees shall acquire the understanding, knowledge, and skills necessary for the
safe performance of the duties assigned under this section.
 Before the employee is first assigned duties under this section.

 Before there is a change in assigned duties.
 Whenever there is a change in permit space operations that presents a hazard about which
an employee has not previously been trained.
 Whenever the employer has reason to believe either that there are deviations from the
permit space entry procedures or that there are inadequacies in the employee's knowledge
or use of these procedures.
The training shall establish employee proficiency in the duties required.
Training Documentation
The employer shall certify that the above has been accomplished. The certification shall contain
each employee's name, the signatures or initials of the trainers, and the dates of training.
Duties of authorized entrants

The employer shall ensure that all authorized entrants:
 Know the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode,
signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure
 Properly use equipment as required.
 Communicate with the attendant as necessary to enable the attendant to monitor entrant
status and to enable the attendant to alert entrants of the need to evacuate the space as
require.
 Alert the attendant whenever.
o The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure to a dangerous
situation.
o The entrant detects a prohibited condition; and
 Exit from the permit space as quickly as possible whenever:
49 of 100 49
o An order to evacuate is given by the attendant or the entry supervisor.
o The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure to a dangerous
situation.
o The entrant detects a prohibited condition.
o An evacuation alarm is activated.
Duties of attendants
The employer shall ensure that each attendant:
 Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode,
signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure.
 Is aware of possible behavioral effects of hazard exposure in authorized entrants.
 Continuously maintains an accurate count of authorized entrants in the permit space and
ensures that the means used to identify authorized entrants accurately identifies who is in
the permit space.
 Remains outside the permit space during entry operations until relieved by another
attendant.
 Communicates with authorized entrants as necessary to monitor entrant status and to alert
entrants of the need to evacuate the space.
 Monitors activities inside and outside the space to determine if it is safe for entrants to
remain in the space and orders the authorized entrants to evacuate the permit space
immediately under any of the following conditions;
o If the attendant detects a prohibited condition.
o If the attendant detects the behavioral effects of hazard exposure in an authorized
entrant.
o If the attendant detects a situation outside the space that could endanger the
authorized entrants.
o If the attendant cannot effectively and safely perform all the duties required.
 Summon rescue and other emergency services as soon as the attendant determines that
authorized entrants may need assistance to escape from permit space hazards.
 Takes the following actions when unauthorized persons approach or enter a permit space
while entry is underway.
 Warn the unauthorized persons that they must stay away from the permit space;
 Advise the unauthorized persons that they must exit immediately if they have entered the
permit space.
 Inform the authorized entrants and the entry supervisor if unauthorized persons have
entered the permit space.
 Performs non-entry rescues as specified by the employer's rescue procedure.
 Performs no duties that might interfere with the attendant's primary duty to monitor and
protect the authorized entrants.
Duties of entry supervisors

The employer shall ensure that each entry supervisor:
 Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode,
signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure.
 Verifies, by checking that the appropriate entries have been made on the permit, that all
tests specified by the permit have been conducted and that all procedures and equipment
specified by the permit are in place before endorsing the permit and allowing entry to
begin.
 Terminates the entry and cancels the permit as required.
50 of 100 50
 Verifies that rescue services are available and that the means for summoning them are
operable.
 Removes unauthorized individuals who enter or who attempt to enter the permit space
during entry operations.
 Determines, whenever responsibility for a permit space entry operation is transferred and
at intervals dictated by the hazards and operations performed within the space, that entry
operations remain consistent with terms of the entry permit and that acceptable entry
conditions are maintained.
51 of 100 51
Definitions Confined Space
"Acceptable entry conditions" means the conditions that must exist in a permit space to allow
entry and to ensure that employees involved with a permit-required confined space entry can
safely enter into and work within the space.
"Attendant" means an individual stationed outside one or more permit spaces who monitors the
authorized entrants and who performs all attendant's duties assigned in the employer's permit
space program.
"Authorized entrant" means an employee who is authorized by the employer to enter a permit
space.
"Blanking or blinding" means the absolute closure of a pipe, line, or duct by the fastening of a
solid plate (such as a spectacle blind or a skillet blind) that completely covers the bore and that is
capable of withstanding the maximum pressure of the pipe, line, or duct with no leakage beyond
the plate.
"Confined space" means a space that:
(1) Is large enough and so configured that an employee can bodily enter and perform assigned
work; and
(2) Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit (for example, tanks, vessels, silos, storage
bins, hoppers, vaults, and pits are spaces that may have limited means of entry.); and
(3) Is not designed for continuous employee occupancy.
"Double block and bleed" means the closure of a line, duct, or pipe by closing and locking or
tagging two in-line valves and by opening and locking or tagging a drain or vent valve in the line
between the two closed valves.
"Emergency" means any occurrence (including any failure of hazard control or monitoring
equipment) or event internal or external to the permit space that could endanger entrants.
"Engulfment" means the surrounding and effective capture of a person by a liquid or finely
divided (flowable) solid substance that can be aspirated to cause death by filling or plugging the
respiratory system or that can exert enough force on the body to cause death by strangulation,
constriction, or crushing.
"Entry" means the action by which a person passes through an opening into a permit-required
confined space. Entry includes ensuing work activities in that space and is considered to have
occurred as soon as any part of the entrant's body breaks the plane of an opening into the space.
"Entry permit (permit)" means the written or printed document that is provided by the
employer to allow and control entry into a permit space and that contains the information
specified in paragraph (f) of this section.
"Entry supervisor" means the person (such as the employer, foreman, or crew chief)
52 of 100 52
responsible for determining if acceptable entry conditions are present at a permit space where
entry is planned, for authorizing entry and overseeing entry operations, and for terminating entry
as required by this section.
NOTE: An entry supervisor also may serve as an attendant or as an authorized entrant, as long as
that person is trained and equipped as required by this section for each role he or she fills. Also,
the duties of entry supervisor may be passed from one individual to another during the course of
an entry operation.
"Hazardous atmosphere" means an atmosphere that may expose employees to the risk of
death, incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-rescue (that is, escape unaided from a permit
space), injury, or acute illness from one or more of the following causes:
(1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10 percent of its lower flammable limit (LFL);
(2) Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or exceeds its LFL;
NOTE: This concentration may be approximated as a condition in which the dust obscures vision
at a distance of 5 feet (1.52 m) or less.
(3) Atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5 percent or above 23.5 percent;
(4) Atmospheric concentration of any substance for which a dose or a permissible exposure limit
is published in Subpart G, Occupational Health and Environmental Control, or in Subpart Z,
Toxic and Hazardous Substances, of this Part and which could result in employee exposure in
excess of its dose or permissible exposure limit;
NOTE: An atmospheric concentration of any substance that is not capable of causing death,
incapacitation, impairment of ability to self-rescue, injury, or acute illness due to its health
effects is not covered by this provision.
(5) Any other atmospheric condition that is immediately dangerous to life or health.
NOTE: For air contaminants for which OSHA has not determined a dose or permissible exposure
limit, other sources of information, such as Material Safety Data Sheets that comply with the
Hazard Communication Standard, section 1910.1200 of this Part, published information, and
internal documents can provide guidance in establishing acceptable atmospheric conditions.
"Hot work permit" means the employer's written authorization to perform operations (for
example, riveting, welding, cutting, burning, and heating) capable of providing a source of
ignition.
"Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH)" means any condition that poses an
immediate or delayed threat to life or that would cause irreversible adverse health effects or that
would interfere with an individual's ability to escape unaided from a permit space.
NOTE: Some materials -- hydrogen fluoride gas and cadmium vapor, for example -- may
produce immediate transient effects that, even if severe, may pass without medical attention, but
are followed by sudden, possibly fatal collapse 12-72 hours after exposure. The victim "feels
normal" from recovery from transient effects until collapse. Such materials in hazardous
53 of 100 53
quantities are considered to be "immediately" dangerous to life or health.
"Inerting" means the displacement of the atmosphere in a permit space by a noncombustible

gas (such as nitrogen) to such an extent that the resulting atmosphere is noncombustible.
NOTE: This procedure produces an IDLH oxygen-deficient atmosphere.
"Isolation" means the process by which a permit space is removed from service and completely
protected against the release of energy and material into the space by such means as: blanking or
blinding; misaligning or removing sections of lines, pipes, or ducts; a double block and bleed
system; lockout or tagout of all sources of energy; or blocking or disconnecting all mechanical
linkages.
"Line breaking" means the intentional opening of a pipe, line, or duct that is or has been
carrying flammable, corrosive, or toxic material, an inert gas, or any fluid at a volume, pressure,
or temperature capable of causing injury.
"Non-permit confined space" means a confined space that does not contain or, with respect to
atmospheric hazards, have the potential to contain any hazard capable of causing death or serious
physical harm.
"Oxygen deficient atmosphere" means an atmosphere containing less than 19.5 percent oxygen
by volume.
"Oxygen enriched atmosphere" means an atmosphere containing more than 23.5 percent
oxygen by volume.
"Permit-required confined space (permit space)" means a confined space that has one or
more of the following characteristics:
(1) Contains or has a potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere;
(2) Contains a material that has the potential for engulfing an entrant;
(3) Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by
inwardly converging walls or by a floor which slopes downward and tapers to a smaller cross-
section; or
(4) Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard.
"Permit-required confined space program (permit space program)" means the employer's
overall program for controlling, and, where appropriate, for protecting employees from, permit
space hazards and for regulating employee entry into permit spaces.
"Permit system" means the employer's written procedure for preparing and issuing permits for
entry and for returning the permit space to service following termination of entry.
"Prohibited condition" means any condition in a permit space that is not allowed by the permit
during the period when entry is authorized.
54 of 100 54
"Rescue service" means the personnel designated to rescue employees from permit spaces.
"Retrieval system" means the equipment (including a retrieval line, chest or full-body harness,
wristlets, if appropriate, and a lifting device or anchor) used for non-entry rescue of persons from
permit spaces.
"Testing" means the process by which the hazards that may confront entrants of a permit space
are identified and evaluated. Testing includes specifying the tests that are to be performed in the
permit space.
NOTE: Testing enables employers both to devise and implement adequate control measures for
the protection of authorized entrants and to determine if acceptable entry conditions are present
immediately prior to, and during, entry.
55 of 100 55
Pre- Entry Checklist
Date and Time Issued: _______________ Date and Time Expires: ________
Job site/Space I.D.: ________________ Job Supervisor:________________
Equipment to be worked on: __________ Work to be performed: _________
Stand-by personnel: __________________ ________________ _____________
1. Atmospheric Checks: Time ________

Oxygen ________%
Explosive ________% L.F.L.
Toxic ________PPM
2. Tester's signature: _____________________________
3. Source isolation (No Entry): N/A Yes No

Pumps or lines blinded, ( ) ( ) ( )
disconnected, or blocked ( ) ( ) ( )
4. Ventilation Modification: N/A Yes No

Mechanical ( ) ( ) ( )
Natural Ventilation only ( ) ( ) ( )
5. Atmospheric check after

isolation and Ventilation:
Oxygen __________% > 19.5 %
Explosive _______% L.F.L < 10 %
Toxic ___________PPM < 10 PPM H(2)S
Time ____________
Testers signature: _____________________________
6. Communication procedures: ________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________
7. Rescue procedures: _______________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
8. Entry, standby, and back up persons: Yes No

Successfully completed required
training?
Is it current? ( ) ( )
9. Equipment: N/A Yes No

Direct reading gas monitor -
tested ( ) ( ) ( )
Safety harnesses and lifelines
for entry and standby persons ( ) ( ) ( )
Hoisting equipment ( ) ( ) ( )
Powered communications ( ) ( ) ( )
SCBA's for entry and standby
persons ( ) ( ) ( )
Protective Clothing ( ) ( ) ( )
All electric equipment listed
Class I, Division I, Group D
and Non-sparking tools ( ) ( ) ( )
10. Periodic atmospheric tests:

Oxygen ____% Time ____ Oxygen ____% Time ____
56 of 100 56
Oxygen ____% Time ____ Oxygen ____% Time ____
Explosive ____% Time ____ Explosive ____% Time ____
Explosive ____% Time ____ Explosive ____% Time ____
Toxic ____% Time ____ Toxic ____% Time ____
Toxic ____% Time ____ Toxic ____% Time ____
Permit Prepared By: __________________________________________________

Approved By:__________________________________________________________
Reviewed By:____________________ _____________________________________
Entrance Log
Name Entrance time Exit Time
57 of 100 57
Respirator Program
Responsibility: President and Jobsite Foreman
Permissible practice
 In the control of those occupational diseases caused by breathing air contaminated with
harmful dusts, fogs, fumes, mists, gases, smokes, sprays, or vapors, the primary objective
shall be to prevent atmospheric contamination. This shall be accomplished as far as
feasible by accepted engineering control measures (for example, enclosure or
confinement of the operation, general and local ventilation, and substitution of less toxic
materials). When effective engineering controls are not feasible, or while they are being
instituted, appropriate respirators shall be used pursuant to this section.
Respiratory protection program

 In any workplace where respirators are necessary to protect the health of the employee or
whenever respirators are required by the employer, the following respiratory protection
program with worksite-specific procedures shall be implemented. The program shall be
updated as necessary to reflect those changes in workplace conditions that affect
respirator use. A suitably trained program administrator must administer the program.
Program Contents
 Procedures for selecting respirators for use in the workplace;
 Medical evaluations of employees required to use respirators;
 Fit testing procedures for tight-fitting respirators;
 Procedures for proper use of respirators in routine and reasonably foreseeable emergency
situations;
 Procedures and schedules for cleaning, disinfecting, storing, inspecting, repairing,
discarding, and otherwise maintaining respirators;
 Procedures to ensure adequate air quality, quantity, and flow of breathing air for
atmosphere-supplying respirators;
 Training of employees in the respiratory hazards to which they are potentially exposed
during routine and emergency situations;
 Training of employees in the proper use of respirators, including putting on and removing
them, any limitations on their use, and their maintenance; and
 Procedures for regularly evaluating the effectiveness of the program.
General requirements
 The employer shall select and provide an appropriate respirator based on the respiratory
hazard(s) to which the worker is exposed and workplace and user factors that affect
respirator performance and reliability.
 The employer shall select a NIOSH-certified respirator. The respirator shall be used in
compliance with the conditions of its certification.
 The employer shall identify and evaluate the respiratory hazard(s) in the workplace; this
evaluation shall include a reasonable estimate of employee exposures to respiratory
hazard(s) and an identification of the contaminant's chemical state and physical form.
58 of 100 58
Where the employer cannot identify or reasonably estimate the employee exposure, the
employer shall consider the atmosphere to be IDLH.
 The employer shall select respirators from a sufficient number of respirator models and
sizes so that the respirator is acceptable to, and correctly fits, the user.
Abrasive-blasting
 Employers must use only respirators approved by the National Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health (NIOSH) under 42 CFR part 84 to protect employees from dust
produced during abrasive-blasting operations.
 The respirator is to be constructed so that it covers the wearer's head, neck, and shoulders
to protect him from rebounding abrasive.
Respirators for IDLH atmospheres

The employer shall provide the following respirators for employee use in IDLH atmospheres:
 A full face piece pressure demand SCBA certified by NIOSH for a minimum service life
of thirty minutes, or
 A combination full-face piece pressure demand supplied-air respirator (SAR) with
auxiliary self-contained air supply.
All oxygen-deficient atmospheres shall be considered IDLH. The respirator selected shall be
appropriate for the chemical state and physical form of the contaminant.
For protection against gases and vapors, the employer shall provide:
 An atmosphere-supplying respirator or an air-purifying respirator provided that the
respirator is equipped with an end-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) certified by NIOSH
for the contaminant. If there is no ESLI appropriate for conditions in the employer's
workplace, the employer implements a change schedule for canisters and cartridges that
is based on objective information or data that will ensure that canisters and cartridges are
changed before the end of their service life. The employer shall describe in the respirator
program the information and data relied upon and the basis for the canister and cartridge
change schedule and the basis for reliance on the data.
For protection against particulates, the employer shall provide:

 An atmosphere-supplying respirator or an air-purifying respirator equipped with a filter
certified by NIOSH under 30 CFR part 11 as a high efficiency particulate air (HEPA)
filter, or an air-purifying respirator equipped with a filter certified for particulates by
NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84
For contaminants consisting primarily of particles with mass median aerodynamic diameters
(MMAD) of at least 2 micrometers:
 An air-purifying respirator equipped with any filter certified for particulates by NIOSH.
Medical Evaluation
 The employer shall provide a medical evaluation to determine the employee's ability to
use a respirator, before the employee is fit tested or required to use the respirator in the
workplace. The employer may discontinue an employee's medical evaluations when the
employee is no longer required to use a respirator.
59 of 100 59
Medical evaluation procedures
 The employer shall identify a physician or other licensed health care professional
(PLHCP) to perform medical evaluations using a medical questionnaire or an initial
medical examination that obtains the same information as the medical questionnaire.
 The medical evaluation shall obtain the information requested in the Medical Evaluation
Checklist.
Follow-up medical examination

 The employer shall ensure that a follow-up medical examination is provided for an
employee who gives a positive response to any question among questions 1 through 8 in
Section 2 of the Medical Evaluation Checklist or whose initial medical examination
demonstrates the need for a follow-up medical examination.
 The follow-up medical examination shall include any medical tests, consultations, or
diagnostic procedures that the PLHCP deems necessary to make a final determination.
Administration of the medical questionnaire and examinations

 The medical questionnaire and examinations shall be administered confidentially during
the employee's normal working hours or at a time and place convenient to the employee.
The medical questionnaire shall be administered in a manner that ensures that the
employee understands its content.
 The employer shall provide the employee with an opportunity to discuss the
questionnaire and examination results with the PLHCP.
Supplemental information for the PLHCP

The following information must be provided to the PLHCP before the PLHCP makes a
recommendation concerning an employee's ability to use a respirator:
 The type and weight of the respirator to be used by the employee;

 The duration and frequency of respirator use (including use for rescue and escape);
 The expected physical work effort;
 Additional protective clothing and equipment to be worn; and
 Temperature and humidity extremes that may be encountered.
 Any supplemental information provided previously to the PLHCP regarding an employee
need not be provided for a subsequent medical evaluation if the information and the
PLHCP remain the same.
 A copy of the written respiratory protection program and a copy of this section.
When a PLHCP is replaced, the employer must ensure that the new PLHCP obtains this
information, either by providing the documents directly to the PLHCP or having the documents
transferred from the former PLHCP to the new PLHCP. However, OSHA does not expect
employers to have employees medically reevaluated solely because a new PLHCP has been
selected.
Medical determination
In determining the employee's ability to use a respirator, the employer shall:
60 of 100 60
 Obtain a written recommendation regarding the employee's ability to use the respirator
from the PLHCP. The recommendation shall provide only the following information:
 Any limitations on respirator use related to the medical condition of the employee, or
relating to the workplace conditions in which the respirator will be used, including
whether or not the employee is medically able to use the respirator;
 The need, if any, for follow-up medical evaluations; and
 A statement that the PLHCP has provided the employee with a copy of the PLHCP's
written recommendation.
If the respirator is a negative pressure respirator and the PLHCP finds a medical condition that
may place the employee's health at increased risk if the respirator is used, the employer shall
provide a PAPR if the PLHCP's medical evaluation finds that the employee can use such a
respirator; if a subsequent medical evaluation finds that the employee is medically able to use a
negative pressure respirator, then the employer is no longer required to provide a PAPR.
Additional medical evaluations

At a minimum, the employer shall provide additional medical evaluations that comply with the
requirements of this section if:
 An employee reports medical signs or symptoms that are related to ability to use a
respirator;
 A PLHCP, supervisor, or the respirator program administrator informs the employer that
an employee needs to be reevaluated;
 Information from the respiratory protection program, including observations made during
fit testing and program evaluation, indicates a need for employee reevaluation; or
 A change occurs in workplace conditions (e.g., physical work effort, protective clothing,
temperature) that may result in a substantial increase in the physiological burden placed
on an employee.
Fit testing
 This procedure requires that before an employee may be required to use any respirator
with a negative or positive pressure tight-fitting face piece, the employee must be fit
tested with the same make, model, style, and size of respirator that will be used. This
paragraph specifies the kinds of fit tests allowed, the procedures for conducting them, and
how the results of the fit tests must be used.
 The employer shall ensure that employees using a tight-fitting face piece respirator pass
an appropriate qualitative fit test (QLFT) or quantitative fit test (QNFT) as stated in this
paragraph.
 The employer shall ensure that an employee using a tight-fitting face piece respirator is
fit tested prior to initial use of the respirator, whenever a different respirator face piece
(size, style, model or make) is used, and at least annually thereafter.
 The employer shall conduct an additional fit test whenever the employee reports, or the
employer, PLHCP, supervisor, or program administrator makes visual observations of,
changes in the employee's physical condition that could affect respirator fit. Such
conditions include, but are not limited to, facial scarring, dental changes, cosmetic
surgery, or an obvious change in body weight.
61 of 100 61
 If after passing a QLFT or QNFT, the employee subsequently notifies the employer,
program administrator, supervisor, or PLHCP that the fit of the respirator is unacceptable,
the employee shall be given a reasonable opportunity to select a different respirator face
piece and to be retested.
 The fit test shall be administered using an OSHA-accepted QLFT or QNFT protocol. The
attached OSHA-accepted QLFT and QNFT protocols and procedures are attached at the
end of this section.
 QLFT may only be used to fit test negative pressure air-purifying respirators that must
achieve a fit factor of 100 or less.
 If the fit factor, as determined through an OSHA-accepted QNFT protocol, is equal to or

greater than 100 for tight-fitting half face pieces, or equal to or greater than 500 for tight-
fitting full face pieces, the QNFT has been passed with that respirator.
 Fit testing of tight-fitting atmosphere-supplying respirators and tight-fitting powered air-

purifying respirators shall be accomplished by performing quantitative or qualitative fit
testing in the negative pressure mode, regardless of the mode of operation (negative or
positive pressure) that is used for respiratory protection.
 Qualitative fit testing of these respirators shall be accomplished by temporarily

converting the respirator user's actual face piece into a negative pressure respirator with
appropriate filters, or by using an identical negative pressure air-purifying respirator face
piece with the same sealing surfaces as a surrogate for the atmosphere-supplying or
powered air-purifying respirator face piece.
 Quantitative fit testing of these respirators shall be accomplished by modifying the face
piece to allow sampling inside the face piece in the breathing zone of the user, midway
between the nose and mouth. This requirement shall be accomplished by installing a
permanent sampling probe onto a surrogate face piece, or by using a sampling adapter
designed to temporarily provide a means of sampling air from inside the face piece.
 Any modifications to the respirator face piece for fit testing shall be completely removed,
and the face piece restored to NIOSH-approved configuration, before that face piece can
be used in the workplace.
Use of respirators
This paragraph requires employers to establish and implement procedures for the proper use of
respirators. These requirements include prohibiting conditions that may result in face piece seal
leakage, preventing employees from removing respirators in hazardous environments, taking
actions to ensure continued effective respirator operation throughout the work shift, and
establishing procedures for the use of respirators in IDLH atmospheres or in interior structural
firefighting situations.
Face piece seal protection

 The employer shall not permit respirators with tight-fitting face pieces to be worn by
employees who have:
62 of 100 62
o Facial hair that comes between the sealing surface of the face piece and the face
or that interferes with valve function; or
o Any condition that interferes with the face-to-face piece seal or valve function.
 If an employee wears corrective glasses or goggles or other personal protective
equipment, the employer shall ensure that such equipment is worn in a manner that does
not interfere with the seal of the face piece to the face of the user.
 For all tight-fitting respirators, the employer shall ensure that employees perform a user
seal check each time they put on the respirator using the attached procedure.
Continuing respirator effectiveness

 Appropriate surveillance shall be maintained of work area conditions and degree of
employee exposure or stress. When there is a change in work area conditions or degree of
employee exposure or stress that may affect respirator effectiveness, the employer shall
reevaluate the continued effectiveness of the respirator.
 The employer shall ensure that employees leave the respirator use area:
o To wash their faces and respirator face pieces as necessary to prevent eye or skin
irritation associated with respirator use; or
o If they detect vapor or gas breakthrough, changes in breathing resistance, or
leakage of the face piece; or
o To replace the respirator or the filter, cartridge, or canister elements.
 If the employee detects vapor or gas breakthrough, changes in breathing resistance, or
leakage of the face piece, the employer must replace or repair the respirator before
allowing the employee to return to the work area.
Procedures for IDLH atmospheres

For all IDLH atmospheres, the employer shall ensure that:
 One employee or, when needed, more than one employee is located outside the IDLH
atmosphere;
 Visual, voice, or signal line communication is maintained between the employee(s) in the
IDLH atmosphere and the employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmosphere;
 The employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmosphere are trained and equipped to
provide effective emergency rescue;
 The employer or designee is notified before the employee(s) located outside the IDLH
atmosphere enter the IDLH atmosphere to provide emergency rescue;
 The employer or designee authorized to do so by the employer, once notified, provides
necessary assistance appropriate to the situation;
 Employee(s) located outside the IDLH atmospheres are equipped with:
o Pressure demand or other positive pressure SCBAs, or a pressure demand or other
positive pressure supplied-air respirator with auxiliary SCBA; and either
o Appropriate retrieval equipment for removing the employee(s) who enter(s) these
hazardous atmospheres where retrieval equipment would contribute to the rescue
of the employee(s) and would not increase the overall risk resulting from entry; or
o Equivalent means for rescue where retrieval equipment is not required.
Maintenance and care of respirators

This procedure is to provide for the cleaning and disinfecting, storage, inspection, and repair of
respirators used by employees.
63 of 100 63
Cleaning and disinfecting
The employer shall provide each respirator user with a respirator that is clean, sanitary, and in
good working order. The employer shall ensure that respirators are cleaned and disinfected using
the procedures attached to this section, or procedures recommended by the respirator
manufacturer, provided that such procedures are of equivalent effectiveness. The respirators shall
be cleaned and disinfected at the following intervals:
 Respirators issued for the exclusive use of an employee shall be cleaned and disinfected
as often as necessary to be maintained in a sanitary condition;
 Respirators issued to more than one employee shall be cleaned and disinfected before
being worn by different individuals;
 Respirators maintained for emergency use shall be cleaned and disinfected after each use;
and
 Respirators used in fit testing and training shall be cleaned and disinfected after each use.
Storage
The employer shall ensure that respirators are stored as follows:
 All respirators shall be stored to protect them from damage, contamination, dust, sunlight,
extreme temperatures, excessive moisture, and damaging chemicals, and they shall be
packed or stored to prevent deformation of the face piece and exhalation valve.
 In addition to the requirements of this section, emergency respirators shall be:
o Kept accessible to the work area;
o Stored in compartments or in covers that are clearly marked as containing
emergency respirators;
o Stored in accordance with any applicable manufacturer instructions.
Inspection
 The employer shall ensure that respirators are inspected as follows:
o All respirators used in routine situations shall be inspected before each use and
during cleaning;
o All respirators maintained for use in emergency situations shall be inspected at

least monthly and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and
shall be checked for proper function before and after each use; and
o Emergency escape-only respirators shall be inspected before being carried into the
workplace for use.
 The employer shall ensure that respirator inspections include the following:
o A check of respirator function, tightness of connections, and the condition of the
various parts including, but not limited to, the face piece, head straps, valves,
connecting tube, and cartridges, canisters or filters; and
o A check of elastomeric parts for pliability and signs of deterioration.
 In addition to the requirements of paragraphs (h)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section, self-
contained breathing apparatus shall be inspected monthly. Air and oxygen cylinders shall
be maintained in a fully charged state and shall be recharged when the pressure falls to
90% of the manufacturer's recommended pressure level. The employer shall determine
that the regulator and warning devices function properly.
 For respirators maintained for emergency use, the employer shall:
64 of 100 64
o Certify the respirator by documenting the date the inspection was performed, the
name (or signature) of the person who made the inspection, the findings, required
remedial action, and a serial number or other means of identifying the inspected
respirator; and
o Provide this information on a tag or label that is attached to the storage
compartment for the respirator, is kept with the respirator, or is included in
inspection reports stored as paper or electronic files. This information shall be
maintained until replaced following a subsequent certification.
Repairs
The employer shall ensure that respirators that fail an inspection or are otherwise found to be
defective are removed from service, and are discarded or repaired or adjusted in accordance with
the following procedures:
 Repairs or adjustments to respirators are to be made only by persons appropriately trained
to perform such operations and shall use only the respirator manufacturer's NIOSH-
approved parts designed for the respirator;
 Repairs shall be made according to the manufacturer's recommendations and
specifications for the type and extent of repairs to be performed; and
 Reducing and admission valves, regulators, and alarms shall be adjusted or repaired only
by the manufacturer or a technician trained by the manufacturer.
Breathing air quality and use

This procedure is to provide employees using atmosphere-supplying respirators (supplied-air and
SCBA) with breathing gases of high purity.
 The employer shall ensure that compressed air, compressed oxygen, liquid air, and liquid
oxygen used for respiration accords with the following specifications:
 Compressed and liquid oxygen shall meet the United States Pharmacopoeia requirements
for medical or breathing oxygen; and
 Compressed breathing air shall meet at least the requirements for Grade D breathing air
described in ANSI/Compressed Gas Association Commodity Specification for Air, G-
7.1-1989, to include:
o Oxygen content (v/v) of 19.5-23.5%;
o Hydrocarbon (condensed) content of 5 milligrams per cubic meter of air or less;
o Carbon monoxide (CO) content of 10 ppm or less;
o Carbon dioxide content of 1,000 ppm or less; and
o Lack of noticeable odor.
 The employer shall ensure that compressed oxygen is not used in atmosphere-supplying
respirators that have previously used compressed air.
 The employer shall ensure that oxygen concentrations greater than 23.5% are used only
in equipment designed for oxygen service or distribution.
 The employer shall ensure that cylinders used to supply breathing air to respirators meet
the following requirements:
o Cylinders are tested and maintained as prescribed in the Shipping Container
Specification Regulations of the Department of Transportation (49 CFR part 173
and part 178);
o Cylinders of purchased breathing air have a certificate of analysis from the
supplier that the breathing air meets the requirements for Grade D breathing air;
and
65 of 100 65
o The moisture content in the cylinder does not exceed a dew point of -50 deg.F (-
45.6 deg.C) at 1 atmosphere pressure.
 The employer shall ensure that compressors used to supply breathing air to respirators are
constructed and situated so as to:
o Prevent entry of contaminated air into the air-supply system;
o Minimize moisture content so that the dew point at 1 atmosphere pressure is 10
degrees F (5.56 deg.C) below the ambient temperature;
o Have suitable in-line air-purifying sorbent beds and filters to further ensure
breathing air quality. Sorbent beds and filters shall be maintained and replaced or
refurbished periodically following the manufacturer's instructions.
o Have a tag containing the most recent change date and the signature of the person
authorized by the employer to perform the change. The tag shall be maintained at
the compressor.
 For compressors that are not oil-lubricated, the employer shall ensure that carbon
monoxide levels in the breathing air do not exceed 10 ppm.
 For oil-lubricated compressors, the employer shall use a high-temperature or carbon
monoxide alarm, or both, to monitor carbon monoxide levels. If only high-temperature
alarms are used, the air supply shall be monitored at intervals sufficient to prevent carbon
monoxide in the breathing air from exceeding 10 ppm.
 The employer shall ensure that breathing air couplings are incompatible with outlets for
nonrespirable worksite air or other gas systems. No asphyxiating substance shall be
introduced into breathing air lines.
 The employer shall use breathing gas containers marked in accordance with the NIOSH
respirator certification standard, 42 CFR part 84.
Identification of filters, cartridges, and canisters

 The employer shall ensure that all filters, cartridges and canisters used in the workplace
are labeled and color coded with the NIOSH approval label and that the label is not
removed and remains legible.
Training and information

 The employer shall ensure that each employee can demonstrate knowledge of at least the
following:
1. Why the respirator is necessary and how improper fit, usage, or maintenance can
compromise the protective effect of the respirator;
2. What the limitations and capabilities of the respirator are;
3. How to use the respirator effectively in emergency situations, including situations
in which the respirator malfunctions;
4. How to inspect, put on and remove, use, and check the seals of the respirator;
5. What the procedures are for maintenance and storage of the respirator;
6. How to recognize medical signs and symptoms that may limit or prevent the
effective use of respirators; and
7. The general requirements of this section.
 The training shall be conducted in a manner that is understandable to the employee.
 The employer shall provide the training prior to requiring the employee to use a respirator
in the workplace.
 An employer who is able to demonstrate that a new employee has received training
within the last 12 months that addresses the elements specified in 1-7 is not required to
repeat such training provided that the employee can demonstrate knowledge of those
66 of 100 66
element(s). Previous training not repeated initially by the employer must be provided no
later than 12 months from the date of the previous training.
 Retraining shall be administered annually, and when the following situations occur:
o Changes in the workplace or the type of respirator render previous training
obsolete;
o Inadequacies in the employee's knowledge or use of the respirator indicate that
the employee has not retained the requisite understanding or skill; or
o Any other situation arises in which retraining appears necessary to ensure safe
respirator use.
 The basic advisory information on respirators, as presented in Appendix D of this section,
shall be provided by the employer in any written or oral format, to employees who wear
respirators when such use is not required by this section or by the employer.
Program evaluation
The employer shall conduct evaluations of the workplace as necessary to ensure that the
provisions of the current written program are being effectively implemented and that it continues
to be effective.
The employer shall regularly consult employees required to use respirators to assess the
employees' views on program effectiveness and to identify any problems. Any problems that are
identified during this assessment shall be corrected. Factors to be assessed include, but are not
limited to:
 Respirator fit (including the ability to use the respirator without interfering with effective
workplace performance);
 Appropriate respirator selection for the hazards to which the employee is exposed;
 Proper respirator use under the workplace conditions the employee encounters; and
 Proper respirator maintenance.
Record Keeping
Medical evaluations
Records of medical evaluations required by this section must be retained and made available.
Fit testing
The employer shall establish a record of the qualitative and quantitative fit tests administered to
an employee including:
 The name or identification of the employee tested;
 Type of fit test performed;
 Specific make, model, style, and size of respirator tested;
 Date of test; and
 The pass/fail results for QLFTs or the fit factor and strip chart recording or other
recording of the test results for QNFTs.
Fit test records shall be retained for respirator users until the next fit test is administered.
A written copy of the current respirator program shall be retained by the employer.
67 of 100 67
User Seal Check Procedures
The individual who uses a tight-fitting respirator is to perform a user seal check to ensure that an
adequate seal is achieved each time the respirator is put on. Either the positive and negative
pressure checks listed in this appendix, or the respirator manufacturer's recommended user seal
check method shall be used. User seal checks are not substitutes for qualitative or quantitative fit
tests.
I. Facepiece Positive and/or Negative Pressure Checks
A. Positive pressure check. Close off the exhalation valve and exhale gently into the facepiece.
The face fit is considered satisfactory if a slight positive pressure can be built up inside the
facepiece without any evidence of outward leakage of air at the seal. For most respirators this
method of leak testing requires the wearer to first remove the exhalation valve cover before
closing off the exhalation valve and then carefully replacing it after the test.
B. Negative pressure check. Close off the inlet opening of the canister or cartridge(s) by covering
with the palm of the hand(s) or by replacing the filter seal(s), inhale gently so that the facepiece
collapses slightly, and hold the breath for ten seconds. The design of the inlet opening of some
cartridges cannot be effectively covered with the palm of the hand. The test can be performed by
covering the inlet opening of the cartridge with a thin latex or nitrile glove. If the facepiece
remains in its slightly collapsed condition and no inward leakage of air is detected, the tightness
of the respirator is considered satisfactory.
II. Manufacturer's Recommended User Seal Check Procedures
The respirator manufacturer's recommended procedures for performing a user seal check may be
used instead of the positive and/or negative pressure check procedures provided that the
employer demonstrates that the manufacturer's procedures are equally effective.
68 of 100 68
Respirator Cleaning Procedures
I. Procedures for Cleaning Respirators
A. Remove filters, cartridges, or canisters. Disassemble facepieces by removing speaking

diaphragms, demand and pressure- demand valve assemblies, hoses, or any components
recommended by the manufacturer. Discard or repair any defective parts.
B. Wash components in warm (43 deg. C [110 deg. F] maximum) water with a mild detergent or
with a cleaner recommended by the manufacturer. A stiff bristle (not wire) brush may be used to
facilitate the removal of dirt.
C. Rinse components thoroughly in clean, warm (43 deg. C [110 deg. F] maximum), preferably
running water. Drain.
D. When the cleaner used does not contain a disinfecting agent, respirator components should be
immersed for two minutes in one of the following:
1. Hypochlorite solution (50 ppm of chlorine) made by adding approximately one milliliter of
laundry bleach to one liter of water at 43 deg. C (110 deg. F); or,
2. Aqueous solution of iodine (50 ppm iodine) made by adding approximately 0.8 milliliters of
tincture of iodine (6-8 grams ammonium and/or potassium iodide/100 cc of 45% alcohol) to one
liter of water at 43 deg. C (110 deg. F); or,
3. Other commercially available cleansers of equivalent disinfectant quality when used as

directed, if their use is recommended or approved by the respirator manufacturer.
E. Rinse components thoroughly in clean, warm (43 deg. C [110 deg. F] maximum), preferably
running water. Drain. The importance of thorough rinsing cannot be overemphasized. Detergents
or disinfectants that dry on facepieces may result in dermatitis. In addition, some disinfectants
may cause deterioration of rubber or corrosion of metal parts if not completely removed.
F. Components should be hand-dried with a clean lint-free cloth or air-dried.
G. Reassemble facepiece, replacing filters, cartridges, and canisters where necessary.
H. Test the respirator to ensure that all components work properly.
69 of 100 69
Respirator Medical Evaluation Questionnaire
Answers to questions in Section 1, and to question 9 in Section 2 of Part A, do not require a

medical examination.
To the employee:
Can you read (circle one): Yes/No
Your employer must allow you to answer this questionnaire during normal working hours, or at a
time and place that is convenient to you. To maintain your confidentiality, your employer or
supervisor must not look at or review your answers, and your employer must tell you how to
deliver or send this questionnaire to the health care professional who will review it.
Part A. Section 1. (Mandatory) The following information must be provided by every employee
who has been selected to use any type of respirator (please print).
1. Today's date:_______________________________________________________
2. Your name:__________________________________________________________
3. Your age (to nearest year):_________________________________________
4. Sex (circle one): Male/Female
5. Your height: __________ ft. __________ in.
6. Your weight: ____________ lbs.
7. Your job title:_____________________________________________________
8. A phone number where you can be reached by the health care professional who reviews this
questionnaire (include the Area Code): ____________________
9. The best time to phone you at this number: ________________
10. Has your employer told you how to contact the health care professional who will review this
questionnaire (circle one): Yes/No
11. Check the type of respirator you will use (you can check more than one category):
a. ______ N, R, or P disposable respirator (filter-mask, non- cartridge type only).
b. ______ Other type (for example, half- or full-facepiece type, powered-air purifying, supplied-
air, self-contained breathing apparatus).
12. Have you worn a respirator (circle one): Yes/No
If "yes," what type(s):______________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________
70 of 100 70
Part A. Section 2. (Mandatory) Questions 1 through 9 below must be answered by every
employee who has been selected to use any type of respirator (please circle "yes" or "no").
1. Do you currently smoke tobacco, or have you smoked tobacco in the last month: Yes/No
2. Have you ever had any of the following conditions?
a. Seizures (fits): Yes/No

b. Diabetes (sugar disease): Yes/No
c. Allergic reactions that interfere with your breathing: Yes/No
d. Claustrophobia (fear of closed-in places): Yes/No
e. Trouble smelling odors: Yes/No
3. Have you ever had any of the following pulmonary or lung problems?
a. Asbestosis: Yes/No
b. Asthma: Yes/No
c. Chronic bronchitis: Yes/No
d. Emphysema: Yes/No
e. Pneumonia: Yes/No
f. Tuberculosis: Yes/No
g. Silicosis: Yes/No
h. Pneumothorax (collapsed lung): Yes/No
i. Lung cancer: Yes/No
j. Broken ribs: Yes/No
k. Any chest injuries or surgeries: Yes/No
l. Any other lung problem that you've been told about: Yes/No
4. Do you currently have any of the following symptoms of pulmonary or lung illness?
a. Shortness of breath: Yes/No

b. Shortness of breath when walking fast on level ground or walking up a slight hill or
incline: Yes/No
c. Shortness of breath when walking with other people at an ordinary pace on level ground:
Yes/No
d. Have to stop for breath when walking at your own pace on level ground: Yes/No
e. Shortness of breath when washing or dressing yourself: Yes/No
f. Shortness of breath that interferes with your job: Yes/No
g. Coughing that produces phlegm (thick sputum): Yes/No
h. Coughing that wakes you early in the morning: Yes/No
i. Coughing that occurs mostly when you are lying down: Yes/No
j. Coughing up blood in the last month: Yes/No
k. Wheezing: Yes/No
l. Wheezing that interferes with your job: Yes/No
m. Chest pain when you breathe deeply: Yes/No
n. Any other symptoms that you think may be related to lung problems: Yes/No
5. Have you ever had any of the following cardiovascular or heart problems?
71 of 100 71
a. Heart attack: Yes/No
b. Stroke: Yes/No
c. Angina: Yes/No
d. Heart failure: Yes/No
e. Swelling in your legs or feet (not caused by walking): Yes/No
f. Heart arrhythmia (heart beating irregularly): Yes/No
g. High blood pressure: Yes/No
h. Any other heart problem that you've been told about: Yes/No
6. Have you ever had any of the following cardiovascular or heart symptoms?
a. Frequent pain or tightness in your chest: Yes/No

b. Pain or tightness in your chest during physical activity: Yes/No
c. Pain or tightness in your chest that interferes with your job: Yes/No
d. In the past two years, have you noticed your heart skipping or missing a beat: Yes/No
e. Heartburn or indigestion that is not related to eating: Yes/ No
f. Any other symptoms that you think may be related to heart or circulation problems:
Yes/No
7. Do you currently take medication for any of the following problems?
a. Breathing or lung problems: Yes/No

b. Heart trouble: Yes/No
c. Blood pressure: Yes/No
d. Seizures (fits): Yes/No
8. If you've used a respirator, have you ever had any of the following problems? (If you've never
used a respirator, check the following space and go to question 9:)
a. Eye irritation: Yes/No

b. Skin allergies or rashes: Yes/No
c. Anxiety: Yes/No
d. General weakness or fatigue: Yes/No
e. Any other problem that interferes with your use of a respirator: Yes/No
9. Would you like to talk to the health care professional who will review this questionnaire about
your answers to this questionnaire: Yes/No
Questions 10 to 15 below must be answered by every employee who has been selected to use
either a full-facepiece respirator or a self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA). For employees
who have been selected to use other types of respirators, answering these questions is voluntary.
10. Have you ever lost vision in either eye (temporarily or permanently): Yes/No
11. Do you currently have any of the following vision problems?
a. Wear contact lenses: Yes/No
72 of 100 72
b. Wear glasses: Yes/No
c. Color blind: Yes/No
d. Any other eye or vision problem: Yes/No
12. Have you ever had an injury to your ears, including a broken ear drum: Yes/No
13. Do you currently have any of the following hearing problems?
a. Difficulty hearing: Yes/No

b. Wear a hearing aid: Yes/No
c. Any other hearing or ear problem: Yes/No
14. Have you ever had a back injury: Yes/No
15. Do you currently have any of the following musculoskeletal problems?
a. Weakness in any of your arms, hands, legs, or feet: Yes/No

b. Back pain: Yes/No
c. Difficulty fully moving your arms and legs: Yes/No
d. Pain or stiffness when you lean forward or backward at the waist: Yes/No
e. Difficulty fully moving your head up or down: Yes/No
f. Difficulty fully moving your head side to side: Yes/No
g. Difficulty bending at your knees: Yes/No
h. Difficulty squatting to the ground: Yes/No
i. Climbing a flight of stairs or a ladder carrying more than 25 lbs: Yes/No
j. Any other muscle or skeletal problem that interferes with using a respirator: Yes/No
Part B Any of the following questions, and other questions not listed, may be added to the
questionnaire at the discretion of the health care professional who will review the questionnaire.
1. In your present job, are you working at high altitudes (over 5,000 feet) or in a place that has
lower than normal amounts of oxygen: Yes/No
If "yes," do you have feelings of dizziness, shortness of breath, pounding in your chest, or other
symptoms when you're working under these conditions: Yes/No
2. At work or at home, have you ever been exposed to hazardous solvents, hazardous airborne
chemicals (e.g., gases, fumes, or dust), or have you come into skin contact with hazardous
chemicals: Yes/No
If "yes," name the chemicals if you know them:_________________________

_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
3. Have you ever worked with any of the materials, or under any of the conditions, listed below:
a. Asbestos: Yes/No
b. Silica (e.g., in sandblasting): Yes/No
c. Tungsten/cobalt (e.g., grinding or welding this material): Yes/No
73 of 100 73
d. Beryllium: Yes/No
e. Aluminum: Yes/No
f. Coal (for example, mining): Yes/No
g. Iron: Yes/No
h. Tin: Yes/No
i. Dusty environments: Yes/No
j. Any other hazardous exposures: Yes/No
If "yes," describe these exposures:____________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
4. List any second jobs or side businesses you have:___________________

_______________________________________________________________________
5. List your previous occupations:_____________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________
6. List your current and previous hobbies:________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________
7. Have you been in the military services? Yes/No
If "yes," were you exposed to biological or chemical agents (either in training or combat):
Yes/No
8. Have you ever worked on a HAZMAT team? Yes/No
9. Other than medications for breathing and lung problems, heart trouble, blood pressure, and
seizures mentioned earlier in this questionnaire, are you taking any other medications for any
reason (including over-the-counter medications): Yes/No
If "yes," name the medications if you know them:_______________________
10. Will you be using any of the following items with your respirator(s)?
a. HEPA Filters: Yes/No

b. Canisters (for example, gas masks): Yes/No
c. Cartridges: Yes/No
11. How often are you expected to use the respirator(s) (circle "yes" or "no" for all answers that
apply to you)?:
a. Escape only (no rescue): Yes/No

b. Emergency rescue only: Yes/No
c. Less than 5 hours per week: Yes/No
d. Less than 2 hours per day: Yes/No
e. 2 to 4 hours per day: Yes/No
f. Over 4 hours per day: Yes/No
74 of 100 74
12. During the period you are using the respirator(s), is your work effort:
a. Light (less than 200 kcal per hour): Yes/No
shift:____________hrs.____________mins.
Examples of a light work effort are sitting while writing, typing, drafting, or performing light
assembly work; or standing while operating a drill press (1-3 lbs.) or controlling machines.
b. Moderate (200 to 350 kcal per hour): Yes/No
shift:____________hrs.____________mins.
Examples of moderate work effort are sitting while nailing or filing; driving a truck or bus in
urban traffic; standing while drilling, nailing, performing assembly work, or transferring a
moderate load (about 35 lbs.) at trunk level; walking on a level surface about 2 mph or down a
5-degree grade about 3 mph; or pushing a wheelbarrow with a heavy load (about 100 lbs.) on a
level surface.
c. Heavy (above 350 kcal per hour): Yes/No
shift:____________hrs.____________mins.
Examples of heavy work are lifting a heavy load (about 50 lbs.) from the floor to your waist or
shoulder; working on a loading dock; shoveling; standing while bricklaying or chipping
castings; walking up an 8-degree grade about 2 mph; climbing stairs with a heavy load (about 50
lbs.).
13. Will you be wearing protective clothing and/or equipment (other than the respirator) when
you're using your respirator: Yes/No
If "yes," describe this protective clothing and/or equipment:__________

_______________________________________________________________________
14. Will you be working under hot conditions (temperature exceeding 77 deg. F): Yes/No
15. Will you be working under humid conditions: Yes/No
16. Describe the work you'll be doing while you're using your respirator(s):
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
17. Describe any special or hazardous conditions you might encounter when you're using your
respirator(s) (for example, confined spaces, life-threatening gases):
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
75 of 100 75
18. Provide the following information, if you know it, for each toxic substance that you'll be
exposed to when you're using your respirator(s):
Name of the first toxic substance:___________________________________________

Estimated maximum exposure level per shift:__________________________________
Duration of exposure per shift:______________________________________________
Name of the second toxic substance:__________________________________________
Name of the third toxic substance:___________________________________________
The name of any other toxic substances that you'll be exposed to
while using your respirator:
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
19. Describe any special responsibilities you'll have while using your respirator(s) that may
affect the safety and well-being of others (for example, rescue, security):
_____________________________________________________________________________
76 of 100 76
Respiratory Protection Program Definitions
The following definitions are important terms used in the respiratory protection standard in this
section.
Air-purifying respirator means a respirator with an air-purifying filter, cartridge, or canister

that removes specific air contaminants by passing ambient air through the air-purifying element.
Assigned protection factor (APF) [Reserved]
Atmosphere-supplying respirator means a respirator that supplies the respirator user with
breathing air from a source independent of the ambient atmosphere, and includes supplied-air
respirators (SARs) and self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) units.
Canister or cartridge means a container with a filter, sorbent, or catalyst, or combination of

these items, which removes specific contaminants from the air passed through the container.
Demand respirator means an atmosphere-supplying respirator that admits breathing air to the
facepiece only when a negative pressure is created inside the facepiece by inhalation.
Emergency situation means any occurrence such as, but not limited to, equipment failure,
rupture of containers, or failure of control equipment that may or does result in an uncontrolled
significant release of an airborne contaminant.
Employee exposure means exposure to a concentration of an airborne contaminant that would

occur if the employee were not using respiratory protection.
End-of-service-life indicator (ESLI) means a system that warns the respirator user of the
approach of the end of adequate respiratory protection, for example, that the sorbent is
approaching saturation or is no longer effective.
Escape-only respirator means a respirator intended to be used only for emergency exit.
Filter or air purifying element means a component used in respirators to remove solid or liquid
aerosols from the inspired air.
Filtering facepiece (dust mask) means a negative pressure particulate respirator with a filter as
an integral part of the facepiece or with the entire facepiece composed of the filtering medium.
Fit factor means a quantitative estimate of the fit of a particular respirator to a specific
individual, and typically estimates the ratio of the concentration of a substance in ambient air to
its concentration inside the respirator when worn.
Fit test means the use of a protocol to qualitatively or quantitatively evaluate the fit of a
respirator on an individual. (See also Qualitative fit test QLFT and Quantitative fit test QNFT.)
Helmet means a rigid respiratory inlet covering that also provides head protection against impact
and penetration.
High efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter means a filter that is at least 99.97% efficient in
77 of 100 77
removing monodisperse particles of 0.3 micrometers in diameter. The equivalent NIOSH 42
CFR 84 particulate filters are the N100, R100, and P100 filters.
Hood means a respiratory inlet covering that completely covers the head and neck and may also
cover portions of the shoulders and torso.
Immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) means an atmosphere that poses an

immediate threat to life, would cause irreversible adverse health effects, or would impair an
individual's ability to escape from a dangerous atmosphere.
Interior structural firefighting means the physical activity of fire suppression, rescue or both,
inside of buildings or enclosed structures which are involved in a fire situation beyond the
incipient stage. (See 29 CFR 1910.155)
Loose-fitting facepiece means a respiratory inlet covering that is designed to form a partial seal
with the face.
Maximum use concentration (MUC) [Reserved].
Negative pressure respirator (tight fitting) means a respirator in which the air pressure inside
the facepiece is negative during inhalation with respect to the ambient air pressure outside the
respirator.
Oxygen deficient atmosphere means an atmosphere with an oxygen content below 19.5% by
volume.
Physician or other licensed health care professional (PLHCP) means an individual whose
legally permitted scope of practice (i.e., license, registration, or certification) allows him or her
to independently provide, or be delegated the responsibility to provide, some or all of the health
care services required by paragraph (e) of this section.
Positive pressure respirator means a respirator in which the pressure inside the respiratory inlet
covering exceeds the ambient air pressure outside the respirator.
Powered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) means an air-purifying respirator that uses a blower
to force the ambient air through air-purifying elements to the inlet covering.
Pressure demand respirator means a positive pressure atmosphere-supplying respirator that

admits breathing air to the facepiece when the positive pressure is reduced inside the facepiece
by inhalation.
Qualitative fit test (QLFT) means a pass/fail fit test to assess the adequacy of respirator fit that
relies on the individual's response to the test agent.
Quantitative fit test (QNFT) means an assessment of the adequacy of respirator fit by
numerically measuring the amount of leakage into the respirator.
Respiratory inlet covering means that portion of a respirator that forms the protective barrier
between the user's respiratory tract and an air-purifying device or breathing air source, or both. It
may be a facepiece, helmet, hood, suit, or a mouthpiece respirator with nose clamp.
78 of 100 78
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) means an atmosphere-supplying respirator for
which the breathing air source is designed to be carried by the user.
Service life means the period of time that a respirator, filter or sorbent, or other respiratory
equipment provides adequate protection to the wearer.
Supplied-air respirator (SAR) or airline respirator means an atmosphere-supplying respirator

for which the source of breathing air is not designed to be carried by the user.
This section means this respiratory protection standard.
Tight-fitting facepiece means a respiratory inlet covering that forms a complete seal with the
face.
User seal check means an action conducted by the respirator user to determine if the respirator is
properly seated to the face.
79 of 100 79
OSHA-Accepted Fit Test Protocols
A. Fit Testing Procedures -- General Requirements
The employer shall conduct fit testing using the following procedures. The requirements in this
appendix apply to all OSHA-accepted fit test methods, both QLFT and QNFT.
1. The test subject shall be allowed to pick the most acceptable respirator from a sufficient
number of respirator models and sizes so that the respirator is acceptable to, and correctly fits,
the user.
2. Prior to the selection process, the test subject shall be shown how to put on a respirator, how it
should be positioned on the face, how to set strap tension and how to determine an acceptable fit.
A mirror shall be available to assist the subject in evaluating the fit and positioning of the
respirator. This instruction may not constitute the subject's formal training on respirator use,
because it is only a review.
3. The test subject shall be informed that he/she is being asked to select the respirator that
provides the most acceptable fit. Each respirator represents a different size and shape, and if
fitted and used properly, will provide adequate protection.
4. The test subject shall be instructed to hold each chosen facepiece up to the face and eliminate
those that obviously do not give an acceptable fit.
5. The more acceptable facepieces are noted in case the one selected proves unacceptable; the
most comfortable mask is donned and worn at least five minutes to assess comfort. Assistance in
assessing comfort can be given by discussing the points in the following item A.6. If the test
subject is not familiar with using a particular respirator, the test subject shall be directed to don
the mask several times and to adjust the straps each time to become adept at setting proper
tension on the straps.
6. Assessment of comfort shall include a review of the following points with the test subject and
allowing the test subject adequate time to determine the comfort of the respirator:
(a) Position of the mask on the nose
(b) Room for eye protection
(c) Room to talk
(d) Position of mask on face and cheeks

7. The following criteria shall be used to help determine the adequacy of the respirator fit:
(a) Chin properly placed;
(b) Adequate strap tension, not overly tightened;
(c) Fit across nose bridge;
(d) Respirator of proper size to span distance from nose to chin;
(e) Tendency of respirator to slip;

80 of 100 80
(f) Self-observation in mirror to evaluate fit and respirator position.
8. The test subject shall conduct a user seal check, either the negative and positive pressure seal
checks described in Appendix B-1 of this section or those recommended by the respirator
manufacturer which provide equivalent protection to the procedures in Appendix B-1. Before
conducting the negative and positive pressure checks, the subject shall be told to seat the mask
on the face by moving the head from side-to-side and up and down slowly while taking in a few
slow deep breaths. Another facepiece shall be selected and retested if the test subject fails the
user seal check tests.
9. The test shall not be conducted if there is any hair growth between the skin and the facepiece
sealing surface, such as stubble beard growth, beard, mustache or sideburns which cross the
respirator sealing surface. Any type of apparel which interferes with a satisfactory fit shall be
altered or removed.
10. If a test subject exhibits difficulty in breathing during the tests, she or he shall be referred to a
physician or other licensed health care professional, as appropriate, to determine whether the test
subject can wear a respirator while performing her or his duties.
11. If the employee finds the fit of the respirator unacceptable, the test subject shall be given the
opportunity to select a different respirator and to be retested.
12. Exercise regimen. Prior to the commencement of the fit test, the test subject shall be given a
description of the fit test and the test subject's responsibilities during the test procedure. The
description of the process shall include a description of the test exercises that the subject will be
performing. The respirator to be tested shall be worn for at least 5 minutes before the start of the
fit test.
13. The fit test shall be performed while the test subject is wearing any applicable safety
equipment that may be worn during actual respirator use which could interfere with respirator fit.
14. Test Exercises.

(a) Employers must perform the following test exercises for all fit testing methods prescribed in
this appendix, except for the CNP quantitative fit testing protocol and the CNP REDON
quantitative fit testing protocol. For these two protocols, employers must ensure that the test
subjects (i.e., employees) perform the exercise procedure specified in Part I.C.4(b) of this
appendix for the CNP quantitative fit testing protocol, or the exercise procedure described in Part
I.C.5(b) of this appendix for the CNP REDON quantitative fit-testing protocol. For the remaining
fit testing methods, employers must ensure that employees perform the test exercises in the
appropriate test environment in the following manner:
(1) Normal breathing. In a normal standing position, without talking, the subject shall breathe
normally.
(2) Deep breathing. In a normal standing position, the subject shall breathe slowly and deeply,
taking caution so as not to hyperventilate.
(3) Turning head side to side. Standing in place, the subject shall slowly turn his/her head from
side to side between the extreme positions on each side. The head shall be held at each extreme
momentarily so the subject can inhale at each side.
81 of 100 81
(4) Moving head up and down. Standing in place, the subject shall slowly move his/her head up
and down. The subject shall be instructed to inhale in the up position (i.e., when looking toward
the ceiling).
(5) Talking. The subject shall talk out loud slowly and loud enough so as to be heard clearly by
the test conductor. The subject can read from a prepared text such as the Rainbow Passage, count
backward from 100, or recite a memorized poem or song.
Rainbow Passage
When the sunlight strikes raindrops in the air, they act like a prism and form a rainbow. The
rainbow is a division of white light into many beautiful colors. These take the shape of a long
round arch, with its path high above, and its two ends apparently beyond the horizon. There is,
according to legend, a boiling pot of gold at one end. People look, but no one ever finds it. When
a man looks for something beyond reach, his friends say he is looking for the pot of gold at the
end of the rainbow.
(6) Grimace. The test subject shall grimace by smiling or frowning. (This applies only to QNFT
testing; it is not performed for QLFT)
(7) Bending over. The test subject shall bend at the waist as if he/she were to touch his/her toes.
Jogging in place shall be substituted for this exercise in those test environments such as shroud
type QNFT or QLFT units that do not permit bending over at the waist.
(8) Normal breathing. Same as exercise (1).

(b) Each test exercise shall be performed for one minute except for the grimace exercise which
shall be performed for 15 seconds. The test subject shall be questioned by the test conductor
regarding the comfort of the respirator upon completion of the protocol. If it has become
unacceptable, another model of respirator shall be tried. The respirator shall not be adjusted once
the fit test exercises begin. Any adjustment voids the test, and the fit test must be repeated.
B. Qualitative Fit Test (QLFT) Protocols
1. General
(a) The employer shall ensure that persons administering QLFT are able to prepare test solutions,
calibrate equipment and perform tests properly, recognize invalid tests, and ensure that test
equipment is in proper working order.
(b) The employer shall ensure that QLFT equipment is kept clean and well maintained so as to
operate within the parameters for which it was designed.
2. Isoamyl Acetate Protocol
Note: This protocol is not appropriate to use for the fit testing of particulate respirators. If used
to fit test particulate respirators, the respirator must be equipped with an organic vapor filter.
(a) Odor Threshold Screening
Odor threshold screening, performed without wearing a respirator, is intended to determine if the
individual tested can detect the odor of isoamyl acetate at low levels.
(1) Three 1 liter glass jars with metal lids are required.
(2) Odor-free water (e.g., distilled or spring water) at approximately 25 deg. C (77 deg. F) shall
82 of 100 82
be used for the solutions.
(3) The isoamyl acetate (IAA) (also known at isopentyl acetate) stock solution is prepared by
adding 1 ml of pure IAA to 800 ml of odor-free water in a 1 liter jar, closing the lid and shaking
for 30 seconds. A new solution shall be prepared at least weekly.
(4) The screening test shall be conducted in a room separate from the room used for actual fit
testing. The two rooms shall be well-ventilated to prevent the odor of IAA from becoming
evident in the general room air where testing takes place.
(5) The odor test solution is prepared in a second jar by placing 0.4 ml of the stock solution into
500 ml of odor-free water using a clean dropper or pipette. The solution shall be shaken for 30
seconds and allowed to stand for two to three minutes so that the IAA concentration above the
liquid may reach equilibrium. This solution shall be used for only one day.
(6) A test blank shall be prepared in a third jar by adding 500 cc of odor-free water.
(7) The odor test and test blank jar lids shall be labeled (e.g., 1 and 2) for jar identification.
Labels shall be placed on the lids so that they can be peeled off periodically and switched to
maintain the integrity of the test.
(8) The following instruction shall be typed on a card and placed on the table in front of the two
test jars (i.e., 1 and 2): "The purpose of this test is to determine if you can smell banana oil at a
low concentration. The two bottles in front of you contain water. One of these bottles also
contains a small amount of banana oil. Be sure the covers are on tight, then shake each bottle for
two seconds. Unscrew the lid of each bottle, one at a time, and sniff at the mouth of the bottle.
Indicate to the test conductor which bottle contains banana oil."
(9) The mixtures used in the IAA odor detection test shall be prepared in an area separate from
where the test is performed, in order to prevent olfactory fatigue in the subject.
(10) If the test subject is unable to correctly identify the jar containing the odor test solution, the
IAA qualitative fit test shall not be performed.
(11) If the test subject correctly identifies the jar containing the odor test solution, the test subject
may proceed to respirator selection and fit testing.
(b) Isoamyl Acetate Fit Test
(1) The fit test chamber shall be a clear 55-gallon drum liner suspended inverted over a 2-foot
diameter frame so that the top of the chamber is about 6 inches above the test subject's head. If
no drum liner is available, a similar chamber shall be constructed using plastic sheeting. The
inside top center of the chamber shall have a small hook attached.
(2) Each respirator used for the fitting and fit testing shall be equipped with organic vapor
cartridges or offer protection against organic vapors.
(3) After selecting, donning, and properly adjusting a respirator, the test subject shall wear it to
the fit testing room. This room shall be separate from the room used for odor threshold screening
and respirator selection, and shall be well-ventilated, as by an exhaust fan or lab hood, to prevent
general room contamination.
83 of 100 83
(4) A copy of the test exercises and any prepared text from which the subject is to read shall be
taped to the inside of the test chamber.
(5) Upon entering the test chamber, the test subject shall be given a 6-inch by 5-inch piece of
paper towel, or other porous, absorbent, single-ply material, folded in half and wetted with 0.75
ml of pure IAA. The test subject shall hang the wet towel on the hook at the top of the chamber.
An IAA test swab or ampule may be substituted for the IAA wetted paper towel provided it has
been demonstrated that the alternative IAA source will generate an IAA test atmosphere with a
concentration equivalent to that generated by the paper towel method.
(6) Allow two minutes for the IAA test concentration to stabilize before starting the fit test
exercises. This would be an appropriate time to talk with the test subject; to explain the fit test,
the importance of his/her cooperation, and the purpose for the test exercises; or to demonstrate
some of the exercises.
(7) If at any time during the test, the subject detects the banana-like odor of IAA, the test is
failed. The subject shall quickly exit from the test chamber and leave the test area to avoid
olfactory fatigue.
(8) If the test is failed, the subject shall return to the selection room and remove the respirator.
The test subject shall repeat the odor sensitivity test, select and put on another respirator, return
to the test area and again begin the fit test procedure described in (b) (1) through (7) above. The
process continues until a respirator that fits well has been found. Should the odor sensitivity test
be failed, the subject shall wait at least 5 minutes before retesting. Odor sensitivity will usually
have returned by this time.
(9) If the subject passes the test, the efficiency of the test procedure shall be demonstrated by
having the subject break the respirator face seal and take a breath before exiting the chamber.
(10) When the test subject leaves the chamber, the subject shall remove the saturated towel and
return it to the person conducting the test, so that there is no significant IAA concentration
buildup in the chamber during subsequent tests. The used towels shall be kept in a self-sealing
plastic bag to keep the test area from being contaminated.
3. Saccharin Solution Aerosol Protocol
The entire screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the test subject prior to the
conduct of the screening test.
(a) Taste threshold screening. The saccharin taste threshold screening, performed without
wearing a respirator, is intended to determine whether the individual being tested can detect the
taste of saccharin.
(1) During threshold screening as well as during fit testing, subjects shall wear an enclosure
about the head and shoulders that is approximately 12 inches in diameter by 14 inches tall with at
least the front portion clear and that allows free movements of the head when a respirator is
worn. An enclosure substantially similar to the 3M hood assembly, parts # FT 14 and # FT 15
combined, is adequate.
(2) The test enclosure shall have a 3/4-inch (1.9 cm) hole in front of the test subject's nose and
mouth area to accommodate the nebulizer nozzle.
(3) The test subject shall don the test enclosure. Throughout the threshold screening test, the test
84 of 100 84
subject shall breathe through his/her slightly open mouth with tongue extended. The subject is
instructed to report when he/she detects a sweet taste.
(4) Using a DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation Medication Nebulizer or equivalent, the test
conductor shall spray the threshold check solution into the enclosure. The nozzle is directed
away from the nose and mouth of the person. This nebulizer shall be clearly marked to
distinguish it from the fit test solution nebulizer.
(5) The threshold check solution is prepared by dissolving 0.83 gram of sodium saccharin USP in
100 ml of warm water. It can be prepared by putting 1 ml of the fit test solution (see (b)(5)
below) in 100 ml of distilled water.
(6) To produce the aerosol, the nebulizer bulb is firmly squeezed so that it collapses completely,
then released and allowed to fully expand.
(7) Ten squeezes are repeated rapidly and then the test subject is asked whether the saccharin can
be tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the sweet taste during the ten squeezes, the screening
test is completed. The taste threshold is noted as ten regardless of the number of squeezes
actually completed.
(8) If the first response is negative, ten more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the test subject is
again asked whether the saccharin is tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the sweet taste
during the second ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. The taste threshold is noted as
twenty regardless of the number of squeezes actually completed.
(9) If the second response is negative, ten more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the test subject
is again asked whether the saccharin is tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the sweet taste
during the third set of ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. The taste threshold is noted
as thirty regardless of the number of squeezes actually completed.
(10) The test conductor will take note of the number of squeezes required to solicit a taste
response.
(11) If the saccharin is not tasted after 30 squeezes (step 10), the test subject is unable to taste
saccharin and may not perform the saccharin fit test.
Note to paragraph 3. (a): If the test subject eats or drinks something sweet before the screening
test, he/she may be unable to taste the weak saccharin solution.
(12) If a taste response is elicited, the test subject shall be asked to take note of the taste for
reference in the fit test.
(13) Correct use of the nebulizer means that approximately 1 ml of liquid is used at a time in the
nebulizer body.
(14) The nebulizer shall be thoroughly rinsed in water, shaken dry, and refilled at least each
morning and afternoon or at least every four hours.
(b) Saccharin solution aerosol fit test procedure.
(1) The test subject may not eat, drink (except plain water), smoke, or chew gum for 15 minutes
before the test.
85 of 100 85
(2) The fit test uses the same enclosure described in 3. (a) above.
(3) The test subject shall don the enclosure while wearing the respirator selected in section I. A.
of this appendix. The respirator shall be properly adjusted and equipped with a particulate
filter(s).
(4) A second DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation Medication Nebulizer or equivalent is used to spray
the fit test solution into the enclosure. This nebulizer shall be clearly marked to distinguish it
from the screening test solution nebulizer.
(5) The fit test solution is prepared by adding 83 grams of sodium saccharin to 100 ml of warm
water.
(6) As before, the test subject shall breathe through the slightly open mouth with tongue
extended, and report if he/she tastes the sweet taste of saccharin.
(7) The nebulizer is inserted into the hole in the front of the enclosure and an initial
concentration of saccharin fit test solution is sprayed into the enclosure using the same number
of squeezes (either 10, 20 or 30 squeezes) based on the number of squeezes required to elicit a
taste response as noted during the screening test. A minimum of 10 squeezes is required.
(8) After generating the aerosol, the test subject shall be instructed to perform the exercises in
section I. A. 14. of this appendix.
(9) Every 30 seconds the aerosol concentration shall be replenished using one half the original
number of squeezes used initially (e.g., 5, 10 or 15).
(10) The test subject shall indicate to the test conductor if at any time during the fit test the taste
of saccharin is detected. If the test subject does not report tasting the saccharin, the test is passed.
(11) If the taste of saccharin is detected, the fit is deemed unsatisfactory and the test is failed. A
different respirator shall be tried and the entire test procedure is repeated (taste threshold
screening and fit testing).
(12) Since the nebulizer has a tendency to clog during use, the test operator must make periodic
checks of the nebulizer to ensure that it is not clogged. If clogging is found at the end of the test
session, the test is invalid.
4. BitrexTM (Denatonium Benzoate) Solution Aerosol Qualitative Fit Test Protocol
The BitrexTM (Denatonium benzoate) solution aerosol QLFT protocol uses the published
saccharin test protocol because that protocol is widely accepted. Bitrex is routinely used as a
taste aversion agent in household liquids which children should not be drinking and is endorsed
by the American Medical Association, the National Safety Council, and the American
Association of Poison Control Centers. The entire screening and testing procedure shall be
explained to the test subject prior to the conduct of the screening test.
(a) Taste Threshold Screening.
The Bitrex taste threshold screening, performed without wearing a respirator, is intended to
determine whether the individual being tested can detect the taste of Bitrex.
86 of 100 86
(1) During threshold screening as well as during fit testing, subjects shall wear an enclosure
about the head and shoulders that is approximately 12 inches (30.5 cm) in diameter by 14 inches
(35.6 cm) tall. The front portion of the enclosure shall be clear from the respirator and allow free
movement of the head when a respirator is worn. An enclosure substantially similar to the 3M
hood assembly, parts # FT 14 and # FT 15 combined, is adequate.
(2) The test enclosure shall have a \3/4\ inch (1.9 cm) hole in front of the test subject's nose and
mouth area to accommodate the nebulizer nozzle.
(3) The test subject shall don the test enclosure. Throughout the threshold screening test, the test
subject shall breathe through his or her slightly open mouth with tongue extended. The subject is
instructed to report when he/she detects a bitter taste
(4) Using a DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation Medication Nebulizer or equivalent, the test
conductor shall spray the Threshold Check Solution into the enclosure. This Nebulizer shall be
clearly marked to distinguish it from the fit test solution nebulizer.
(5) The Threshold Check Solution is prepared by adding 13.5 milligrams of Bitrex to 100 ml of
5% salt (NaCl) solution in distilled water.
(6) To produce the aerosol, the nebulizer bulb is firmly squeezed so that the bulb collapses
completely, and is then released and allowed to fully expand.
(7) An initial ten squeezes are repeated rapidly and then the test subject is asked whether the
Bitrex can be tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the bitter taste during the ten squeezes, the
screening test is completed. The taste threshold is noted as ten regardless of the number of
squeezes actually completed.
(8) If the first response is negative, ten more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the test subject is
again asked whether the Bitrex is tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the bitter taste during
the second ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. The taste threshold is noted as twenty
regardless of the number of squeezes actually completed.
(9) If the second response is negative, ten more squeezes are repeated rapidly and the test subject
is again asked whether the Bitrex is tasted. If the test subject reports tasting the bitter taste during
the third set of ten squeezes, the screening test is completed. The taste threshold is noted as thirty
regardless of the number of squeezes actually completed.
(10) The test conductor will take note of the number of squeezes required to solicit a taste
response.
(11) If the Bitrex is not tasted after 30 squeezes (step 10), the test subject is unable to taste Bitrex
and may not perform the Bitrex fit test.
(12) If a taste response is elicited, the test subject shall be asked to take note of the taste for
reference in the fit test.
(13) Correct use of the nebulizer means that approximately 1 ml of liquid is used at a time in the
nebulizer body.
87 of 100 87
(14) The nebulizer shall be thoroughly rinsed in water, shaken to dry, and refilled at least each
morning and afternoon or at least every four hours.
(b) Bitrex Solution Aerosol Fit Test Procedure.
(1) The test subject may not eat, drink (except plain water), smoke, or chew gum for 15 minutes
before the test.
(2) The fit test uses the same enclosure as that described in 4. (a) above.
(3) The test subject shall don the enclosure while wearing the respirator selected according to
section I. A. of this appendix. The respirator shall be properly adjusted and equipped with any
type particulate filter(s).
(4) A second DeVilbiss Model 40 Inhalation Medication Nebulizer or equivalent is used to spray
the fit test solution into the enclosure. This nebulizer shall be clearly marked to distinguish it
from the screening test solution nebulizer.
(5) The fit test solution is prepared by adding 337.5 mg of Bitrex to 200 ml of a 5% salt (NaCl)
solution in warm water.
(6) As before, the test subject shall breathe through his or her slightly open mouth with tongue
extended, and be instructed to report if he/she tastes the bitter taste of Bitrex.
(7) The nebulizer is inserted into the hole in the front of the enclosure and an initial
concentration of the fit test solution is sprayed into the enclosure using the same number of
squeezes (either 10, 20 or 30 squeezes) based on the number of squeezes required to elicit a taste
response as noted during the screening test.
(8) After generating the aerosol, the test subject shall be instructed to perform the exercises in
section I. A. 14. of this appendix.
(9) Every 30 seconds the aerosol concentration shall be replenished using one half the number of
squeezes used initially (e.g., 5, 10 or 15).
(10) The test subject shall indicate to the test conductor if at any time during the fit test the taste
of Bitrex is detected. If the test subject does not report tasting the Bitrex, the test is passed.
(11) If the taste of Bitrex is detected, the fit is deemed unsatisfactory and the test is failed. A
different respirator shall be tried and the entire test procedure is repeated (taste threshold
screening and fit testing).
5. Irritant Smoke (Stannic Chloride) Protocol
This qualitative fit test uses a person's response to the irritating chemicals released in the
"smoke" produced by a stannic chloride ventilation smoke tube to detect leakage into the
respirator.
(a) General Requirements and Precautions
(1) The respirator to be tested shall be equipped with high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) or
P100 series filter(s).
(2) Only stannic chloride smoke tubes shall be used for this protocol.
88 of 100 88
(3) No form of test enclosure or hood for the test subject shall be used.
(4) The smoke can be irritating to the eyes, lungs, and nasal passages. The test conductor shall
take precautions to minimize the test subject's exposure to irritant smoke. Sensitivity varies, and
certain individuals may respond to a greater degree to irritant smoke. Care shall be taken when
performing the sensitivity screening checks that determine whether the test subject can detect
irritant smoke to use only the minimum amount of smoke necessary to elicit a response from the
test subject.
(5) The fit test shall be performed in an area with adequate ventilation to prevent exposure of the
person conducting the fit test or the build-up of irritant smoke in the general atmosphere.
(b) Sensitivity Screening Check
The person to be tested must demonstrate his or her ability to detect a weak concentration of the
irritant smoke.
(1) The test operator shall break both ends of a ventilation smoke tube containing stannic
chloride, and attach one end of the smoke tube to a low flow air pump set to deliver 200
milliliters per minute, or an aspirator squeeze bulb. The test operator shall cover the other end of
the smoke tube with a short piece of tubing to prevent potential injury from the jagged end of the
smoke tube.
(2) The test operator shall advise the test subject that the smoke can be irritating to the eyes,
lungs, and nasal passages and instruct the subject to keep his/her eyes closed while the test is
performed.
(3) The test subject shall be allowed to smell a weak concentration of the irritant smoke before
the respirator is donned to become familiar with its irritating properties and to determine if
he/she can detect the irritating properties of the smoke. The test operator shall carefully direct a
small amount of the irritant smoke in the test subject's direction to determine that he/she can
detect it.
(c) Irritant Smoke Fit Test Procedure
(1) The person being fit tested shall don the respirator without assistance, and perform the
required user seal check(s).
(2) The test subject shall be instructed to keep his/her eyes closed.
(3) The test operator shall direct the stream of irritant smoke from the smoke tube toward the
faceseal area of the test subject, using the low flow pump or the squeeze bulb. The test operator
shall begin at least 12 inches from the facepiece and move the smoke stream around the whole
perimeter of the mask. The operator shall gradually make two more passes around the perimeter
of the mask, moving to within six inches of the respirator.
(4) If the person being tested has not had an involuntary response and/or detected the irritant
smoke, proceed with the test exercises.
(5) The exercises identified in section I.A. 14. of this appendix shall be performed by the test
subject while the respirator seal is being continually challenged by the smoke, directed around
the perimeter of the respirator at a distance of six inches.
(6) If the person being fit tested reports detecting the irritant smoke at any time, the test is failed.
89 of 100 89
The person being retested must repeat the entire sensitivity check and fit test procedure.
(7) Each test subject passing the irritant smoke test without evidence of a response (involuntary
cough, irritation) shall be given a second sensitivity screening check, with the smoke from the
same smoke tube used during the fit test, once the respirator has been removed, to determine
whether he/she still reacts to the smoke. Failure to evoke a response shall void the fit test.
(8) If a response is produced during this second sensitivity check, then the fit test is passed.
C. Quantitative Fit Test (QNFT) Protocols
The following quantitative fit testing procedures have been demonstrated to be acceptable:
Quantitative fit testing using a non-hazardous test aerosol (such as corn oil, polyethylene glycol
400 [PEG 400], di-2-ethyl hexyl sebacate [DEHS], or sodium chloride) generated in a test
chamber, and employing instrumentation to quantify the fit of the respirator; Quantitative fit
testing using ambient aerosol as the test agent and appropriate instrumentation (condensation
nuclei counter) to quantify the respirator fit; Quantitative fit testing using controlled negative
pressure and appropriate instrumentation to measure the volumetric leak rate of a facepiece to
quantify the respirator fit.
1. General
(a) The employer shall ensure that persons administering QNFT are able to calibrate equipment
and perform tests properly, recognize invalid tests, calculate fit factors properly and ensure that
test equipment is in proper working order.
(b) The employer shall ensure that QNFT equipment is kept clean, and is maintained and
calibrated according to the manufacturer's instructions so as to operate at the parameters for
which it was designed.
2. Generated Aerosol Quantitative Fit Testing Protocol
(a) Apparatus.
(1) Instrumentation. Aerosol generation, dilution, and measurement systems using particulates
(corn oil, polyethylene glycol 400 [PEG 400], di-2-ethyl hexyl sebacate [DEHS] or sodium
chloride) as test aerosols shall be used for quantitative fit testing.
(2) Test chamber. The test chamber shall be large enough to permit all test subjects to perform
freely all required exercises without disturbing the test agent concentration or the measurement
apparatus. The test chamber shall be equipped and constructed so that the test agent is effectively
isolated from the ambient air, yet uniform in concentration throughout the chamber.
(3) When testing air-purifying respirators, the normal filter or cartridge element shall be replaced
with a high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) or P100 series filter supplied by the same
manufacturer.
(4) The sampling instrument shall be selected so that a computer record or strip chart record may
be made of the test showing the rise and fall of the test agent concentration with each inspiration
and expiration at fit factors of at least 2,000. Integrators or computers that integrate the amount
of test agent penetration leakage into the respirator for each exercise may be used provided a
record of the readings is made.
(5) The combination of substitute air-purifying elements, test agent and test agent concentration
shall be such that the test subject is not exposed in excess of an established exposure limit for the
90 of 100 90
test agent at any time during the testing process, based upon the length of the exposure and the
exposure limit duration.
(6) The sampling port on the test specimen respirator shall be placed and constructed so that no
leakage occurs around the port (e.g., where the respirator is probed), a free air flow is allowed
into the sampling line at all times, and there is no interference with the fit or performance of the
respirator. The in-mask sampling device (probe) shall be designed and used so that the air sample
is drawn from the breathing zone of the test subject, midway between the nose and mouth and
with the probe extending into the facepiece cavity at least 1/4 inch.
(7) The test setup shall permit the person administering the test to observe the test subject inside
the chamber during the test.
(8) The equipment generating the test atmosphere shall maintain the concentration of test agent
constant to within a 10 percent variation for the duration of the test.
(9) The time lag (interval between an event and the recording of the event on the strip chart or
computer or integrator) shall be kept to a minimum. There shall be a clear association between
the occurrence of an event and its being recorded.
(10) The sampling line tubing for the test chamber atmosphere and for the respirator sampling
port shall be of equal diameter and of the same material. The length of the two lines shall be
equal.
(11) The exhaust flow from the test chamber shall pass through an appropriate filter (i.e., high
efficiency particulate filter) before release.
(12) When sodium chloride aerosol is used, the relative humidity inside the test chamber shall
not exceed 50 percent.
(13) The limitations of instrument detection shall be taken into account when determining the fit
factor.
(14) Test respirators shall be maintained in proper working order and be inspected regularly for
deficiencies such as cracks or missing valves and gaskets.
(b) Procedural Requirements.
(1) When performing the initial user seal check using a positive or negative pressure check, the
sampling line shall be crimped closed in order to avoid air pressure leakage during either of these
pressure checks.
(2) The use of an abbreviated screening QLFT test is optional. Such a test may be utilized in
order to quickly identify poor fitting respirators that passed the positive and/or negative pressure
test and reduce the amount of QNFT time. The use of the CNC QNFT instrument in the count
mode is another optional method to obtain a quick estimate of fit and eliminate poor fitting
respirators before going on to perform a full QNFT.
(3) A reasonably stable test agent concentration shall be measured in the test chamber prior to
testing. For canopy or shower curtain types of test units, the determination of the test agent's
stability may be established after the test subject has entered the test environment.
91 of 100 91
(4) Immediately after the subject enters the test chamber, the test agent concentration inside the
respirator shall be measured to ensure that the peak penetration does not exceed 5 percent for a
half mask or 1 percent for a full facepiece respirator.
(5) A stable test agent concentration shall be obtained prior to the actual start of testing.
(6) Respirator restraining straps shall not be over-tightened for testing. The straps shall be
adjusted by the wearer without assistance from other persons to give a reasonably comfortable fit
typical of normal use. The respirator shall not be adjusted once the fit test exercises begin.
(7) The test shall be terminated whenever any single peak penetration exceeds 5 percent for half
masks and 1 percent for full facepiece respirators. The test subject shall be refitted and retested.
(8) Calculation of fit factors.

(i) The fit factor shall be determined for the quantitative fit test by taking the ratio of the average
chamber concentration to the concentration measured inside the respirator for each test exercise
except the grimace exercise.
(ii) The average test chamber concentration shall be calculated as the arithmetic average of the
concentration measured before and after each test (i.e., 7 exercises) or the arithmetic average of
the concentration measured before and after each exercise or the true average measured
continuously during the respirator sample.
(iii) The concentration of the challenge agent inside the respirator shall be determined by one of
the following methods:
(A) Average peak penetration method means the method of determining test agent penetration
into the respirator utilizing a strip chart recorder, integrator, or computer. The agent penetration
is determined by an average of the peak heights on the graph or by computer integration, for each
exercise except the grimace exercise. Integrators or computers that calculate the actual test agent
penetration into the respirator for each exercise will also be considered to meet the requirements
of the average peak penetration method.
(B) Maximum peak penetration method means the method of determining test agent penetration
in the respirator as determined by strip chart recordings of the test. The highest peak penetration
for a given exercise is taken to be representative of average penetration into the respirator for that
exercise.
(C) Integration by calculation of the area under the individual peak for each exercise except the
grimace exercise. This includes computerized integration.
(D) The calculation of the overall fit factor using individual exercise fit factors involves first
converting the exercise fit factors to penetration values, determining the average, and then
converting that result back to a fit factor. This procedure is described in the following equation:
92 of 100 92
Where ff1, ff2, ff3, etc. are the fit factors for exercises 1, 2, 3, etc.
(9) The test subject shall not be permitted to wear a half mask or quarter facepiece respirator
unless a minimum fit factor of 100 is obtained, or a full facepiece respirator unless a minimum fit
factor of 500 is obtained.
(10) Filters used for quantitative fit testing shall be replaced whenever increased breathing
resistance is encountered, or when the test agent has altered the integrity of the filter media.
3. Ambient aerosol condensation nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing protocol.
The ambient aerosol condensation nuclei counter (CNC) quantitative fit testing (Portacount TM )
protocol quantitatively fit tests respirators with the use of a probe. The probed respirator is only
used for quantitative fit tests. A probed respirator has a special sampling device, installed on the
respirator, that allows the probe to sample the air from inside the mask. A probed respirator is
required for each make, style, model, and size that the employer uses and can be obtained from
the respirator manufacturer or distributor. The CNC instrument manufacturer, TSI Inc., also
provides probe attachments (TSI sampling adapters) that permit fit testing in an employee's own
respirator. A minimum fit factor pass level of at least 100 is necessary for a half-mask respirator
and a minimum fit factor pass level of at least 500 is required for a full facepiece negative
pressure respirator. The entire screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the test
subject prior to the conduct of the screening test.
(a) Portacount Fit Test Requirements.
(1) Check the respirator to make sure the sampling probe and line are properly attached to the
facepiece and that the respirator is fitted with a particulate filter capable of preventing significant
penetration by the ambient particles used for the fit test (e.g., NIOSH 42 CFR 84 series 100,
series 99, or series 95 particulate filter) per manufacturer's instruction.
(2) Instruct the person to be tested to don the respirator for five minutes before the fit test starts.
This purges the ambient particles trapped inside the respirator and permits the wearer to make
certain the respirator is comfortable. This individual shall already have been trained on how to
wear the respirator properly.
(3) Check the following conditions for the adequacy of the respirator fit: Chin properly placed;
Adequate strap tension, not overly tightened; Fit across nose bridge; Respirator of proper size to
span distance from nose to chin; Tendency of the respirator to slip; Self-observation in a mirror
to evaluate fit and respirator position.
(4) Have the person wearing the respirator do a user seal check. If leakage is detected, determine
the cause. If leakage is from a poorly fitting facepiece, try another size of the same model
respirator, or another model of respirator.
(5) Follow the manufacturer's instructions for operating the Portacount and proceed with the test.
(6) The test subject shall be instructed to perform the exercises in section I. A. 14. of this
appendix.
(7) After the test exercises, the test subject shall be questioned by the test conductor regarding
the comfort of the respirator upon completion of the protocol. If it has become unacceptable,
another model of respirator shall be tried.
(b) Portacount Test Instrument.
93 of 100 93
(1) The Portacount will automatically stop and calculate the overall fit factor for the entire set of
exercises. The overall fit factor is what counts. The Pass or Fail message will indicate whether or
not the test was successful. If the test was a Pass, the fit test is over.
(2) Since the pass or fail criterion of the Portacount is user programmable, the test operator shall
ensure that the pass or fail criterion meet the requirements for minimum respirator performance
in this Appendix.
(3) A record of the test needs to be kept on file, assuming the fit test was successful. The record
must contain the test subject's name; overall fit factor; make, model, style, and size of respirator
used; and date tested.
4. Controlled negative pressure (CNP) quantitative fit testing protocol.
The CNP protocol provides an alternative to aerosol fit test methods. The CNP fit test method
technology is based on exhausting air from a temporarily sealed respirator facepiece to generate
and then maintain a constant negative pressure inside the facepiece. The rate of air exhaust is
controlled so that a constant negative pressure is maintained in the respirator during the fit test.
The level of pressure is selected to replicate the mean inspiratory pressure that causes leakage
into the respirator under normal use conditions. With pressure held constant, air flow out of the
respirator is equal to air flow into the respirator. Therefore, measurement of the exhaust stream
that is required to hold the pressure in the temporarily sealed respirator constant yields a direct
measure of leakage air flow into the respirator. The CNP fit test method measures leak rates
through the facepiece as a method for determining the facepiece fit for negative pressure
respirators. The CNP instrument manufacturer Occupational Health Dynamics of Birmingham,
Alabama also provides attachments (sampling manifolds) that replace the filter cartridges to
permit fit testing in an employee's own respirator. To perform the test, the test subject closes his
or her mouth and holds his/her breath, after which an air pump removes air from the respirator
facepiece at a pre-selected constant pressure. The facepiece fit is expressed as the leak rate
through the facepiece, expressed as milliliters per minute. The quality and validity of the CNP fit
tests are determined by the degree to which the in-mask pressure tracks the test pressure during
the system measurement time of approximately five seconds. Instantaneous feedback in the form
of a real-time pressure trace of the in-mask pressure is provided and used to determine test
validity and quality. A minimum fit factor pass level of 100 is necessary for a half-mask
respirator and a minimum fit factor of at least 500 is required for a full facepiece respirator. The
entire screening and testing procedure shall be explained to the test subject prior to the conduct
of the screening test.
(a) CNP Fit Test Requirements.
(1) The instrument shall have a non-adjustable test pressure of 15.0 mm water pressure.
(2) The CNP system defaults selected for test pressure shall be set at -- 15 mm of water (-0.58
inches of water) and the modeled inspiratory flow rate shall be 53.8 liters per minute for
performing fit tests.
(Note: CNP systems have built-in capability to conduct fit testing that is specific to unique work
rate, mask, and gender situations that might apply in a specific workplace. Use of system default
values, which were selected to represent respirator wear with medium cartridge resistance at a
low-moderate work rate, will allow inter-test comparison of the respirator fit.)
(3) The individual who conducts the CNP fit testing shall be thoroughly trained to perform the
test.
94 of 100 94
(4) The respirator filter or cartridge needs to be replaced with the CNP test manifold. The
inhalation valve downstream from the manifold either needs to be temporarily removed or
propped open.
(5) The employer must train the test subject to hold his or her breath for at least 10 seconds.
(6) The test subject must don the test respirator without any assistance from the test administrator
who is conducting the CNP fit test. The respirator must not be adjusted once the fit-test exercises
begin. Any adjustment voids the test, and the test subject must repeat the fit test.
(7) The QNFT protocol shall be followed according to section I. C. 1. of this appendix with an
exception for the CNP test exercises.
(b) CNP Test Exercises.
(1) Normal breathing. In a normal standing position, without talking, the subject shall breathe
normally for 1 minute. After the normal breathing exercise, the subject needs to hold head
straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during the test measurement.
(2) Deep breathing. In a normal standing position, the subject shall breathe slowly and deeply for
1 minute, being careful not to hyperventilate. After the deep breathing exercise, the subject shall
hold his or her head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test
measurement.
(3) Turning head side to side. Standing in place, the subject shall slowly turn his or her head
from side to side between the extreme positions on each side for 1 minute. The head shall be held
at each extreme momentarily so the subject can inhale at each side. After the turning head side to
side exercise, the subject needs to hold head full left and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds
during test measurement. Next, the subject needs to hold head full right and hold his or her
breath for 10 seconds during test measurement.
(4) Moving head up and down. Standing in place, the subject shall slowly move his or her head
up and down for 1 minute. The subject shall be instructed to inhale in the up position (i.e., when
looking toward the ceiling). After the moving head up and down exercise, the subject shall hold
his or her head full up and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during test measurement. Next,
the subject shall hold his or her head full down and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during
test measurement.
(5) Talking. The subject shall talk out loud slowly and loud enough so as to be heard clearly by
the test conductor. The subject can read from a prepared text such as the Rainbow Passage, count
backward from 100, or recite a memorized poem or song for 1 minute. After the talking exercise,
the subject shall hold his or her head straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds
during the test measurement.
(6) Grimace. The test subject shall grimace by smiling or frowning for 15 seconds.
(7) Bending Over. The test subject shall bend at the waist as if he or she were to touch his or her
toes for 1 minute. Jogging in place shall be substituted for this exercise in those test
environments such as shroud-type QNFT units that prohibit bending at the waist. After the
bending over exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head straight ahead and hold his or her
breath for 10 seconds during the test measurement.
95 of 100 95
(8) Normal Breathing. The test subject shall remove and re-don the respirator within a one-
minute period. Then, in a normal standing position, without talking, the subject shall breathe
normally for 1 minute. After the normal breathing exercise, the subject shall hold his or her head
straight ahead and hold his or her breath for 10 seconds during the test measurement. After the
test exercises, the test subject shall be questioned by the test conductor regarding the comfort of
the respirator upon completion of the protocol. If it has become unacceptable, another model of a
respirator shall be tried.
(c) CNP Test Instrument.
(1) The test instrument must have an effective audio-warning device, or a visual-warning device
in the form of a screen tracing, that indicates when the test subject fails to hold his or her breath
during the test. The test must be terminated and restarted from the beginning when the test
subject fails to hold his or her breath during the test. The test subject then may be refitted and
retested.
(2) A record of the test shall be kept on file, assuming the fit test was successful. The record
must contain the test subject's name; overall fit factor; make, model, style and size of respirator
used; and date tested.
5. Controlled negative pressure (CNP) REDON quantitative fit testing protocol.
(a) When administering this protocol to test subjects, employers must comply with the
requirements specified in paragraphs (a) and (c) of Part I.C.4 of this appendix ("Controlled
negative pressure (CNP) quantitative fit testing protocol"), as well as use the test exercises
described below in paragraph (b) of this protocol instead of the test exercises specified in
paragraph (b) of Part I.C.4 of this appendix.
(b) Employers must ensure that each test subject being fit tested using this protocol follows the
exercise and measurement procedures, including the order of administration, described below in
Table A-1 of this appendix.
Table A-1. -- CNP REDON Quantitative Fit Testing Protocol
(1)
Exercises Exercise procedure Measurement procedure
Facing Forward Stand and breathe normally, without talking, Face forward, while holding
for 30 seconds. breath for 10 seconds.
Bending Over Bend at the waist, as if going to touch his or Face parallel to the floor, while
her toes, for 30 seconds. holding breath for 10 seconds
Head Shaking For about three seconds, shake head back and Face forward, while holding
forth vigorously several times while shouting. breath for 10 seconds.
REDON 1 Remove the respirator mask, loosen all Face forward, while holding
facepiece straps, and then redon the respirator breath for 10 seconds.
mask.
REDON 2 Remove the respirator mask, loosen all Face forward, while holding
facepiece straps, and then redon the respirator breath for 10 seconds.
mask again.
1
Exercises are listed in the order in which they are to be administered.
(c) After completing the test exercises, the test administrator must question each test subject
regarding the comfort of the respirator. When a test subject states that the respirator is
unacceptable, the employer must ensure that the test administrator repeats the protocol using
another respirator model.
96 of 100 96
(d) Employers must determine the overall fit factor for each test subject by calculating the
harmonic mean of the fit testing exercises as follows:
Where:
N = The number of exercises;
FF1 = The fit factor for the first exercise;
FF2 = The fit factor for the second exercise; and
FFN = The fit factor for the nth exercise.
Part II. New Fit Test Protocols
A. Any person may submit to OSHA an application for approval of a new fit test protocol. If the
application meets the following criteria, OSHA will initiate a rulemaking proceeding under
section 6(b)(7) of the OSH Act to determine whether to list the new protocol as an approved
protocol in this Appendix A.
B. The application must include a detailed description of the proposed new fit test protocol. This
application must be supported by either:
1. A test report prepared by an independent government research laboratory (e.g., Lawrence

Livermore National Laboratory, Los Alamos National Laboratory, the National Institute for
Standards and Technology) stating that the laboratory has tested the protocol and had found it to
be accurate and reliable; or
2. An article that has been published in a peer-reviewed industrial hygiene journal describing the
protocol and explaining how test data support the protocol's accuracy and reliability.
C. If OSHA determines that additional information is required before the Agency commences a
rulemaking proceeding under this section, OSHA will so notify the applicant and afford the
applicant the opportunity to submit the supplemental information. Initiation of a rulemaking
proceeding will be deferred until OSHA has received and evaluated the supplemental
information.
97 of 100 97
Responsibility: President and Jobsite Foreman
Procedure:
1. Company Policy
To ensure that information about the dangers of all hazardous chemicals used by
Swanson Steel Erectors, Inc. are known by all affected employees, the following
hazardous information program has been established. All work units of the
Company will participate in the Hazard Communication Program. This written
program will be available in the main office and at all job sites for review by any
interested employee.
2. Container Labeling
The Job Superintendent will verify that all containers received for use will be
clearly labeled as to the contents, note the appropriate hazard warning and list the
name and address of the manufacturer. The Job Superintendent will ensure that
all secondary containers are labeled with either an extra copy of the original
manufacturer’s label or with labels that have the identity and the appropriate
hazard warning. The Job Superintendent will review the company labeling
procedures and update as required.
3. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
The Job Superintendent is responsible for establishing and monitoring the

Company MSDS Program. He/she will make sure procedures are developed to
obtain the necessary MSDS and will review incoming MSDS for new or
significant health and safety information. He/she will see that any new
information is passed on to affected employees.
Copies of MSDS for all hazardous chemicals in use will be kept in the main office
and at all job sites.
MSDS will be available to all employees during each work shift. If an MSDS is
not available, immediately contact the main office.
4. Employee Training and Information
The Job Superintendent is responsible for the company employee training.

He/she will ensure that all program elements specified below are carried out.
Prior to starting work, each new employee of Swanson Steel Erectors, Inc. will
attend a health and safety orientation that includes the following information and
training:
98 of 100 98
An overview of the requirements contained in the Hazard Communication
Standard.
Hazardous chemicals present at his/her workplaces.
Physical and health risks of the hazardous chemicals.
The symptoms of overexposure.
How to determine the presence or release of hazardous chemicals in

his/her work area.
How to reduce or prevent exposure to hazardous chemicals through use of

control procedures, work practices and personal protective equipment.
Steps the Company has taken to reduce or prevent exposure to hazardous

chemicals equipment.
Procedures to follow if employees are overexposed to hazardous

chemicals.
How to read labels and review MSDS to obtain hazard information.
Location of the MSDS file and written hazard communication program.
Prior to introducing a new chemical hazard into any section of this Company,
each employee in that section will be given information and training as outlined
above for the new chemical hazard.
5. Hazardous Non-routine Tasks
Periodically, employees may be required to perform hazardous non-routine tasks.

Prior to starting work on any such hazardous non-routine project, each affected
employee will be given information by the Job Superintendent about the
hazardous chemicals he or she may encounter during such activity. This
information will include specific chemical hazards, protective and safety
measures the employee can use, and steps the Company is utilizing to reduce the
hazards, including ventilation, respirators, presence of another employee and
emergency procedures.
99 of 100 99
6. Informing Contractors
Contractors will be contacted before work is started to gather and distribute

information concerning any chemical hazard that may be brought to the
workplace.
7. List of Hazardous Chemicals
A complete list of all known hazardous chemicals used by our employees is

provided in the index located at the back of this manual. Further information on
each chemical may be obtained by reviewing the following MSDS.
8. New Hazardous Chemicals on Jobsite
The Job Superintendent will be responsible for obtaining MSDS on any new
chemicals brought to the job site. To obtain MSDS, he/she must alert the main
office to add the new chemical to the list. Additionally, the following information
will need to be supplied to the main office in order to request the MSDS from the
manufacturer.
A. Manufacturer/Distributor Name & Address

B. Full Name of the Chemical from the label
A form letter follows for use by the main office. After the MSDS has been
requested, the new chemical is to be added to the list and all affected job sites are
to receive a copy of the request and corresponding MSDS when received.
100 of 100 100

Site Specific Erection Plan
For
This site specific erection plan is intended to provide outlining information for the steel
erection activities at the PSCA Project in accordance with OSHA Subpart R. All Swanson
Steel Erectors employees are to adhere to the plan, discuss, comment, and be notified of
changes to the plan.
1) Procedures for plan implementation and enforcement
a) Competent person to review plans and attachments with crew members including operators
before start of operations.
b) Crew members to sign and acknowledge review.
c) All comments to be reviewed by competent person and management for revisions and
adjustments.
d) Enforcement of procedures and adjustments to plans are the responsibility of the onsite competent
person.
2) Approval to begin steel erection
a) Davis Constructors & Engineers (DCE) to provide written notice:

i) All concrete work, footings for anchor bolts and embeds, is allowed adequate time to cure
and reach sufficient strength to support loads.
ii) Notification of any repairs, modifications or replacement of any anchor bolts accompanied by
engineer’s approval.
3) Site Layout
a) Swanson Steel Erectors, Inc. (SSE) and DCE will develop a plan and coordinate delivery routes
for materials and erection equipment.
b) Flat, firm, level surfaces to be provided and maintained by DCE.
c) Roadways may change as job progresses, requiring on-going coordination between SSE’s
competent supervisor and DCE’s superintendent.
4) Material deliveries
a) Establish and coordinate delivery routes with DCE.

b) All non-essential personnel, vehicles, equipment, and building materials to be relocated prior to
off-loading materials.
c) Staging areas must be firm and properly graded.
d) Material staging will be performed by qualified personnel.
e) All materials to be stored properly with adequate dunnage to avoid contact with dirt and to
properly support materials.
f) Materials to be stored with adequate slope to avoid water pooling and to provide proper drainage.
g) Forklift used for offloading materials shall be operated by trained, designated employees who are
familiar with the hazards associated with handling structural steel.
h) Material offloading and staging areas to be coordinated between SSE, DCE and other onsite
subcontractors as required to maintain clear access and designation.
5) Coordination
a) Coordination with other trades / crafts to be performed before and during erection activities.
i) SSE will review and coordinate activities at DCE weekly subcontractor coordination
meetings.
ii) SSE will review and coordinate activities daily with DCE’s superintendent.
b) Coordination within trade activities (SSE) to be ongoing.
i) SSE general foreman will review daily activities with other SSE foreman before each shift.
ii) SSE general foreman will provide updates throughout daily shift to other SSE foreman as
needed.
6) Erection Sequence
a) Erection Sequence to follow structural steel zone sequence.
7) Overhead Loads
a) Paths for overhead loads to be pre-determined before lifts by competent supervisor.

b) Overhead loads to utilize least exposure path for each lift.
c) All non-essential personnel, vehicles, equipment and building materials to be relocated prior to
lifts.
8) Erection Activities
a) Columns
i) Free standing with all anchor bolt nuts snug tightened prior to releasing the crane.
ii) Tied together before end of shift with intersecting girders between columns.
iii) Areas to be clearly identified and delineated as required, keeping non-essential personnel
from entering erection area.
b) Beams
i) Steel beams will be erected and framed to columns, truss chords and girder beams with a
minimum of two (2) snug tight bolts installed at each connection prior to releasing the crane.
ii) Final connections to be made after initial steel member erection.
iii) Areas to be clearly identified and delineated as required, keeping non-essential personnel
from entering the erection area.
c) Metal Deck
i) Bundles placed at supporting members.
ii) Bundles banded together to prevent displacement until decking installation.
iii) Metal Decking placed loosely and aligned with supporting members. Following alignment
the deck shall be “wind” tack welded. Final deck attachment welding to follow once area is
aligned and secure.
iv) Areas to be clearly identified and delineated as required, keeping non-essential personnel
from entering the erection area.
9) Stability
a) Temporary cable bracing utilized where needed.

b) BRB braces installed during erection activity provide permanent/ temporary stability.
10) Cranes
a) Mandatory inspections conducted and documented daily by crane operator.

b) Crane Operator to be certified and have appropriate supporting documentation.
c) Crane to have current certification and supporting documentation.
d) Crane capacity charts and certifications will be kept in crane cab.
e) Suitable compacted, graded, and drained fill materials provided by DCE capable of supporting
erection equipment.
f) Paths of overhead loads to be coordinated between SSE and DCE.
g) Erection area will be clearly marked and non-essential personnel will not be allowed in these
areas.
h) Crane - TBD
11) Critical Lifts: NONE
12) Fall Protection and Work access – Please see fall protection plan
13) Bolted connections
a) Installed and tightened in accordance with AISC S329, Manual of Steel Joints, using ASTM
A325 and/or A490 bolts.
b) Tension control bolts will be used; tension calibration is in the bolt, not in the installers wrench.
c) Standard hex-head bolts, nuts and washers will be tightened using the turn of the nut method.
d) Faying surfaces will be inspected for rust, dirt or other deleterious materials.
e) All bolts in a connection shall be installed and brought to a snug tight condition prior to
tensioning.
14) Rigging
a) Rigging to be in accordance with OSHA Standards.

b) Wire rope slings to be used in rigging of all loads (6X19 classification group, improved plow
steel).
c) All rigging to have clearly identified tags showing capacity and size by manufacturer.
d) All rigging devices to have manufacturer certification clearly identified. All loads to be choked.
e) Tag lines to be used on all loads.
f) Multiple lift rigging to be utilized where applicable.
g) All hooks to have safety latches with the exception of sorting hooks.
h) Sorting hooks will be used on the ground only to separate and sort nested materials.
i) 5 to 1 safety factor used when sizing rigging.
j) Inspect wire rope daily for damage. Damaged rigging to be disposed of immediately.
k) Experienced riggers which have completed Subpart CC training, with knowledge of steel weights
and wire rope capacities will perform all rigging under the supervision of the erection foreman.
15) Activity Hazard Analysis: See Safety Plan
16) Steel Erection Training – See attached
17) Competent Person Information – See Attached
18) Rescue Procedures – See Site Specific Fall Protection Plan
Plan prepared by: Dustin Swanson
Title: President, Swanson Steel Erectors, Inc.
Date: 5/5/14
= Crane Centerpin Location 50' radius from crane center pin
50'-6" 6'-1"
'-0"
18
30'-0"
50'-6"
30
E
'-0
"
30'-0"
20'-0"
B
"
50'-6
C
"
'-0
30
30'-0"
16
'-7
"
50'-6"
A
50'-6" 30'-3"
Swanson Steel Erectors, Inc
LSS Crane Placement
1 2 3 4 5 6
Site Specific Erection Plan
For
PSCA-Range Facilities LSS
Crane Information 11) Special Considerations:
This site specific erection plan is intended to provide outlining 10)Cranes
a) In the event of average wind speed greater than 35 MPH:
information for the steel erection activities at the PSCA-Range a)Mandatory inspections conducted and documented daily by
1) All Material Hoisting Activities are to be halted
Facilities LSS Project in accordance with OSHA Subpart R. All crane operator.
2) A determination between SSE and DCE is to be made on
Swanson Steel Erectors employees are to adhere to the plan, b)Crane Operator to be certified and have appropriate supporting
relocation of the crane and boom placement.
discuss, comment, and be notified of changes to the plan. documentation.
4) When Extremely high winds are predicted, the crane is to be
c)Crane to have current certification and supporting
mobilized to a clear area and allowed to "boom down" laying its
1)Procedures for plan implementation and enforcement documentation.
boom completely on the ground to prevent damage to near by
a)Competent person to review plans and attachments with crew d)Crane capacity charts and certifications will be kept in crane cab.
structures and the crane.
members including operators before start of operations. e)Suitable compacted, graded, and drained fill materials provided
b) In the event of heavy rain, most likely sideways rain, all hoisting
b)Crew members to sign and acknowledge review. by DCE capable of supporting erection equipment.
activities are to be halted when the wind speed exceeds the
c)All comments to be reviewed by competent person and f)Paths of overhead loads to be coordinated between SSE and
allowable 35mph.
management for revisions and adjustments. DCE.
c) Due to the height of the LSS structure all loads are to use
d)Enforcement of procedures and adjustments to plans are the g)Erection area will be clearly marked and non-essential personnel
suitable tag lines.
responsibility of the onsite competent person. will not be allowed in these areas.
1) All loads are to be kept clear of the structure while being hoisted
h)Crane
so as to not "hang up" or touch the existing building.
2)Approval to begin steel erection i)Manitowoc 3900T, 150 ton truck crane
2) once the load is to the applicable height to be installed the crane
a)Davis Constructors & Engineers (DCE) to provide written notice: ii)Boom length: 180’ main boom, 20 ‘ jib
will swing the load in to the personnel and the tag lined will be used
i)All concrete work, footings for anchor bolts and embeds, is
to control the load while it is being placed at its destination.
allowed adequate time to cure and reach sufficient strength to 11)Critical Lifts: NONE
d) Due to the height of the LSS structure all crane signals between
support loads.
the aerial personnel and operator will be made via radio. All radio
ii)Notification of any repairs, modifications or replacement of any 12)Fall Protection and Work access – Please see fall protection
communication between the operator and the aerial personnel is to
anchor bolts accompanied by engineer’s approval. plan
be clear and uninterrupted.
1) Ground personnel involved in the hoisting activity will not require
3)Site Layout 13)Bolted connections
radio as long as visual contact with is kept between the operator
a)Swanson Steel Erectors, Inc. (SSE) and DCE will develop a plan a)Installed and tightened in accordance with AISC S329, Manual of
and rigging personnel.
and coordinate delivery routes for materials and erection Steel Joints, using ASTM A325 and/or A490 bolts.
2) All hoisting shall stop immediately if communication is lost
equipment. b)Tension control bolts will be used; tension calibration is in the
between the aerial personnel and the operator - FOR ANY
b)Flat, firm, level surfaces to be provided and maintained by DCE. bolt, not in the installers wrench.
REASON.
c)Roadways may change as job progresses, requiring on-going c)Standard hex-head bolts, nuts and washers will be tightened
coordination between SSE’s competent supervisor and DCE’s using the turn of the nut method.
12) Other: TBD
superintendent. d)Faying surfaces will be inspected for rust, dirt or other deleterious
d)See Crane Placement for layout materials.
e)All bolts in a connection shall be installed and brought to a snug
4)Material deliveries tight condition prior to tensioning.
a)Establish and coordinate delivery routes with DCE.
b)All non-essential personnel, vehicles, equipment, and building 14)Rigging
materials to be relocated prior to off-loading materials. a)Rigging to be in accordance with OSHA Standards.
c)Staging areas must be firm and properly graded. b)Wire rope slings to be used in rigging of all loads (6X19
d)Material staging will be performed by qualified personnel. classification group, improved plow steel).
e)All materials to be stored properly with adequate dunnage to c)All rigging to have clearly identified tags showing capacity and
avoid contact size by manufacturer.
5)Coordination d)All rigging devices to have manufacturer certification clearly
a)Coordination with other trades / crafts to be performed before identified. All loads to be choked.
and during erection activities. e)Tag lines to be used on all loads.
i)SSE will review and coordinate activities at DCE weekly f)Multiple lift rigging to be utilized where applicable.
subcontractor coordination meetings. g)All hooks to have safety latches with the exception of sorting
ii)SSE will review and coordinate activities daily with DCE’s hooks.
superintendent. h)Sorting hooks will be used on the ground only to separate and
b)Coordination within trade activities (SSE) to be ongoing. sort nested materials.
i)SSE general foreman will review daily activities with other SSE i)5 to 1 safety factor used when sizing rigging
foreman before each shift. j)Inspect wire rope daily. All damaged rigging to be disposed of
ii)SSE general foreman will provide updates throughout daily shift immediately.
to other SSE foreman as needed. k) Experienced riggers which have completed Subpart CC training,
with knowledge of steel weights and wire rope capacities will
6)Erection Sequence perform all rigging under the supervision of the erection foreman.
a)Erection Sequence l) Common rigging sizes and capacities:
i)All applicable steel materials to be set from corresponding crane
location.
ii)5 locations of crane placement have been indicated
7)Overhead Loads
a)Paths for overhead loads to be pre-determined before lifts by
competent supervisor.
b)Overhead loads to utilize least exposure path for each lift.
c)All non-essential personnel, vehicles, equipment and building
materials to be relocated prior to lifts.
d)See crane placement for proposed overhead load areas
8)Erection Activities, AS APPLICABLE

a)Columns
i)Free standing with all anchor bolt nuts snug tightened prior to
releasing the crane.
ii)Tied together before end of shift with intersecting girders between
columns.
iii)Areas to be clearly identified and delineated as required, keeping
non-essential personnel from entering erection area.
b)Beams
i)Steel beams will be erected and framed to columns, truss chords
and girder beams with a minimum of two (2) snug tight bolts
installed at each connection prior to releasing the crane.
ii)Final connections to be made after initial steel member erection.
iii)Areas to be clearly identified and delineated as required, keeping
non-essential personnel from entering the erection area.
Swanson Steel Erectors, Inc
LSS Steel Erection and Crane Information
9)Stability
a)Temporary cable bracing utilized where needed.
b)Existing Structure Bracing provides temporary and permanent
stability
Fall Protection Plan
For
Pacific Spaceport Complex-Alaska
Kodiak, Alaska
Policy:
Swanson Steel Erectors Inc. practices fall protection activities within the guidelines of the state
and federal OSHA regulations. It is the responsibility of all Swanson Steel Erectors employees
to work safely and follow the appropriate practices. The intent of this plan is to provide job
specific fall protection activities.
Personal Protective Equipment:

Safety Harness
Lanyard
Hard Hat
Gloves
Work Boots
Safety Glasses
Activities:
The following steel erection activities are covered under this plan:
1) Connecting
2) Metal Deck placement
3) Structural Steel detailing work
Systems:
1) Foot level horizontal lifelines
a) Located at perimeter beams and header/girder beams as required for access.
(see attachment)
b) Lifelines installed on the beams while on the ground before hoisting
c) Workers access beam via ladder, connect lanyard to cable.
2) Sliding beam anchors

a) Utilized on beams where horizontal lifelines are not used. (see attachment)
b) Workers access beam via ladder, connect beam anchor, connect lanyard to
beam anchor.
3) Elevated horizontal lifelines

a) Located at perimeter beams and header/girder beams as required for lanyard
attachment.
b) Lifelines are elevated and anchored to the structure to keep lanyard from being
obstructed by foot level objects
c) Workers access beam via ladder, connect lanyard to elevated lifeline.
4) Boom Lifts
a) Workers attach lanyard to manufacturer designated attachment point prior
operating the equipment.
b) Each employee is trained prior to operating equipment.
c) DC&E to provide and maintain firm and level surfaces to operate lifts from.
5) Retractable Lanyards
a) Used independently or in conjunction with other systems.
b) attach retractable to appropriate attachment point
c) use per manufacturer direction
Access:
1) Extension ladders:
a) Ladders tied off at top to beam or other fixed member.
b) Ladders designated as temporary area access to be extended 3’ above the
desired access point.
2) Stairways:
a) Stairways installed during erection activities that have been completed and
railed.
Implementation:
Connecting activities:
1) When above 15’, safety harness, lanyard and the appropriate attachment point is
required to be available and worn.
a) Access work via ladder
required to be used.
a) Access work via ladder, attach lanyard to the attachment point (see systems)
b) Access and perform work using boom lift.
Metal Deck placement activities:
1) When above 15’, with structure overhead, safety harness, lanyard and the appropriate
attachment point is required to be used.
a) attach sliding beam anchor to bottom flange of beam above.
b) attach retractable lanyard to sliding beam anchor
c) attach retractable directly to safety harness
2) When above 15’, with no structure overhead, safety harness, lanyard and the
appropriate attachment point is required to be used.
a) attach lanyard to elevated lifeline
3) Controlled decking zone; When above 15’, with no structure overhead, safety harness,
lanyard and the appropriate attachment must be available and worn.
a) all workers placing metal deck must be properly trained in controlled decking
zone procedures
b) appropriate delineation must be used and maintained
Structural Steel detail work activities:
a) access work via ladder
b) attach lanyard to the attachment point
a) access and perform work using boom lift
Competent Personnel:
See attached competent person designation
Enforcement:
It is every Swanson Steel Erectors employee’s responsibility to adhere and enforce the safety
program and the fall protection plan. Swanson Steel Erectors General Foreman, Matthew Case,
is the primary enforcement officer on this project.
Accident Investigation:
Accidents will be investigated and reported. The nature of the accident will determine if changes
to the plan are needed. All information from the investigation will be documented as soon as
possible.
Plan Changes:
Changes to the plan may be determined necessary by unforeseen conditions, scope change and /
or jobsite conditions. The onsite general foreman and/or competent person has the ability to
make these changes. Swanson Steel Erectors employees will be notified of the change / changes
and provided the appropriate knowledge and if required training.
Fall Rescue Procedures:

In the event of a fall:
1) Check the area for hazards before performing any type of rescue – this may be the
cause of the fall
2) Identify the safest and quickest means of access to the employee
a) use aerial work platform to access the worker and retrieve
b) use man basket on crane to access the worker and retrieve

AAC Site Safety Plan

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

AAC Site Safety Plan

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Davis Constructors & Engineers, Inc.

Pacific Spaceport Complex Alaska

Site Specific Safety Plan

2. Roles & Responsibilities ,Organization Chart, Statement of

3. ABC’s of Safety and General Rules

4. Safety Policy & Procedures

5. Subcontractor Health & Safety Procedures

6. Emergency Action, Evacuation, and Fire Plan

7. Accident Prevention and Reporting Procedures

8. Hazard Communication Plan

9. Fall Protection and Elevated Surface Work Emergency Action

10. Trenching & Excavation Procedure

11. Confined Space Procedures

12. Lock Out / Tag Out Program

13. Forklift Procedures and Training

14. Aerial Lift and Scissor Lift Procedure

15. Ladder Safety Program

16. Respiratory Protection Plan

17. Indoor Air Quality Controls

18. Electrical Safety Program

19. Scaffold Safety Program

20. Steel Erection

21. Environmental Protection Plan & Control of Hazardous Materials

22. Cast In Place Concrete

23. Job Hazard Analysis (JHAs)

During initial mobilization and early project development the Davis

Subcontractors may designate a competent person at any time, assuming

486-8000 KODIAK POLICE DEPARTMENT

486-3281 KODIAK HOSPITAL

800 222-1222 STATE OF ALASKA POISON CONTROL

800 424-8802 SPILL RESPONSE (NRC)

907-269-3063 ADEC - Spill Report After hours: 800-478-9300

TBD DAVIS JOBSITE OFFICE

242-0422 DAVIS SUPERINTENDENT (CELL) - Ken Parmenter

952-3816 SAFETY CORDINATOR (CELL) - Kirk Waggoner

301-4017 DAVIS PROJECT MANAGER (CELL) - Luke Blomfield

562-2336 DAVIS ANCHORAGE OFFICE

486-8060 SEWER LOCATES

800-808-8083 ALASKA COMMUNICATIONS

811 CABLE LOCATES 800-478-3121

486-7700 KODIAK ELECTRIC ASSOC.

486-8060 GAS LOCATES

486-8060 WATER LOCATES

Project Name: Pacific Spaceport Complex – Alaska

1- Launch Service Structure

3- Launch Equipment Building 120 sf (1 story)

4- Launch Equipment Vault 400 sf (1 story)

6- Rocket Motor Storage Facility 1,500 sf (1 story)

7- Payload Processing Facility 10,952 SF (5 story)

*Reference specification section 01000 for additional project description

Phase of Work/Hazardous Activities:

STATEMENT OF SAFETY AND HEALTH POLICY

THE ABC’S OF SAFETY

Safe behavior means taking safety guidelines and practices seriously.

How you react to a situation is an important part of being safe. Following

GENERAL RULES OF CONDUCT – ALL PERSONNEL ON SITE

Personal Protective Equipment

Double Eye Protection

Fall protection equipment

Alcohol & Drugs

Personal Entertainment Devices

The following section is intended as a multi-level application of the

Executive Staff Meetings

Informal Meeting With Management